ibm pc server hardware maintenance manual - - top level
TRANSCRIPT
S30H-2501-01IBM PC Servers
Hardware Maintenance Manual March 1996 Use this manual with thePS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual
IBM
Note
Before using this information and the product itsupports, be sure to read the general informationunder “Notices” in your manual.
Second Edition (March 1996)
The following paragraph does not apply to the UnitedKingdom or any country where such provisions areinconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONALBUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THISPUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer ofexpress or implied warranties in certain transactions,therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies ortypographical errors. Changes are periodically made tothe information herein; these changes will be incorporatedin new editions of the publication. IBM may makeimprovements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or theprogram(s) described in this publication at any time.
It is possible that this publication may contain reference to,or information about, IBM products (machines andprograms), programming, or services that are notannounced in your country. Such references orinformation must not be construed to mean that IBMintends to announce such IBM products, programming, orservices in your country.
Requests for technical information about IBM productsshould be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketingrepresentative.
Copyright International Business MachinesCorporation 1995, 1996. All rights reserved.Note to U.S. Government users–Documentation related toRestricted rights–Use, duplication, or disclosure is subjectto restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contractwith IBM Corp.
ii PC Server HMM
About This SupplementThis supplement contains diagnostic information,Symptom-to-FRU Indexes, service information, errorcodes, error messages, and configuration information forthe following PC Servers and Expansion Enclosures.
� 300 Type 8640� 310 Type 8639� 320 Type 8640� 500 Type 8641� 500 System/390 Type 8641� 520 Type 8641� 720 Type 8642� SCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure Type 3517� Enterprise Expansion Enclosure Type 3518
This supplement should be used with the advanceddiagnostic tests and the information in the IBM PersonalSystem/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (part number83G8990, form number S52G-9971) to troubleshootproblems effectively.
Important
This manual is intended for trained servicers who arefamiliar with IBM PC Server products.
Before servicing an IBM product, be sure to review“Safety Information” on page 456.
iii
Related PublicationsThe following publications are available for IBM products.For more information, contact IBM or an IBM AuthorizedDealer.
For Information About See Publication
PS/2 Computers IBM Personal System/2Hardware MaintenanceManual (S52G-9971)
PS/ValuePoint Computers IBM PS/ValuePointHardware MaintenanceService and Reference(S61G-1423)
Laptop, Notebook, Portable,and ThinkPad Computers(L40, CL57, N45, N51,P70/P75, ThinkPad 300,350, 500, 510, 710T,Expansion Unit, Dock I,Dock II)
IBM Mobile SystemsHardware MaintenanceManual Volume 1(S82G-1501)
ThinkPad Computers(ThinkPad 340, 355, 360,370, 700, 701, 720, 750,755)
IBM Mobile SystemsHardware MaintenanceManual Volume 2(S82G-1502)
ThinkPad Computers(ThinkPad 365, 760)
IBM Mobile SystemsHardware MaintenanceManual Volume 3(S82G-1503)
Monitors (Displays) (February 1993)
IBM PS/2 Display HMMVolume 1 (SA38-0053)
Monitors (December 1993)
IBM Color Monitor HMMVolume 2 (S71G-4197)
IBM Monitors (P Series) (February 1996)
IBM Monitor HMMVolume 3 (S52H-3679)
IBM 2248 Monitor (February 1996)
IBM Monitor HMMVolume 4 (S52H-3739)
Disk Array technologyoverview and using the IBMRAID Configuration Program
Configuring Your Disk Arraybooklet (S82G-1506)
Installation Planning forPersonal System/2computers
Personal System/2Installation Planning andBeyond (G41G-2927)
Installation Planning forAdvanced PersonalSystem/2 Servers
Advanced PS/2 ServersPlanning and SelectionGuide (GG24-3927)
iv PC Server HMM
Contents
About This Supplement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiRelated Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO . . . 3General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO) . . . . . . . . . 4Diagnostics (QAPlus/PRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . . 18Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . 18Locations (486DX2 System Board) . . . . . . . . . 25Locations (Pentium System Board) . . . . . . . . . 29Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . . 56Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . 67Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement . . . . . . . . 95Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 . . . . . . . . . . . 127Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 129Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 130Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 . . . . . . . . . . . 177Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 178Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 179Locations (System Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 . . 221Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 223Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 223Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 . . . . . . . . . . . 243Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Diagnostics and Test Information (Models EZO, EZV,
EZL, EZS, EZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 v
Diagnostics and Test Information (Models MZO, MZV,MZS, MZE, MZL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 256Locations (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE) . . 294Locations (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL) . 301Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 . . . . . . . . . . . 325Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 330Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
SCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure - Type 3517 . . . 405Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 407Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 407Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement . . . . . . . 416Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
PC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure - Type3518 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 425Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 426Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Related Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 453Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Battery Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Disk Array Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Drive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Ethernet Quad-BT and -B2 PeerMaster Micro
Channel Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490External SCSI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508Hot-Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8388) . . . . 512IDE Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . 514Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement (RAID Array) 515Network Adapters Supported (Dual Processor
Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518OS/2 Trap Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519PC Server Flash/Diagnostics/CMOS Access
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
vi PC Server HMM
SCSI Fast/Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters(AHA-2940/2940W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
SCSISelect Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . 547Setting the Motor-Start Jumper . . . . . . . . . 549ServerGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550Software/Hardware Mismatch Problems . . . . . 550Undetermined Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552Problem Determination Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 553Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . 555
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Contents vii
General Checkout/DiagnosticsQAPlus/PRO
The following Maintenance Analysis Procedure (MAP) anddiagnostic information should be used to isolate problemson servers that are supported by the QAPLus/PRODiagnostics test.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 3
General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO)This general checkout procedure is for computers that aresupported by the QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics test.
Diagnostic error messages appear when a test programfinds a problem with a hardware option. For the testprograms to properly determine if a test Passed, Failed, orAborted, the test programs check the error-return code attest completion. (See “Return Codes” on page 7.)
General error messages appear if a problem or conflict isfound by an application program, the operating system, orboth. For an explanation of these messages, refer to theinformation supplied with that software package.
Notes
1. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnosethe first error code displayed.
2. If the computer hangs with a POST error, go tothe "Symptom-to-FRU Index" for the system youare servicing.
3. If the computer hangs and no error is displayed,go to “Undetermined Problems” on page 552.
4. If a device cannot be select from the Module Testmenu, that device may be defective.
001
– Power-off the computer and all external devices.– Check all cables and power cords.– Set all display controls to the middle position.– Insert the QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics diskette into drive A.– Power-on all external devices.– Power-on the computer.– Check for the following responses:
1. One beep.2. Readable instructions or the Main Menu.
DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES?Yes No
002
Find the failure symptom in the "Symptom-to-FRUIndex" for the system you are servicing.
003
Run the Advanced Diagnostics Test. If necessary, refer to“Diagnostics (QAPlus/PRO)” on page 5.If you receive an error, go to the "Symptom-to-FRU Index"for the system you are servicing.
4 PC Server HMM
Diagnostics (QAPlus/PRO)The following tools are available to help identify andresolve hardware-related problems:
� Power-on self-test (POST)� POST Beep Codes
� Test programs � Error messages � Diagnostics Diskette
Power-On Self-Test (POST)Each time you turn on the system, it performs a series oftests that check the operation of the system and someoptions. This series of tests is called the power-onself-test, or POST. POST does the following:
� Checks some basic system-board operations� Checks the memory operation� Starts the video operation� Verifies that the diskette drives are working� Verifies that the hard disk drive is working
If the POST finishes without detecting any problems, asingle beep sounds and the first screen of your operatingsystem or application program appears.
If the POST detects a problem, an error message appearson your screen. A single problem can cause several errormessages to appear. When you correct the cause of thefirst error message, the other error messages probably willnot appear on the screen the next time you turn on thesystem.
POST Beep CodesThe Power On Self-Test generates a beeping sound toindicate successful completion of POST or to indicate thatthe tests detect an error.
One beep and the appearance of text on the displayindicates successful completion of the POST. More thanone beep indicates that the POST detects an error.
Test ProgramsThe QAPlus/PRO test programs, developed by DiagSoftfor IBM, are the primary method of testing the PC Server.You can use them to test the IBM components of thesystem and some external devices. The amount of timerequired to test all components depends on the number ofcomponents. The more optional adapters and devices youhave attached to your system, the longer the testing takes.
The test programs on the Diagnostic Diskette include thefollowing features:
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO 5
Feature Description
AdvancedDiagnosticTests
Identifies most problems associated with thefollowing major components:
� System board� Hard disk drives
� Diskette drives � CD-ROM drives � RAM� Serial and parallel ports
� Video adapter � Printer � Keyboard � Mouse
FlexibleTestControl
Allows you to:
� Run groups of tests in batch� Specify parameters to use for each test
(for example, video modes, diskcylinders, port addresses, and so on)
� Specify the number of passes you wantto run (one to continuous)
� Log the test results to a text dBase(DBF) format file
� Save all test settings for future use� View System Information� View the server's configuration
information. (For example, you can viewthe IRQ/DMA assignments, memoryusage, device drivers, and so on.)
� Select System Utilities� Run a low-level format also contains
system utilities.� Format a diskette
Error MessagesMessages generated by the software—the operatingsystem or application programs—generally are textmessages, but they also can be numeric. Basically, thereare five types of error messages.
� POST error messages� Diagnostic error messages� POST beep codes� Software generated messages.
� Multiple messages
ErrorMessage
Description
POSTErrorMessages
Displayed when POST finds problems withthe hardware or detects a change in thehardware configuration.
POSTBeepCodes
Sounds emitted from the speaker if POSTfinds a problem. One beep indicates POSTcompleted successfully. Multiple beepsindicate a problem was found by the POST.
6 PC Server HMM
ErrorMessage
Description
DiagnosticErrorMessages
Displayed when a test program finds aproblem with a hardware option.
SoftwareGeneratedErrorMessages
Displayed if a problem or conflict is found byan application program, the operating system,or both. For an explanation of thesemessages, refer to the information suppliedwith that software package.
MultipleMessages
The first error that occurs can causesadditional errors. Follow the suggestedaction of the first error displayed. In thiscase, the system displays more than oneerror message. Always follow the suggestedaction instructions for the first error messagedisplayed.
Return CodesFor the test programs to properly determine if a testPassed, Failed, or Aborted, the test programs check theerror-return code at test completion. To register the testproperly in the test log, the test programs must generateone of the following return codes:
ReturnCode
Description
0 Indicates that the device passed its test.
1 Indicated that the device failed its test.
2 orgreater
Indicates that the test stopped or wasaborted.
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO 7
Using the Test ProgramsThe test programs provide advanced functions and utilitiesfor power users and service or support professionals totroubleshoot even the most difficult problems.
Program Navigation: You can maneuver within thetest programs by typing the first letter of a menu choice,using the function keys, or using command-line options.
Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice
Throughout the test programs, pressing the first letter of anoption on a menu is the same as moving to that item withthe cursor and pressing Enter; however, this function isnot enabled on Test Group Screens.
Using the Function Keys
Use the following keys to maneuver throughout the testprograms:
Additional functions are available in the Test ModuleSelection screen and the Test Group screen using thefollowing keys:
Keys Action
Enter Select an item, run the test module, or runthe test
DownArrow (↓)
Moves the cursor down
Up Arrow(↑)
Moves the cursor up
F1 Calls up the appropriate Help information.Use the up arrow key (↑) or the down arrowkey (↓) to scroll through the information.Pressing F1 from within a Help screenprovides a help index from which you canselect different categories. One of theimportant help categories is function keyusage. Pressing Esc exits Help and returnsto where you left off.
Esc Go back to the previous menu
Keys Action
Tab Move to test group (or move to parameters)
Spacebar Toggle modules on/off (or toggle tests on/off)
F2 View test results log
F10 Local menu
+ Next logical unit number (for example, LUN 1,LUN 2, and so on)
− Previous logical unit number
8 PC Server HMM
Command Line Options
The following Command Line Options are available wheninitially starting the diagnostic program from within itsdirectory.
Type QAPLPRO/XXX (where /XXX represents one of thefollowing from the list below) then press Enter.
Viewing the Test Groups: As you move thecursor bar up or down in the Test Module Selectionwindow, the right hand screen changes to show theattributes, parameters, and the selected tests of thecorresponding Test Group. The diamond “♦” markindicates a module selected for testing.
The indicated attributes are characteristics of the selectedtest module that are used by the test programs todetermine which tests to run or how to run selected tests.Attributes are also used to limit the allowable range ofparameters (for example, – ending cylinder).
Parameters are values you select to establish the scope oftests. For example, you can select Extended Memorytesting parameters and limit the testing to a specific rangeof test blocks by specifying the starting and endingmemory block. This might be appropriate if priorexperience indicates that problems are likely to exist in a
Command Action
/B&W The /B&W command line option forces theprogram to load in Black and White(Monochrome) mode, which is often morereadable on laptop computers.
/LOG=file The /LOG=file command line option directsthe test programs to start using a specifiedError Log file.
/INT10 The /INT10 command line option forces thetest programs to use the BIOS for screenwrites.
/OXXX The /OXXX command line option, whereXXX=test group (for example,MBD/MEM/VID/HDU/FDU/KBD/COM/LPT,and so on), omits the designated test groupfrom testing.
/USRCONFIG=file
The /USERCONFIG=file command lineoption tells the test programs to look for auser diagnostic configuration file other thanthe default USERDIAG.CFG.
/SCRIPT=file[,R]
The /SCRIPT=file[,R] command line optionwith the “,R” runs the selected script.Please see “Scripting” on page 10 for adescription of scripting.
Note: You can use a “–” instead of a “/” asthe command line switch.
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO 9
specific area of memory. By selecting these limitingparameters, you reduce memory testing time.
Scripting: Scripting allows you to select specificgroups of tests, testing parameters, and options. Yourselection is saved for later use as a test Script. To set upa test script, first select all the appropriate test groups andspecific tests you want to run from the Module Testingsection under Diagnostics. You should also selectappropriate testing parameters and options. See “ProgramNavigation” on page 8, for instructions to save a testscript.
Changing Logical Unit Numbers: In someinstances, you can have more than one logical unit number(LUN) for a particular module. LUNs represent individualdevices within a test group or module. For example, youmight have two diskette drives or two hard disk drives; or,you might have base, extended, shadow, and cachememory installed in the computer. This configuration mightresult in as many as four or five different LUNs in theMemory Test Group. Or you might have base, extended,shadow, and cache memory installed in the system whichmight result in as many as four or five different LUNs inthe Memory Test Group.
From either the Module Test Menu or the Test Groupwindow, you can change to a different LUN (whereapplicable) by pressing the plus (+) key (next LUN), or theminus (−) key (previous LUN).
Test Group Specifications: In theupper-right-hand portion of the testing screen (or just theupper portion if you switched to an individual test groupscreen) are the specifications for the related test group.
Note: In the Hard Disk Test Group specification area, if asoftware program was to compress your drive, theindicated size is the compressed size of the logicaldrive.
Starting the QAPlus/PRO DiagnosticsDiskette
1. Insert the QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics Diskette into driveA.
2. Power-on the computer.3. When the QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics Main Menu is
displayed, press Ctrl+A .4. Select Diagnostics; then, press Enter .5. Follow the instructions that appear on your screen. If
an error is displayed, go to the "Symptom-to-FRUIndex" for the system you are servicing.
10 PC Server HMM
Module Testing Mode
If the test programs do not find a problem, or you want toperform in-depth testing, the Module Testing modeprovides a method to run individual tests on a singlemodule. For example, you can run an individual test forthe diskette drive, or you can run groups of tests forseveral modules.
In the Module Testing mode, you can define how manytimes each test should run and how the test programshould log the errors.
To start the Module Testing mode:
1. Start the diagnostics diskette. See “Starting theQAPlus/PRO Diagnostics Diskette” on page 10.
2. Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu.3. Select Module Tests from the next menu.4. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to move
the highlight bar from one selection to the next.5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: As you scroll down the selection menu, the TestGroup window to the right changes to correspondto the highlighted Module.
Running Selected Module Tests
To run all selected tests for a test group:
1. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to movethe cursor to your selection.
2. Press Enter .
Note: A “♦” appears next to your selection.
Running All Selected Modules
To run all selected test modules:
1. Use the down arrow key (↓) to move the cursor to thelast choice, Run All Selected Modules .
2. Press Enter .
Note: A “♦” appears next to your selection.
Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups
To change selected tests in a Test Group:
1. In the Module Tests Menu, use the up and downarrow keys (↑ and ↓) to move the cursor to yourselection.
2. Press Tab to move into the expanded Test Groupwindow.
3. Scroll to the test you want to select or deselect.
Warning: Items indicated by a directly adjacent “*”(red text on color screens) are destructive tests.
4. Press the spacebar at the highlighted test to togglebetween select (indicated by a “♦”) and deselect.
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO 11
Note: Pressing the first letter of a test does notactivate the test, unlike menu operation.
5. Press Enter .
Running an Individual Test
To run an individual test:
1. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to moveto the highlighted bar to the test you want to run.
2. Press Enter to run the test.
Note: The results of the test appear in thelower-right-hand Test Log window. Also, ifyou enabled Test Logging, the results arerecorded in the Test Log.
3. When the test completes, press Esc to return to theTest Group Menu.
Stopping the Tests: To stop running a specific testor stop testing after you have started a test, press Escwhile the test is running. The test pauses at the firstpossible opportunity, and the Skip/Abort Test Menuappears with the following options:
QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics Control Keys: Thefollowing is a list of the QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics ControlKeys, when used and a description of the diagnosticsresponse.
Option Action
Continue The test program begins testing where it leftoff.
Skip tonext test
The test program skips the current test, butremaining tests for the selected Test Modulecontinue.
Skip tonext group
The test program skips the remaining tests inthe current test group.
Abort alltests
The test program stops and returns to theprevious menu.
ControlKeys
When Used Diagnostics Response
Ctrl+A Main Menu Allows you to select test fromthe sub menus that arehighlighted with red letters.
Attention
If selected, these testswill erase the informationstored on the diskette orhard disk drive.
12 PC Server HMM
ControlKeys
When Used Diagnostics Response
Up andDownArrowKeys
Main MenuModule TestMenuTest GroupMenu
Highlights an item you want toselect.
SpaceBar
Module TestMenuTest GroupMenu
Adds a diamond to the left ofthe highlighted test. The testwill run when Run AllSelected is highlighted andthe Enter key is pressed.Also removes the diamond tothe left of the item. The testwill not run when Run AllSelected is highlighted andthe Enter key is pressed.
TabKey
Main MenuModule TestMenu
Selects the additional test forthe menu you are in.
+/−Keys
Test GroupMenu
Selects additional test. TheLUN displayed on the top rightTest Group Menu shows whichtest is selected and how andremain (example LUN 1 of 2).
General Checkout/Diagnostics QAPlus/PRO 13
PC Server 300 - Type 8640
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . . 18Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adapters Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Setup (BIOS Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Starting Setup During the POST . . . . . . . 21System Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Formatting Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Using the Low-Level Format Program . . . . 22When To Use the Low-Level Format Program 22Hard Disk Drive Preparation . . . . . . . . . 22File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22File Edit Function Key Usage . . . . . . . . 23
System Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 24Locations (486DX2 System Board) . . . . . . . . . 25
Jumper Settings (486DX2 System Board) . . . . 26Jumper Settings (Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26ISA IDE Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Keyboard Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Tag Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26BIOS Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 27DPU Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27PCI Port Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27PCI Compilant IRQ Jumper Header . . . . . 27Cache Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27PCI IDE Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Reserved Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Locations (Pentium System Board) . . . . . . . . . 29Jumper Settings (Pentium System Board) . . . . 29
Parity Check Selections . . . . . . . . . . . 29DRQ Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Secondary Cache Selection . . . . . . . . . 29Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Cache Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30DACK Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Keyboard Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Clock Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Pentium Clock Selection . . . . . . . . . . 30BIOS Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Secondary Cache Selection . . . . . . . . . 31W17 IRQ Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Reserved Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32No Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Miscellaneous Error Messages . . . . . . . . . 46
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 15
Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Keyboards (101/102 Key) . . . . . . . . . . . 50Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
16 PC Server HMM
FeaturesThe following table contains the features for PC Server300 - Type 8640 computers.
Machine Type Feature Description
8640-0N0, 1N0 ProcessorVideoSlots/BaysMemorySelectable StartupHard Disk Drive
486DX2-66MHzVGA/SVGA 1
8/98/128MBYesShipped to orderor without a drive
8640-0NJ, 1NJ ProcessorVideoSlots/BaysMemorySelectable StartupHard Disk Drive
486DX2-66MHzVGA/SVGA 1
8/98/128MBYes728MB IDE
8640-0P0, 1P0 ProcessorVideoSlots/BaysMemorySelectable StartupHard Disk Drive
Pentium-60MHzVGA/SVGA 1
8/916/192MBYesShipped to orderor without a drive
8640-0PT, 1PT ProcessorVideoSlots/BaysMemorySelectable StartupHard Disk Drive
Pentium-60MHzVGA/SVGA 1
8/916/192MBYes1GB SCSI
1 SVGA for AP and EMEA only.
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 17
Diagnostics and Test InformationThe following list contains problems and references fordiagnosing a PC Server 300 Type 8640.
Notes
� The QAPlus/PRO diagnostic program recognizesthe primary processor as LUN 1 and thesecondary processor as LUN 2. During testingthe program automatically tests LUN 1. Youmust select LUN 2 if you want the program totest the secondary processor.
� The type of DASD diagnostics required to testthe hard disk controller (adapter) and drives isdetermined by the type of hard disk adapterinstalled in the computer.
� Always start with “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
Problem Reference
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” onpage 32.
DASD Adapter Problems For non-disk-array models, see“SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547. SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-BusRAID Adapter, see “Disk ArrayConfiguration” on page 461.
Memory “Symptom-to-FRU Index” onpage 32.
Power Supply Voltages “Power Supply Voltages” onpage 20.
Miscellaneous “Symptom-to-FRU Index” onpage 32.
Additional Service InformationThe following additional service information is for the PCServer 300 Type 8640.
� “Adapters Supported”� “Memory” on page 19� “Power Supply Voltages” on page 20� “Setup (BIOS Utility)” on page 21� “System Utilities” on page 21� “System Board Replacement” on page 24
Adapters SupportedThe PC Server 300 - Type 8640 supports IndustryStandard Architecture (ISA), Extended Industry StandardArchitecture (EISA), and Peripheral ComponentInterconnect (PCI) adapters.
18 PC Server HMM
The connectors and the location of the components on thesupported adapters are shown below.
MemoryThe PC Server 300 - Type 8640 has four, 36-bit (72-pin)SIMM sockets on the system board. The system boardcan accommodate memory from 8MB up to 128MB(192MB on some models).
The following are the memory requirements for the PCServer 300 - Type 8640 computer:
� At least two SIMM sockets must be filled. Start withbank 0, then work your way up.
� The SIMMs must be rated at 70NS or better.� Recommended that the SIMMs have tin-lead
contacts.� Banks 0 and 1 must have the same size memory
installed.� If memory is installed in banks 2 and 3, the memory
for Banks 2 and 3 be the same size.
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 19
Power Supply VoltagesNote: Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable)
is set for the correct voltage.
If the power-on indicator is not on, and if the power-supplyfan is not running, check the power cord for properinstallation and continuity.
If the power cord is OK, either the power supply isdefective or a defective device is causing the power supplyto shut off. Check the power supply voltages.
If the voltages are incorrect, replace the power supply. Ifthe voltages are correct, and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
P1
P2
P3
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6
1 2 3 4
Power Good+4.8V+11.52V−10.8V
+5.25V+12.60V−13.2V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2
3 4 5 6
−4.5V+4.8V+4.8V+4.8V
−5.5V+5.25V+5.25V+5.25V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3 +4.8V +5.25V
20 PC Server HMM
P4 and P641
P5, P7, and P8
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2, 3 2, 3
1 4
+4.8V+11.52V
+5.25V+12.6V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2, 3 2, 3
1 4
+11.52V+4.8V
+12.6V+5.25V
Setup (BIOS Utility)You can start the Setup Utility program during the POST orin any DOS Full Screen. However, the procedure forstarting the Setup Utility program during the POSTdepends on the machine type of the computer you areservicing.
Notes:
1. If a configuration error occurs during POST, press F1to bypass the error. (A configuration error messageappears before the operating system loads.)
2. Do not start the Setup Utility while using the EISAConfiguration diskette.
3. The EISA Configuration diskette must be used toconfigure computers that have a EISA configuration.For information on how to use the EISA Configurationdiskette, refer to the documentation shipped with thesystem.
4. The procedure for starting the Set Utility will not workin an OS/2 DOS Window.
Starting Setup During the POST: To start theprogram during the POST do the following.
1. Power-On the computer.2. During the POST memory test, press and then
release the Spacebar ; then press and release theCTR+ALT+S keys simultaneously.
System UtilitiesThe Diagnostic Diskette contains utilities for formattingdiskettes, performing a low-level format on a hard disk,and editing.
Formatting Diskettes: To format a diskette withinthe Diagnostic programs, select one of the followingoptions:
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 21
Format A: high density — 1.44MB
Format A: low density — 720KB
Format B: high density — 1.44MB
Format B: low density — 720KB
After selecting one of the above options to format adiskette, follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Using the Low-Level Format Program:Depending on the hard disk capacity, the Low-LevelFormat program could take up to two hours.
When To Use the Low-Level FormatProgramUse the Low-Level Format program:
� When you are installing software that requires alow-level format
� When you get recurring messages from the testprograms directing you to run the Low-Level Formatprogram on the hard disk
� As a last resort before replacing a failing hard diskdrive
Hard Disk Drive Preparation: When theLow-Level Format program is finished, restore to the harddisk all the files that you previously backed up.
1. Partition the remainder of the hard disk for youroperating system. (The commands vary with theoperating system. Refer to your operating-systemmanual for instructions.)
2. Format the hard disk using your operating system.(The commands vary with the operating system.Refer to your operating-system manual forinstructions.)
3. Install the operating system.
You are now ready to restore the files.
File Editor: The File Editor is an ASCII text editor thatuses simple function key commands.
To access the File Editor:
1. Select File Editor from the Utility Menu ; then pressEnter .
2. Insert a diskette into Drive A or Drive B beforeselecting the file you want to edit, then select the fileyou want to edit from the Files selection box.
3. Make your changes. The arrow keys move thecursor, and the function keys perform search andblock editing functions. (See “File Edit Function KeyUsage” on page 23.)
22 PC Server HMM
4. When you are done, press F10 to update the file withthe changes you made, or press Esc to quit theediting process without saving the changes.
File Edit Function Key Usage The followinginformation describes the function of the function keys andkeyboard keys when you are using the File Editor.
Key Description
Arrows Move the cursor to the place in the textwhere you want to make changes.
Home Press Home once, to move the cursor to thestart of the current line.Press Home twice, to move to the beginningof the file.Press Home three times, to move to thebeginning of the file.
End Press End once, to move the cursor to theend of the current line.Press End twice, to move the cursor to theend of the current screen.Press End three times, to move the end ofthe file.
F2 Press F2. to be in search mode, You areprompted to enter the search word or wordson a reverse highlighted line at the bottom ofthe File Edit Screen. After typing in thesearch word, press Enter.
F3 Press F3, to find the next occurrence of asearch word.
F4 Press F4, to mark the start of a block of text(if you have not previously marked it).If you previously marked the block of text,pressing this key unmarks the text block.
F5 Press F5, to complete the block marking(started with F4).If you did not previously press F4 to startmarking a block of text, F5 is ignored.
F6 Press F6 while the cursor is within the activeblock to move an active (marked) block oftext. Move the cursor to the new locationwhere the active block is to be moved, thenpress F6 again.If there is no active block of text, F6 isignored.
F7 To copy an active (marked) block of text to anew location, move the cursor to the newlocation and then press F7.If there is no active block of text F7 isignored.
F8 To delete an active (marked) block of text,move the cursor within the active block andpress F8.If there is no active block of text, F8 isignored.
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 23
Notes:
1. Always make a backup copy on a self-startingdiskette of the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYSfiles before making any changes.
2. The default text editing mode of the File Editor is theinsert mode. To toggle between overtype and insertmodes, press Insert.
Key Description
F10 Press F10, to save all changes and exit thefile.
System Board ReplacementType 8640 computers have one or two processors, andother components installed on the system board. Whenreplacing the system board, remove all of the installedcomponents from the old system board and install them onthe new system board. If the problem remains, check thefollowing:
� The primary processor is installed and seatedcorrectly in socket U2 on the system board.
� If installed, the secondary processor is seatedcorrectly in socket U3 on the system board.
� All other components removed from the old systemboard are installed and seated correctly on the newsystem board.
Note
If the processor(s) are not seated correctly,intermittent problems can occur.
24 PC Server HMM
Locations (486DX2 System Board).1/ Memory connectors (U31, U32, U33, and
U34) .2/ Processor socket.3/ ISA-IDE hard disk drive LED jumper (W46).4/ PCI-IDE hard disk drive LED jumper (W39).5/ Power LED pins 1-3 (W12).6/ Speaker connector (J5).7/ EISA slots (J12, J13, J14, 15, and J16).8/ PCI slots (J18, J19, and J20).9/ Mouse port (J2).1ð/ PCI-IDE hard disk drive connector (J21).11/ Keyboard port (J1).12/ Serial port, COM1 (J11).13/ Power supply connector, P2 (J7).14/ Power supply connector, P1 (J6).15/ Serial port, COM2 (J10).16/ Parallel port (J8).17/ Diskette drive connector (J9).18/ Real-time clock socket.19/ IDE 2 hard disk drive connector (J22)
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 25
Jumper Settings (486DX2 SystemBoard)A label (diagram) showing the following jumper locations islocated on the top of the base frame assembly inside thesystem unit.
Jumper Settings (Central Processing Unit(CPU) Selection)
ISA IDE Selection
Keyboard Selection
Tag Selection
Jumper Configuration Setting
W2 486SXAll other CPUs (Default)
Pins 2-31-2 & 3-4
W3 P24T CPUAll others CPUs (Default)
Not installedInstalled
W16 25MHz33MHz (Default)
Not installedInstalled
W20 25MHz33MHz (Default)
InstalledNot installed
W33 DX4DX4 internal double clock468SX, DX2, DX, and DX4internal clock tripler (Default)
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3Not installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
W42 ISA IDE uses ISA IRQ 14ISA IDE uses ISA IRQ 15
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
W43 ISA IDE uses DMA channel 6ISA IDE uses DMA channel 7ISA IDE uses P10 transfer(Default)
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3Not installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
W10 PS/2 Mouse installed (Default)PS/2 Mouse not installed
InstalledNot installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
W24 7-Bit Tag8-Bit Tag9-Bit Tag (Default)Illegal
Not installedInstalledInstalledNot installed
W26 7-Bit Tag8-Bit Tag9-Bit Tag (Default)Illegal
InstalledInstalledNot InstalledNot installed
26 PC Server HMM
BIOS Mode Selection
DPU Selection
PCI Port Selection
PCI Compilant IRQ Jumper Header
Cache Selections
Jumper Configuration Setting
W6 BIOS in normal mode (Default)BIOS in boot recovery mode
Pins 2-3Pins 1-2
Jumper Configuration Setting
W17 DPU generate parityCPU generate parity
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
W18 DPU forces parity errorDPU does not force parity error(Default)
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
Jumper Configuration
J20 PCI #1 (master/slave shared with EISA slot J17)
J19 PCI #2 (master/slave)
J18 PCI #3 (master/slave)
Jumper Setting
J101 Open (Default)Pin 2: Route to ISA IRQ1Pin 3: Route to ISA IRQ3Pin 4: Route to ISA IRQ4Pin 5: Route to ISA IRQ5Pin 6: Route to ISA IRQ6Pin 7: Route to ISA IRQ7Pin 8: Route to ISA IRQ8Pin 9: Route to ISA IRQ9Pin 10: Route to ISA IRQ10Pin 11: Route to ISA IRQ11Pin 12: Route to ISA IRQ12Pin 13: Route to ISA IRQ14Pin 14: Route to ISA IRQ15
Jumper Configuration Setting
W1 Secondary cache in write-throughmodeSecondary cache in write-backmode (Default)
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
W4 Internal cache in write-throughmode (Default)Internal cache in write-back mode
Not installedInstalled
W5 128KB of secondary cache256KB of secondary cache(Default)
Not installedInstalled
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 27
PCI IDE Selection
Reserved Jumpers
Jumper Configuration Setting
W21 Secondary cache not installedSecondary cache installed(Default)
InstalledNot installed
W22 128KB of secondary cache256KB of secondary cache(Default)
InstalledNot installed
W23 128KB of secondary cache256KB of secondary cache(Default)
Not installedInstalled
Jumper Configuration Setting
W35 PCI IDE uses ISA IRQ 14(Default)PCI IDE does not use ISA IRQ 14
InstalledNot Installed
W37 PCI IDE uses PCI INTR_A(Default)PCI IDE does not use PCIINTR_A (Default)
InstalledNot Installed
W38 PCI uses ISA IRQ 15PCI does not use ISA IRQ 15(Default)
InstalledNot Installed
Jumper Setting
W8 Installed
28 PC Server HMM
Locations (Pentium System Board).1/ Memory connectors (J7, J8, J9, J10, J33,
and J34).2/ IDE hard disk drive LED connector (W10)
IDE hard disk drive adapter connector.3/ Power LED connector (W9).4/ Speaker connector (J11)
.5/ Processor socket.6/ EISA slots (J23, J24, J25, J26, J27, J28).7/ PCI slots (J30, J31, and J32).8/ Mouse port (J15).9/ Keyboard port (J14).1ð/ Serial port, COM1 (J20).11/ Power supply connector P1 (J12).12/ Power supply connector, P2 (J17).13/ Serial port, COM2 (J21).14/ Parallel port (J18).15/ Real-time clock socket.16/ Diskette drive connector (J19).17/ Power supply connector, P3 (J37).18/ IDE 2 hard disk drive connector (J22)
IDE hard disk drive adapter connector
Jumper Settings (Pentium SystemBoard)A label (diagram) showing the following jumper locations islocated on the top of the base frame assembly inside thesystem unit.
Parity Check Selections
DRQ Selection
Secondary Cache Selection
Jumper Configuration Setting
J1 Pentium parity check enabled(Default)Pentium parity check disabled
InstalledNot installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
W14 DRQ6DRQ7
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
Jumper Configuration Setting
J40 5 volts for thePentium5.3 volts for thePentium
Installed: Jumper blocks(all pins)Installed: Power module
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 29
Default Settings
Cache Selections
DACK Selection
Keyboard Selection
Clock Selection
Pentium Clock Selection
Jumper Configuration Setting
J41 5.3 volts forground
Installed: Power module(ground)
J42 5.3 volts forground
Installed: Power module(ground)
Jumper Default Setting
J3 Pins 2-3
J4 Pins 1-2
J35 Pins 1-2
Jumper Configuration Setting
J2 Pentium write-through cachePentium write-back cache(Default)
InstalledNot installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
W16 DACK 6DACK 7
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
Jumper Configuration Setting
W6 PS/2 Mouse installed (Default)PS/2 Mouse not installed
InstalledNot installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
J5 66MHz clock speed (Default)50MHz clock speed
InstalledNot installed
Jumper Configuration Setting
J6 Oscillator for U15 (Default)Clock synthesizer
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
30 PC Server HMM
BIOS Mode Selection
Secondary Cache Selection
W17 IRQ Selection
Reserved Jumpers
Jumper Configuration Setting
W2 BIOS in boot recovery modeBIOS in normal mode (Default)
Pins 1-2Pins 2-3
Configuration J3 J4 J35
No secondarycache
Pins 1-2 Pins 1-2 —
Reserved Pins 1-2 Pins 2-3 —
256KB secondarycache
Pins 2-3 Pins 1-2 Pins 1-2
512KB secondarycache
Pins 2-3 Pins 2-3 Pins 2-3
Selection Setting
Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 5Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 9Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 10Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 11Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 15Redirect modified PCI interrupt to IRQ 14
Pins 1-2Pins 3-4Pins 5-6Pins 7-8Pins 9-10Pins 11-12
Jumper Setting
W20 Pins 2-3
J5 Installed
J6 Pins 1-2
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 31
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThis index supports the PC Server 300.
Always start with “General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO)” onpage 4.
The Symptom-to-FRU Index lists symptoms, errors, andthe possible causes. The most likely cause is listed first.Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to haveavailable when servicing the computer.
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Note
For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus/PROdiagnostics code, refer to the manual for that device.
For information on: Go to:
Additional service help.(For example 0S/2 Traperrors)
“Related Service Information”on page 453)
Possible software andhardware mismatchproblems. (Notrepairable by replacingFRUs).
“Software/Hardware MismatchProblems” on page 550
Power supply problems. “Power Supply Voltages” onpage 20
32 PC Server HMM
No Beep SymptomsNo Beep/Symptom FRU/Action
No beep, fan runs, and000215XX is displayed.(Check memory)
1. System BoardMemory
2. Processor 3. System Board
No beep, fan runs, and000258XX is displayed.(Check memory)
1. System Board
No beep and the computeris otherwise functional.
1. Speaker Assembly 2. Processor 3. System Board
No beep and the computeris not functionalSee “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. System Board 2. Power Supply
No beep, fan runs,power-on LED lights,memory may or may notcount, and blinking cursorcontinuously loops.
1. Processor 2. System Board
No beep, power-on indicatordoes not come on, and fandoes not run.
1. Switch Assembly 2. Power Supply 3. Processor 4. System Board
5. Any Device or Adapter
No beep, fan runs,power-on indicator is on,and computer hangs duringPOST.(See “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.)
1. System Board 2. Processor 3. Power Supply
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 33
Beep SymptomsBeeps symptoms are short tones or a series of short tonesseparated by pauses (intervals without sound). (X can beany number.)
Examples:
Beeps Description
4 Four continuous beeps
1-2-X � One beep� A pause (or break)
� Two beeps� A pause (or break)� Any number of beeps
Beep/Symptom FRU/Action
4 1. Video Adapter 2. System Board
1-1-3CMOS read/write error
1. Run Setup. (See,“Setup (BIOS Utility)”on page 21)
2. System Board
1-1-4ROM BIOS check error
1. System Board
1-2-XDMA error
1. System Board
1-3-1RAM refresh verificationerror
1. System Board
1-3-X(not listed above)The first 64KB RAM modulefailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
1-4-XAn error was detected in thefirst 64KB of RAM.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-1-XThe first 64KB of RAMfailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-2-XThe first 64KB of RAMfailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-3-XThe first 64KB of RAMfailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-4-XThe first 64KB of RAMfailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
3-1-XThe DMA register failed.
1. System Board
34 PC Server HMM
Beep/Symptom FRU/Action
3-2-4The keyboard controllerfailed.
1. System Board 2. Keyboard
3-3-4Screen initialization failed.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
3-4-1The screen retrace testdetected an error.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
3-4-2POST is searching for videoROM.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 35
Error CodesError Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0000SCSI Adapter not enabled.
1. Be sure the adapterDevice and Bus Masterfields are enabled inthe PCI configurationprogram. Refer to thedocumentation thatwas shipped with thecomputer.
002X 1. SCSI Adapter
008XCheck for proper installationof SCSI terminators.
1. Check SCSIterminators forproper installation
2. SCSI Cable 3. SCSI Terminator 4. SCSI Device 5. SCSI Adapter
0115Protected mode cannot beenabled.
1. System Board
0164POST detected a basememory or expansionmemory size mismatch.
1. Run Setup andensure the memorysize is correct. (See,“Setup (BIOS Utility)”on page 21)
2. Run the ExpandedMemory Diagnostictests.
0601Diskette configuration error
1. Set Configuration
0610Cannot find diskettecontroller for drive A.
1. Diskette Drive2. Diskette Drive Cable3. Diskette Drive Adapter,
if installed 4. System Board
0612Cannot find diskettecontroller for drive B.
1. Diskette Drive2. Diskette Drive Cable3. Diskette Drive Adapter,
if installed 4. System Board
0616Diskette drive reset failed.
1. Diskette DriveAdapter
0632Diskette drive 0 seek failure
1. Diskette Drive A
0642Diskette drive 1 seek failure
1. Diskette Drive B
0653Diskette not formatted ordefective
1. Format diskette 2. Diskette
36 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0655Diskette drive controllerfailed.
1. Diskette Drive2. Diskette Drive Cable3. Diskette Drive Adapter,
if installed 4. System Board
107XCheck for proper installationof SCSI terminators.
1. Check SCSIterminators forproper installation
2. SCSI Cable 3. SCSI Terminator 4. SCSI Device 5. SCSI Adapter
1701Hard disk drive failed.Press F1 to restart thesystem.
1. Hard Disk Drive
1702Hard disk drive controllererror.
1. Hard Disk DriveAdapter, if installed
2. System Board
1704Hard disk drive configurationerror, controller failed.
1. Hard Disk DriveAdapter, if installed
2. System Board
1715The Hard Disk DriveConfiguration information isnot correct.
1. Run Setup and enterthe correct hard diskdrive information..(See, “Setup (BIOSUtility)” on page 21
1726Hard disk drive read errorPress F1 to restart thesystem.
1. Hard Disk Drive
182X 1. SCSI Adapter
190XEnsure that each SCSIdevice is properly installedand powered-on.
1. SCSI Cable 2. SCSI Terminator 3. SCSI Device 4. SCSI Adapter
1XXX(not listed above)
1. SCSI Adapter
221XEnsure that each SCSIdevice is properly installedand powered-on.
1. SCSI Cable 2. SCSI Terminator 3. SCSI Device 4. SCSI Adapter
222X, 224X 1. SCSI Adapter
2401The monochrome/colorswitch is not set correctly.
1. Correct the switchsetting
2. Display Adapter
3XXXCheck for proper installationof SCSI terminators.
1. Check SCSIterminators forproper installation
2. SCSI Cable 3. SCSI Terminator 4. SCSI Device 5. SCSI Adapter
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 37
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
4XXXEnsure that each SCSIdevice is properly installedand powered-on.
1. SCSI Cable 2. SCSI Terminator 3. SCSI Device 4. SCSI Adapter
6XXX 1. SCSI Device
GP_COMThe serial port test detectedan error.
1. System Board
GP_FDUThe diskette drive testdetected an error.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable 4. Diskette
GP_HDUThe hard disk drive testdetected an error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 4. System Board
GP_KBDThe keyboard test detectedan error.
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
GP_MBD The system board testdetected an error.
1. System Board 2. Processor 3. Real-Time Clock
Assembly
GP_MEM The memory testdetected an error.
1. Memory Module Kit 2. System Board
GP_PDVThe mouse test failed.
1. Mouse 2. System Board
GP_PRTThe printer test detected anerror.
1. Printer 2. System Board 3. Printer Cable
GP_VIDThe video test detected anerror.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Color Display
GRPCDRThe CD-ROM test detectedan error.
1. CD-ROM
38 PC Server HMM
Error MessagesError Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Arithmetic FunctionsFailedAn error was detectedduring the CPU Test.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Base Memory Test FailedAn error was detected inbase memory.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Battery Error 1. Replace the batteryand run Setup.
2. System Board
Boot Sector UnreadableA boot sector read errorwas detected on the harddisk drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 4. System Board
Bus Noise Test FailedThe RAM Test detected anerror in the memory bus.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Butterfly Cylinder AccessTest FailedThe Hard Disk Drive Testdetected mismatch betweenthe data read and the datastored on the drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 4. System Board
Clock StoppedThe real-time clock hasstopped working.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
CMOS Clock Test FailedThe Time and Date Settingsfor CMOS and DOS do notMatch.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
COM Port Tests FailedTest failed with wrap plugattached.
1. Serial Cable 2. System Board
Controller Diagnostic TestFailedAn error was detected whiletesting the Hard DiskController (Adapter).
1. Hard Disk DriveAdapter (if installed)
2. Hard Disk Drive 3. System Board
Cylinder 0 errorsThe test detected an errorreading the first cylinder ofthe hard disk drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 3. System Board
Device is Not ReadyReady the Device...
orPress Any Key
1. Ensure the device ispowered-on
2. Replace failing device3. Device Adapter (if
installed) 4. System Board
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 39
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Disk Error EncounteredOpening Output File PressAny Key To Continue.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 3. System Board
DMA #X FailedThe Main Components Testdetected an error whiletesting the DMA controller.
1. System Board
DMA Page Register FailedAn error was detected whileoutputting all possiblevalues to the DMA PageRegister.
1. System Board
Door Is Open 1. Close door on devicebeing tested.
2. Device being tested 3. System Board
Drive (x) Media (y)MismatchThe capacity listed for thedrive in the File AllocationTable ID does not match thecalculated capacity of thedrive.
1. Check diskette anddiskette drivecapacity.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
EISA ConfigurationNVRAM Bad
1. Replace battery, thenrun Setup.
2. System Board
Error in video buffer. BadbitsThe video memory testfailed.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
Exception Interrupt InProtected Mode DiagsCannot ContinueServer error, all systemtests will stop.Remove one adapter at atime until the symptom goesaway.
1. Any Adapter 2. System Board 3. Processor
Extended Memory TestFailedAn error was detected inExtended Memory.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
FF Stuck KeyKeyboard error
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
Floppy Drive FailedOne or more diskette drivesfailed.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
General Function FailedRemove one adapter at atime until the symptom goesaway.
1. Any Adapter 2. System Board 3. Processor
40 PC Server HMM
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Hard Drives FailedOne or more of the HardDisk Drive tests detected anerror.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 3. System Board
Incorrect DOS version 1. Ensure you are usingDOS version 3.0 orhigher.
Insert A Data Disk 1. Insert a known gooddata disk into theCD-ROM.
2. CD-ROM Drive 3. System Board 4. CD-ROM Cable
INT Mask Register FailedThe INT Mask Registertests detected an error.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Invalid DateThe back-up clock and DOSdates do not match.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Invalid TimeThe back-up clock and DOStime of day settings do notmatch.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Keyboard ErrorOne or more keys do notoperate correctly.
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
Linear Cylinder AccessTest FailedHard disk drive error. Theredundancy check of thesectors read does not matchthe information on the drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 4. System Board
Logic Function FailedThe CPU Logic Test hasdetected an error.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Loopback ErrorAn error occurred during theCOM Port Test or ParallelPort Test.
Note: A wrap plug must beinstalled tosuccessfullycomplete thesetests.
1. System Board 2. Wrap Plug
Main Components FailedA component failure wasdetected on the systemboard.
1. System Board 2. Processor
Memory test cannot run atthis location in memoryNot enough free memoryavailable to start thememory test.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 41
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Missing QAPlus/PROFiles(s)One or more Diagnosticsupport files are missing.
1. Diagnostic Diskette
NO LOOP-BACK PLUG.Skipping Externalloopback testNo wrap plug installed.
1. Install wrap plug onthe serial port, reruntest.
2. System Board
Not readyPrinter not on-line or notready.
1. Ready Printer 2. Printer 3. Printer Cable 4. System Board
Not ready error, readydrive ADMA Transfer test error
1. Ensure that a knowngood formatteddiskette is in drive a,then rerun the test.
2. System Board
No 'type-amatic' repeat
Note: At least one repeatkey must be testedduring this test or anerror will occur.
The Type-amatic testdetected an error.
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
Not used by any standarddeviceThe IRQ is not currentlybeing used by anon-standard device.
1. System Board
Numeric Proc FailedThe NPU TEST detected anerror.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Parallel Ports FailedTest Report Summarymessage.
1. System Board
Pass (N): ** Errors ** Drive(X) FailedThe read/write test failed onthe diskette drive.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
Pass (N) Drive Not ReadyThe diskette drive door isopen or defective.
1. Ensure diskette driveis ready.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Pass (N): Drive (X) WriteProtected or Unformatted
1. Insert a non-writeprotected, formatteddiskette into thediskette drive; thererun the test
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
42 PC Server HMM
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Pass (N): Unknown MediaDrive (X)Diskette Drive Test error.The File Allocation Table IDon the diskette is invalid.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Place Hi-density Media inDriveThe capacity of the disketteinstalled in the diskette driveis less then the capacity ofthe drive.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Printer FailedEnsure the printer ispowered-on and ready.
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Printer FaultEnsure the printer ispowered-on and ready.
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Printer Not SelectedEnsure the printer ispowered-on and ready.
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Program or File Not FoundPress Any KeyThe diagnostics cannot findthe USER(N).COM file.
1. Diagnostic Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
Program Too Big To Fit InMemoryToo many Terminate andStay Resident programs inmemory while loadingdiagnostics.
1. Reboot the systemfrom the DiagnosticDiskette
QAPlus/PRO Cannot BeRe-run Because Of ErrorIn Relocating ProgramDiagnostics failed torelocate the DiagnosticsTest programs so thememory space it resides inwas not tested.
1. Diagnostic Diskette 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
RAM Memory Error inBlock n. Bad bits nAn error was detected inRAM.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
RAM Test FailedTest Result Summarymessage, Memory Testfailed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Read error on cylinder nHard disk drive physicalformat error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed) 3. System Board
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 43
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Read ErrorsDiskette drive read error.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Receive ErrorSerial Port loopback testerror.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Refresh FailureThe Diagnostics Testdetected an error whiletesting the DMA controller'sRAM refresh cycle.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
RTC Interrupt FailureThe Diagnostics Test cannotdetect the Real-Time clockinterrupt.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Serial Chip ErrorCOM Port error, general.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serial Compare ErrorCOM Port error, informationtransmitted is not the sameas information received.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serial Time-out ErrorCOM Port error, timeinterval is too long betweentransmitted and receiveddata.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serious Memory Error —Diags Cannot ContinueMemory Test error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Sorry You Need A MouseThe mouse or mouse driverwas not detected.
1. Mouse 2. System Board
System Hangs (whileloading a diagnostic test)
1. System Board
System HangsGo to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. Any device 2. Any adapter 3. System Board
Too Many Errors — TestAbortedToo many errors, theDiagnostics Test cannotcontinue.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Transmit ErrorInternal or external serialport loopback test failure.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Unable To Detect CD-ROM 1. CD-ROM Drive 2. System Board 3. CD-ROM Cable
44 PC Server HMM
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Video Adapter FailedTest Result Summary,displayed if "Fail" was at theQuit/Fail/Pass menu of anyvideo test.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
Write error on cylinder nHard disk drive write error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
Write ErrorsDiskette drive write error.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Write Protected orUnformattedThe diskette is WriteProtected or not formatted.
1. Insert a non-writeprotected, formatteddiskette into thediskette drive; thenrerun the test
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 45
Miscellaneous Error MessagesMessage/Symptom FRU/Action
The Address Exceeds TheSize Of Your MemoryAn invalid memory addresswas entered. TheDiagnostics Tests displaythis message during theLocate Bad Chips optionunder the interact menu ifan invalid memory addresswas entered at the at the"Enter Memory Address OfBad Chip" prompt.
1. Enter correct address 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
That Number is Out OfRangeAn invalid bit number wasentered. The DiagnosticsTests display this messageduring the Locate Bad Chipsoption under the interactmenu if an invalid bitnumber was entered at the"Enter the Bad Bit" prompt.
1. Enter correct number 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
You Cannot Delete theMotherboardThe "Remove Board" optionwas selected. TheDiagnostics Tests displaythis message during theLocate Bad Chips optionunder the interact menu ifthe "Remove Board" optionwas selected while thesystem board wasdisplayed.
1. Make the correctselection
2. Memory Module 3. System Board 4. Processor
46 PC Server HMM
Parts Listing
1
2
3
8
910
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
20
4
7
5
6
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 47
SystemIndex System Unit (PC Server 300 - Type 8640)
1 Access Cover 06H89302 3.5" Hard Disk Drive Tray(s) (1 each) 06H26523 Base Frame Assembly 06H89334 Front Bezel/Door Assembly 06H8935
PC Server 300 Label 06H60035 Power Button (with spring) 06H21916 Keylock Assembly (with keys) 33F84337 Bezel (5.25" Blank) 71G07718 Bezel (3.5" Blank) 71G0770
9 Speaker 06H264910 Fan Assembly (with Connector) 06H2647
11 Card Guide 71G0757 12 Pedestal 96G2412
13 DASD 3-Drive Cage 06H893814 Diskette Drive (see DASD)15 Hard Disk Drive (see DASD)16 300W Power Supply with Switch 71G0044
System Board, Pentium without Memory 71G0747and Processor (Models 0P0, 0PT, 1P0, 1PT)
Processor Chip, Pentium 60MHz (Models 0P0, 06H26800PT, 1P0, 1PT)
System Board, 486DX2-66 71G0033without Memory and Processor (Models 0N0,0NJ, 1N0, 1NJ)
Processor Chip, 486DX2-66 (Models 0N0, 06H26790NJ, 1N0, 1NJ)
4MB Memory SIMM, Parity (Models 0N0, 73G32330NJ, 1N0, 1NJ)
8MB Memory SIMM, Parity (Models 0P0, 73G32340PT, 1P0, 1PT)
16MB Memory SIMM (Parity) 60G295032MB Memory SIMM (Parity) 73G3235486 Real-Time Clock 06H3397with an internal battery(Models 0N0, 0NJ, 1N0, 1NJ),see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Pentium Real-Time Clock 06H3398with internal battery(Models 0P0, 0PT, 1P0, 1PT),see “Battery Notice” on page 461
486 Heat Sink with Clip (Models 0N0, 06H21790NJ, 1N0, 1NJ)
Pentium Heat Sink with Clip (Models 0P0, 06H21800PT, 1P0, 1PT)
Keyboard with Cable,see “Keyboards (101/102 Key)” on page 50
Key/Lock Cable 06H8766
48 PC Server HMM
Index System Unit (PC Server 300 - Type 8640) Power Cord
(see Power cords)SCSI-2 Fast PCI-Bus Adapter (Models 53G0382
0PT, 1PT)SVGA Card (Models 0P0, 0PT, 1P0, 71G00311PT, 1N0, 1NJ)
VGA Card 71G0030Miscellaneous Parts Kit 06H8940
� EMC Ground Contacts (4 each) � Screws 6X32X5/16" (6 each) � I/O Blank (1 each) � Nut Screws 4-40 (2 each) � Power Switch Bracket (1 each) � Screws 3x8mm Plastite (3 each) � Screws 3mm Diskette Drive (2 each) � Screws 6-32 Hard Disk Drive (2 each) � System Board Edge Support (1 each)
Shadow Box 96G2411Cable Cover with Lock 06H5072
Index Cables/Indicators (PC Server 300 - Type 8640) 17 LED Cables 06H8936
Activity, with Amber LED) 18 Serial Cable 06H2165
19 Parallel Cable 06H216620 IDE Hard Disk Drive Cable - 2X (Models 0N0, 92F0424
0NJ, 0P0, 1P0, 1N0, 1NJ)21 SCSI Cable Assembly - 4X (Models 0PT, 1PT) 82G3626
SCSI Cable Assembly - 7X (Models 0P0, 0PT, 06H2181 1P0, 1PT)
Diskette Drive Signal Cable (with power) 92F0423C2 Cable Assembly 06H8767
Index DASD (PC Server 300 - Type 8640)14 1.44MB Diskette Drive Assembly 93F236114 1.2MB 5.25-Inch Diskette Drive Assembly 64F410215 270MB Hard Disk Drive (IDE) 82G592615 364MB Hard Disk Drive (IDE) 82G592715 527MB Hard Disk Drive (IDE) 92F040515 540MB Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) 92F040615 728MB Hard Disk Drive (IDE) 82G592915 1GB Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) 92F042815 2GB Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) 92F0407
Enhanced Internal CD-ROM II Drive 92F0084
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 49
Keyboards (101/102 Key)Keyboards (101/102 Key)
Arabic 1391490 Belgium-Dutch 1391414 Belgium-French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian-Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian-Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia/Croatia/Bosnia 1393669
South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss-French 1391412 Swiss-German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286
U.K. English 1391406U.S. English 71G4646U.S. English (E/ME/A use only) 1396790
50 PC Server HMM
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520
Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520
PC Server 300 - Type 8640 51
PC Server 310 - Type 8639
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . . 56
General Checkout (Models 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0,0DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
General Checkout (Models MDT, MXT, MZT) . . 59From the Reference Diskette . . . . . . . . 59
To Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59To Test the Base System . . . . . . . . 60
From the Diagnostics Diskette . . . . . . . . 61From the System Partition . . . . . . . . . . 61
To Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61To Test the Base System . . . . . . . . 61
System Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Starting the System Programs . . . . . . . . 63
From the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . 63From the Reference Diskette . . . . . . . 63
System Programs Main Menu . . . . . . . . 63Module Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . 67BIOS Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Flash (BIOS/VPD) Update Procedure . . . . . . 69POST Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Power-on Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Power-On Self-Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . 70Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Processor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rapid Resume Manager . . . . . . . . . . 73Rapid Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Running Rapid Resume Manager . . . . . . 73Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Wake Up on Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Formatting Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Hard Disk Drive Boot Error . . . . . . . . . 74When To Use the Low-Level Format Program 75
Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for Use . . . . . 75File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76File Edit Function Key Usage . . . . . . . . 76Diagnostics Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . 77System Board Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80System Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 81Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Undetermined Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Using the Test Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Program Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice . . 84Using the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . 84
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 53
Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . 85Viewing the Test Groups . . . . . . . . . . 86Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Changing Logical Unit Numbers . . . . . . . 86Test Group Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 86Starting the Diagnostics Diskette . . . . . . 87
Module Testing Mode . . . . . . . . . . 87Running Selected Module Tests . . . . . 87Running All Selected Modules . . . . . . 87Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups . 88Running an Individual Test . . . . . . . . 88
Stopping the Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Vital Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Expansion Slots/Riser Cards . . . . . . . . . . 89
PCI/Micro Channel Models . . . . . . . . . 89PCI/ISA Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Riser Card (ISA) Administrator Password . . 90
Keylock Assembly Exploded View . . . . . . . 91System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
System Board (Continued) . . . . . . . . . 93Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Bus/CPU Speed MHz Settings . . . . . . . 94
Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement . . . . . . . . 95Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96No Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Numeric Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Miscellaneous Error Messages . . . . . . . . 117
Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Keyboards (101/102 Key - RD) . . . . . . . . 123Enhanced Keyboards (101/102 Key - BS) . . . 124Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
54 PC Server HMM
Features Note
All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup.
Microprocessor
� Pentium microprocessor with 16KB of internal cache; clockrate varies by model
Cache Memory
� 256KB of level-2 cache
Memory
� Standard: 16MB (min.), expandable to 192MB� 70 ns, parity� Six single inline memory-module sockets in three banks
Diskette Drives
� Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44MB � Optional (internal):
– 3.5-inch, 2.88MB – 3.5-inch, 1.44MB
Hard Disk Drives
� Number and capacities of hard disk drives varies by model� Supports up to three internal hard disk drives
CD-ROM Drive
� Standard: SCSI-2
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device
� 101-key keyboard � Mouse
Expansion Slots
� Two 32-bit PCI slots; five 32-bit Micro Channel slots or five16-bit ISA slots, depending on model. (The PCI slots andadjacent Micro Channel or ISA slots are shared slots.)
� The number of slots available for expansion varies by model.
Expansion Bays
� Two 5.25-inch drive bays� Three 3.5-inch drive bays� The number of bays available for expansion varies by model.
Video
� Super video graphics array (SVGA) controller � Compatibility:
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)
Security Features
� Bolt-down capability � Door lock� LogicLock security feature set� Power-on and administrator passwords
� Selectable drive-startup
Upgradable POST and BIOS
� Upgradable EEPROM on the system board� POST/BIOS upgrades (when available)
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 55
Input/Output Connectors
� Video port� Two serial ports
� Parallel port� Auxiliary device port
� Keyboard port� SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter
– One external port (8-bit)– One internal port (8-bit)
� Ethernet Adapter – 10Base-T – 10Base2 – 10Base5
Power Supply
� 200 W with voltage switch (115–230 V ac)� +3.3 V, ±5 V, and ±12 V outputs� Built-in overload and surge protection
Diagnostics and Test InformationThe diagnostic procedure required for servicing a PCServer 310 Type 8639 is determined by the architecture ofthe server.
� For ISA Models 0D0, 0DT, OXT, 0Z0, and OZT go to“General Checkout (Models 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0,0DT)” on page 57.
� For Micro Channel Models MDT, MXT, and MZT to“General Checkout (Models MDT, MXT, MZT)” onpage 59.
56 PC Server HMM
General Checkout (Models 0XT, 0Z0,0ZT, 0D0, 0DT)This general checkout procedure is for Type 8639 (Model0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0, 0DT) servers.
If you are servicing a Type 8639 (Models MDT, MXT,MZT) server, see “General Checkout (Models MDT,MXT, MZT)” on page 59.
Attention
The drives in the computer you are servicing mighthave been rearranged or the drive startup sequencechanged. Be extremely careful during write operationssuch as copying, saving, or formatting. Data orprograms can be overwritten if you select an incorrectdrive.
Diagnostic error messages appear when a test programfinds a problem with a hardware option. For the testprograms to properly determine if a test Passed, Failed, orAborted, the test programs check the error-return code attest completion. See “Return Codes” on page 72.
General error messages appear if a problem or conflict isfound by an application program, the operating system, orboth. For an explanation of these messages, refer to theinformation supplied with that software package.
Notes
1. Before replacing any FRUs, ensure the latestlevel of BIOS is installed on the system. Adown-level BIOS may cause false errors andunnecessary replacement of the system board.For more information on how to determine andobtain the latest level BIOS, see “BIOS Levels”on page 68.
2. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnosethe first error code displayed.
3. If the computer hangs with a POST error, go to“Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement” onpage 95.
4. If the computer hangs and no error is displayed,go to “Undetermined Problem” on page 83.
5. If a device is not highlighted on the Module Testmenu, that device may be defective.
001
– Power-off the computer and all external devices.– Check all cables and power cords.– Set all display controls to the middle position.– Insert the Diagnostics diskette into drive A.– Power-on all external devices.(Step 001 continues)
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 57
(CONTINUED)
001 (continued)– Power-on the computer.– Check for the following responses:
1. One beep.2. Readable instructions or the Main Menu.
DID YOU RECEIVE THE CORRECT RESPONSES?Yes No
002
If Rapid Resume is displayed, do the following:
1. Disable Rapid Resume, See “Running RapidResume Manager” on page 73.
2. Run the Diagnostics tests.3. Enable Rapid Resume after service is
complete.
– or –If the computer hangs during Rapid Resume, do thefollowing:
1. Power-off; then, power-on the computer.2. When the hard-disk drive activity light comes
on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to exit Rapid Resumeand restart the computer. (Rapid Resume isnow turned off.)
– or –Go to the “Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement” onpage 95.
003
ARE ALL ADAPTERS AND DEVICES INSTALLED INTHE COMPUTER HIGHLIGHTED ON THE MODULETEST MENU?Yes No
004
Go to “Module Test Menu” on page 67.
005
Run the Advanced Diagnostics test. If necessary, refer to“Additional Service Information” on page 67.
� If you receive an error, go to “Symptom-to-FRU IndexSupplement” on page 95.
� If the test stops and you cannot continue, replace thelast device tested.
� If the computer has incorrect keyboard responses, goto “Keyboard” on page 515.
� If the printer has incorrect responses, go to “Printer”on page 524.
� If the display has problems such as jittering, rolling,shifting, or being out of focus, go to “Display” onpage 490.
58 PC Server HMM
General Checkout (Models MDT, MXT,MZT)This general checkout procedure is for Type 8639 (ModelsMDT, MXT, MZT) servers.
On Type 8639 (Models MDT, MXT, MZT) Micro Channelcomputers, you can start the advanced diagnosticsprograms in one of three ways:
1. From the PC Server 310 (Models MDT, MXT, MZT)Reference Diskette
2. From the PC Server 310 (Models MDT, MXT, MZT)Diagnostics Diskette
3. From the System Partition.
From the Reference Diskette: The ReferenceDiskette is bootable. Starting the diagnostic programsfrom the Reference Diskette allows you to test the optionsinstalled in the computer or test the base system.
To Test Options
Notes
1. Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled beforestarting this procedure.
2. If Rapid Resume is displayed during thisprocedure, see “Running Rapid ResumeManager” on page 73.
3. Re-run the Diagnostics tests.
To test the options installed in the computer, do thefollowing.
1. Power-off the computer and all external devices.2. Check all cables and power cords.3. Set all display controls to the middle position.4. Insert the Reference Diskette into drive A.5. Power-on all external devices.6. Power-on the computer.7. Check for the following responses:
a. One beep b. IBM Logo
c. Readable instructions or the Main Menu8. If you received the correct responses, press Ctrl+A
(Test the Computer screen appears). Select Optionsdiagnostics and follow the instructions on the screen.
9. If you did not receive the correct responses, go to“Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement” on page 95.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 59
To Test the Base System
Notes
1. Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled beforestarting this procedure.
2. If Rapid Resume is displayed during thisprocedure, see “Running Rapid ResumeManager” on page 73.
3. Re-run the Diagnostics tests.
To test the base system, do the following:
1. Power-off the computer and all external devices.2. Check all cables and power cords.3. Set all display controls to the middle position.4. Insert the Reference Diskette into drive A.5. Power-on all external devices.6. Power-on the computer.7. Check for the following responses:
a. One beep b. IBM Logo
c. Readable instructions or the Main Menu8. If you received the correct responses, do the
following. a. Press Ctrl+A
(Test the Computer screen appears).b. Select System board diagnostics and follow
the instructions on the screen.c. When the QAPlus/Pro Main Menu appears,
press Ctrl+A . d. Select Diagnostics .
e. Select Module Test .� If the Module Test Menu is correct, run
diagnostics.� If the Module Test Menu is not correct, go
to “Module Test Menu” on page 67.9. If you did not receive the correct responses, go to
“Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement” on page 95.
60 PC Server HMM
From the Diagnostics Diskette
Important
If the diagnostic program is started from thediagnostics diskette, you will not have the option totest the Micro Channel options installed in thecomputer.
The Diagnostics Diskette is bootable. The procedurefor starting the Diagnostics Diskette when servicing aType 8639 server is the same for all models. See“General Checkout (Models 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0,0DT)” on page 57.
From the System Partition: Starting thediagnostic programs from the System Partition gives youthe option of testing the options installed in the computeror testing the base system.
To Test Options
Notes
1. Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled beforestarting this procedure.
2. If Rapid Resume is displayed during thisprocedure, see “Running Rapid ResumeManager” on page 73.
3. Re-run the Diagnostics tests.
To test the options installed in the computer, do thefollowing.
1. Power-off the computer and all external devices.2. Check all cables and power cords.3. Set all display controls to the middle position.4. Remove all media from the drives.5. Power-on all external devices.6. Power-on the computer.7. Check for the following responses:
a. One Beep b. IBM Logo
8. When the F1 prompt appears in the lower left-handcorner of the screen, press F1 (the IBM logo appears,then the System Programs Main Menu).
9. Press Ctrl+A(Test the Computer screen appears).
10. If you received the correct responses, select Optionsand follow the instructions on the screen.
11. If you did not receive the correct responses, reinstallthe System Partition on the hard disk drive from theReference Diskette.
To Test the Base System
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 61
Notes
1. Ensure that Rapid Resume is disabled beforestarting this procedure.
2. If Rapid Resume is displayed during thisprocedure, see “Running Rapid ResumeManager” on page 73.
3. Re-run the Diagnostics tests.
To test the base system, do the following.
1. Power-off the computer and all external devices.2. Check all cables and power cords.3. Set all display controls to the middle position.4. Remove all media from the drives.5. Power-on all external devices.6. Power-on the computer.7. Check for the following responses:
a. One Beep b. IBM Logo
8. When the F1 prompt appears in the lower left-handcorner of the screen, press F1 (a second IBM logoappears followed by the System Programs MainMenu).
9. If you received the correct responses, do thefollowing: a. Press Ctrl+A
(Test the Computer screen appears).b. Select System board diagnostics and follow
the instructions on the screen.c. When the QAPlus/Pro Main Menu appears,
press Ctrl+A d. Select Diagnostics .
e. Select Module Test .f. If the Module Test Menu is correct, run
diagnostics.g. If the Module Test Menu is not correct, go to
“Module Test Menu” on page 67.10. If you did not receive the correct responses, reinstall
the System Partition on the hard disk drive from theReference Diskette.
System Programs: The system programs are utilityprograms for Micro Channel computers that allow you to:
� Change the system configuration � Set passwords� Change the date and time� Set power management features� Test the computer
The programs are installed in a special protected area ofthe hard disk drive called the System Partition.
The System Partition appears on the FDISK and FDISKPMscreens for DOS and OS/2, so that the partition can be
62 PC Server HMM
deleted and the disk space (about 6MB) can be used forother programs. Before you delete the System Partition,you must first use the Back up/Restore systemprograms option on the system programs Main Menu tomake current copies of the Reference, Diagnostic, andQAPlus/Pro diskettes. Without the System Partition, youmust use these diskettes to configure and diagnose thecomputer.
If the computer was manufactured without a hard diskdrive, the system programs were provided on threediskettes:
� Reference Diskette � Diagnostics Diskette� QAPlus/PRO for IBM Diskette
Starting the System Programs: You can startthe system programs from the hard disk drive or from theReference Diskette.
If an error occurs during startup, the computerautomatically starts the system programs to help youisolate and correct the problem. If you do not want thesystem programs to automatically start when an erroroccurs, change the Bypass System Programs on errorsetting in the system programs.
From the Hard Disk Drive: To start the systemprograms from the hard disk drive, do the following:
1. Remove all media from all the drives.2. Power-off the computer; then, power it back on. (The
IBM logo appears on the screen.)3. When the F1 prompt appears, press F1. (A second
IBM logo appears, followed by the system programsmain menu.
From the Reference Diskette: To start the systemprograms from the Reference Diskette, do the following:
1. Power-off the computer.2. Remove all media from the drives.3. Insert the Reference Diskette into the primary diskette
drive.4. Power-on the computer.
After a few seconds, the IBM logo appears on the screen;then a second IBM logo screen appears, followed by thesystem programs main menu.
System Programs Main Menu: The followingtables contain a listing of the System Programs Main Menuitems followed by a description of the item.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 63
Des
crip
tion
Exi
ts f
rom
the
sys
tem
pro
gram
s an
d lo
ads
the
oper
atin
g sy
stem
.
Mak
es a
bac
kup
copy
of
the
Ref
eren
ce,
Dia
gnos
tic,
and
QA
Plu
s/P
RO
dis
kette
s.
Cop
ies
the
syst
em p
rogr
ams
from
the
Sys
tem
Par
titio
n to
the
bac
kup
disk
ette
s.A
lso
crea
tes
back
up R
efer
ence
,D
iagn
ostic
, an
d Q
AP
lus/
PR
O d
iske
ttes.
You
nee
d at
leas
t th
ree
2MB
dis
kette
s fo
r th
e ba
ckup
pro
cedu
re.
Rei
nsta
lls t
he s
yste
m p
rogr
ams
from
bac
kup
disk
ette
s to
the
Sys
tem
Par
titio
n.U
se t
his
prog
ram
to
rebu
ild t
he S
yste
mP
artit
ion
in c
ase
of a
ccid
enta
l los
s or
dam
age.
Cop
ies
a ne
w v
ersi
on o
f th
e sy
stem
pro
gram
s to
the
Sys
tem
Par
titio
n fr
om a
n up
date
d se
t of
sys
tem
dis
kette
s.
Vie
ws,
cha
nges
, ba
cks
up,
or r
esto
res
the
conf
igur
atio
n in
form
atio
n st
ored
in t
he b
atte
ry-b
acke
d m
emor
y.T
heco
nfig
urat
ion
info
rmat
ion
cons
ist
of:
�T
he a
mou
nt o
f m
emor
y in
stal
led
�T
he b
uilt-
in f
eatu
res
and
thei
r as
sign
men
ts�
The
inst
alle
d op
tions
with
the
ir lo
catio
n an
d as
sign
men
ts
Dis
play
s th
e pr
esen
t co
nfig
urat
ion
info
rmat
ion
for
Mic
ro C
hann
el a
dapt
ers
and
built
-in f
eatu
res.
Allo
ws
you
to c
hang
e th
e co
nfig
urat
ion
of t
he M
icro
Cha
nnel
ada
pter
s.Y
ou c
an a
lso
chan
ge t
he B
ypas
s S
yste
mP
rogr
ams
set
ting
from
thi
s m
enu.
Cop
ies
the
conf
igur
atio
n in
form
atio
n fr
om t
he b
atte
ry-b
acke
d m
emor
y to
the
har
d di
sk d
rive.
Item
Sta
rt o
pera
ting
syst
em
Bac
k up
/Res
tore
sys
tem
pro
gram
s:
�B
ack
up t
he s
yste
m d
iske
ttes
�B
ack
up t
he S
yste
m P
artit
ion
�R
esto
re t
he S
yste
m P
artit
ion
Upd
ate
Sys
tem
Pro
gram
s
Set
Con
figur
atio
n
� V
iew
conf
igur
atio
n
� C
hang
eco
nfig
urat
ion
�B
ack
up c
onfig
urat
ion
64 PC Server HMM
Des
crip
tion
Ret
rieve
s th
e M
icro
Cha
nnel
con
figur
atio
n co
pied
by
the
Bac
k up
Con
figur
atio
n pr
ogra
m a
nd r
esto
res
that
info
rmat
ion
to t
he b
atte
ry-b
acke
d m
emor
y.
Ver
ifies
and
upd
ates
the
con
figur
atio
n in
form
atio
n fo
r th
e M
icro
Cha
nnel
ada
pter
s an
d bu
ilt-in
fea
ture
s.
Dis
play
s th
e m
emor
y ad
dres
s as
sign
ed t
o th
e ad
apte
rs.
Dis
play
s th
e ex
istin
g M
icro
Cha
nnel
dev
ice
setti
ngs
and
allo
ws
you
to m
ake
limite
d m
odifi
catio
n to
som
e de
vice
s.O
nly
the
info
rmat
ion
encl
osed
in b
rack
ets
([...
]) c
an b
e ch
ange
d.
Dis
play
s th
e cu
rren
t co
nfig
urat
ion
of P
erip
hera
l Com
pone
nt I
nter
conn
ect
devi
ces
and
adap
ters
.B
ecau
se P
CI
com
pone
nts
are
auto
mat
ical
ly c
onfig
ured
eac
h tim
e th
e co
mpu
ter
star
ts u
p, y
ou c
anno
t ch
ange
the
se s
ettin
gs.
Cha
nges
the
dat
e an
d tim
e in
bat
tery
-bac
ked
mem
ory.
Hel
ps p
reve
nt t
he u
se o
f th
e co
mpu
ter
by u
naut
horiz
ed p
erso
ns.
Tw
o ty
pes
of p
assw
ords
are
ava
ilabl
e fr
om t
his
prog
ram
:a
pow
er-o
n pa
ssw
ord
and
a pr
ivile
ged-
acce
ss p
assw
ord.
Cha
nges
the
spe
ed a
t w
hich
a c
hara
cter
rep
eats
whe
n a
key
is h
eld
dow
n.
Sel
ect
this
cho
ice
if th
e co
mpu
ter
is g
oing
to
be u
sed
as a
ser
ver,
with
out
a ke
yboa
rd.
Allo
ws
you
to s
peci
fy t
he s
eque
nce
of t
he d
rives
tha
t th
e co
mpu
ter
will
atte
mpt
to
star
t fr
om w
hen
you
pow
er it
on.
Item
� R
esto
reC
onfig
urat
ion
�R
un A
utom
atic
Con
figur
atio
n
�D
ispl
ay m
emor
y m
ap
�S
et a
nd V
iew
Mic
ro C
hann
el
SC
SI
devi
ces
�V
iew
PC
I co
nfig
urat
ion
Set
Fea
ture
s�
Set
dat
e an
d tim
e
�S
et p
assw
ord
and
secu
rity
feat
ures
�S
et k
eybo
ard
spee
d
� S
etco
nsol
e
�S
et s
tart
up s
eque
nce
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 65
Des
crip
tion
Allo
ws
you
to c
hang
e th
e se
tting
s fo
r th
e fo
llow
ing:
�
Rap
idR
esum
e �
Sta
ndby
Tim
eout
�W
ake
Up
on R
ing
�W
ake
Up
on A
larm
Cop
ies
conf
igur
atio
n an
d di
agno
stic
file
s fr
om a
dis
kette
tha
t co
mes
with
an
optio
nal d
evic
e.
Allo
ws
you
to t
est
the
base
com
pute
r by
sel
ectin
g S
yste
m b
oard
dia
gnos
tics
, or
tes
t th
e M
icro
Cha
nnel
opt
ions
by
sele
ctin
g O
ptio
n di
agno
stic
s.
Dis
play
s up
date
s an
d ch
ange
s.
Dis
play
s en
trie
s in
the
err
or lo
g.A
ny m
emor
y an
d pr
ivile
ged-
acce
ss p
assw
ord
erro
rs a
re r
ecor
ded
in t
his
log.
Des
crib
es h
ow t
o us
e th
e U
INS
TA
LL p
rogr
am t
o ge
t in
form
atio
n ab
out
addi
tiona
l util
ity p
rogr
ams
avai
labl
e on
the
Dia
gnos
tics
Dis
kette
.S
ome
of t
hese
pro
gram
s ca
n be
use
d on
ly w
ith s
peci
fic o
pera
ting
syst
ems.
Mak
e su
re y
ou r
ead
all o
f th
e in
form
atio
n be
fore
inst
allin
g an
y of
the
se u
tility
pro
gram
s.
Rec
ords
the
com
pute
r se
rial n
umbe
r an
d di
spla
ys t
he id
entif
icat
ion
num
bers
for
the
sys
tem
uni
t, pr
oces
sor
boar
d, a
ndsy
stem
boa
rd.
Thi
s in
form
atio
n is
als
o kn
ow a
s th
e vi
tal p
rodu
ct d
ata
(VP
D).
Allo
ws
you
to c
hoos
e th
e di
spla
y ty
pe a
nd s
et a
hor
izon
tal f
requ
ency
and
ref
resh
rat
e.
Item
�S
et p
ower
man
agem
ent
feat
ures
Not
e: I
f si
mila
r po
wer
man
agem
ent
feat
ures
are
set
in t
he o
pera
ting
syst
em,
they
will
ove
rrid
e th
ese
setti
ngs.
Cop
y an
opt
ion
disk
ette
Tes
t th
e C
ompu
ter
Mor
e U
tiliti
es�
Dis
play
rev
isio
n le
vels
�D
ispl
ay s
yste
m e
rror
log
�S
tand
alo
ne u
tility
info
rmat
ion
�S
et a
nd v
iew
sys
tem
iden
tific
atio
n
�S
et v
ideo
dis
play
info
rmat
ion
66 PC Server HMM
Module Test Menu
Attention
A customized setup configuration (other than defaultsettings) might exist on the computer you areservicing. Running the Setup Utility program mightalter those settings. Note the current configurationsettings and verify that the settings are in place whenservice is complete. To start the Setup Utility programsee “Setup Program” on page 73.
At the start of the diagnostic tests, the Module Test Menuis displayed. Normally, all adapters and devices installedin the computer are highlighted on the menu.
� If an adapter or device that is not installed in thecomputer is highlighted on the menu, use theprocedure in “Undetermined Problem” on page 83 tofind the problem.
� If an adapter or device is installed in the computerand is not highlighted on the menu, you have one ofthe following conditions:
– The diagnostic code for the adapter or device isnot on the diagnostic diskette. Run thediagnostics provided with that device.
– The SCSI controller failed (on the system boardor SCSI adapter).
– An unrecognizable adapter is installed.– The missing device is defective or it requires an
additional diskette or service manual.– A defective adapter caused the device not to be
highlighted on the menu.
If a device is missing from the list, replace it. If this doesnot correct the problem, use the procedure in“Undetermined Problem” on page 83.
Additional Service InformationThe following information and tools are available to helpidentify and resolve hardware-related problems:
� “BIOS Levels” on page 68.� “Error Messages” on page 68.� “Flash (BIOS/VPD) Update Procedure” on page 69.� “Power-on Password” on page 70.� “Power-On Self-Test (POST)” on page 70.� “Power Supply” on page 71.� “Processor Replacement” on page 72.� “Return Codes” on page 72.� “Setup Program” on page 73.� “Specifications” on page 80.� “System Board Replacement” on page 81.� “Test Programs” on page 81.� “Undetermined Problem” on page 83.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 67
� “Using the Test Programs” on page 84.� “Vital Product Data” on page 89.
BIOS LevelsAn incorrect level of BIOS can cause false error andunnecessary FRU replacement. Use the followinginformation to determine the current level of BIOS installedin the computer, the latest BIOS available for thecomputer, and where to obtain the latest level of BIOS.
� Current Level BIOS information.– Run the Configuration Utility to determine the
level of BIOS installed.� Sources for determining the latest level BIOS
available. 1. RETAIN
2. Bulletin board system (BBS) 3. HelpCenter
4. Levels 1 and 2 Support.� Sources for obtaining the latest level BIOS available.
1. Bulletin board system (BBS) 2. HelpCenter
3. Levels 1 and 2 Support
To update (flash) the BIOS, see “Flash (BIOS/VPD)Update Procedure” on page 69.
Error MessagesMessages generated by the software—the operatingsystem or application programs—generally are textmessages, but they also can be numeric. Basically, thereare five types of error messages.
� POST error messages� POST beep codes� Diagnostic error messages� Software generated messages
� Multiple messages
Error Message Description
POST Error Messages Displayed when POST findsproblems with the hardwareor detects a change in thehardware configuration.
POST Beep Codes Sounds emitted from thespeaker if POST finds aproblem. One beepindicates POST completedsuccessfully. Multiplebeeps indicate a problemwas found by the POST.
Diagnostic Error Messages Displayed when a testprogram finds a problemwith a hardware option.
68 PC Server HMM
Error Message Description
Software Generated ErrorMessages
Displayed if a problem orconflict is found by anapplication program, theoperating system, or both.For an explanation of thesemessages, refer to theinformation supplied withthat software package.
Multiple Messages The first error that occurscan cause additional errors.Follow the suggested actionof the first error displayed.In this case, the systemdisplays more than oneerror message. Alwaysfollow the suggested actioninstructions for the first errormessage displayed.
Flash (BIOS/VPD) Update Procedure1. Power-off the computer and all external devices.2. Insert the Flash/VPD diskette into diskette drive A.3. Power-on all external devices, then power-on the
computer.4. When the POST/BIOS Update Utility appears; type
the number for your country/language, then pressEnter .
5. If the computer serial number was previouslyrecorded, the serial number is displayed with theoption to update it. Press Y to update the serialnumber.
6. Type the 7 digit serial number of the computer youare servicing; then, press Enter .
7. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete theflash (BIOS/VPD) update procedure.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 69
POST Beep CodesThe Power On Self-Test generates a beeping sound toindicate successful completion of POST or to indicate thatthe tests detect an error.
One beep and the appearance of text on the displayindicates successful completion of the POST. More thanone beep indicates that the POST detects an error.
Power-on PasswordTo service Type 8639 computers with an active andunknown power-on password, power-off the computer anddo the following:
Note
This procedure will not remove the AdministratorPassword.
1. Unplug the power cord and remove the top cover.
2. Refer to “System Board” on page 92 for the jumperlocation.
3. Move the password jumper to connect the center pinand the pin on the opposite end of the connector.
4. Power-on the computer. The system senses thechange in the position and erases the password.
� It is not necessary to move the jumper back tothe previous position.
5. Remind the user to enter a new password whenservice is complete.
Power-On Self-Test (POST)Each time you power-on the system, it performs a series oftests that check the operation of the system and someoptions. This series of tests is called the power-onself-test, or POST. POST does the following:
� Checks some basic system-board operations� Checks the memory operation� Starts the video operation� Verifies that the diskette drive is working� Verifies that the hard disk drive is working
If the POST finishes without detecting any problems, asingle beep sounds and the first screen of your operatingsystem or application program appears.
If the POST detects a problem, an error message appearson your screen. A single problem can cause several errormessages to appear. When you correct the cause of thefirst error message, the other error messages probably willnot appear on the screen the next time you turn on thesystem.
70 PC Server HMM
Power SupplyIf the power-on indicator is not on, the power-supply fan isnot running, or the computer will not power-off, do thefollowing.
Check/Verify FRU/Action
1. Verify that thevoltage-selector switchis set for the correctvoltage.
Correct thevoltage-selector switchsetting.
2. Check the following forproper installation. � Power Cord � On/Off Switch
connector � On/Off Switch
Power Supplyconnector
� System BoardPower Supplyconnectors
Reseat
3. Check the power cordfor proper continuity.
Power Cord
4. Check the power-onswitch for continuity.
Power-on Switch
If these are correct, check the following voltages.
System Board Connections
Note: These voltages must be checked with the powersupply cables connected to the system board.
If the voltages are not correct, and the power cord is good,replace the power supply.
If the voltages are correct, and the computer you areservicing has a power supply connector on the riser card,check the following riser card voltages.
Riser Card Connections
Note: These voltages must be checked with the powersupply cable connected to the riser card.
If the voltages are not correct, and the power cord is good,replace the power supply.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 71
Processor ReplacementLooking from the front of the computer, install allprocessors with the beveled corner located at the right-rearcorner of the processor socket.
Important
If the processor is not installed correctly, the systemboard and the processor can be damaged.
Return CodesFor the test programs to properly determine if a testPassed, Failed, or Aborted, the test programs check theerror-return code at test completion. To register the testproperly in the test log, the test programs must generateone of the following return codes:
Return Code Description
0 Indicates the device passedits test.
1 Indicated the device failedits test.
2 or greater Indicates the test stopped orwas aborted.
72 PC Server HMM
Setup ProgramThe Setup Utility (configuration) program is stored in thepermanent memory of the computer. This programincludes setting for the following:
� Devices and I/O Ports� Date and Time
� Security � Start Options � Advanced Setup� ISA Legacy Resources� Rapid Resume Manager
To run the Setup Utility program, do the following:
1. Power-off the computer and wail for a few secondsuntil all in-use lights go off.
2. Power-on the computer.3. When the Setup Utility prompt appears on the screen
during start-up, press F1. The Setup Utility menuappears.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Rapid Resume Manager Personal computers comewith built-in energy-saving capabilities. If the computer youare servicing was shipped with DOS and Windowspreinstalled, Rapid Resume Manager is available. RapidResume Manager reduces the power consumption of thecomputer. The following are features of Rapid ResumeManager:
� Rapid Resume � Standby � Scheduler� Wake Up on Ring
Rapid Resume: With Rapid Resume activated, thecomputer saves its current state when you power it off withthe power switch. Rapid Resume retains all currentsettings, remembers which programs were active, andsaves the position and size of windows and other objectson the screen. When the computer is restarted (with thepower-on switch, the Scheduler, or Wake-Up on Ring), itquickly returns to full-power operation in exactly the samestate. The programs that were being used will reappear inthe state they were in when you suspended operation ofthe computer.
Running Rapid Resume Manager: To selectand activate, deactivate, or change Rapid ResumeManager do the following.
1. From the Windows Program Manager, select IBMManagement Plus .
2. Select Rapid Resume Manager .3. View or change settings.4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 73
Standby: When the Standby feature is enabled, itinitiates reduced power modes for the display,microprocessor, and hard disk drive after a specifiedperiod of inactivity. The default setting for automaticallyinitiating standby is 20 minutes. The display is blankedand the hard disk drive "spins down' (enters areduced-power state). Any use of the keyboard, mouse, orhard disk drive causes the computer to exit standby andreturn to full-power operation. For example, if 40 minutesis selected as the specified period, the computer goes intostandby state if the mouse, keyboard, or microprocessor isnot active for more than 40 minutes.
To select and activate, deactivate, or change the Standbyfeature, see “Running Rapid Resume Manager” onpage 73.
Scheduler: Use the Scheduler to set a time for thecomputer to do the following:
� Start a program� Display a message� Power-off the computer
If the computer will not already be power-on when it is timeto start a program or display a message, a setting can beselected to power-on the computer at the appropriate time.
To select and activate, deactivate, or change theScheduler feature, see “Running Rapid Resume Manager”on page 73.
Wake Up on Ring: You can select settings so that, ifthe modems receives a call the computer is in the suspendstate, the computer "wakes up" on the first ring; that is, itreturns to full-power.
To select the Wake Up on Ring settings, feature, see“Running Rapid Resume Manager” on page 73.
Formatting Diskettes: To format a diskette withinthe Diagnostic programs, select one of the followingoptions:
Format A: high density — 1.44MB
Format A: low density — 720KB
Format B: high density — 1.44MB
Format B: low density — 720KB
After selecting a diskette format option, follow theinstructions that appear on the screen.
Hard Disk Drive Boot Error: A hard disk driveboot error (error codes 1996 and I999030X) can be causedby the following:
74 PC Server HMM
Cause Actions
The start-up drive is not inthe boot sequence inconfiguration.
Check the configuration andensure the start-up drive isin the boot sequence.
No operating systeminstalled on the boot drive.
In stall an operating systemon the boot drive.
The boot sector on thestart-up drive is corrupted.
The drive must beformatted, do the following:
1. Attempt to access andrecover (back-up) thefailing hard disk drive.
2. Using the operatingsystems programs,format the hard diskdrive.
3. Go to “Preparing theHard Disk Drive forUse” on page 75.
The drive is defective. Replace the hard disk drive.
When To Use the Low-Level FormatProgram
Note
Before formatting the hard disk drive, make a back-upcopy of the files on the drive to be formatted.
Use the Low-Level Format program:
� When you are installing software that requires alow-level format
� When you get recurring messages from the testprograms directing you to run the Low-Level Formatprogram on the hard disk
� As a last resort before replacing a hard disk drive
Preparing the Hard Disk Drive for UseWhen the Low-Level Format program is finished, restore tothe hard disk all the files that you previously backed up.
1. Partition the remainder of the hard disk for youroperating system. (The commands vary with theoperating system. Refer to your operating-systemmanual for instructions.)
2. Format the hard disk using your operating system.(The commands vary with the operating system.Refer to your operating-system manual forinstructions.)
3. Install the operating system.
You are now ready to restore the files.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 75
File Editor: The File Editor is an ASCII text editor thatuses simple function key commands.
To access the File Editor:
1. Select File Editor from the Utility Menu ; then pressEnter .
2. Insert a diskette into Drive A or Drive B beforeselecting the file you want to edit, then select the fileyou want to edit from the Files selection box.
3. Make your changes. The arrow keys move thecursor, and the function keys perform search andblock editing functions. (See “File Edit Function KeyUsage.”)
4. When you are done, press F10 to update the file withthe changes you made, or press Esc to quit theediting process without saving the changes.
File Edit Function Key Usage The followinginformation describes the function of the function keys andkeyboard keys when you are using the File Editor.
Key Description
Arrows Move the cursor to theplace in the text where youwant to make changes.
Home Press Home once, to movethe cursor to the start of thecurrent line.Press Home twice, to moveto the beginning of the file.Press Home three times, tomove to the beginning ofthe file.
End Press End once, to movethe cursor to the end of thecurrent line.Press End twice, to movethe cursor to the end of thecurrent screen.Press End three times, tomove the end of the file.
F2 Press F2 to be in searchmode, You are prompted toenter the search word orwords on a reversehighlighted line at thebottom of the File EditScreen. After typing in thesearch word, press Enter.
F3 Press F3 to find the nextoccurrence of a searchword.
76 PC Server HMM
Notes:
1. Always make a backup copy on a self-startingdiskette of the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYSfiles before making any changes.
2. The default text editing mode of the File Editor is theinsert mode. To toggle between overtype and insertmodes, press Insert.
Diagnostics Control Keys: The following is a listof the Diagnostics Control Keys, when used and adescription of the Diagnostics response.
Key Description
F4 Press F4 to mark the startof a block of text (if youhave not previously markedit).If you previously marked theblock of text, pressing thiskey unmarks the text block.
F5 Press F5 to complete theblock marking (started withF4).If you did not previouslypress F4 to start marking ablock of text, F5 is ignored.
F6 Press F6 while the cursor iswithin the active block tomove an active (marked)block of text. Move thecursor to the new locationwhere the active block is tobe moved, then press F6again.If there is no active block oftext, F6 is ignored.
F7 To copy an active (marked)block of text to a newlocation, move the cursor tothe new location and thenpress F7.If there is no active block oftext F7 is ignored.
F8 To delete an active(marked) block of text,move the cursor within theactive block and press F8.If there is no active block oftext, F8 is ignored.
F10 Press F10, to save allchanges and exit the file.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 77
Control Keys When Used DiagnosticsResponse
Ctrl+A Main Menu Allows you toselect test fromthe sub menusthat arehighlighted withred letters.Attention:If selected,these test willerase theinformationstored on thediskette or harddisk drive.
Up and DownArrow Keys
Main MenuModule TestMenuTest GroupMenu
Highlights anitem you want toselect.
Space Bar Module TestMenuTest GroupMenu
Adds a diamondto the left of thehighlighted test.The test will runwhen Run AllSelected ishighlighted andthe Enter key ispressed.Also removesthe diamond tothe left of theitem. The testwill not run whenRun AllSelected ishighlighted andthe Enter key ispressed.
Tab Key Main MenuModule TestMenu
Selects theadditional testfor the menu youare in.
+/− Keys Test GroupMenu
Selectsadditional test.The LUNdisplayed on thetop right TestGroup Menushows which testis selected andhow and remain(example LUN 1of 2).
78 PC Server HMM
System Board Memory: The following matrixcross-references the name of the computer (printed on thelogo) and the size, speed, and type of memory modulessupported in the computer.
ComputerName
Memory Module
Size Speed Type
Type 8639SIMMsmust beinstalled inmatchedpairs.
4MB 8MB16MB32MB
70ns Parity
Note: Use only 70ns memory-module kits in your computer.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 79
SpecificationsSize
� Depth: 448 mm (17.6 in.) � Height: 160 mm (6.3 in.) � Width: 420 mm (16.5 in.)
Weight
� Min. configuration: 12.7 kg (28.0 lb) � Max. configuration: 14.1 kg (31.0 lb)1
Environment
� Air temperature:– System on: 10° to 32°C (50° to 90°F)– System off: 10° to 43°C (50° to 110°F)
� Humidity:– System on: 8% to 80%– System off: 8% to 80%– Maximum altitude: 2134 m (7000 ft)
Heat Output
� Approximate heat output in BTUs per hour:– Min. configuration: 120 BTU (35 watts)– Max. configuration: 1060 BTU (310 watts) 2
– Deep sleep: 15 BTU (4 watts)
Electrical Input
� Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz) required.� Low range input voltage:
– Min.: 110 V ac– Max.: 125 V ac
� High range input voltage:– Min.: 200 V ac– Max.: 240 V ac
� Input kVA (approximately):– Min. configuration as shipped: 0.08 kVA
– Max. configuration: 0.52 kVA
Airflow
� Approximately 0.56 cubic meters/minute (20 CFM)
Acoustical Noise Emission Values
� Average sound pressure levels:– At operator position:
- 43 dB operating- 43 dB idle
– At bystander position (1 meter):- 40 dB operating- 40 dB idle
� Declared (upper limit) sound power levels:– 5.0 bels operating– 4.8 bels idle
1 Maximum configuration weight depends on options installed.Figures above are a system fully populated with options.
2 Maximum power and heat specifications are based on the200-watt maximum capacity of the system power supply.
3 For additional information, see the ISO Supplier's Declarationavailable from IBM.
80 PC Server HMM
System Board Replacement Notes
1. The BIOS and Vital Product Data (VPD) for thecomputer you are servicing must be installed onthe new system board (FRU) after it is installed inthe computer. To do this, you must run theFlash Update program using the Flash Updatediskette shipped with the new system boardFRU. See “BIOS Levels” on page 68 “VitalProduct Data” on page 89, and “Flash(BIOS/VPD) Update Procedure” on page 69.
2. Always ensure the latest level of BIOS is installedon the computer. A down level BIOS may causefalse errors and unnecessary replacement of thesystem board.
3. The processor is a separate FRU from thesystem board and is not included with the systemboard FRU. If you are instructed to replace thesystem board, do the following.
4. Install the processor from the old system boardon the new system board.
5. If any of the following options are on the oldsystem board, install them on the new systemboard.� External cache memory and cache tag RAM
� Memory modules� Extended video memory
6. Ensure that the new system board jumpersettings match the old system board jumpersettings.
7. If the new system board does not correct theproblem, reinstall the options on the old systemboard, reinstall the old system board, thenreplace the processor.
Test ProgramsThe Diagnostics test programs, developed by DiagSoft forIBM, are the primary method of testing the computer. Youcan use them to test the IBM components of the systemand some external devices. The amount of time requiredto test all components depends on the number ofcomponents. The more optional adapters and devices youhave attached to your system, the longer the testing takes.
The test programs on the Diagnostic Diskette include thefollowing features:
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 81
Feature Description
Advanced Diagnostic Tests Identifies most problemsassociated with thefollowing major components:
� System board� Hard disk drives
� Diskette drives � CD-ROM drives � RAM� Serial and parallel
ports � Video adapter � Printer � Keyboard � Mouse
Flexible Test Control Allows you to:
� Run groups of tests inbatch
� Specify parameters touse for each test (forexample, video modes,disk cylinders, and portaddresses)
� Specify the number ofpasses you want to run(one to continuous)
� Log the test results toa text dBase (DBF)format file
� Save all test settingsfor future use
� View SystemInformation
� View the server'sconfigurationinformation. (Forexample, you can viewthe IRQ/DMAassignments, memoryusage, and devicedrivers)
� Select System Utilities� Run a low-level format
also contains systemutilities.
� Format a diskette
82 PC Server HMM
Undetermined ProblemCheck the power supply voltages. See “Power Supply” onpage 71. If the voltages are correct, return here andcontinue with the following steps.
1. Power-off the computer.2. Remove or disconnect the following, one at a time:
a. Non-IBM devicesb. External devices (modem, printer, or mouse)
c. Math coprocessor d. Any adapters e. Riser card f. Memory modules
Before removing or replacing memory modules,see “System Board Memory” on page 79.
g. Extended video memory h. External Cache
i. External Cache RAMj. Hard disk drive
k. Diskette drive3. Power-on the computer to re-test the system.4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you find the failing
device or adapter.
If all devices and adapters have been removed, and theproblem continues, replace the system board. See“System Board Replacement” on page 81.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 83
Using the Test ProgramsThe test programs provide advanced functions and utilitiesfor users and service or support professionals totroubleshoot even the most difficult problems.
Program Navigation: You can maneuver within thetest programs by typing the first letter of a menu choice,using the function keys, or using command-line options.
Using the First Letter of a Menu Choice
Throughout the test programs, pressing the first letter of anoption on a menu is the same as moving to that item withthe cursor and pressing Enter; however, this function isnot enabled on Test Group Screens.
Using the Function Keys
Use the following keys to maneuver throughout the testprograms:
Additional functions are available in the Test ModuleSelection screen and the Test Group screen using thefollowing keys:
Keys Action
Enter Select an item, run the testmodule, or run the test
DownArrow (↓)
Moves the cursor down
UpArrow (↑)
Moves the cursor up
F1 Calls up the appropriateHelp information. Use theup arrow key (↑) or thedown arrow key (↓) to scrollthrough the information.Pressing F1 from within aHelp screen provides a helpindex from which you canselect different categories.One of the important helpcategories is function keyusage. Pressing Esc exitsHelp and returns to whereyou left off.
Esc Go back to the previousmenu
Keys Action
Tab Move to test group (or moveto parameters)
Spacebar Toggle modules on/off (ortoggle tests on/off)
F2 View test results log
84 PC Server HMM
Command Line Options
The following Command Line Options are available wheninitially starting the diagnostic program from within itsdirectory.
Type QAPLPRO/XXX (where /XXX represents one of thefollowing from the list below) then press Enter.
Keys Action
F10 Local menu
+ Next logical unit number (forexample, LUN 1, LUN 2,and so on)
− Previous logical unit number
Command Action
/B&W The /B&W command lineoption forces the program toload in Black and White(Monochrome) mode, whichis often more readable onlaptop computers.
/LOG=file The /LOG=file commandline option directs the testprograms to start using aspecified Error Log file.
/INT10 The /INT10 command lineoption forces the testprograms to use the BIOSfor screen writes.
/OXXX The /OXXX command lineoption, where XXX=testgroup (for example,MBD/MEM/VID/HDU/FDU/KBD/COM/LPT, and soon), omits the designatedtest group from testing.
/USRCONFIG=file
The /USERCONFIG=filecommand line option tellsthe test programs to look fora user diagnosticconfiguration file other thanthe defaultUSERDIAG.CFG.
/SCRIPT=file[,R]
The /SCRIPT=file[,R]command line option withthe “,R” runs the selectedscript. Please see“Scripting” on page 86 for adescription of scripting.
Note: You can use a “–”instead of a “/” asthe command lineswitch.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 85
Viewing the Test Groups: As you move thecursor bar up or down in the Test Module Selectionwindow, the right hand screen changes to show theattributes, parameters, and the selected tests of thecorresponding Test Group. The ◊ mark indicates a moduleselected for testing.
The indicated attributes are characteristics of the selectedtest module that are used by the test programs todetermine which tests to run or how to run selected tests.Attributes are also used to limit the allowable range ofparameters (for example, – ending cylinder).
Parameters are values you select to establish the scope oftests. For example, you can select Extended Memorytesting parameters and limit the testing to a specific rangeof test blocks by specifying the starting and endingmemory block. This might be appropriate if priorexperience indicates that problems are likely to exist in aspecific area of memory. By selecting these limitingparameters, you reduce memory testing time.
Scripting: Scripting allows you to select specificgroups of tests, testing parameters, and options. Yourselection is saved for later use as a test Script. To set upa test script, first select all the appropriate test groups andspecific tests you want to run from the Module Testingsection under Diagnostics. You should also selectappropriate testing parameters and options. See “ProgramNavigation” on page 84, for instructions to save a testscript.
Changing Logical Unit Numbers: In someinstances, you can have more than one logical unit number(LUN) for a particular module. LUNs represent individualdevices within a test group or module. For example, youmight have two diskette drives or two hard disk drives; or,you might have base, extended, shadow, and cachememory installed in the computer. This configuration mightresult in as many as four or five different LUNs in theMemory Test Group. Or you might have base, extended,shadow, and cache memory installed in the system whichmight result in as many as four or five different LUNs inthe Memory Test Group.
From either the Module Test Menu or the Test Groupwindow, you can change to a different LUN (whereapplicable) by pressing the plus (+) key (next LUN), or theminus (−) key (previous LUN).
Test Group Specifications: In theupper-right-hand portion of the testing screen (or just theupper portion if you switched to an individual test groupscreen) are the specifications for the related test group.
Note: In the Hard Disk Test Group specification area, if a
86 PC Server HMM
software program was to compress your drive, theindicated size is the compressed size of the logicaldrive.
Starting the Diagnostics Diskette1. Insert the Diagnostics diskette into drive A.2. Power-on the computer.3. When the Diagnostics Main Menu is displayed, press
Ctrl+A . (The screen will not change.)4. Select Diagnostics; then, press Enter .5. Follow the instructions that appear on your screen. If
an error is displayed, go to “Symptom-to-FRU IndexSupplement” on page 95.
Module Testing Mode
If the test programs do not find a problem, or you want toperform in-depth testing, the Module Testing modeprovides a method to run individual tests on a singlemodule. For example, you can run an individual test forthe diskette drive, or you can run groups of tests forseveral modules.
In the Module Testing mode, you can define how manytimes each test should run and how the test programshould log the errors.
To start the Module Testing mode:
1. Start the Diagnostics diskette. See “Starting theDiagnostics Diskette.”
2. Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu.3. Select Module Tests from the next menu.4. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to move
the highlight bar from one selection to the next.5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: As you scroll down the selection menu, the TestGroup window to the right changes to correspondto the highlighted Module.
Running Selected Module Tests
To run all selected tests for a test group:
1. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to movethe cursor to your selection.
2. Press Enter .
Note: A ◊ appears next to your selection.
Running All Selected Modules
To run all selected test modules:
1. Use the down arrow key (↓) to move the cursor to thelast choice, Run All Selected Modules .
2. Press Enter .
Note: A ◊ appears next to your selection.
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 87
Changing Selected Tests in Test Groups
To change selected tests in a Test Group:
1. In the Module Tests Menu, use the up and downarrow keys (↑ and ↓) to move the cursor to yourselection.
2. Press Tab to move into the expanded Test Groupwindow.
3. Scroll to the test you want to select or deselect.
Attention
Items indicated by a directly adjacent “*” (red texton color screens) are destructive tests.
4. Press the spacebar at the highlighted test to togglebetween select (indicated by a ◊) and deselect.
Note: Pressing the first letter of a test does notactivate the test, unlike menu operation.
5. Press Enter .
Running an Individual Test
To run an individual test:
1. Use the up and down arrow keys (↑ and ↓) to moveto the highlighted bar to the test you want to run.
2. Press Enter to run the test.
Note: The results of the test appear in thelower-right-hand Test Log window. Also, ifyou enabled Test Logging, the results arerecorded in the Test Log.
3. When the test completes, press Esc to return to theTest Group Menu.
Stopping the Tests: To stop running a specific testor stop testing after you have started a test, press Escwhile the test is running. The test pauses at the firstpossible opportunity, and the Skip/Abort Test Menuappears with the following options:
Option Action
Continue The test program beginstesting where it left off.
Skip to next test The test program skips thecurrent test, but remainingtests for the selected TestModule continue.
Skip to next group The test program skips theremaining tests in thecurrent test group.
Abort all tests The test program stops andreturns to the previousmenu.
88 PC Server HMM
Vital Product DataEach computer has a unique vital product data (VPD) codestored in the nonvolatile memory on the system board.After you replace the system board the VPD must beupdated. To update the VDP, see “Flash (BIOS/VPD)Update Procedure” on page 69.
LocationsThe following location information is for the PC Server 310Type 8639.
� “Expansion Slots/Riser Cards.”� “Keylock Assembly Exploded View” on page 91.� “System Board” on page 92.
Expansion Slots/Riser CardsAll Type 8639 computers have seven expansion slots, twoof which are PCI expansion slots. The other fiveexpansion slots are either Micro Channel or ISA,depending on model.
The PCI slots and their adjacent Micro Channel or ISAexpansion slots are shared expansion slots. This meansthat an adapter can be installed in either the PCIexpansion slot or the adjacent Micro Channel or ISAexpansion slot, but not in both.
A SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter is installed in one of thePCI expansion slots. An Ethernet adapter is installed inone of the Micro Channel or ISA slots.
This leaves one PCI slot and three Micro Channel or ISAslots available for future expansion. For example, you canadd adapters to provide communications, specializedgraphics, and sound.
PCI/Micro Channel Models: The followingillustration shows the location and numbering of the PCIand Micro Channel expansion slots. Note the location ofthe shared expansion slots.
Micro Channel Architecture ( )*
Riser
(On other side)
ShareSlot
ShareSlot
PCI
PCI
( )*( )( )**
( )
( )
**
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 89
PCI/ISA Models: The following illustration shows thelocation and numbering of the PCI and ISA expansionslots. Note the location of the shared expansion slots.
Riser
(On other side)
ISA
ISA
ISA
PCI
ISA
PCI
ISAShare Slot
Share Slot
Riser Card (ISA) Administrator Password:ISA Riser cards have an administrator password jumperlocated to the left of the battery.
Note: This jumper will not remove the password.
The setting of this jumper determines if an AdministratorPassword can or cannot be set on the computer.
Important
If the Administrator Password is lost or forgotten, thepassword cannot be changed or removed. If thisoccurs, the system board must be replaced.
Jumper Position Results
1-2 (pins closest to thebattery)
Administrator Password canbe set
2-3 (pins farthest from thebattery)
Administrator passwordcannot be set
90 PC Server HMM
Keylock Assembly Exploded View
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 91
System Board
27
29
92 PC Server HMM
System Board (Continued)
.1/ Riser connector.2/ MRD Modem Ring Detect jumper.3/ WP Diskette drive write protect jumper.4/ Diskette drive connector.5/ Hard disk drive connectors.6/ J38 On/Off Switch Power Supply Connector.7/ J37 On/Off Switch Connector.8/ Power supply connectors.9/ J26, J27 Bus/CPU Speed (MHz).1ð/ 256KB/1MB Cache jumpers.11/ Processor connector.12/ J101 Bus/Core Ratio.13/ Cache connectors.14/ Memory connectors (Bank 2).15/ Memory connectors (Bank 1).16/ Memory connectors (Bank 3).17/ Video memory modules.18/ PWD Power-on password jumper.19/ Battery.2ð/ Display connector.21/ Parallel connector.22/ Serial connector.23/ Serial connector.24/ Keyboard connector.25/ Mouse connector.26/ Audio (input jack).27/ Audio (output jack).28/ IDE CD-ROM Audio connector.29/ J28 Mouse jumper
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 93
Jumper Settings
The following tables contain the jumper setting information.(D) indicates the default setting.
Bus/CPU Speed MHz Settings: The followingtable contains the Bus/CPU Speed Settings
Jumper Setting Description
MRD 2-3 (D)1-2
Modem answer on ring.Modem no answer on ring.
WP 2-3 (D)1-2
Enable writing to a disketteDisable writing to a diskette.
Cache 1-2 (D)2-3
256KB Cache1MB Cache
J101 1-2 (D)2-3
2/3 Bus/Core Ratio1/2 Bus/Core Ratio
PWD 1-2 (D)2-3
Password enabled.Password reset.
Jumper 50/75 60/9060/120
66/10066/133
J26J27
2-32-3
2-31-2
1-21-2
94 PC Server HMM
Symptom-to-FRU Index SupplementThe Symptom-to-FRU Index lists error symptoms andpossible causes. The most likely cause is listed first.Always begin with “General Checkout (Models 0XT, 0Z0,0ZT, 0D0, 0DT)” on page 57. This index can also be usedto help you decide which FRUs to have available whenservicing a computer. If you are unable to correct theproblem using this index, go to “Undetermined Problem” onpage 83.
Notes
� If you have both an error message and anincorrect audio response, diagnose the errormessage first.
� If you cannot run the diagnostic tests, but didreceive a POST error message, diagnose thePOST error message.
� If you did not receive any error message, look fora description of your error symptoms in the firstpart of this index.
� Check all power supply voltages before youreplace the system board. (See “Power Supply”on page 71.)
Important
1. Some errors are indicated with a series of beepcodes. (See “Beep Symptoms” on page 96.)
2. The processor is a separate FRU from thesystem board; the processor is not included withthe system board FRU. (See “System BoardReplacement” on page 81.)
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 95
Beep SymptomsBeeps symptoms are short tones or a series of short tonesseparated by pauses (intervals without sound). See thefollowing examples.
Beeps Description
1-2-X � One beep� A pause (or break)
� Two beeps� A pause (or break)� Any number of beeps
4 Four continuous beeps
Beep Symptom FRU/Action
1-1-3CMOS read/write error
1. Run Setup 2. System Board
1-1-4ROM BIOS check error
1. System Board
1-2-XDMA error
1. System Board
1-3-X 1. Memory Module 2. System Board
1-4-4 1. Keyboard 2. System Board
1-4-XError detected in first 64KBof RAM.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-1-1, 2-1-2 1. Run Setup
2. System Board
2-1-XFirst 64KB of RAM failed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-2-2 1. Video Card 2. System Board
2-2-XFirst 64KB of RAM failed.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-3-X 1. Memory Module 2. System Board
2-4-X 1. Run Setup 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
3-1-XDMA register failed.
1. System Board
3-2-4Keyboard controller failed.
1. System Board 2. Keyboard
3-3-4Screen initialization failed.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
3-4-1Screen retrace test detectedan error.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
96 PC Server HMM
Beep Symptom FRU/Action
3-4-2POST is searching for videoROM.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board
4 1. Video Adapter 2. System Board
All other beep codesequences.
1. System Board
One long and one shortbeep during POST.Base 640KB memory erroror shadow RAM error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
One long beep and two orthree short beeps duringPOST.(Video error)
1. Display Adapter, ifinstalled.
2. System Board
Three short beeps duringPOST.
1. See “System BoardMemory” on page 79.
2. System Board
Continuous beep. 1. System Board
Repeating short beeps. 1. Keyboard stuck key? 2. Keyboard Cable 3. System Board
No Beep Symptoms
Symptom/Error FRU/Action
No beep during POST butcomputer works correctly.
1. System Board
No beep during POST. 1. See “UndeterminedProblem” onpage 83.
2. System Board 3. Memory Module
4. Any Adapter or Device 5. Riser Card 6. Power Cord 7. Power Supply
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 97
Numeric Error CodesIn the following index, “X” can represent any number.
Error Code FRU/Action
000SCSI Adapter not enabled.
1. Be sure adapterdevice and BusMaster fields areenabled in PCIconfigurationprogram. Seedocumentationshipped withcomputer.
02X 1. SCSI Adapter
08XCheck SCSI terminatorinstallation.
1. SCSI Cable 2. SCSI Terminator 3. SCSI Device 4. SCSI Adapter
101Interrupt failure.
1. System Board
102Timer error.
1. System Board
106 1. System Board
110System board parity error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
111I/O channel parity error.
1. Reseat adapters 2. Any Adapter 3. System Board
114External ROM checksumerror.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
129Internal cache test error.
1. Processor2. L2 Cache Memory
3. System Board
151Real-time clock failure.
1. System Board
161Bad CMOS battery.
1. Run Setup 2. Clock Battery
(See “Battery Notice”on page 461)
3. System Board
162And unable to rundiagnostics.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
162 1. Run Setup 2. Clock Battery
(See “Battery Notice”on page 461)
3. System Board
98 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
163Clock not updating or invalidtime set.
1. Time and Date Set? 2. Clock Battery
(See “Battery Notice”on page 461)
3. System Board
164POST detected a basememory or extendedmemory size mismatcherror.
1. Run Setup. CheckSystem Summarymenu for memorysize change. (See“Setup Program” onpage 73.)
2. Run the ExtendedMemory Diagnostictests.
17X, 18X 1. C2 Security
175 1. Riser Card 2. System Board
176 1. Covers were removedfrom the computer.
177Corrupted AdministratorPassword.
1. Riser Card 2. System Board
178 1. Riser Card 2. System Board
183 1. Enter theadministratorpassword
184Password removed due tocheck-sum error.
1. Enter new password
185Corrupted boot sequence.
1. Set configuration andreinstall the bootsequence.
186 1. Riser Card 2. System Board
189 1. More than threepassword attemptswere made to accessthe computer.
1XXNot listed above.
1. System Board
201Memory data error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
225 1. Unsupported Memory
229External cache test error.
1. L2 Cache Memory 2. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 99
Error Code FRU/Action
262POST detected a basememory or extendedmemory type error.
1. Run Setup. CheckSystem Summarymenu for memorytype change. (See“Setup Program” onpage 73.)
2. Run the ExtendedMemory Diagnostictests.
301 1. Keyboard 2. Keyboard Cable 3. System Board
303With an 8603 error.
1. Mouse 2. Keyboard 3. Keyboard Cable 4. System Board
303With no 8603 error.
1. Keyboard 2. Keyboard Cable 3. System Board
3XXNot listed above.
1. Keyboard 2. Keyboard Cable 3. System Board
5XX 1. Display Adapter(if installed)
2. System Board
601 1. Diskette Drive A2. Diskette Drive Cable
3. System Board
604And unable to rundiagnostics.
1. Diskette Drive A2. Diskette Drive Cable
3. System Board
604And able to run diagnostics.
1. Diskette Drive B2. Diskette Drive Cable
3. System Board
605POST cannot unlock thediskette drive.
1. Diskette Drive2. Diskette Drive Cable
3. System Board
662 1. Diskette driveconfiguration error orwrong diskette drivetype, run SetConfiguration.
6XXNot listed above.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. External Drive Adapter4. Diskette Drive Cable
5. Power Supply
762Math coprocessorconfiguration error.
1. Run Setup 2. Math Coprocessor 3. System Board
7XX Not listed above.
1. Math Coprocessor 2. System Board
100 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
962 Parallel port configurationerror.
1. Run Configuration 2. Parallel Adapter
(if installed) 3. System Board
9XX 1. Printer 2. System Board
1047 1. 16-Bit AT Fast SCSIAdapter
107XCheck SCSI terminatorinstallation.
1. Check SCSIterminatorinstallation .
2. SCSI Cable 3. SCSI Terminator 4. SCSI Device 5. SCSI Adapter
1101Serial connector error,possible system boardfailure.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1101, 1102, 1106,1108, 1109
1. System Board2. Any Serial Device
1107 1. Communications Cable
2. System Board
1102Card selected feedbackerror.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1103Port fails register check.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
2. System Board
1106Serial option cannotbe turned off.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
2. System Board
1107 1. Serial Device Cable 2. System Board
1110Register test failed.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
2. System Board
1116Interrupt error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1117Failed baud rate test.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1162 Serial port configurationerror.
1. Run Configuration 2. Serial Adapter
(if installed) 3. System Board
11XXNot listed above.
1. System Board
1201 1. System Board2. Any Serial Device
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 101
Error Code FRU/Action
1202, 1206, 1208,1209, 12XX
1. Dual AsyncAdapter/A
2. System Board3. Any Serial Device
1207 1. Communications Cable
2. Dual Async Adapter/A
13XX 1. Game Adapter
1402Printer not ready.
Information only
1403No paper error, orinterrupt failure.
Information only
1404System board timeoutfailure.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1405Parallel adapter error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
1406Presence test error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
14XXNot listed above.Check printer beforereplacing system board.
1. Printer 2. System Board
15XX 1. SDLC Adapter
1692Boot sequence error.
1. Run FDISK to ensureat least one activepartition is set active.
16XX 1. 36/38 Workstation Adapter
1762Hard disk drive configurationerror.
1. Run Configuration(See “SetupProgram” onpage 73.)
1780 (Disk Drive 0)1781 (Disk Drive 1)1782 (Disk Drive 2)1783 (Disk Drive 3)
1. See “Power Supply”on page 71.
2. Hard Disk Drive 3. System Board
4. Hard Disk Cable 5. Power Supply
1962Boot sequence error.
1. Possible hard diskdrive problem, see“Hard Disk DriveBoot Error” onpage 74.
209X 1. Diskette Drive 2. Diskette Cable
3. 16-bit AT Fast SCSIAdapter
20XXNot listed above
1. BSC Adapter 2. Riser Card
102 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
21XX 1. SCSI Device2. 16-bit AT Fast SCSI
Adapter3. Alternate BSC Adapter
4. Riser Card
2401, 2402If screen colors change.
1. Display
2401, 2402If screen colors are OK.
1. System Board 2. Display
2409 1. Display
2410 1. System Board 2. Display
2462Video memory configurationerror.
1. Run Configuration 2. Video Memory
Modules 3. Video Adapter
(if installed) 4. System Board
3015, 3040Check for missing wrapor terminator plug on theadapter.
1. Network Attached? 2. LF Translator 3. Cable Problem
4. PC Network Adapter 5. Riser Card
30XX 1. PC Network Adapter 2. LF Translator 3. Cable Problem? 4. Riser Card
3115, 3140 1. Network Attached? 2. LF Translator 3. Alternate PC
Network-Adapter 4. Cable Problem 5. Riser Card
31XX 1. Alternate PC NetworkAdapter
2. LF Translator 3. Cable Problem? 4. Riser Card
36XX 1. GPIB Adapter 2. Riser Card
38XX 1. DAC Adapter 2. Riser Card
4611, 4630 1. Multiport/2 Interface Board
2. Multiport/2 Adapter
4612, 4613 4640, 4641 1. Memory Module Package
2. Multiport/2 Adapter
4650 1. Multiport Interface Cable
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 103
Error Code FRU/Action
46XXNot listed above.
1. Multiport/2 Adapter 2. Multiport/2 Interface
Board 3. Memory Module
5600 1. Financial System 2. Controller Adapter
5962CD-ROM configurationerror.
1. Run Configuration 2. CD-ROM Drive 3. CD-ROM Adapter 4. System Board
62XX 1. 1st Store Loop Adapter
2. Adapter Cable
63XX 1. 2nd Store Loop Adapter
2. Adapter Cable
64XX 1. Network Adapter
71XX 1. Voice Adapter
74XX 1. Display Adapter (if installed)
2. Riser Card
76XX 1. Page Printer Adapter
78XX 1. High Speed Adapter
79XX 1. 3117 Adapter
80XX 1. PCMCIA Adapter
84XX 1. Speech Adapter 2. Speech Control
Assembly 3. Riser Card
8601, 8602 1. Pointing Device (Mouse)
2. System Board
8603, 8604 1. System Board 2. Pointing Device
(Mouse)
86XXNot listed above
1. Mouse 2. System Board
89XX 1. PC Music Adapter2. MIDI Adapter Unit
3. Riser Card
91XX 1. Optical Drive 2. Adapter
96XX 1. SCSI Adapter2. Any SCSI Device
3. System Board
104 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
10101, 10102, 1010410105, 10106, 1010710108, 10109, 1011110112, 10113, 1011410115, 10116
1. Have customer verifycorrect operatingsystem devicedrivers are installedand operational.
2. Modem
10103, 10110, 101171 1. System Board 2. Data/Fax Modem
10117Not listed above.
1. Check system speaker
2. Check PSTN cable 3. External DAA
(if installed) 4. Modem
10118 1. Run Diagnostics andverify the correctoperation of themodem slot
2. Modem
10119 1. Diagnostics detecteda non-IBM modem
2. Modem
10120 1. Check PSTN Cable 2. External DAA
(if installed) 3. Modem
10132, 10133, 1013410135, 10136, 1013710138, 10139, 1014010141, 10142, 1014310144, 10145, 1014610147, 10148, 1014910150, 10151, 10152
1. Modem
10153 1. Data/Fax Modem 2. System Board
101XXNot listed above.
1. Modem Adapter/A 2. Data/Fax Modem 3. System Board
10450, 10451, 1049010491, 10492, 10499Read/write error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
2. Riser Card3. Hard Disk Drive
4. System Board
10452Seek test error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10453Wrong drive type?
Information only
10454Sector buffer test error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10455, 10456Controller error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 105
Error Code FRU/Action
10459Drive diagnostic commanderror.
Information only
10461Drive format error
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10462Controller seek error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10464Hard Drive read error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10467Drive non fatal seek error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10468Drive fatal seek error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10469Drive soft error countexceeded.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10470, 10471, 10472Controller wrap error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10473Corrupt data. Low levelformat might be required.
Information only
10480 1. Hard Disk Drive (ESDI)
2. Drive Cable 3. System Board
10481ESDI drive D seek error.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
10482Drive selectacknowledgement bad.
1. Run AdvancedDiagnostics
106X1 1. Check Configuration 2. Ethernet Adapter
10635 1. Power-off computer,wait ten seconds;then power-on thecomputer.
2. Ethernet Adapter
10651, 10660 1. Check Cables 2. Ethernet Adapter
106XXNot listed above.
1. Ethernet Adapter
107XX 1. 5.25-inch External Diskette Drive
2. 5.25-inch Diskette Drive Adapter/A
109XXCheck the adapter cables.
1. ActionMedia Adapter/A
2. System Board
112XXThis adapter doesnot have cache.
1. SCSI Adapter2. Any SCSI Device
3. System Board
106 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
119XX 1. 3119 Adapter
121XX 1. Modem Adapter2. Any Serial Device
3. System Board
136XX 1. ISDN Primary RateAdapter
2. System Board
137XX 1. System Board
141XX 1. Realtime InterfaceCoprocessorPortmaster Adapter/A
143XX 1. Japanese Display Adapter
2. System Board
14710, 14711 1. System Board Display Adapter
2. Adapter Video Memory
148XX 1. Display Adapter
14901, 149021491X, 14922
1. Display Adapter 2. System Board
3. Display (any type)
14932 1. External Display 2. Display Adapter
16101 1. Riser Card Battery(See “Battery Notice”on page 461) (See“Battery Notice” onpage 461)
161XX 1. FaxConcentrator Adapter
164XX 1. 120MB Internal Tape Drive
2. Diskette Cable 3. System Board
16500 1. 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter
16520, 16540 1. 6157 Streaming Tape Drive
2. 6157 Tape Attachment Adapter
166XX, 167XX 1. Token Ring Adapter 2. System Board 3. Riser Card
18001 to 18029 1. Wizard Adapter 2. Wizard Adapter
Memory
18031 to 18039 1. Wizard Adapter Cable
185XXXX 1. DBCS Japanese Display Adapter/A
2. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 107
Error Code FRU/Action
20001 to 20003 1. Image Adapter/AImage-I Adapter/A
2. Memory Module DRAM, VRAM
20004 1. Memory Module DRAM, VRAM
2. Image Adapter/AImage-I Adapter/A
20005 to 20010 1. Image Adapter/AImage-I Adapter/A
2. Memory Module DRAM, VRAM
200XXNot listed above.
1. Image Adapter/AImage-I Adapter/A
2. Memory Module DRAM, VRAM
3. System Board
20101 to 20103 1. Printer/Scanner Option
2. Image Adapter/A 3. Memory Module
DRAM, VRAM
20104 1. Memory Module DRAM, VRAM
2. Printer/Scanner Option 3. Image Adapter/A
20105 to 20110 1. Printer/Scanner Option
2. Image Adapter/A 3. Memory Module
DRAM, VRAM
Image Adapter/AMemory Test failureindicated by graphicof adapter.
1. Replace memorymodule (shown ingraphic.)
206XX 1. SCSI-2 Adapter2. Any SCSI Device
3. System Board
208XXVerify there are no duplicateSCSI ID settings on thesame bus.
1. Any SCSI Device
210XXXXInternal bus, size unknown.
210XXX1External bus, size unknown.
1. SCSI Hard Disk Drive2. SCSI Adapter or
System Board 3. SCSI Cable
4. SCSI ID Switch(on some models)
Tape Drive amber LEDremains on.
1. Tape Drive2. SCSI Cable (internal)3. SCSI Adapter or
System Board
108 PC Server HMM
Error Code FRU/Action
Tape Drive green “in use”LED fails to come on.
1. Tape Drive2. SCSI Adapter or
System Board3. SCSI Cable (internal)
SCSI Cable (external)
Tape automatically ejectedfrom drive.
1. Tape Cassette 2. Drive
SCSI ID on rotary switchdoes not match SCSI IDset in configuration.Verify drive switchesinside cover are set tozero.
1. Rotary Switch Circuit Board
2. Circuit Board Cable 3. Tape Drive
Tape sticks/breaks indrive.Verify that the tapes usedmeet ANSI standard X3B5.
1. Tape Cassette
212XX 1. SCSI Printer 2. Printer Cable
213XX 1. SCSI Processor
214XX 1. WORM Drive
215XXXC215XXXD215XXXE215XXXUIf an external device, andpower-on LED is off, checkexternal voltages.
1. CD-ROM Drive ICD-ROM Drive IIEnhanced CD-ROM Drive IIAny CD-ROM Drive
2. SCSI Cable3. SCSI Adapter or
System Board
216XX 1. Scanner
217XXIf an external device, andpower-on LED is off, checkexternal voltages.
1. Rewritable Optical Drive
2. SCSI Adapter orSystem Board
3. SCSI Cable
218XXCheck for multi CDtray, or juke box.
1. Changer
219XX 1. SCSI Communications Device
24201Y0, 24210Y0Be sure wrap plug isattached.
1. ISDN/2 Adapter2. ISDN/2 Wrap Plug
3. ISDN/2 Communications Cable
273XX 1. 1Mbps Micro ChannelInfrared LAN Adapter
27501, 2750327506, 27507
1. ServerGuard Adapter 2. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 109
Error Code FRU/Action
27502, 27504, 2751027511, 27533, 2753427536, 27537
1. ServerGuard Adapter
27509 1. Remove redundantadapters, run AutoConfigurationprogram, then retest.
27512 1. WMSELF.DGSdiagnostics filemissing.
2. WMSELF.DGSdiagnostics fileincorrect.
27535 1. 3V Lithium BackupBattery
2. ServerGuard Adapter
27554 1. Internal Temperatureout of range
2. ServerGuard Adapter
27555, 27556 1. ServerGuard Adapter 2. Power Supply
27557 1. 7.2V NiCad MainBattery Pack
2. ServerGuard Adapter
27558, 2755927560, 27561
1. PCMCIA Type IIModem
2. ServerGuard Adapter
27562 1. External PowerControl notconnected
2. External Power Control 3. ServerGuard Adapter
27563, 27564 1. External PowerControl
2. ServerGuard Adapter
275XX 1. Update DiagnosticSoftware
27801 to 27879 1. Personal Dictation System Adapter
2. System Board
27880 to 27889 1. External FRU (Speaker, Microphone)
I999030XHard disk reset failure.
Possible hard disk driveproblem, see “Hard DiskDrive Boot Error” onpage 74.
110 PC Server HMM
Error MessagesError Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Address Exceeds the Sizeof Your MemoryAn invalid memory addresswas entered. DiagnosticsTests display this messageduring the Locate Bad Chipsoption.
1. Enter the correctaddress.
2. Memory Module 3. System Board
Arithmetic FunctionsFailedAn error was detectedduring the CPU Test.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Base Memory Test FailedAn error was detected inbase memory.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Boot Sector UnreadableA boot sector read errorwas detected on the harddisk drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
4. System Board
Bus Noise Test FailedRAM Test detected an errorin the memory bus.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Butterfly Cylinder AccessTest FailedHard Disk Drive Testdetected mismatch betweenthe data read and the datastored on the drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
4. System Board
Clock StoppedReal-time clock has stoppedworking.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
CMOS Clock Test FailedTime and Date Settings forCMOS and DOS do notMatch.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Controller Diagnostic TestFailedAn error was detected whiletesting the Hard DiskController (Adapter).
1. Hard Disk DriveAdapter (if installed)
2. Hard Disk Drive 3. System Board
Cylinder 0 errorsTest detected an errorreading the first cylinder ofthe hard disk drive.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
3. System Board
Device is Not ReadyReady the Device...
orPress Any Key
1. Ensure the device ispowered-on.
2. Replace failing device 3. Device Adapter
(if installed) 4. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 111
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Disk Error EncounteredOpening Output File PressAny Key To Continue.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
3. System Board
DMA #X FailedMain Components Testdetected an error whiletesting the DMA controller.
1. System Board
DMA Page Register FailedDMA page register error
1. System Board
Drive (x) Media (y)MismatchFAT ID mismatch withinstalled drive.
1. Check diskette anddiskette drivecapacity.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
Error in video buffer.Bad bits.Video memory test error.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
Exception Interrupt InProtected Mode DiagsCannot ContinueServer error, remove oneadapter at a time until thesymptom goes away.
1. Any Adapter 2. System Board 3. Processor
Extended Memory TestFailedExtended memory error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Floppy Drive FailedDiskette drive(s) failed.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
General Function FailedRemove one adapter at atime until the symptom goesaway.
1. Any Adapter 2. System Board 3. Processor
Hard Drives FailedHard Disk Drive test error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
3. System Board
Incorrect DOS version 1. Ensure you are usingDOS version 3.0 orhigher.
INT Mask Register FailedINT Mask Register error.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Invalid DateClock/DOS date mismatch.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Invalid TimeClock/DOS time mismatch.Back-up clock and DOStime of day settings do notmatch.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
112 PC Server HMM
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Linear Cylinder AccessTest FailedHard disk drive error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive Cable3. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
4. System Board
Logic Function FailedCPU Logic test error.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Loopback ErrorCOM Port Test or ParallelPort error.
A wrap plug must beinstalled to successfullycomplete these tests.
1. System Board 2. Wrap Plug
Main Components FailedSystem board error.
1. System Board 2. Processor
Memory test cannot run atthis location in memoryNot enough free memoryavailable to start thememory test.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Missing QAPlus/PROFiles(s)One or more diagnosticsupport files are missing.
1. Diagnostic Diskette
NO LOOP-BACK PLUG.Skipping Externalloopback testNo wrap plug installed.
1. Install wrap plug onthe serial port, reruntest.
2. System Board
Not readyPrinter not on-line or notready.
1. Ready Printer 2. Printer 3. Printer Cable 4. System Board
No 'type-amatic' repeatAt least one repeat keymust be tested during thistest or an error will occur.Type-amatic test error.
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
Not used by any standarddeviceIRQ is not currently beingused by a non-standarddevice.
1. System Board
Numeric Proc FailedNPU test error.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Parallel Ports FailedTest Report Summarymessage.
1. System Board
Pass (N): ** Errors ** Drive(X) FailedDiskette drive read/write testerror.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 113
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Pass (N) Drive Not ReadyDiskette drive door is openor defective.
1. Ensure diskette driveis ready.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Pass (N): Drive (X) WriteProtected or Unformatted
1. Insert a non-writeprotected, formatteddiskette into thediskette drive; thenrerun the test.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Pass (N): Unknown MediaDrive (X)Diskette Drive Test error.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Place Hi-density Media inDriveMedia/drive mismatch.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Printer FailedPrinter powered-on andready?
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Printer FaultPrinter powered-on andready?
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Printer Not SelectedEnsure the printer ispowered-on and ready.
1. Printer 2. Printer Cable 3. System Board
Program or File Not FoundPress Any Key
Diagnostics cannot find theUSER(N).COM file.
1. Diagnostic Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
Program Too Big To Fit InMemoryToo many Terminate andStay Resident programs inmemory.
1. Reboot the systemfrom the DiagnosticDiskette.
QAPlus/PRO Cannot BeRe-run Because Of ErrorIn Relocating ProgramDiagnostics failed torelocate the DiagnosticsTest programs so thememory space it resides inwas not tested.
1. Diagnostic Diskette 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
RAM Memory Error inBlock n. Bad bits nMemory error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
RAM Test FailedMemory error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
114 PC Server HMM
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Read error on cylinder nHard disk drive format error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
3. System Board
Read ErrorsDiskette drive read error.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Receive ErrorSerial Port loopback testerror.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Refresh FailureDiagnostics Test detectedan error while testing theDMA controller's RAMrefresh cycle.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
RTC Interrupt FailureDiagnostics Test cannotdetect the Real-Time clockinterrupt.
1. Real-Time ClockAssembly
2. System Board
Serial Chip ErrorCOM Port error, general.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serial Compare ErrorCOM Port error, informationtransmitted is not the sameas information received.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serial Time-out ErrorCOM Port error, timeinterval is too long betweentransmitted and receiveddata.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Serious Memory Error —Diags Cannot ContinueMemory Test error.
1. Memory Module 2. System Board
Sorry You Need A MouseMouse or mouse driver wasnot detected.
1. Mouse 2. System Board
System HangsGo to “UndeterminedProblem” on page 83.
1. Any device 2. Any adapter 3. System Board
The Address Exceeds TheSize Of Your MemoryAn invalid memory addresswas entered. TheDiagnostics Tests displaythis message during theLocate Bad Chips optionunder the interact menu ifan invalid memory addresswas entered at the "EnterMemory Address Of BadChip" prompt.
1. Enter correct address 2. Memory Module 3. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 115
Error Message/Symptom FRU/Action
That Number is Out OfRangeAn invalid bit number wasentered. Diagnostics Testsdisplay this message duringthe Locate Bad Chipsoption.
1. Enter the correctnumber.
2. Memory Module 3. System Board
Too Many Errors — TestAbortedToo many errors, theDiagnostics Test cannotcontinue.
1. Microprocessor 2. System Board
Transmit ErrorInternal or external serialport loopback test failure.
1. Serial Port Cable 2. System Board
Video Adapter FailedTest Result Summary,displayed if "Fail" was at theQuit/Fail/Pass menu of anyvideo test.
1. Video Adapter 2. System Board 3. Display
Write error on cylinder nHard disk drive write error.
1. Hard Disk Drive2. Hard Disk Drive
Adapter (if installed)
Write ErrorsDiskette drive write error.
1. Diskette 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
Write Protected orUnformattedDiskette is Write Protectedor not formatted.
1. Insert a non-writeprotected, formatteddiskette into thediskette drive; thenrerun the test.
2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
You Cannot Delete theMotherboard"Remove Board" option wasselected. The DiagnosticsTests display this messageduring the Locate Bad Chipsoption.
1. Make the correctselection.
2. Memory Module 3. System Board 4. Processor
116 PC Server HMM
Miscellaneous Error MessagesMessage/Symptom FRU/Action
Changing colors. 1. Display
Computer will not power-off.See “Power Supply” onpage 71.
1. Power Switch 2. System Board
Dead computer.See “Power Supply” onpage 71.
1. Power Switch 2. Power Supply 3. System Board
Diskette drive in-use lightremains on or does not lightwhen drive is active.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
Flashing cursor with anotherwise blank display.
1. System Board2. Primary Hard Disk
Drive3. Hard Disk Drive Cable
Incorrect memory sizeduring POST.
1. Run the Memorytests.
2. Memory Module 3. System Board
“Insert a Diskette” iconappears with a known-gooddiagnostics diskette in thefirst 3.5-inch diskette drive.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable 4. Network Adapter
Intensity or color varies fromleft to right of charactersand color bars.
1. Display 2. System Board
No power, or fan notrunning.
1. See “Power Supply”on page 71.
Nonsystem disk or diskerror-type messagewith a known-gooddiagnostic diskette.
1. Diskette Drive 2. System Board
3. Diskette Drive Cable
Other display symptoms notlisted above (including blankor illegible display).
1. See “Display” onpage 490.
2. System Board 3. Display
Power-on indicator or harddisk drive in-use lightnot on, but computerworks correctly.
1. Power Supply 2. System Board 3. LED Cables
Printer problems. 1. See “Printer” onpage 524.
Program loads from thehard disk with aknown-good diagnosticsdiskette in the first 3.5-inchdiskette drive.
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive
3. Diskette Drive Cable 4. System Board 5. Power Supply
Serial or parallel port devicefailure (system board port).
1. External DeviceSelf-Test OK?
2. External Device 3. Cable 4. System Board
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 117
Message/Symptom FRU/Action
Serial or parallel port devicefailure (adapter port).
1. External DeviceSelf-Test OK?
2. External Device 3. Cable 4. Alternate Adapter 5. System Board 6. Riser Card
Some or all keys on thekeyboard do not work.
1. Keyboard 2. Keyboard Cable 3. System Board
Clock Battery inaccurate. 1. Clock Battery(See “Battery Notice”on page 461)
2. System Board
118 PC Server HMM
Parts ListingsService Position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 119
SystemIndex System Unit (PC Server 310 - Type 8639)
ISA Models 0D0, 0DT, 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZTMicro Channel Models MDT, MXT, MZT
1 Cover (Top) 06H1771(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
2 Diskette Drive,see DASD (PC Server 310 - Type 8639)
3 Hard Disk Drive,see DASD (PC Server 310 - Type 8639)
4 Power Supply Assembly (210W, 3.3V), 06H2968(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
5 System Board see System Board(PC Server 310 - Type 8639)
6 Base Frame 06H9405(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
7 Card Guide 06H1779(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT)
7 Card Guide 06H1778(Models MDT, MXT, MZT)
9 DASD Tray (Removal) 06H1780(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
10 DASD Tray (Non-Removal) 06H1781(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
11 Floor Stand Assembly 07H0516(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
5.25-Inch Blank Bezel 96G2484(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Blank Bezels 06H1784(Models MDT, MXT, MZT)
Bottom Cover 06H1791(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
C2 Switch Assembly 06H1788(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Cover Latch 06H1783(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Door Assembly 96G2446(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Door Hinge 96G2447(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
EMC Clip 06H5734(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
EMC Shield 06H1782(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Fan Assembly 06H1796(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Front Bezel 96G2445(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Keyboard with Cable, see“Keyboards (101/102 Key - RD)” on page 123,“Enhanced Keyboards (101/102 Key - BS)” on page 124
Keylock with Keys 33F8433(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
LED and Cable Power 93F2389(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Mouse 06H4595(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Power Button 06H1777(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
120 PC Server HMM
Index System Board (PC Server 310 - Type 8639)ISA Models 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0, 0DTMicro Channel Models MDT, MXT, MZTPower Switch with Cable 60G2258(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Rear I/O Panel Assembly 06H1786(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT)
Rear I/O Panel Assembly 06H1787(Models MDT, MZT, MXT)
Rear Panel 06H1785(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Jumper Kit 93F0067(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZ)
Miscellaneous Mounting Screws 93F0041(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Speaker 92F0421(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
1MB Video DRAM (60ns) 92G7432(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
256KB L2 Cache - 12ns 60H7416(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, MDT, MZT)
256KB L2 Cache - 15ns 06H6052(Models 0XT, MXT)
8MB Memory SIMM (Parity) 92G7521(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Battery, 33F8354(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Ethernet Card Assembly 48G7170(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT)
Ethernet Card Assembly 48G7172(Models MDT, MXT, MZT)
I/O Riser Card 5X5 06H4008(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT)
I/O Riser Card 5X5 06H4023(Models MDT, MXT, MZT)
Power Cordsee “Power Cords” on page 125.SCSI PCI Card Assembly 60H5715(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
5 System Board without Memory 88G4270and Processor
(Model 0XT)5 System Board without Memory 11H5545
and Processor (Model MXT)
P54C 50/75MHz Processor Chip 06H5210with Heat Sink (Model 0XT, MXT)
P54C 66/100 Chip with Heat Sink 06H6063(Models 0Z0, 0ZT MZT)
P54C 66/133 Chip with Heat Sink 06H9891(Models 0D0, 0DT, MDT)
5 System Board without Memory 60H7198and Processor (Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT)
5 System Board without Memory 60H7197and Processor (Models MZT, MDT)
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 121
Index DASD (PC Server 310 - Type 8639)ISA Models 0XT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0D0, 0DTMicro Channel Models MDT, MXT, MZT1.44MB Diskette Drive 93F2361(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
1GB Fast/Wide Hard Disk Drive 06H9079(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Diskette Drive Cable 06H6325(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
Hard Disk Drive Cable 06H6326(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
LED & Cable (Hard Disk Drive) 93F2388(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
MKE CR-504 4X CD-ROM DR 88G4921(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Cable (PCI-5X5) 06H6062(Models 0D0, 0DT, 0Z0, 0ZT, 0XT, MDT, MXT, MZT)
122 PC Server HMM
Keyboards (101/102 Key - RD)Keyboards (101/102 Key - RD)
Arabic 71G4617 Belgium-French 71G4618 Belgium-Dutch 71G4639 Bulgarian 71G4619 Czech 71G4620 Danish 71G4621 Dutch 71G4622 French 71G4624 French/Canadian 06H2963 German 71G4625 Greek 71G4626 Hebrew 71G4627 Hungarian 71G4628 Iceland 71G4629 Italy 71G4630 Latin/Spanish 82G3291 Norwegian 71G4631 Polish 71G4632 Portuguese 71G4633 Romanian 71G4634 Russian/Cyrillic 71G4635 Serbian/Cyrillic 71G4636 Slovak 71G4637 Spanish 71G4638 Swedish/Finnish 71G4623 Swiss-French/German 71G4640 Turkish 71G4642 Turkish 82G3255 UK English 71G4643 US English 71G4646
US English (E/ME/A use only) 71G4644 Yugoslavian/Latin American 71G4647
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 123
Enhanced Keyboards (101/102 Key -BS)
Enhanced Keyboards (101/102 Key - BS) Arabic 8125417 Belgium-French 8125418 Belgium-Dutch 8125439 Bulgarian 8125419 Czech 8125420 Danish 81G5421 Dutch 8125422 Finnish 8125423 French 8125424 French/Canadian 82G3280 German 8125425 Greek 8125426 Hebrew 8125427 Hungarian 8125428 Iceland 8125429 Italy 8125430 Latin/Spanish 82G3294 Norwegian 8125431 Polish 8125432 Portuguese 8125433 Romanian 8125434 Russian/Cyrillic 8125435 Serbian/Cyrillic 8125436 Slovak 8125437 South African 8125441 Spanish 8125438 Swedish 8125423
Swiss - French/German 8125440 Turkish 8125442 UK English 8125443 US English 82G3278
US English (E/ME/A use only) 1396790 Yugoslavian/Latin American 8125447
124 PC Server HMM
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520
Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520
PC Server 310 - Type 8639 125
PC Server 320 - Type 8640
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 129Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 130
Checkpoint Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Assigning Interrupt Levels . . . . . . . . . 135EISA Configuration Diskette . . . . . . . . 136
Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette 136Making Menu Selections . . . . . . . . 136Recording EISA Configuration Settings . 137Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette 137Using EISA Configuration Diskette
Advanced Function . . . . . . . . . 138EISA, ISA, and PCI Adapters . . . . . . . 138EISA or ISA Features and Options . . . . . 139
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Sample Applications . . . . . . . . . . 141
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141PCI Features and Options . . . . . . . . . 142
Configuration Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Changing the Software Configuration . . . 143Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 143Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts . 144
Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Installing Additional Test Programs . . . . 145USERDIAG.CFG Example . . . . . . . . 147
Internal SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Setting SCSI IDs for Internal Devices . . . 148Termination (Internal SCSI Devices) . . . . 150
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154System Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . 155Symmetric Multiprocessors/Multiprocessing . . 155
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 156Internal Drive Bays (Disk-Array Models) . . . . 157Internal Drive Bays (Non-Disk-Array Models) . 159System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Keyboards (101/102 Key) . . . . . . . . . . 175Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 127
Features Note
All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup.
Microprocessor
� Pentium with 16KB of internal cache� Expandable to two microprocessors
Cache Memory
� 256KB of level-2 cache, upgradable to 512KB
Memory
� Standard: 16MB (min.), expandable to 256MB� 70 ns, parity� 8 single inline memory-module sockets
Diskette Drives
� Standard: one 3.5-inch, 1.44MB � Optional (internal):
Hard Disk Drive
� Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent� Supports up to 7 internal hard disk drives
CD-ROM Drive
� Standard: SCSI-2
Keyboard and Mouse
� 101-key keyboard � Mouse
Expansion
� 6 EISA/ISA slots, 3 PCI slots(1 shared slot)
� Up to 10 drive bays
Video
� SVGA Adapter � Compatibility:
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)– Enhanced graphics adapter (EGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)– Multicolor graphics array (MCGA)
Security Features
� Bolt-down capability � Door lock� Supervisor and user passwords
� Selectable drive-startup� Security cover (optional)
Upgradable POST and BIOS
� Upgradable EEPROM on the system board� BIOS upgrades (when available)
Integrated Functions
� Video port on an adapter� 2 serial ports� 1 parallel port
� Mouse port � Keyboard port� Battery-backed clock and calendar� SCSI-2 connectors on an adapter
128 PC Server HMM
– 2 internal connectors– 1 external connector
Power Supply
� 300 watt with voltage switch (115–230 V ac)� Built-in overload and surge protection
SCSI-2 Controller (varies by model)
� IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter– 2 internal connectors (one 8-bit and one 16-bit)– One 16-bit external connector
� IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAID Adapter– Two 16-bit internal connectors– One 16-bit external connector
Diagnostics and Test InformationThe following list contains problems and references fordiagnosing a PC Server 320.
Notes
� The QAPlus/PRO diagnostic program recognizesthe primary processor as LUN 1 and thesecondary processor as LUN 2. During testingthe program automatically tests LUN 1. Youmust select LUN 2 if you want the program totest the secondary processor.
� The type of DASD diagnostics required to testthe hard disk controller (adapter) and drives isdetermined by the type of hard disk adapterinstalled in the computer.
� Always start with “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
Problem Reference
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
“General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4 andthe Symptom-to-FRU Index(QAPlus/PRO) on page 61 inthe PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
DASD Adapter Problems For non-disk-array models, see“SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547. SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-BusRAID Adapter, see “Disk ArrayConfiguration” on page 461.
Memory “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
Power Supply Voltages “Power Supply” on page 152.
Miscellaneous “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 129
Additional Service InformationThe following additional service information is for the PCServer 320 Type 8640.
� “Checkpoint Codes.”� “Configuration” on page 135.� “Configuration Conflicts” on page 142.� “Diagnostic Programs” on page 145.� “Internal SCSI Drives” on page 147.� “Power Supply” on page 152.� “Setup Program” on page 153.� “Specifications” on page 154..� “System Board Replacement” on page 155.� “Symmetric Multiprocessors/Multiprocessing” on
page 155.
Checkpoint CodesDuring POST, the computer displays the status of thecomponents being tested in the form of Checkpoint (CP)codes in the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Thefollowing is a list of the CP codes followed by the routine inprocess and the boot mode.
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
01 Its_A_Reset Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
0D Init Chip_NS Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
12 Periph Init Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
03 Disable Video Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
05 Phase 1 EnterBig Real
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B0 Enable LocalAPIC
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
06 Cache Init Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
07 Init Refresh Cold+Restore+Mfg
08 Wait For RTC Cold+Restore+Mfg
0A Std CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0B Mid CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0C Ext CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0E C SET_INIT Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
10 Check ParityNonParity
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
11 Disable Parity Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B1 Init Seattle Cold+Restore+Mfg+SAD
13 Test CPU Regs Cold+Restore+Mfg
14 Init RTC Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
16 Init Timer 0 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
17 Init Timer 2 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
18 Test DMA Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
19 Test Page Regs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
130 PC Server HMM
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
1A Verify Refresh Cold+Restore+Mfg
1B Enable Parity Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
1C Save ID Warm SAD
1D Test First 64k Cold+Restore+Mfg
1E Clear First 64k Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
1F POST with Stack Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
20 EnableBIOSE000
SAD
21 BIOS Shadow Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B2 Shadow SCSI Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
23 Phase 2 POST Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
24 Enable BIOSF000
SAD
24 Shadow VPD Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
25 Init Key BoardData
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
26 Save ID Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B3 Check P54C Cold+Mfg
27 Init Q Boot Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
28 Periph Config Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
2A Init TimeoutTables
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
2B Pos_Setup Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
2F Test DMALocations
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B4 Init DMA Regs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
30 Test PICs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
31 Init Vector Table Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
32 Enable Timer Int Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
33 Init Keyboard Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
34 Clear MemorySize Error
Cold+Restore+Mfg
35 CheckConfiguration
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
36 Mfg Boot Fork Cold+Restore+Mfg
37 PCI Reset Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B5 NVRAM check Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
38 PCI Video Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
3B Sign On Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
3C Test Timer Tick Cold+Restore+Mfg
3F Enable Video SAD
40 CSET BFRSIZMEM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
41 Size MemoryAbove 64k
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
42 CSET AFT SIZMEM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
43 Test Timer 2 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
44 Password NotEntered
Cold+Restore
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 131
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
45 Test PS/2 Mouse Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
46 Check ForMouse Buttons
Cold+Restore
47 Init Key BoardFlags
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
48 Test Key Board Cold+Warm+Restore
4B Memory TestPrompt
Cold+Warm+Mfg
4C Test Memory Cold+Restore+Mfg
4D Clear EBDA Warm
4E CSET AFT MTEST
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
4F Allocate EBDA Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B6 Set Planar Info Cold+Restore+
50 xfer ebda vars Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B7 Init P54M Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B8 Init MPStructures
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B9 CPU Speed Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
51 Set Warm BootFlag
Warm
52 Clear Speed Bits Cold+Warm+Mfg+SAD
53 E FLOB Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
54 Enable SystemInterrupts
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
55 C2 SecurityCheck
Restore
56 Init Key Board Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
57 Test RTC Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
58 Check For NPX Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
59 reset hdctl Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5A FD INIT Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5B Set FloppyConfig
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
BA Unlock Early Cold+Restore
5C Init A20 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5D Cache Config Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5E HD SETUP Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
62 Verify CMOSConfig
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
70 Check For SetupHot Key
Cold+Warm
63 Clear Screen Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
BB Init IRQ Levels Cold+Restore
65 IBM Cirrus DDC Cold
BC PACP Arbitration Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
BD Enable PlanarSCSI
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
66 CSET BFROPROM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
132 PC Server HMM
The following codes also produce a series of beeps. Theseries of beeps are listed for each code followed by anexplanation of the code.
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
BE Do ROM Scan Cold+Warm+Restore
2C TCPC Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
49 TCPC Errors Cold+Warm+Restore
2D Find Serial Ports Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
2E Find ParallelPorts
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
68 CSET AFTOPROM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
BF Get MC Data Cold+Warm+Restore
69 PCI Configure Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
6A MFG Hook 65 MFG
6B Init Time Of Day Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
6C Check ForLocked KeyBoard
Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
6D Init Enable NMI Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
6E Set Boot Speed Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
6F Set Key BoardLEDs
Cold+Warm+SAD
71 Init Flush KeyBoard
Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
72 Move Error LogTo EBDA
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
73 Init DisableMouse
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
74 Sys Reset MFG
75 Phase 2 Exit BigReal
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
76 BOOT STRAP 1 Cold+Warm+MFG+SAD
78 SAD BOOTPROC
SAD
79 Start BootSequence
N/A
7A Read BootSector
N/A
7B Boot SectorRead Complete
N/A
7C Check for CEBoot Override
N/A
7F Xfer to boot code N/A
CP Code Beeps Definition
82 1-1-3 CMOS write/read failure
83 1-1-4 BIOS ROM checksum failure
84 1-2-1 Programmable Interval Timer testfailure
85 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 133
CP Code Beeps Definition
86 1-2-3 DMA page register write/read testfailure
87 1-2-4 RAM refresh verification failure
88 1-3-1 1st 64K RAM test failure
89 1-3-2 1st 64K RAM parity test failure
90 2-1-1 Slave DMA register testin-progress or failure
91 2-1-2 Master DMA register testin-progress or failure
92 2-1-3 Master interrupt mask registertest failure
93 2-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register testfailure
95 2-2-2 Key-board controller test failure
99 2-3-2 Screen memory test in-progressor failure
9A 2-3-3 Screen retrace tests in-progressor failure
9B N/A Search for video ROMin-progress
9C N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9D N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9E N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9F N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
A0 3-1-1 Timer tick interrupt test failure
A1 3-1-2 Interval timer channel 2 testfailure
A3 3-1-4 Time-Of-Day clock test failure
A7 3-2-4 Comparing CMOS memory sizeagainst actual
A8 3-3-1 Memory size mismatch occurred
D0 N/A Cache State
D1 N/A Cache Init
D2 N/A Cache Restore
D3 N/A Cache Config
D4 N/A Cache Flush
D5 N/A Cache Enable
D6 N/A Cache Disable
D7 N/A Cache Custom
e1h N/A CSET BFR VIDROM
e5h N/A CSET AFT CMCFG
134 PC Server HMM
Configuration Note
DASD and other adapters may require additionalconfiguration information.
Configuration is the allocation of the server resources toorganize and interconnect hardware devices and softwareprograms. The steps required to configure the abovenamed severs depend on the number and variety ofdevices and programs installed.
For information about configuring the IBM SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAID Adapter, see “Starting the RAIDConfiguration Program” on page 465.
These servers support the following types of adapters.
� Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)� Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA)� Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)
The following hardware configuration utility programs aresupplied with the server.
� Built-in Setup programConfigures system board functions, such as theintegrated drive electronics (IDE) controller and serialand parallel port assignments that you install. It alsoallows you to set passwords for starting up andaccessing the Setup program.
� PC Server 520 EISA Configuration DisketteConfigures EISA and ISA adapters (boards).
� Built-in SCSI-2 adapter utility program (SCSISelectUtility program)Configures SCSI devices installed in non-disk-arraymodels
� Configuration Option DisketteConfigures SCSI devices in disk-array models
Assigning Interrupt Levels: A rotational interrupttechnique to is used to configure PCI adapters. Thistechnique enables you to install a variety of PCI adaptersthat currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
Always use the IBM PC Server EISA ConfigurationDiskette for the system you are servicing when assigninginterrupts for EISA and ISA adapters. You cannot assignan EISA or ISA adapter the same interrupt that you haveassigned to a PCI adapter. This is because the serverdoes not support interrupt sharing among PCI, EISA, andISA adapters.
If a situation occurs where you need an additionalinterrupt, you can use an interrupt from another functionthat you might not need, such as the IDE controller(Interrupt 14) or COM2 (Interrupt 3).
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 135
EISA Configuration Diskette: You must use theEISA Configuration Diskette anytime you want to changeresource allocations, such as:
� Adding or removing devices � Moving devices� Changing device function
� Resolving conflicts� Adding or removing PCI adapters
Each time you use the EISA Configuration Diskette toconfigure the server, the configuration information is savedin a System Configuration Information (SCI) file and in theNVRAM configuration. Only devices that you install andconfigure correctly appear on the EISA Configurationscreens.
Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette:Use an operating system command, such as the DOSDISKCOPY command, to make a complete backup copy ofthe EISA Configuration Diskette. Using the backup copycan prevent damage to the original diskette. The operatingsystem documentation provides information on backing updiskettes.
Making Menu Selections: When you start the EISAConfiguration Diskette, an introductory screen appears.Type CF at the prompt. After you press Enter, the mainmenu, Steps in configuring the computer , appears. TheEISA Configuration program main menu contains fivesteps:
Step 1
Important EISA configuration information: This stepprovides information about the differences between the ISAconfiguration process and the EISA configuration process.
Step 2
Add or remove boards: If the server is configuredcorrectly, this step provides a list of the devices installed inthe EISA expansion slots. The Add choice allows you toadd ISA devices to the configuration. If EISA adapters areinstalled in the server, and you have not copied the .CFGfile to the EISA Configuration Diskette, you are promptedto insert the adapter's configuration diskette into thediskette drive. The .CFG file is copied to your diskette. Ifthe adapter's .CFG file is copied to the EISA ConfigurationDiskette before starting the diskette, and the adapter isinstalled in the server, EISA devices are addedautomatically.
Step 3
View or edit details: After adding EISA or ISA adaptersin Step 2, use the Edit selection of this step to configurethem. Use the Edit Resources selection of this step for
136 PC Server HMM
complex configurations. If you change a setting in thisstep, you might have to change a switch or jumper settingon the system board or on a device.
Step 4
Examine switches or print report: After Steps 1 and 2have been completed correctly, this step displays thecorrect switch and jumper settings for the installed devicesthat have switches and jumpers. Also, you can choose toprint a system configuration report.
Step 5
Save and exit: This step allows you to save theconfiguration or to discard the changes before exiting theprogram.
Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlightyour selection; then press Enter to make your selection.To help you track your progress, a checkmark (√) appearson the main menu next to the completed steps.
You can access help information through:
� Help windows, which remain active.� Information windows, which appear automatically as a
result of some configuration activities.� The Help=F1 prompt, which allows you to access the
Help Menu for screens displaying the prompt. Toremove the Help Menu, press Esc .
Recording EISA Configuration Settings: Recordthe configuration settings you made in Step 3, View oredit details and Step 4, Examine switches or printreport on a separate sheet and store it in a safe place forfuture reference. If a printer is attached to the server, youcan use the Print Screen key to print these settings. Thesettings are helpful when you install additional options.Also, record the new settings each time you makechanges. Be sure to record the current configurationsettings for the user.
Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette: Using abackup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette canprevent damage to the original diskette (see “Backing Upthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 136).
To start the EISA Configuration Diskette, do the following:
1. Insert the EISA Configuration Diskette into thediskette drive.
2. Power-on the computer, or if it is already on, shutdown the operating system and restart the computer.
3. When the first screen appears, type CF and pressEnter . Follow the instructions on the screen until themain menu, Steps in configuring the computer ,appears.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 137
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key toadvance through the items on the screen. Use theTab key to select choices on the bottom of thescreen. Press the Esc key to return to a previousmenu.
5. Press Enter to make a selection.6. Follow the instructions on the screen to view or
change (edit) the configuration information.
Note
Adapters installed in the server appearautomatically on the EISA Configuration screensafter you copy the adapter's configuration file (filewith an extension of .CFG) to the EISAConfiguration Diskette. If you want to manuallyadd an adapter that you have not yet installed inthe server, add it using Step 2 from the menu.To configure ISA adapters, follow the instructionson the screen.
Using EISA Configuration Diskette AdvancedFunction: Locking an ISA adapter reserves the selectedresources and prevents the system from using them toresolve resource conflicts. Use the Advanced function tolock ISA boards. An exclamation mark (!) appears next tolocked adapters.
To use the Advanced functions, do the following:
1. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 137).
2. At the main menu, select Step 3, The View or editdetails screen appears.
3. Press F7. The Advanced functions screen appears.4. Follow the instructions on the screen to:
a. Lock or unlock boardsb. View additional system informationc. Set verification moded. Maintain SCI files
EISA, ISA, and PCI Adapters: Before installing anew device or program, read the documentation suppliedwith it. Reading the instructions helps you determine thesteps required for installation and configuration. Thefollowing list provides a preview of the actions that mightbe required to configure the server.
When installing different types of adapters at the sametime, install and configure them in the following sequence:
1. ISA 2. EISA 3. PCI
138 PC Server HMM
Note
During POST, the server automatically configures ISAPlug and Play and PCI devices.
1. Run the Setup program and record the currentconfiguration settings.
2. Backup the EISA Configuration Diskette.
See “Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette” onpage 136.
3. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette and:a. Record the current settings.b. Install configuration files (.CFG).
Note
If the .CFG files were not supplied with theadapter, see “Files.”
See “Recording EISA Configuration Settings” onpage 137 and “Starting the EISA ConfigurationDiskette” on page 137.
4. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “Jumpers” on page 162.5. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions supplied with the adapter.6. Install the adapter in the server.7. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions supplied with thesoftware.
8. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Configuration Conflicts” on page 142.
EISA or ISA Features and Options: Some ISAand most EISA devices are supplied with option diskettes.These diskettes can contain any or all of the followingtypes of information:
� Configuration files (.CFG)� Diagnostic files (.DGS)
� Device drivers� Sample applications (mini-applications)
Files: A configuration file is required to configure theserver for ISA or EISA adapters. You must copy thisconfiguration file, which has a file-name extension of .CFG,from the device diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskettebefore installing the device in the server. Theconfiguration file reserves the system resources that theadapter needs to function properly.
Some ISA adapters are supplied with a diskette thatcontains the CFG file for the adapter. If ISA adapters areinstalled that were not supplied with their own CFG files,you must use the PC Server EISA Configuration Diskette
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 139
for the system you are servicing to create a unique CFGfile for each adapter.
Note
The unique .CFG files are slot sensitive. That is, theyshould not be used to configure identical adapters inmultiple systems unless you install the adapters in thesame expansion slots within each system.
To create a unique CFG file for an ISA adapter, do thefollowing:
1. Insert the IBM PC Server EISA Configuration Diskettefor the system you are servicing into diskette drive A.
2. Start the configuration utility program.3. At the main menu, select Step 2, Add or remove
boards.4. At the next menu, select the slot in which you
installed the adapter.5. At the next screen, select OK.6. At the next screen, press F5; then select Create
.CFG file . 7. Press Enter .
8. At the Create a board CFG file screen, type in theadapter manufacturer and description (for exampleIBM Token Ring); then press Enter .
9. Refer to the adapter documentation for informationabout specific configuration parameters (such as IRQor DMA channel) required for the adapter. Then,follow the instructions on the screen to enter theappropriate parameters on the menu.
Notes:
a. Normally, ISA adapters do not use everyparameter. Most adapters require only a PORTaddress.
b. The SVGA video adapter in the server requiresspecific memory and I/O address assignments tofunction properly. To avoid configurationconflicts, do not assign the following SVGAmemory and I/O addresses to other adapters oroptions in the server:
� Memory address space:AðððH – C7FFH
� I/O address spaces:
ð2Eðh – ð2EFh
ð3Bðh – ð3DFh
46E8h
10. After you type in all of the appropriate parameters,press F10.
11. At the next screen, carefully verify that the informationis correct; then press Enter .
12. At the Add Confirmation window, press Enter again.
140 PC Server HMM
13. In the next window (add), press Enter .
The adapter description appears in the selected slot.14. Verify the installation; then press F10.15. At the next menu, select Save and exit the
configuration utility .
Note
PCI devices do not require .CFG files.
Device Drivers: Device drivers are programs designedto support a specific type of hardware device. Theyprovide instructions that enable the computer to interactwith the device, or to take advantage of a device's specialfeature. The device driver might ship with the operatingsystem, the application program, or on the option diskette.Not all devices require device drivers. Refer to thedocumentation supplied with the option for additionalinformation.
Sample Applications: Some optional devices providesmall applications or sampler files. These applicationsdemonstrate the capabilities of the device and serve assoftware examples for programming the device. Refer tothe documentation supplied with the option for additionalinformation.
To configure the server for an ISA or EISA adapter:
1. Read the documentation supplied with the adapter.2. Copy any files with the extension of .CFG from the
option diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette.See “Files” on page 139 for important informationabout configuring ISA adapters.
3. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 137).
4. Record the new configuration information (see“Recording EISA Configuration Settings” onpage 137).
5. Save the new configuration settings to the EISAConfiguration Diskette and to the nonvolatile randomaccess memory (NVRAM) (see “Starting the EISAConfiguration Diskette” on page 137).
6. Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter.7. Install the adapter in the server.
Memory: After you add (or remove) extended memory,you must update the EISA Configuration Diskette.
Note
Not performing the following procedure could result inmemory errors, and in the operating system notrecognizing the added (or removed) memory.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 141
1. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 137).
2. Select Step 3: View or edit details . The systeminformation appears.
3. Under Advanced System Feature Setup , selectTotal System Memory .
4. Select the correct amount of memory, then press F10.
Note
It is possible to installsingle-inline-memory-modules (SIMMs) incombinations where the total amount of memoryinstalled does not appear on the memoryconfiguration screen. In the unlikely event thatthis occurs, select the next lower setting on thememory configuration menu, and all of theinstalled memory will be supported on the server.
5. Return to the Main Menu, save the configuration, andexit from the utility program.
PCI Features and Options: PCI devicesautomatically communicate with the server's configurationinformation. This usually results in automatic configurationof a PCI device. If a conflict does occur, refer to“Configuration Conflicts.”
Configuration ConflictsThe resources used by a server consist of interrupt requestlevels (IRQs), direct memory access channels (DMAs), I/Oports (for example, serial and parallel), and memory. Thisinformation is useful when a resource configuration conflictoccurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
� A device is installed that requires the same resourceas another device. (For example, if you install an ISAnetwork adapter and an EISA network adapter, bothrequesting IRQ 5, only one of the adapters can beconfigured.)
� A device resource is changed (for example, changingjumper settings).
� A device function is changed (for example, assigningCOM 1 to two different serial ports).
� An installed software program requires the sameresource as a hardware device (for example, anexpanded memory specification (EMS) device driverthat uses the address required by the SVGA videoadapter).
The steps required to resolve a configuration error aredetermined by the number and variety of hardware devicesand software programs install in the system.
142 PC Server HMM
If a hardware configuration error is detected, aconfiguration error message appears after the servercompletes POST, but before the operating system starts.You can bypass the error or start one of the configurationutility programs. Press F1 to bypass the error and load theoperating system. Press F2 to start the Setup program.To start the EISA Configuration Diskette, insert the diskettein the diskette drive and press F1.
The Setup program and the EISA Configuration programconfigure only the system hardware. These programs donot consider the requirements of the operating system orthe application programs.
Changing the Software Configuration: Thebest way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to changethe addresses used by the application program or thedevice driver. To do this, use the EISA Configurationprogram.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict,refer to the operating-system documentation or thedocumentation supplied with the device drivers.
Resolving Hardware ConfigurationConflicts: Use the following information to helpresolve hardware configuration conflicts:
1. Run the Setup program to view and changeresources used by the system board functions.Record the current settings before making anychanges. (See “Setup Program” on page 153 forinstructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing theerror. The EISA Configuration program specifies howthe server checks for resource conflicts. Initially, thisverification mode is set to automatic. When the modeis set to automatic, the EISA Configuration programtries to resolve configuration conflicts for you. Usethe Advanced selection of the EISA ConfigurationDiskette's View or edit details screen to change thesetting (see “Using EISA Configuration DisketteAdvanced Function” on page 138).
If the automatic verification mode is set, theconfiguration program attempts to resolve conflicts foryou. However, this might disable adapters or systemboard features. For example, if you choose IRQ 4 foran adapter, the program disables Serial Port 1, whichuses IRQ 4. If this happens, and you do not wantthis feature disabled, choose another IRQ for theadapter.
If you set the verification mode to manual, theconfiguration utility program does not try to resolve aconflict. Instead, you have to determine if a resourceconflict has occurred and then resolve the conflict.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 143
When the verification mode is set to manual, anasterisk (*) appears on the View or edit details screennext to adapters in conflict.
If the EISA Configuration program cannot resolve aconfiguration error, it deactivates the adapter anddisplays the deactivated status (<>) on the View oredit details screen. Use the Advanced selection ofthe EISA Configuration Diskette's View or edit detailsscreen to update or copy the server's systemconfiguration information file (see “Using EISAConfiguration Diskette Advanced Function” onpage 138).
3. Change configuration resource allocations. Use thebuilt-in Setup program to view or change systemboard resource allocations. Use the Advancedselection of the EISA Configuration Diskette's View oredit details screen to view the available or the usedsystem resources (see “Using EISA ConfigurationDiskette Advanced Function” on page 138). Use theEdit Changes selection to change resourceallocations for complex configurations.
4. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Jumpers andswitches define the system resources that a devicecan use. If the settings are incorrect or set to use aresource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs andthe device remains deactivated by the configurationprogram. Use the EISA Configuration Diskette's Step4, Examine switches or print report screen to verifyswitches (see “Making Menu Selections” onpage 261). Read the documentation supplied withthe device.
5. Change system board jumpers or switches. Removethe cover; then, refer to the system-board diagraminside the server.
6. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurationsare not supported (for example, you cannot operatethe server with two ISA SVGA adapters installed).
Resolving Software ConfigurationConflicts: The memory-address space and interruptlevels (IRQs) used by some hardware options mightconflict with addresses defined for use through applicationprograms or the EMS. (EMS is used only with DOS.)
If there is a conflict, one or more of the following conditionsmight exist:
� The system cannot load the operating system.� The system does not work.� An application program does not operate, or it returns
an error.� Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
You can resolve conflicts by changing either the softwareor the hardware configuration.
144 PC Server HMM
Note
Start the EISA Configuration Diskette to view theaddresses used by the system board functions. Usethe Advanced function of Step 3, View or edit detailsto view the addresses used by the adapters. (See“Using EISA Configuration Diskette AdvancedFunction” on page 138 for instructions.)
Diagnostic ProgramsThe Diagnostic program supplied with the server is theprimary method of testing the server. Option-specificdiagnostic files are supplied with some optional devicesand adapters. These files provide a more specialized testof the option. “Installing Additional Test Programs”provides additional information about installing and usingdiagnostic files. Also, refer to the documentation suppliedwith the option for information on installing and runningoption-specific diagnostics.
Installing Additional Test Programs: You canadd other test programs to the Diagnostic Diskette. Theseother programs are usually provided on the diskettesupplied with a device. After you add the programs to theDiagnostic Diskette, you can include information from theprograms in the Test Log.
Before the test programs can find these programs to runas the User Diags test group, information about them mustbe included in a file called USERDIAG.CFG. This is anASCII text file. It must include the following three items foreach test to run:
� Program Name (.COM and .EXE files only)� Test Description of the test to be run� Command-line parameters to be passed to the
program identified in the first item of this list
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 145
Notes
1. All of the information for a given test must be ona single line, and a semicolon (;) must separatethe items on the line.
2. Make sure you press Enter at the end of eachline of text in the USERDIAG.CFG file. Thiscreates a carriage return line feed (CR LF) whichis necessary for the User Diagnostics to be foundand executed.
3. If the program executable file is in a directoryother than the QA directory (or other directoryyou have designated to contain the QA files), thatdirectory must be listed in the PATH= section ofthe AUTOEXEC.BAT.
4. You can use a .CFG file other thanUSERDIAG.CFG if you use the command line“USRCONFIG=filename,” when running thediagnostic programs. For example, you mightuse: QAPLPRO /USRCONFIG=MYTESTS.CFG.
146 PC Server HMM
USERDIAG.CFG Example: An exampleUSERDIAG.CFG file might look like the following:
Note
You can have more than one command-line parameterfor any given test.
When you view these tests on the Test Group window forthe User Diag test group, they appear as follows:
(♦) 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem(♦) Generic 1(♦) Generic 2(♦) CMD 1(♦) CMD 2(♦) CMD 3
The diagnostic program automatically assigns a testnumber to each test. The test numbers start at 201 andcontinue upward as needed. The numbers for the testslisted above are as follows:
202 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem203 Generic 1204 Generic 2205 CMD 1206 CMD 2207 CMD 3
Program Name TestDescription
Command-LineParameter
BBSMODEM.EXE; 9600 Baud 5Line Modem;
5
TEST1.EXE; Generic 1; TEST2.EXE; Generic 2; TESTALL.EXE; CMD 1; 1TESTALL.EXE; CMD 2; 2TESTALL.EXE; CMD 3; 3
Internal SCSI DrivesThe server supports small computer system interface(SCSI) drives. You can attach multiple SCSI drives to thepreinstalled SCSI-2 adapter.
If you install additional SCSI devices in a non-disk-arraymodel, you must set a unique identification (ID) for eachSCSI device that you connect to the SCSI-2 Fast/WidePCI-Bus adapter, so that the SCSI-2 adapter can identifythe devices and ensure that different devices do notattempt to transfer data at the same time.
The SCSI IDs in disk-array models with the SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCI-Bus Adapter are hard-coded in thebackplane of the hot-swap bay and preset for the CD-ROMdrive. Do not attempt to change the SCSI IDs for internalSCSI devices on disk-array models.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 147
Refer to Table 1 on page 148 before setting SCSI IDs.Do not set the SCSI IDs for other devices to these values.
Note
Any information about SCSI drives also applies toother SCSI devices, such as scanners and printers.
Setting SCSI IDs for Internal Devices: Fornon-disk-array models, Fast/Wide (16-bit) devices supportSCSI IDs 0 to 15; narrow (8-bit) devices support SCSI IDs0 to 7. For disk-array models, the external channelconnector supports SCSI IDs 0 to 7; the internal channelconnector (only one of the two internal channel connectorscan be used at one time) also supports SCSI IDs 0 to 7.
Note
For disk-array models, devices attached to theexternal connector and internal connector areaccessed independently. A SCSI ID of 0 assigned toan internal device and a SCSI ID of 0 assigned to anexternal device does not create a conflict.
Table 1. SCSI IDs for Preinstalled SCSI Devices
SCSI ID Bay Device
Non-Disk-Array Models
6 1 Hard Disk Drive1
3 4 CD-ROM Drive
7 N/A SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCIAdapter
Disk-Array Models2
0–53 1–6 Hot-SwappableHard DiskDrives4
6 7 CD-ROM Drive
7 N/A SCSI-2Fast/WidePCI-Bus RAIDAdapter
Note:
1. This only applies to models with a hard disk drivepreinstalled in bay 1.
2. Or non-disk-array models with the hot-swap bay optioninstalled.
3. SCSI IDs are hard-coded into the hot-swap baybackplane.
4. Two hard disk drives are preinstalled in some disk-arraymodels in bays 1 and 2. The SCSI IDs for the two harddisk drives are 0 and 1.
148 PC Server HMM
The drive from which you will start the non-disk-arrayserver (also known as the boot or startup drive) shouldhave a SCSI ID of 6. Therefore, if the server was notsupplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive and you installhard disk drives, set the SCSI ID of the first drive (the bootdrive) to 6.
Note
If the BIOS is version M54PE_08 or earlier and youhave two PCI SCSI adapters installed in the PCI slots,the system will start from the hard disk drive attachedto the SCSI adapter with the least amount ofRead-only memory (ROM) and the lowest ROMaddress space. (In the case of equal ROM size, thesystem scans from slot 1 to 3 and assigns slot 1 asthe lowest ROM address.) Therefore, in order for thesystem to load the operating system correctly, connectthe startup drive to the SCSI adapter with the lowestROM address space. If the version of BIOS is laterthan M54PE_08, and you have two PCI SCSIadapters installed in the PCI slots, the system will startfrom the hard disk drive attached to the SCSI adapterin descending order from slot 3 to slot 1.
If the disk-array model was supplied with a preinstalledhard disk drive in bay 1, this drive is the startup drive, andit already has a SCSI ID of 0. The SCSI ID of thepreinstalled hard disk drive in bay 1 of non-disk-arraymodels is set to 6.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the SCSI devices forinformation about setting a SCSI ID.
The SCSI-2 adapter in the server has two internalconnectors and one external connector:
� On non-disk-array models, the SCSI-2 adapter hasone internal connector for an 8-bit cable, and oneinternal connector for a 16-bit cable.
Non-disk-array models that are supplied with apreinstalled wide hard disk drive use a 16-bit internalconnector. Non-disk-array models that are notsupplied with a preinstalled hard disk drive orsupplied with a narrow hard disk drive use an 8-bitinternal connector.
� On the disk-array models, the SCSI-2 adapter hastwo internal connectors for 16-bit cables.
Note
To keep the external channel available for use onthe preinstalled RAID adapter, use Channel 2 forconnecting internal SCSI devices.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 149
ExternalChannel 1
InternalChannel 1
InternalChannel 2
� On all models, the external connector is for 16-bitcable.
The SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter supports a total ofseven 8-bit or fifteen 16-bit SCSI devices. The SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCI-Bus Adapter supports a total of fourteen16-bit SCSI devices.
Note
If you plan to install both internal and external SCSIdevices, you must follow the instructions given in“External SCSI Devices” on page 508 in addition tothe instructions in this section.
Termination (Internal SCSI Devices): Thedevices at both ends of the SCSI bus must be terminated.If you attach SCSI devices (internal or external), you mustterminate the last device in the chain. You must removethe termination from the other devices within the chain. Ifyou attach external devices to a non-disk-array model withinternal devices attached, you must also change thetermination setting of the SCSI-2 adapter from the defaultin the SCSISelect utility program, as described in“SCSISelect Utility Program” on page 547.
Note
Read the README file on the SCSI-2 Fast/WidePCI-Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette forupdated information. Select Option Diskette from thefirst menu.
Termination on disk-array models is automatically set.
The requirements for terminating internal SCSI devices onnon-disk-array models are:
� If you attach internal SCSI devices to only one of theSCSI-2 adapter internal connectors, you mustterminate the last internal device on the bus (cable)and disable the termination on the other devicesconnected to the internal SCSI connector. TheSCSI-2 adapter is already terminated.
� If you attach internal SCSI devices to both of theSCSI-2 adapter internal connectors, you must
150 PC Server HMM
terminate the last internal device on each internalcable and disable the termination on the otherdevices connected to the internal SCSI connectors.You must also change the termination setting of theSCSI-2 adapter from the default in the SCSISelectutility program, as described in “SCSISelect UtilityProgram” on page 547.
Note
You can use only one of the two internal SCSIconnectors on the SCSI-2 adapter if you connectboth internal and external devices.
A CD-ROM drive is installed in bay 4 of non-disk-arraymodels and bay 7 of disk-array models. In non-disk-arraymodels that are supplied with a narrow hard disk drive anarrow (8-bit) cable is provided. In non-disk-array modelsthat are not supplied with a hard disk drive:
� The CD-ROM drive is terminated.� A narrow (8-bit) cable is provided in these models.
If you install 8-bit drives above the CD-ROM drive inbays 5–9, remove the termination from those drives.
� If you install a drive in bay 1, you must terminate thatdrive and remove the termination from the CD-ROMdrive
� If you install a 16-bit device, you must purchase a16-bit cable and a 16-bit to 8-bit SCSI InternalConverter to connect the CD-ROM drive to the 16-bitcable.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the SCSI device formore information about termination.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 151
Power SupplyNote: Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable)
is set for the correct voltage.
If the power-on indicator is not on, and if the power-supplyfan is not running, check the power cord for properinstallation and continuity.
If the power cord is OK, either the power supply isdefective or a defective device is causing the power supplyto shut off. Check the power supply voltages.
If the voltages are incorrect, replace the power supply. Ifthe voltages are correct, and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
P1
P2
P3
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6
1 2 3 4
Power Good+4.8V+11.52V−10.8V
+5.25V+12.60V−13.2V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2
3 4 5 6
−4.5V+4.8V+4.8V+4.8V
−5.5V+5.25V+5.25V+5.25V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
4, 5, 6 1, 2, 3 +4.8V +5.25V
152 PC Server HMM
P4 and P641
P5, P7, and P8
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2, 3 2, 3
1 4
+4.8V+11.52V
+5.25V+12.6V
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2, 3 2, 3
1 4
+11.52V+4.8V
+12.6V+5.25V
Setup ProgramTo access the Setup program:
1. Remove all diskettes from the server.
Note
Never start the Setup program while using theEISA Configuration program.
2. Power-on the server and watch the screen. Be readyto act quickly.
3. After the IBM logo screen appears and then quicklydisappears, you are prompted to Press <F1> or <F2>
to enter SETUP. As soon as you see that prompt,press the correct F-key (F1 or F2) . If the Setupprogram screen doesn't appear, restart the systemand try again.
Note
If a configuration error occurs, a prompt appearsbefore the operating system starts (see“Configuration Conflicts” on page 274).
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to view orchange the configuration.
You must correctly exit from the Setup program tosave the configuration information.
5. Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit menuoption on the menu bar.
6. Select Exit menu from the menu bar.7. Select Save changes and exit.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 153
Specifications Size
� With pedestal: – Depth: 473 mm (18.6 in.)
585 mm (23.0 in.) with cable cover – Height: 651 mm (25.6 in.) – Width: 315 mm (12.4 in.)
� Without pedestal: – Depth: 473 mm (18.6 in.)
585 mm (23.0 in.) with cable cover – Height: 622 mm (24.5 in.) – Width: 195 mm (7.7 in.)
Weight
� Minimum configuration as shipped: 19.0 kg (42 lb)� Maximum configuration as shipped: 19.5 kg (43 lb)
Environment
� Air temperature:– System on: 10° to 35° C
(50° to 95° F)Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
– System on: 10° to 32° C(50° to 90° F)Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)
– System off: 10° to 43° C(50° to 110° F)Maximum Altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
� Humidity:– System on: 8% to 80%– System off: 8% to 80%
� Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft)
Electrical Input
� Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz) is required � Input voltage:
– Low range:- Minimum: 90 V ac- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range:- Minimum: 180 V ac- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately:
- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.07 kVA - Maximum configuration: 0.64 kVA
Total Power Available for Drives
� Nominal Operating Current allowed:– +5 V dc line: 9.3 A– +12 V dc line: 6.0 A
Heat Output
� Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units (BTU) perhour: – Minimum configuration:
150 BTU (44 watts) – Maximum configuration:
1434 BTU (420 watts)
154 PC Server HMM
System Board ReplacementType 8640 computers have one or two processors, andother components installed on the system board. Whenreplacing the system board, remove all of the installedcomponents from the old system board and install them onthe new system board. If the problem remains, check thefollowing:
� The primary processor is installed and seatedcorrectly in socket U2 on the system board.
� If installed, the secondary processor is seatedcorrectly in socket U3 on the system board.
� All other components removed from the old systemboard are installed and seated correctly on the newsystem board.
Note
If the processor(s) are not seated correctly,intermittent problems can occur.
SymmetricMultiprocessors/MultiprocessingSome PC Server computers incorporate a 90MHz Pentiumprocessor and a second upgradeability processor socketon the system board to support SymmetricMultiprocessors/Multiprocessing (SMP). The SMPcapability extends processing performance by allowingtasks to be dispatched to the next available processorrather then being queued until the busy processor hascompleted its task. The SMP capability also provides alevel of high availability in that with some operatingsystems, such as OS/2 SMP, run in a uni-processor modeif one of the processors should experience a failure. Thisfunction will allow the LAN to continue operation so thatservice can be scheduled at a non-critical time.
Locations� “Input/Output Connectors” on page 156� “Internal Drive Bays (Disk-Array Models)” on
page 157� “Internal Drive Bays (Non-Disk-Array Models)” on
page 159� “System Board” on page 161� “Connections” on page 162� “Jumpers” on page 162
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 155
Input/Output Connectors
115
Power Connector
Display Connector
SCSI Connector
Expansion Slots
Keyboard ConnectorMouse ConnectorSerial ConnectorsParallel Connector
Keyboard Connector: The cable from the keyboardconnects here.
Mouse Connector: This is where the mouse cableconnects to the server. This connector sometimes iscalled an auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.
Serial Connectors: Two 9-pin serial connectors, A(COM1) and B (COM2), are provided. The serial signalcable for a modem or other serial device usually connectshere. If you are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a9-pin to 25-pin adapter cable.
Parallel Connector: One 25-pin parallel port is provided.This is where the signal cable for a parallel printer, orother parallel device, connects to the server.
SCSI Connector: Attach external SCSI devices here.
Display Connector: The display signal cable attaches tothe connector on this adapter.
156 PC Server HMM
Internal Drive Bays (Disk-Array Models)Internal drives are installed in bays. The bays arenumbered 1 through 10.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover plates (sometimes called bezels) cover the front ofsome installed drives. If you install a drive that usesremovable media (diskette, optical disc, or tape), you mightneed to remove or change the cover plate.
� Bays 1–6 are for 3.5-inch hot-swappable hard diskdrives.
� Bay 7 has a preinstalled SCSI CD-ROM drive.� Bays 8 and 9 are for 3.5-inch diskette interface
devices, such as a diskette drive or a tape backupunit that uses the diskette cable.
The system board in the server supports a maximumof two diskette interface devices. You can install asecond 3.5-inch diskette interface device in bay 9.
� Bay 10 is for a 3.5-inch hard disk drive only. Be surethe screw holes in the device line up with the screwholes in bay.
� Disk-array models are supplied with a 2-drop SCSIcable.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 157
The following table shows the widths, types, and maximumheights for the drives that you can install in each bay.
Table 2. Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes (Disk-ArrayModels)
Bay DriveWidth
DriveType
Maximum DriveHeight
1–6 3.5-inch Harddisk
41.3 mm (1.6 inches)
7 5.25-inch CD-ROM 41.3 mm (1.6 inches)
8, 9 3.5-inch Diskette1 25.4 mm (1 inch)
10 3.5-inch Harddisk
25.4 mm (1 inch), witha drive in bay 9
41.3 mm (1.6 inches),with no drive in bay 9
Note: 1 Or a drive that connects to the diskette cable. Be sure theholes in the drive align with the drive housing.
158 PC Server HMM
Internal Drive Bays (Non-Disk-ArrayModels)Internal drives are installed in bays. The bays arenumbered 1 through 9.
8
7
6
5
4
9
1
2
3
Note
If you install a drive that uses removable media(diskette, optical disc, or tape), you might need toremove or change the cover plate.
� Bay 1 is for 3.5-inch hard disk drives only. Somemodels are supplied with a hard disk drivepreinstalled in bay 1.
� Bays 2 and 3 are for 3.5-inch diskette interfacedevices, such as a diskette drive or tape backup unitthat uses the diskette cable. All models are suppliedwith a diskette drive preinstalled in bay 3.
� Bay 4 has a preinstalled SCSI CD-ROM drive.� Bays 5–9 are for 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch drives.� The system board supports a maximum of two
diskette interface devices. You can install a second3.5-inch diskette interface device in bay 2. Be surethe screw holes in the device line up with the screwholes in bay.
� Bays 5–9 contain trays for housing 3.5-inch drives. Ifyou want to install a 5.25-inch drive in one of thesebays, you must remove screws and the tray beforeattempting to install the drive.
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 159
� You can install a full-high drive between bays 6 and 7by removing the trays from these bays. You cannotinstall full-high drives between bays 4 and 5, orbetween bays 8 and 9.
� If you are installing one or two integrated driveelectronics (IDE) drives, you must purchase an IDEcable, such as in the PC Server Cable Kit.
� If you are connecting two hard disk drives to the IDEcontroller, you must reset the jumpers on one of thedrives, as specified in the documentation suppliedwith the drive.
� If a preinstalled hard disk drive was not supplied withthe server and you plan to have more than four 8-bitinternal SCSI drives (including the CD-ROM drive),you must use an optional 7-drop SCSI cable in placeof the 4-drop SCSI cable supplied with the server.
To install 16-bit devices, you need a 16-bit cable (anda 16-bit to 8-bit SCSI Internal Converter if you want toconnect the CD-ROM drive to the 16-bit cable). See“Internal SCSI Drives” on page 147 for additionalinformation.
� The IBM 3.5-inch rewritable optical disc drive requiresa special mounting bracket.
The following table shows the widths, types, and maximumheights for the drives that you can install in each bay.
Table 3. Maximum Allowable Drive Sizes (Non-Disk-ArrayModels)
Bay DriveWidth
DriveType
Maximum DriveHeight
1 3.5-inch Harddisk
25.4 mm (1 inch),with a drive in bay 2
41.3 mm (1.6 inches),with no drive in bay 2
2, 3 3.5-inch Diskette1 25.4 mm (1 inch)
4 5.25-inch CD-ROM 41.3 mm (1.6 inches)
5–9 3.5-inchor5.25-inch
Harddisk,removablemedia2
41.3 mm (1.6 inches)
Notes:
1. Or a drive that connects to the diskette cable. Be surethe holes in the drive align with the drive housing.
2. Removable media include CDs, optical discs, and tapes.
160 PC Server HMM
System Board
W6
W16
W21
W10
W11
W17
FLASHBIOS
REAL TIMECLOCK
J26
W38
W31
W37
W32
W34
W33
W22
W23
W25
J11
J8
J6
J13
J23 PCI 3
U35
U36
U38
U39
U44
U43
U46
U47
J22 PCI 2
J21 PCI 1SharedPCI/EISASlot
J20 EISA Slot 6
J19 EISA Slot 5
J18 EISA Slot 4
J17 EISA Slot 3
J16 EISA Slot 2
UPGRADE
CPU
MAIN
CPU
W1
J12J2
J1
J9J1
0
W30
W20
W36W2
W15
W18
W14W13W24
W12
W35
W5 U28U27U26U25 U32
U31U30U29
J15 EISA Slot 1Secondary CacheMemory UpgradeSockets
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 161
Connections
Jumpers
Header Configuration Connect To
W12/W31 Speaker Speaker
W18/W37 Power LED Pins 1-3
W24/W38 IDE Hard Drive LED IDE Hard Drive
W35 CPU Fan Connector Fan
W36 CPU Fan Connector Fan
J1/J2/J26 Power SupplyConnector
P1 to J1P2 to J2P3 to J26
J6 Mouse Connector Mouse
J8 Keyboard Connector Keyboard
J9 Parallel PortConnector
Parallel Device
J10 Floppy DriveConnector
Diskette Drive
J11 Serial Port COMM AConnector
Serial Device
J12 Serial Port COMM BConnector
Serial Device
J13 ISA IDE Connector IDE Hard Drive
N/A SCSI LED SCSI Option Card
N/A SCSI DeviceConnector
SCSI Option Card
Jumper Description Setting
W1 L1 Cache Mode Open - L1Write-Back (Default) Closed - L1Write-Through
W2 Reserved Open
W5 L2 Cache Size Pins 1-2 - L2 CacheSize = 256K(Default) Pins 2-3 - L2 CacheSize = 512K
W6 CPU Clock Pins 1-2 Pentium60/90MHz Pins 2-3 Pentium66/100MHz
162 PC Server HMM
Jumper Description Setting
W10 L2 Cache Size Pins 1-2 - L2 CacheSize = 256K(Default) Pins 2-3 - L2 CacheSize = 512K
W16 Reserved Pins 1-2 (Default)
W17 Reserved Closed (Default)
W20 Monitor Selection Open - MonochromeMonitor Setting Closed - ColorMonitor Setting(Default)
W21 Reserved Open - AT StyleKeyboard Closed - PS/2 StyleKeyboard andMouse (Default)
W22 Reserved Open (Default)
W23 Reserved Open (Default)
W25 ISQ IDE IRQSelect
Pins 1-2 - ISA IDEusing IRQ 14Primary IDEController (Default) Pins 2-3 - ISA IDEusing IRQ 15Secondary Controller
W30 Reserved Open (Default)
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 163
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThis index supports Type 8640 computers.
Always start “General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO)” onpage 4.
The Symptom-to-FRU lists symptoms, errors, and thepossible causes. The most likely cause is listed first. Usethis Symptom-to-FRU Index and the Symptom-to-FRUIndex (QAPlus/PRO) on page 61 in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual to help you decide which FRUs tohave available when servicing the computer.
In the following error codes and model numbers, X can beany number or letter.
Where the model number is used to identify an error, XXused in place of the last 2 digits can be any number orletter.
Note
For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus/PROdiagnostics code, refer to the manual for that device.
For information on: Go to:
Additional service help.(For example, 0S/2Trap)errors, or
“Related Service Information”on page 453.
Possible software andhardware mismatchproblems. (Notrepairable by replacingFRUs)
“Software/Hardware MismatchProblems” on page 550.
Memory ConfigurationProblems
“Memory” on page 141.
Replacing the systemboard does not correctthe problem.
See “System BoardReplacement” on page 155.
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
101, 102(System and microprocessorerror)
1. System Board
0103(System Timer error)
1. System Board
106(System and microprocessorerror)
1. System Board
0110(Parity Check 1 XXXX, runSetup)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
111(I/O channel check error)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
164 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
114(Adapter read-only memoryerror)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. Failing Adapter
0115(Parity Check 1 XXXX, runSetup)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0120(Previous boot incomplete,default configuration used)
1. Run Setup 2. Battery/CMOS Chip 3. System Board
0130(Invalid NVRAM media type)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
151(Real time clock error)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. System Board
161(Real time clock batteryerror)
1. Battery
0162 (Models EXX)(Configuration error for slotXX, run Setup; then, run theEISA Configuration Utility)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
162 (Configuration error)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
0163 (Real-Time Clock error)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
164(Memory configurationchanged)
1. Run Configuration
165(Micro Channel adapterconfiguration changed)
1. Run Configuration,insert Referencediskette
0171(System battery is dead)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
0173(System CMOS checksumbad)
1. Run Setup 2. Battery/CMOS Chip 3. System Board
0174(Invalid ISA Configuration)
1. Run Setup2. Look for configuration
conflicts. 3. Battery/CMOS Chip
0175(EISA Configuration Error,run the configuration utility)
1. Run Setup 2. Run EISA
Configuration Utility 3. Battery/CMOS Chip 4. System Board
176(Computer cover or cablecover was removed withouta key being used)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
177, 178(Hardware error)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. System Board
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 165
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
184(Power-on passwordcorrupted)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
185(Drive startup sequenceinformation corrupted)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
186(System board or securityhardware error)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. System Board
189(An attempt was made toaccess the computer withan invalid password)
1. Run Configuration,enter theadministratorpassword
201(Memory test error)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0214(System RAM failed atoffset XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0215(Failing Bits XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0216(Extended RAM failed atoffset XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0221(Shadow RAM failed atoffset)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0254(System board Cache error,Cache disabled)
1. System Board Cache 2. System Board
229(Cache memory test error.Be sure the cache memoryis enabled.)
1. Cache memory 2. System Board
0301(Keyboard or keyboardcontroller error)
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
0302(Keyboard locked)
1. Unlock the keyboard 2. Keyboard 3. System Board
0303(Keyboard Error, stuck key)
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
604(Diskette drive error)
1. Diskette Drive 2. Drive Cable 3. System Board
0610(Incorrect drive A type)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
166 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0612(Incorrect drive B type)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
0632(Diskette drive A error)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
0642(Diskette drive B error)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
662(Diskette drive configurationerror)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
762(Processor configurationerror)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. Run Diagnostics
962(Parallel port error)
1. Disconnect externalcable on parallel port.
2. Internal Cable 3. System Board
1162(System-board serial port 1or 2 error)
1. Disconnect externalcable on serial port.
2. Run Configuration
1300(Operating system notfound)
1. Run Setup withknown good diskette
2. Fixed Disk Drive3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. Diskette Drive 5. System Board
1701(Fixed Disk X failed)
1. Run Setup2. Fixed Disk Drive3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. System Board
1702(Fixed Disk Drive Controllerfailed)
1. Run Setup2. Fixed Disk Adapter3. Fixed Disk Drive
4. System Board
1801(No room for PCI optionROM)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Adapter 3. System Board
1802(No more I/O spaceavailable for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
1803(No more memory (above1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 167
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
1804(No more memory (below1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
1805(PCI option ROM checksumerror)
1. Remove Failing PCICard
2. System Board
1962(No valid boot device found,be sure the drive you wantto start from is the bootsequence)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. Run Diagnostics 3. Drive Cable
4. Hard Disk Drive 5. System Board
2401(Monitor type does notmatch CMOS)
1. Run Setup and entercorrect monitor type
2. Video Display 3. Video Adapter 4. System Board
2462(Video controller error)
1. Display 2. System Board
000247100 (Type 8641) 1. L2 processor cachewas disabled, do thefollowing� Boot the system
diagnostics. � Run the
processor tests.� When asked if
you want to turnon the processorcache, reply,"yes," and theerror will becleared.
I9990301(Fixed boot sector error, nooperating system installed)
1. Install operatingsystem to hard diskdrive.
8601, 8603(Pointing Device Error)
1. Pointing Device 2. System Board
168 PC Server HMM
Parts Listings
1
56
8
7
12
10
13
9
1415
16
11
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3
2
4
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 169
System Note
The model(s) listed for the following FRUs indicatesFRUs that the models may contain at the time ofshipping. However, other FRUs are supported in eachmodel as options.
Index System Unit (PC Server 320 - Type 8640) 1 Access Cover 06H8930
2 DASD Hot Swap Backplane (Models 1Y0, 06H76691YT, MZ1, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV,MDS, MZ0, MZV, 1D0, 1DS)
3 Hot Swap Shell (Models 1D0, 1DS, 1Y0, 06H50681YT, MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS,MZ1, MZ0, MZV,)
4 Hot Swap Door Assembly (Models 1Y0, 06H50701YT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS,MZ1, MZ0, MZV, 1D0, 1DS)
5 1/2-Inch Hard Disk Drive Adapter Tray 06H2652(Models 0D0, 0DV,0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT)MD0, MDS, MDV, MX0, MXT, MY0,MYR, MYT, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
6 Hard Disk Drtive,see DASD (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640)
7 DASD Tray - Hot Swap (Wide) (Models 1D0, 06H39561DS, 1Y0, 1YT, MD0, MDS, MDV, MY0,MYR, MYT, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
7 DASD Tray - Hot Swap Option (Models 71G62921D0, 1DS, 1Y0, 1YT, 1Z0)
8 Base Frame (Models 0D0, 0DV, 06H89330T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1D0, 1DS,1Y0, 1YT, 1Z0)
8 Base Frame (Models MD0, MDS, MDV, 06H8934MX0, MXT, MY0, MYR, MYT,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
9 Front Bezel/Door Assembly 06H893510 Keylock with Keys 33F843311 Keylock with Keys 33F843312 1/2-Inch Blank Bezel 71G077013 1/4-Inch Blank Bezel 71G0771
14 CD-ROM Drive,see DASD (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640)
15 16/8 BIT SCSI Converter (Models 0T0, 0XT, 92F03240YT, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0,MDV, MDS, MZ0, MZ1, MZV, 0D0, 0DV)
16 Speaker 06H264918 Card Guide (Models 0D0, 0DV, 71G0757
0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1D0,1DS, 1Y0, 1YT)
18 Card Guide (Models MD0, MDS, MDV, MX0, 96G2111MXT, MY0, MYR, MYT, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
17 Fan Assembly with Connector (Models 0D0, 06H26470DV, 0T0, 0XT,0Y0, 0YT, 1D0, 1DS, 1Y0, 1YT)
17 Fan Assembly with Connector (Models MD0, 96G2112MDS, MDV, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYR, MYT,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
19 Pedestal 07H0516
170 PC Server HMM
Index System Unit (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640) continued20 DASD 2-Drive Cage (Models MD0, MDS, 06H8937
MDV, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYR, MYT,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
20 DASD 3-Drive Cage (Models 0D0, 0DV, 06H89380T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1D0,1DS, 1Y0, 1YT)
21 Diskette Drive,see DASD (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640)
22 Hard Disk Drive,see DASD (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640)
23 Casting I/O Back Panel (Models MX0, 96G2107MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
24 300 Watt Power Supply Assembly 71G0044 with Switch
Keyboard with Cable,see “Keyboards (101/102 Key)” on page 175
Memory Riser Card (Models MX0, MXT, 96G3692MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 06H8940 � 32X5/16-Inch Screws (6 each) � Captive Screws (2 each) � Diskette Drive M3 Screws (2 each) � EMC Ground Contacts (4 each) � EMC I/O Spring � EMC Keyboard/Mouse Clip � FEM-Nut 4-40 Screws (2 each) � FEM-Nut 2-56 Screws (2 each) � Hard Drive 6-32 Screws (2 each) � I/O EISA Blank � I/O Micro Channel Blank � Memory Card Standoff � System Board Edge Support � System Board M3X8 Hex Screws (3 each) � System Board Standoff � Thumb Screw � Video Gasket
Mouse 06H4595PC Server 300 Label 06H6003PC Server 320 Label 06H6004Pressing I/O Back Panel - Old Models only 96G2411(Models MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR)
SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Card (Models 0T0, 0XT, 06H85740Y0, 0YT, 0D0, 0DV MDS, MZ1)
SCSI Fast/Wide ARRAY Card (Models 06H5078MDS, MZ1, 1D0, 1DS)
Shadow Box 96G2411SVGA Card (Models 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 71G0031
1Y0, 1YT)SVGA Card (Models 0D0, 0DV, 0Z0, 06H91140ZV, 1D0, 1DS, 1Z0)
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 171
Index Power (PC Server 300/320 - Type 8640)Battery (Models MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, 33F8354MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Power Button with Spring 06H2191 Power Cord,
see “Power Cords” on page 176.Real-Time Clock with Battery (Models 0D0, 06H33980DV, 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1D0,1DS, 1Y0, 1YT)see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Index System Boards (PC Server 320 - Type 8640)4MB Memory SIMM - Parity (Models 73G3233
MX0, MXT)8MB Memory SIMM - Parity (Models 73G32340D0, 0DV, 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1D0,1DS, 1Y0, 1YT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0,MDV, MDS, MZ0, MZ1, MZV,
256KB Cache (Models MD0, MDV, MDS, 96G2121MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MZ0,
MZ1, MZV)512KB Cache (Models MD0, MDV, MDS, 96G2413MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MZ0,
MZ1, MZV)P54C 50/75 Processor with Heat Sink 95G9613(Models 0T0, 0XT, MX0, MXT)
P54C 60/90 Processor with Heat Sink 06H6142(Models 0Y0, 0YT, 1Y0, 1YT)
P54C 60/90 Processor with Heat Sink 95G9614(Models MY0, MYT, MYR)
P54C 100/66 Processor with Heat Sink 75H8846(Models 0Z0, 0ZV, 1Z0)
P54C 100/66 Processor with Heat Sink 96G2415(Models MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
P54C 133/66 Processor with Heat Sink 96G2423(Models MD0, MDV, MDS)
P54C 133/66 Processor with Heat Sink 06H9492(Models 0D0, 0DV, 1D0, 1DS)
Heat Sink with Clip (Models 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 06H61370YT, 1Y0, 1YT)
Heat Sink with Clip (Models MX0, MXT, MY0, 95G9612 MYT, MYR)
System Board without Memory and Processor 06H2173(Models 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 1Y0, 1YT, 0D0,0DV, 1D0, 1DS)
System Board with SVGA and SCSI Fast/Wide 96G3694(Models MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR, MD0,MDV, MDS, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
172 PC Server HMM
Index DASD (PC Server 320 - Type 8640)6 1GB Hard Disk Drive - Fast (Models 0T0, 06H6416
0XT, MX0, MXT)6 1GB Hard Disk Drive - Fast/Wide (Models 06H3371
0YT, MY0, MYT, MYR)6 2GB Hard Disk Drive - Fast/Wide (Models 06H8561
MDV, MDS, MZ1, MZV, 0DV, 0ZV, 1DS)15 2X SCSI CD-ROM Drive (Models 1Y0, 1YT, 06H3847
0Y0, 0YT, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT, MYR)15 4X SCSI CD-ROM Drive (Models 0D0, 0DV, 88G4921
0T0, 0XT, 1D0, 1DS, MD0, MDV, MDS,MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
23 1.44MB Diskette Drive 93F2361
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 173
Cables
8 1
67
2
34
5
Index Cables (PC Server 320 - Type 8640)1 Cable Cover with Lock 06H50722 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable - 4X 82G3626
(Models 0T0, 0XT, 0Y0, MX0, MXT)SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable - 7X 06H6440(Models 0T0, 0XT, 0YT, MX0, MXT, 0D0,0DV, 1D0, 1DS, 1Z0)
3 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Fast Cable - 2X 06H5065(Models 1D0, 1DS, 1Y0, 1YT, 1Z0, MY0,MYT, MYR, MD0, MDV, MDS, MZ0,
MZ1, MZV)4 Diskette Drive Cable with power 92F04235 Parallel DATA Cable 06H21666 Serial DATA Cable 06H21657 SCSI Fast/Wide Internal/External Port Cable 06H6864
(Models 1D0, 1DS, 1Y0, 1YT, 1Z0)8 LED Cable Assembly 06H8936
C2 Cable Assembly 06H8767DASD Status Cable (Models 1Y0, 1YT, 06H7766MDS, MZ1, 1D0, 1DS)
Keylock Cable 06H8766SCSI Short Cable to I/O Casting (Models 96G2102MD0, MDV, MDS, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT,MYR, MZ0, MZ1, MZV)
174 PC Server HMM
Keyboards (101/102 Key)Keyboards (101/102 Key)
Arabic 1391490 Belgium-Dutch 1391414 Belgium-French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian-Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian-Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia/Croatia/Bosnia 1393669
South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss-French 1391412 Swiss-German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286
U.K. English 1391406U.S. English (Models 0X0, 0XT, 0Y0, 0YT, 71G46461Y0, 1YT, MX0, MXT, MY0, MYT)
U.S. English (Models MD0, MDV, MZ0, MZV, 06H9743MDS, MZ1, 0D0, 0DV, 0Z0, 0ZV, 1D0,
1DS, 1Z0)U.S. English (E/ME/A use only) 1396790
PC Server 320 - Type 8640 175
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520
Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520
176 PC Server HMM
PC Server 500 - Type 8641
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 178Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 179
Administration Monitoring Utilities . . . . . . . 179Advanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Backing Up Your Disk-Array Configuration . 180Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration . . . 181Using the Advanced Functions . . . . . . 181
Changing the Write Policy . . . . . . . 181Formatting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 183Changing the RAID Parameters . . . . 183
Configuring the Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . 185RAID Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Hard Disk Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . 186Additional Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . 186The RAID Configuration Program Screens . 186
Drive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Obtaining Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . 188
Bay/Array Selection List . . . . . . . . 188Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure . . . . 189Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications 190Replacing a Faulty Drive . . . . . . . . . 190
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Installing Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . 193
Defining a Hot-Spare Drive . . . . . . . . 193Deleting a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 194Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 195Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array 196Defining Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . 196
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Primary Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . 199Optional Power Supply Drive Connector
Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective . . . . 200Redefining Space in an Array . . . . . . . . . 202Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or E . . . . 204Starting the RAID Configuration Program . . . 205
RAID Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . 205Main Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . 205
Viewing the RAID Configuration . . . . . . . 206Locations (System Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209No Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210SCSI Error Code Format . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 177
FeaturesIn addition to the following features, the PC Server 500 isshipped with a ServerGuide package that contains a set ofServerGuide Compact Discs (CDs). The easiest and mostefficient way to set up the server, install an operatingsystem, and take advantage of the latest software for thenetwork environment is to use the ServerGuide compactdiscs. Refer to the "User's Guide" that is shipped with theServerGuide Compact Discs.
Microprocessor
� P54C 90/60MHz Processor Complex
Memory
� Standard: 16 or 32 MB (Varies by model) 70 ns, ECC
Diskette Drives
� Standard: one 3.5-inch
Hard Disk Drives
� Number of drives and drive capacities varies by model
Keyboard and Mouse
� 101-key Keyboard � Mouse
Expansion
� 6 Micro Channel slots, 6 Standard slots� Up to 20 bays
Video
� SVGA Adapter � Compatibility
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)– Enhanced graphics adapter (EGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)– Multicolor graphics ARRAY (MCGA)
Integrated Functions
� Video port on an adapter� 2 serial ports� 1 parallel port
� Mouse port � Keyboard port� Battery-backed clock and calendar
Power Supply
� Power Supply: – Standard Primary: 434 watt – Optional Secondary: 220 watt
SCSI Controller (varies by model)
� IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Adapter� IBM Enhanced SCSI-2 RAID Adapter
Diagnostics and Test InformationThe following list contains problems and references fordiagnosing a PC Server 500 Type 8641.
178 PC Server HMM
Notes
Always start with "General Checkout (Micro Channel)"on page 19 in the PS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual
Problem Reference
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” onpage 209.
DASD Adapter Problems For non-disk-array models, see“SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547. SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-BusRAID Adapter, see “Disk ArrayConfiguration” on page 461.
Memory "General Checkout (MicroChannel)" on page 19 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual
Power Supply Voltages “Power Supplies” on page 199.
Miscellaneous "General Checkout (MicroChannel)" on page 19 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the PC Server 500 Type8641.
� “Administration Monitoring Utilities.”� “Advanced Functions” on page 180.� “Configuring the Disk Array” on page 185.� “Drive Maintenance” on page 187.� “Drivers” on page 191.� “Installing Internal Drives” on page 191.� “Performing Common Tasks” on page 193.� “Power Supplies” on page 199.� “RAID Recovery Procedure Not Effective” on
page 200.� “Redefining Space in an Array” on page 202.� “Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or E” on
page 204.� “Starting the RAID Configuration Program” on
page 205.� “Viewing the RAID Configuration” on page 206.
Administration Monitoring UtilitiesSeveral of the operating systems that your server supportsalso support (for disk-array models) RAID monitoringprograms. The monitoring programs are:
� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor� OS/2 RAID NetFinity/Alert Manager
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 179
� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration for NetWare� IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines
These programs include many of the functions contained inthe IBM RAID configuration program, but unlike thatprogram, they reside on top of your operating system anddo not require you to start the program from a startablediskette or from a startable compact disc. You can startthese programs from your active operating systemdesktop.
Each of these monitoring programs allow you view theRAID configuration, reconfigure the array when replacing adefective drive, and perform tuning tasks such as changingthe write policy.
To monitor the drive status with OS/2, Novell NetWare,Microsoft Windows, and Banyan Vines, you must run theadministration programs. The RAID controller diskettecontains files that must be installed when you use OS/2,NetWare, or Banyan Vines.
See the README file on the RAID controller diskette forinstallation and usage instructions for OS/2 RAIDController Administration and Monitor, OS/2 RAIDController Administration for Netware, and IBM RAIDController Administration for Banyan Vines. For OS/2RAID NetFinity Alert Manager, see the ServerGuide CDdocumentation.
Advanced FunctionsYou can select several utilities from the AdvancedFunctions menu. They include:
� Backup configuration to diskette� Restore configuration to diskette� Change the write policy� Change the RAID parameters� Format a drive
Backing Up Your Disk-Array Configuration:The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk-arrayconfiguration information in its EEPROM (electronicallyerasable programmable read-only memory) module. Thedisk-array configuration is vital information. To protect thisinformation, back up the information to diskette as soon asyou have completed your tasks. You need a blank,formatted, 3.5-inch diskette.
To back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette:
1. Label the blank diskette “Disk Array ConfigurationBackup,” and date it.
2. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
3. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.
180 PC Server HMM
4. Select Backup config. to diskette .5. Remove the RAID controller diskette from the drive
and insert the blank diskette.6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration: Torestore the disk-array configuration information in the RAIDadapter EEPROM module, use the RAID controller disketteand an up-to-date Disk Array Configuration Backupdiskette.
Note
Because dynamic changes in the configuration of yourdisk array occur due to hot-spare drive replacement orother drive maintenance activity, the configurationbackup information on the diskette might be differentfrom that in the adapter. It is important that you backup the disk-array configuration information frequently,to keep the backup information on the diskette current.
To restore the RAID configuration information:
1. Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into theprimary drive and power-on the system. If the systemalready is on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.3. Select Restore config. from diskette .4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Using the Advanced Functions: This sectiongives the procedures for using the advanced functions,such as changing the write policy, changing the RAIDparameters, and formatting a drive.
Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you topotential loss of data and should be heeded beforeanswering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAIDconfiguration program.
Changing the Write Policy: When you configure alogical drive, the RAID adapter automatically sets the writepolicy to write-through (WT) mode, where the completionstatus is sent after the data is written to the hard diskdrive. To improve performance, you can change this writepolicy to write-back (WB) mode, where the completionstatus is sent after the data is copied to cache memory,but before the data is actually written to the storagedevice.
Although you gain performance with write-back mode, itcreates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure.This is because the system gets a completion statusmessage when the data reaches cache memory, butbefore data is actually written to the storage device.
To change the write policy:
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 181
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.3. Select Change write policy from the Advanced
Functions menu. The cursor will be active in theLogical Drive list.
4. Select the logical drive whose write policy you want tochange. The Advanced Functions screen appears.
Note
Your information might be different from thatshown in this screen.
The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID,the size in megabytes of each logical drive, the RAIDlevel you assigned to that logical drive, and the dateyou created it.
The status of the logical drive is also shown. Goodmeans that all is well with the drive; Critical meansthat you must replace the hard disk drive and rebuildthe logical drive. (You will have received a messagetelling you what has happened to the drive.) Offlinemeans that the logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata in that drive is lost.
5. Locate the Wrt pol (Write Policy) field in the LogicalDrive list.
The write policy is shown as either WT (write-through,which is the default setting) or WB (write-back).
6. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto select the logical drive whose write policy you wantto change.
Warning
If you change the write policy to write-back, waitat least 10 seconds after your last operationbefore you power-off the server. It takes thatlong for the system to move the data from thecache memory to the storage device. Failure tofollow this practice can result in lost data.
7. Press Enter to change the write policy.
Notice that WT changes to WB. You can press Enterto alternate between WT and WB.
8. When you have made your choice, press Esc toreturn to the Advanced Functions menu.
9. Select Exit . The Confirm pop-up window appearsasking you to confirm your action.
10. To return the setting to its original state, select No.To save your changes, select Yes.
11. Back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette. Refer to “Backing Up Your Disk-ArrayConfiguration” on page 180 for more information.
182 PC Server HMM
Formatting Drives: You can perform a low-levelformat on drives with RDY (ready), OFL (offline), or UNF(unformatted) status.
Note
The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functionsmenu provides a low-level format. If you install a newhard disk drive that requires a standard format, usethe Format command provided by your operatingsystem.
The Format program works like the low-level formatprogram in the advanced diagnostics portion of the systemprograms. It is provided in the IBM RAID configurationprogram so that you can perform a low-level format on adrive controlled by the RAID adapter.
To perform a low-level format:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.
Warning
A low-level format erases all data and programsfrom the drive.
3. Select Format drive . The low-level format programstarts.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
You can perform a low-level format on more than onedrive at a time.
Changing the RAID Parameters: You can changethe RAID parameters using the advanced functions byselecting Change RAID parameters .
The default settings are:
� Stripe unit size — 8K
The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on agiven disk before writing on the next disk. Tomaximize the overall performance, this stripe unitshould be chosen such that the stripe-unit size isclose to the size of the system I/O request. Thedefault is set to 8K data bytes.
Warning
Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is storedin the logical drives, the stripe unit cannot bechanged without destroying data in the logicaldrives.
� Rebuild priority — Equal.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 183
Rebuild priority can be set to equal, high, or low.When set to equal, the rebuild I/O request andsystem I/O request get equal priority in the executionorder.
When set to high, the rebuild I/O request will get ahigher priority than a system I/O request. In a heavilyloaded system (with a high rate of system I/Orequests), the high-priority rebuild can significantlyreduce the disk rebuild time at the expense ofdegraded handling of I/O requests.
When the rebuild priority is set to low, the rebuild I/Orequests can execute only if there is no pendingsystem I/O requests. In a moderate to heavily loadedsystem, low rebuild priority will increase the diskrebuild time significantly and provide better systemperformance.
Note
Rebuild priority can be changed without affectingdata in the logical drives.
� Parity placement — RA.
Warning
Once a parity placement scheme is chosen anddata stored, it cannot be changed withoutdestroying data.
Parity placement defines how parity is placed in thedisk array with respect to data. The followingillustration shows both the Left Symmetric (LS) andRight Asymmetric (RA) parity placement in afour-drive disk array. Here AAA, BBB, and CCC arethe data stripe units, and PP0 is the correspondingparity. Similarly DDD, EEE, and FFF are the datastripe units, and PP1 is the corresponding parity.
Right Asymmetric (RA) Left Symmetric (LS)
Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PPð AAA BBB CCC AAA BBB CCC PPð
DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD
GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH
JJJ KKK LLL PP3 PP3 JJJ KKK LLL
In some situations you may want to try LS parityplacement to improve performance. The defaultparity placement is RA.
� Read ahead — On.
Normally the IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAIDAdapter transfers data from disk to its local cache insteps of stripe-unit size. This provides excellentoverall performance when workloads tend to besequential. However, if the workload is random and
184 PC Server HMM
system I/O requests are smaller than stripe-unit size,reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will resultin a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted diskutilization. When read-ahead is set to Off, the size ofdata transfer from the disk to local cache is equal tothe system I/O request size, and no read-ahead tothe end of the stripe unit is performed.
Notes
1. The Read-ahead setting can be changed withoutdestroying data in a logical drive.
2. When the configuration is saved on a diskette,the RAID parameters are saved also.
Configuring the Disk ArrayThe following information applies only to disk array models.Use this information to perform the tasks necessary toconfigure, add, change, or delete one or more disk arrays.
� If you need to create an IBM RAID controller diskette,refer to the ServerGuide User's Guide that wasshipped with the system.
� Familiarize yourself with the information contained inthis manual and the RAID (redundant array ofinexpensive disks) information in the User'sReference shipped with the server.
� Verify the disk-array configuration. The disk-arraymodel comes configured as one logical drive.
– To view the disk-array configuration, go to“Viewing the RAID Configuration” on page 206and select View Configuration from the MainMenu.
– To create a disk array, go to“Creating a DiskArray” on page 195.
� Backup the disk-array configuration. See “BackingUp Your Disk-Array Configuration” on page 180.
After you configure the disk array, you can complete setupby installing an operating system (from the ServerGuidecompact disc that was shipped with the server or from thediskettes that came with the operating system). To installan operating system from the ServerGuide CD, refer to theServerGuide User's Guide.
RAID Technology: RAID is the technology ofgrouping several hard disk drives in a server into an arraythat can be defined as a single logical drive. This logicaldrive then appears to the operating system as a singlephysical drive. This grouping technique greatly enhanceslogical-drive capacity and performance. In addition, if oneof the hard-disk drives fails (becomes defective the servercontinues to run, with no operator intervention required, atreduced performance. The defective drive can be replacedwithout powering off the server (hot-swap). For more
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 185
information about hot-swappable hard disk drives, see“Installing Internal Drives” on page 191.
Hard Disk Drive Capacities: With a server, it isimportant to understand the implications of hard disk drivecapacities and how they influence the way you create diskarrays.
Drives in the disk array can be of different capacities. Forexample, if the model came with two 1GB hard disk drivesand you install a 2GB hard disk drive to create a RAID 5disk array, the total capacity of the array is 3GB instead of4GB. Therefore, when creating arrays it is wise to adddrives of equal capacity.
Additional Storage Capacity: When you addhard disk drives to the server, you must configure a newdisk array before the drives can be used. You can eitherreconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacityoffered with the added drives, or group the added drivesinto their own array (see “Adding Drives to Create anAdditional Array” on page 196). You also can create anarray with only one drive.
The RAID Configuration Program Screens:When you configure the disk array, or even just view itsconfiguration, you will be using the IBM RAID configurationprogram on the IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Streaming-RAIDAdapter/A Option Diskette (also called the IBM RAIDcontroller diskette). The following figure is a compilation ofmany of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration(also called the IBM RAID configuration program) screens.The list below the figure gives explanations of thenumbered areas of the figure.
1. This pop-up allows you to select the RAID level youwant to assign to the logical drive you are defining,and it allows you to select the logical drive size. Youcan enter the size, in megabytes, or you can acceptthe default value shown.
When you need to confirm an action, the Confirmpop-up appears in this area.
2. You can select any of the choices that appear on themenus.
3. The Bay/Array selection list shows each bay in theserver (for each channel) numbered 1 through 7. Theabbreviation in the bay indicates the status of thedrive installed in the bay. Selections are made fromthis list to determine which bays (hard disk drives) arein the arrays. The letter to the right of the bay,identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in thatbay is grouped.
186 PC Server HMM
Note
The Channel/Bay/Array area on the screen doesnot reflect the physical configuration of theserver. The hard disk drives are installed inhorizontal banks of bays (in banks C, D, and Ethere are 6 bays, numbered 1 through 6 from leftto right). See “Installing Internal Drives” onpage 191 to see the physical location of the harddisk drives.
4. The Array list shows you the array ID and the size (inmegabytes) of the array.
Note
The capacity (size) is shown in binary equivalent.
When a drive is being rebuilt, this area, along with theLogical Drive list area, shows the progression of therebuilding process.
5. The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive (forexample, A1), the size of the logical drive, the RAIDlevel assigned to the logical drive, the date it wascreated, and the write policy.
The status of the logical drive also is shown. Goodmeans that all is well with the drive; Critical meansthat you must replace the drive or do a rebuildoperation. (You will have received a message tellingyou the drive is in a Critical state.) Offline meansthat the logical drive is unrecoverable; the data in thatdrive is lost.
When a drive is being rebuilt, this area, along with theArray list area, shows the progression of therebuilding process.
Note
The capacity (size) is shown in binary equivalent.
During an initialization process, the Write Policy areadisplays the percent initialized; during asynchronization process, it displays the percentsynchronized.
6. The information area tells you the action you canperform on this screen or pop-up.
Drive MaintenanceThe following section provides information about statusindicators for logical and hard disk drives, and the resultsof a hard disk drive failure. It also contains procedures forreplacing defective drives and for redefining the space inan array by replacing logical drives.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 187
Obtaining Drive Status: To see the ID, capacity,and other information about each of the hard disk drivesattached to the RAID adapter:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select Drive information .3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key
to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay/Arrayselection list. As a drive is highlighted, theinformation for that drive is shown at the bottom ofthe screen.
4. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
Note
The status of the hard disk drive determines the statusof the logical drives in the array in which the hard diskis grouped.
Bay/Array Selection List: The status of the drives inthe Bay/Array selection list is defined as follows:
Status Meaning
CDR CD-ROM drive installed.
DDD Defective. The drive is an online orhot-spare drive that does not respond tocommands. (If a RDY drive is defectiveor powered down, it shows an empty bay(a blank status), not a DDD status).
FMT Format. The drive is being reformatted.
HSP Hot spare. The drive will replace asimilar drive that becomes defective inreal time. At that time, its status changesto ONL, and its array association isdisplayed.
OFL Offline. The drive is a good drive thathas replaced a defective drive in a RAIDlevel 1 or level 5 array. It is associatedwith an array, but does not contain anyvalid data. The drive state remains OFLduring the rebuild phase.
ONL Online. The drive is part of an array. Ifthis drive fails, logical drives defined inthe array in which this drive is groupedwill have a status of offline (if the logicaldrive is assigned RAID level 0 with agood status) or Critical (if the logical driveis assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with agood status).
RDY Ready. The drive is recognized by theadapter and is available for definition.
TAP Tape drive installed.
188 PC Server HMM
Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure:Depending on the circumstances, there can be severalpossible results from a drive failure.
Example 1 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is defined that is the same or
greater size than the failed drive.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
level 1, level 5, or a combination of these two levels.
Then the hot spare will take over immediately.
Note
Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 ismaintained; however, system performance will bereduced. Hot-spare drive capability does not apply tological drives assigned RAID level 0.
Example 2 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is not defined.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
levels 1, 5, or a combination of these two levels.
Then no data will be lost, but the system will operate atreduced performance until the defective drive is replacedand rebuilt.
Example 3 :
If more than one drive fails, all data is lost. Therefore, it isimportant that you replace and rebuild a defective drive assoon as possible.
Status Meaning
UFM Unformatted. The drive requires alow-level format before it can be used inan array.
Blank Status Any of the following circumstances cancause the status area to be blank:
� No hard disk drive is installed in thatbay.
� The bay contains a hard disk drive,but the drive is not insertedcorrectly.
� An array was deleted and adefective drive is still in the bay.
� A new drive was installed and theconfiguration program has not beenrestarted. (The status will change toRDY when the RAID configurationprogram is restarted.)
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 189
Logical and Hard Disk Drive StatusIndications: The status of the hard disk drivedetermines the status of the logical drives in the array inwhich the hard disk is grouped.
� A single hard disk drive failure (indicated by a DDDstatus in the Bay/Array selection list) causes logicaldrives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 tohave a Critical status. Data remains in logical driveswith a Critical status, but you must replace the onedefective hard disk drive promptly, because if twohard disk drives were to fail, all of the data in thearray would be lost.
After you install a new hard disk drive, the Replaceprocess changes the drive status from DDD to OFL ifthere is a Critical logical drive. After the Rebuildprocess, the hard disk drive status changes from OFLto ONL.
� A single or multiple hard disk drive failure causeslogical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 tohave an offline status. Data in logical drives with anoffline status is lost. However, with a multiple diskdrive failure, when the defective drives are part of thesame array, logical drives in that array will have anoffline status. This means that data is lost in all thelogical drives in that array, regardless of which RAIDlevel is assigned.
Replacing a Faulty Drive
Note
The hard disk drive indicator light will blink when thedrive has failed and needs to be replaced (DDD stateonly).
To replace a faulty drive:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
If the drive failed while the system was powereddown, a screen appears the next time the system ispowered on showing you which drive is defective.
2. If the drive is not damaged (for example, it is notinserted correctly):
a. Power-off the system.b. Correct the problem.c. Remove the diskette.d. Restart the system.
3. If the drive is defective:a. Press Y (Yes) to reconfigure the system.b. Press Ctrl +Alt +Del when instructed to restart the
system. The Main Menu appears.c. Select Rebuild device .
190 PC Server HMM
At this point, the drive status shows DDD.
Warning
Removing the wrong hard disk drive cancause loss of all data in the array.
d. Replace the defective drive. Refer to “Removinga Drive from Bank C, D, or E” on page 204.
e. After you have replaced the drive, press Enter .The system will reconfigure to include the drive,and the drive's status will change to OFL.
f. Allow the system to complete the configuration(the screen displays a completion message);then select Rebuild drive .
g. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓)key to highlight the OFL (offline) drive you wantto rebuild; then press Enter .
The progress of the rebuilding process appearson the screen.
h. When the rebuilding process completes, pressEsc to return to the Main Menu. The newconfiguration will be saved automatically.
i. Backup the new configuration (see “Backing UpYour Disk-Array Configuration” on page 180).
j. Select Exit to end the RAID configurationprogram.
k. Remove the diskette and press Ctrl +Alt +Del torestart the system.
DriversThe RAID adapter requires the installation of devicedrivers. See the README file on the RAID controllerdiskette for detailed instructions.
If you install OS/2 from the ServerGuide CD, the devicedrivers will be installed automatically. If, however, youinstall OS/2 from diskette, you will need to install thedevice drivers. See the README file on the RAIDcontroller diskette.
Installing Internal DrivesThe Type 8641 server supports the following drive types:
� Diskette � Hard disk� Rewritable optical disc
� Tape
The server has hardware that lets you replace a failedhard disk drive without powering-off the server. Therefore,you have the advantage of continuing to operate yoursystem while a hard disk drive is removed or installed.These drives are also known as hot-swappable drives.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 191
Hot-swappable drives have a green LED that shinesthrough the knob on the tray containing the drive. If thedrive has a good electrical connection upon installation, theLED illuminates. The LED blinks briefly during power-up,and also blinks if the drive malfunctions.
Internal drives are installed in bays. A diskette drive and aCD-ROM. drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models. Aremovable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1.You can install two drives in bay B. You can installhot-swappable hard disk drives in banks C, D, and E only.Banks C, D, and E each contain six bays. Bank Csupports up to six drives. However, the total number ofSCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank C is six.The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank Cvaries according to the model you purchased. You caninstall up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives inbank E.
Note
The bank letter-designations are located on bothvertical rails on the front of the server. The bay-slotnumbers are located on the top of bank C and thebottom of bank E.
A cover plate (sometimes called a bezel or face plate)covers the front of bay B2 only. If you install a drive thatuses removable media (diskette, optical disc, tape), youmight install and adjust the cover plate after you install thedrive in bay B2.
Considerations� Bay A comes with one SCSI CD-ROM drive and one
3.5-inch, 2.88MB diskette drive.� Bay B supports:
– One 5.25-inch, full-high, removable-media ornon-removable-media device, or
– One 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-mediadevice and one 3.5-inch, half-high,removable-media device, or
– Two 3.5-inch or two 5.25-inch, slim-high orhalf-high, removable-media devices.
Note
Only one of the devices installed in bay B can bea SCSI device.
� You cannot install hot-swappable drives in bay B.� PC Server 500 supports eighteen 3.5-inch, slim-high,
hot-swappable hard disk drives, or nine 3.5-inch,half-high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks(C, D, and E).
192 PC Server HMM
Banks C, D, and E can accommodate six slim-highdrives or three half-high drives, or a combination ofboth drive sizes. If you use a combination, rememberthat one half-high drive uses the equivalent space oftwo slim-high drives.
� If you install drives in bank D or E, you will removethe fan assembly on the rear of the server, install adirect access storage device (DASD) backplane inbanks D and E, and install an optional 220-wattpower supply.
� Each backplane has six connectors, to support up tosix hard disk drives.
Performing Common TasksThe Create/Delete Array menu of the RAID configurationprogram contains the more common tasks for configuringdisk arrays. Procedures to complete these tasks arecontained in this section as follows:
� “Defining a Hot-Spare Drive”� “Deleting a Disk Array” on page 194� “Creating a Disk Array” on page 195� “Defining Logical Drives” on page 196
Defining a Hot-Spare Drive: To define a drive asa hot-spare drive:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu. TheCreate/Delete Array screen appears.
3. Select Define hot-spare drive . The cursor willbecome active in the Bay/Array selection list.
Note
Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY,ONL, DDD, OFL, or HSP state. SCSI tape andCD-ROM drives are not shown. They appearwhen you select drive information. Refer to“Bay/Array Selection List” on page 188 for thedrive status meanings.
The numbers shown on the left are the bay IDs. See“Installing Internal Drives” on page 191 for anexplanation of the bay IDs.
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RDY (ready) drive you want to defineas the hot spare; then press Enter. The RDYchanges to HSP (hot spare). You can press Enteragain to toggle between HSP and RDY.
5. Press Esc when you have finished. The cursor willbecome active in the Create/Delete Array menu.
6. If you want to create a disk array, go to “Creating aDisk Array” on page 195.
7. If you are finished:
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 193
a. Select Exit or press Esc . A pop-up window willappear asking you to confirm your change.
Note
The changes you make are not saved untilyou confirm them by selecting Yes in theConfirm pop-up window.
b. Select No if you do not want the drive youselected to be a hot spare; select Yes to defineit as a hot-spare drive.
c. Back up the disk-array configuration informationto diskette. Refer to “Backing Up YourDisk-Array Configuration” on page 180 forinstructions.
Deleting a Disk Array: The last array createdmust be the first deleted.
Warning
All the data and programs in the array are lost duringthis procedure. Before proceeding, back up any dataand programs that you want to save.
To delete a disk array:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.3. Select Delete disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu. The cursor will be active in the Arraylist.
4. Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drivelist; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or the DownArrow (↓) key to highlight the most recently definedarray.
5. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up window appears.6. If you do not want to delete the array, select No. To
delete the array, select Yes.
Note
To use hard disks from the existing array whencreating a new array, you must confirm thedeletion of the existing array.
If a defective drive is still in a bay, the status shows ablank bay, as though there is no drive in that bay. Whenyou replace the drive, the status will show RDY after youreconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop-up window.
194 PC Server HMM
Note
In some operating systems, deleting an array andassociated logical drives might change the drive lettersassigned to the existing drives.
Creating a Disk Array: To create a disk array:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
Note
To create an array using hard disks in an existingarray, refer to “Redefining Space in an Array” onpage 202.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.3. Select Create disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu.
The cursor will be active in the Bay/Array selectionlist.
Important
In the following step, when you press Enter toselect a drive for an array, you cannot deselect itby pressing Enter again, as you can with thehot-spare selection process. Carefully determinewhich drives you want to include in the arraybefore beginning the selection process.
If you change your mind after selecting the drivesfor an array, you can delete the array (byselecting Delete disk array from theCreate/Delete Array menu) and begin again.
4. Select each drive you want in the array by using theUp Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key tohighlight the drive and then pressing Enter . As youselect each drive, the status will change from RDY(Ready) to ONL (Online).
5. When you have selected all the drives you want toinclude in the array, press Esc . The cursor willbecome active in the menu.
6. If you have drives you did not use in this array andyou want to create another array, you can do one ofthe following:� Define the logical drive or drives for this array;
then create another array and its logical drives.See “Defining Logical Drives” on page 196.
� Create another array now by repeating steps 2through 5 in this procedure; then define logicaldrives for both arrays.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 195
Note
You must define at least one logical drive foreach created array before you can exit theconfiguration program.
� Continue with “Defining Logical Drives.”
Adding Drives to Create an AdditionalArray: To add storage capacity to your server withoutdisturbing existing data:
1. Install the additional hard disk drive or drives. (See“Installing Internal Drives” on page 191.)
2. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
3. Create a new disk array and define logical drives (see“Creating a Disk Array” on page 195 for additionalinformation.
Defining Logical Drives: After you have createdan array, you must define a logical drive. (You cannotleave the RAID configuration program until you define thelogical drives for any created arrays.)
To define a logical drive:
1. Select Define Logical drive from the Create/DeleteArray menu. The Create/Delete Array menu screenappears; the cursor is active in the Array list.
2. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the array you want to define; then pressEnter . The Select RAID Level pop-up windowappears, and the cursor is active in the window.
Note
The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 toany logical drives defined in an array containingonly one hard disk drive. When this is the case,the Select RAID Level pop-up window will notappear.
If you have only two hard disk drives in the array, theSelect RAID Level pop-up window appears, but RAIDlevel 5 is not selectable because you need at leastthree hard disk drives in an array to assign RAIDlevel 5 to one of the logical drives. You can definemore than one logical drive for your array. The onlyrestriction is that the maximum number of logicaldrives you can define is eight.
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RAID level you want to assign tothese logical drives, then press Enter .
196 PC Server HMM
Note
Because the level you assign can influence thespace needed for the drive, you must assign aRAID level before you enter the size of thelogical drive.
The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID,the size of each logical drive, the RAID level youassigned to that logical drive, and the date that thelogical drive was created.
The status of the logical drive also is shown. Goodmeans that all is well with the drive. Critical meansthat you must replace the hard disk drive or do arebuild operation. (You will have received a messagetelling you what has happened to the drive.) Offlinemeans that the logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata on that drive is lost.
The Logical Drive Size pop-up window shows thespace in this array that is available for logical drives.
4. Type the size, in megabytes, that you want for the
logical drive; then press Enter . A pop-up windowappears asking you to confirm your action.
Information about the new logical drive appears in theLogical Drive list.
Note
The size appearing in the Logical Drive list mightbe different from the size you typed because itappears in binary equivalent.
The size of a logical drive is determined by a numberof factors, but basically the size must be divisible bythe number of drives in the array.
Consider the following examples:
Example 1:There are three 1GB drives in the array. You assignRAID level 0 (which uses all the drives in the arraywith no parity storage), and type “1000MB.” The“Size (MB)” will be 999, which is the number closestto and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3.
Example 2:There are three 1GB drives in the array, and youassign RAID level 5. Data is striped across all threedrives in the array, but the space equivalent to that ofone drive is used for redundant storage. Therefore, ifyou type “1000MB,” the “Size (MB)” remains 1000because it is divisible by 2 (drives), which is thespace available for data.
If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive,you can create another by assigning either the same
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 197
or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive.You can have as many as eight logical drives amongfour disk arrays.
5. To return to the Create/Delete Array menu, pressEsc . To define more logical drives, repeat steps 1through 5 of this procedure.
6. To leave this screen, select Exit or press Esc . Apop-up window appears asking you to confirm youraction.
7. To save your changes, select Yes. To maintain thedisk-array configuration that was in place before youmade changes, select No.
8. If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5, youmust select Initialize logical drive for properoperation. This sets the drive to a predeterminedstate. Any data existing on the drive is overwrittenwith zeros, and corresponding parity is initialized tothe correct value.
a. Select Initialize/synchronize array from theMain Menu; then select Initialize logical drive .
b. Select the logical drives you want to initializefrom the Logical Drive list by pressing theSpacebar (the selected drives will appearhighlighted). To start the initialization, pressEnter . A pop-up window appears asking you toconfirm your action.
Warning
If you select Yes in the Confirm pop-upwindow, information in the logical drive willbe overwritten with zeros.
c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to initializethis logical drive.
The initialization process begins, and you cansee its progress in the Pct. Int. (PercentInitialized) column of the Logical Drive list.
d. To stop the initialization at any time, press Esc .Then press Esc again to return to the menu, orpress Enter to continue initializing the drive.
9. To back up the disk-array configuration to diskette,you will need a 3.5-inch formatted diskette. To backup the disk-array configuration:
a. Select Advanced functions from the MainMenu.
b. Select Backup config. to diskette .
Follow the instructions on the screen. A pop-upwindow shows the default file name of CONFIG.You can change the file name by typing over thedefault. The Backup program will assign afile-name extension of .dmc.
198 PC Server HMM
Power SuppliesThe Type 8641 computers is shipped with a primary powersupply. An additional or optional power supply can beadded to the computer. Connectors are used to transferthe primary power supply voltages and signals from theprimary power supply to the optional power supply. Thefollowing illustrations show how the two power supplies areconnected.
Attention
When replacing the primary power supply cover plate,rotate the plate 180°. (This will leave an opening forthe primary power supply connector cable thatconnects to the optional power supply.) Failure to doso will cause the power supply connector cable to becrimped when the plate is replaced.
Note
Tabs are located on the side of each power supply tosecure them together.
Primary Power Supply Voltages: If thevoltages are correct, and the power supply fan runs, thepower supply is OK.
1 4 7
2 3 5
A B C D
Power-Supply Connector
DriveConnector
Connectors P11, P12, and P13
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
5 5 5 B B
3 4 7 D A
+4.8+11.52−10.8+4.8+11.52
+ 5.25+12.6−15.0+ 5.25+12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2 1 +11.5 +12.6
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 199
Optional Power Supply Drive ConnectorVoltages: If the voltages are correct, and the powersupply fan runs, the power supply is OK.
A B C D
If the power supply shuts down, or appears to fail atpower-on, you might have one of the following problems:
� Too many devices are set to start instantly, see“Setting the Motor-Start Jumper” on page 549.
� There are too many large-capacity devices installed.The nominal operating current of the devices installedcollectively exceeds the available current of the powersupply. See the “Personal System/2 InstallationPlanning” guide (form number G41G-2927) for moreinformation.
Attention
Unplug the power cord and wait two minutes beforechecking voltages to give the power supply capacitorstime to discharge.
On some models, there is an access-cover fan (to cool theprocessor). If that fan does not work, you have one of thefollowing problems:
� No power to the fan: 12 V dc (±1.4 V dc) required atthe two fan cable pins on the base.
� Defective J28 cable (check cable continuity)� Defective fan. (To test the fan, use a two-wire jumper
to connect the fan terminals to the cable pins on thebase.)
� Defective system board.
Note
Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable) isset for the correct voltage.
If the voltages are correct, and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
B B
D A
+ 4.8+ 11.52
+ 5.25+12.60
RAID Recovery Procedure Not EffectiveSymptom:
A single drive failed, but 2 RAID fixed disk drives appearas DDD (Defunct, the drive is not responding to
200 PC Server HMM
commands). Routine recovery procedures are ineffectivein bringing the DDD drive(s) back on-line.
Note
The system may have run without problems for sometime.
Problem Isolation Aids:
� The system is a Server 500 RAID Array (8641).� The system diagnostics do not fail.� The RAID Administration program appears normal.� More than one DASD backplane is installed.
Fix:/Background:
The RAID controller requires two cables to be attached tothe DASD backplane in order to maintain control of theRAID subsystem, the SCSI signal cable (wide), and amuch smaller Status cable. The backplane in Bank Cmust be attached to SCSI Connector Channel 1. Ifinstalled, DASD backplane in Bank D would be attached toSCSI Connector Channel 2. The same is true of theStatus cables. Status connector 1 must be attached toDASD backplane C and Status connector 2 must beattached to DASD backplane D, if installed.
The signal cable and status cables for each channel maynot be connected to the same backplane. (For example:The Status cable for the backplane in Bank C is mistakenlyconnected to Bank D, and vice-versa). In this case, theRAID adapter is not communicating with the correctbackplane (but has no way of knowing this), so erroneousstatus information is being presented to the RAID adapter.
Attempting to rebuild a fixed disk with the cablesconnected in this manner will probably result in customerdata loss.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 201
In systems which have more than one DASD backplaneinstalled, make certain that the RAID Channel 1 (SCSI)signal cable and the RAID Channel 1 Status cable areboth attached to the same backplane (are not crossed).
SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Streaming RAID Controller, FRUP/N06H3059
┌┬────DASD STATUS CONN.───────┐┌─────────┐┌──┐┌─────────┐┌──────┬┐
││ ┌───┐ ┌───┐ └┘Channel 1└┘ └┘Channel 2└┘ ││
││ └───┘ └───┘ ┌──────┐ ┌───────┐ ││
││ Chan1 Chan2 ┌─────┐ ┌──────┐ │ │ │ │ ││
││ ┌────┐ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ ││
││ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ ││
││ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ ││
││ │ │ │ │ │ │ └──────┘ └───────┘ ││
││ └────┘ └─────┘ └──────┘ ││
││ ___________________________ ││
└┴───────────────────────│││││││││││││││ │││││││││││────────┐ ││
└───┴┘
Redefining Space in an ArrayYou can redefine space in a disk array in a number ofways. For example, you can combine a number of smalllogical drives to create a larger one or you can redefinethe existing logical drive into several smaller drives. Also,you can install additional hard disk drives to create a largerlogical drive than was possible with the existing storagecapacity.
One method to redefine space in an array is to change theRAID level assigned to a logical drive. For example, if youassigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decidedyou needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5, youcan use this procedure to replace the existing logical drivewith a logical drive assigned the new RAID level.
To redefine the space in a disk array, first you must deletethe array. The last disk array defined must be the firstdeleted.
Warning
In all cases, when you delete an array, all the dataand programs in the array are lost.
If you have data and programs that you want to save, theymust be backed up and then restored. It is suggested youuse a high-speed backup device, such as a tape drive.
To redefine the space in an array:
1. Back up all data and programs in the array.
2. If needed, install additional hard disk drives.
Refer to the User's Reference for information aboutselecting drive sizes.
3. Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette; then pressCtrl +Alt +Del to start the RAID configuration program.
4. Delete the existing array:a. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.
The Create/Delete Array menu will disappear.
202 PC Server HMM
b. Select Delete disk array . The cursor will beactive in the Bay/Array list.
c. Review the Logical Drive List Date Createdcolumn; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or theDown Arrow (↓) key to highlight the mostrecently defined array.
Note
You must delete disk arrays in descendingorder; the last one created must be the firstone deleted.
d. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up windowappears.
Warning
All the data in the array will be lost duringthis procedure. Be sure to back up all dataand programs that you want to save.
e. If you do not want to delete the array, select No.To delete the array select, Yes.
Note
To use the hard disks from the existingarray when creating a new array, you mustconfirm the deletion of the existing array.After you make your selection, the Confirmpop-up window will disappear, and thecursor will be active in the menu.
5. If you want a drive defined as a hot spare, refer to“Defining a Hot-Spare Drive” on page 193 forstep-by-step instructions.
6. Create a new disk array and define logical drives.
See “Creating a Disk Array” on page 195 forinstructions on creating a disk array and defininglogical drives.
7. After you have established the new array and logicaldrive or drives, select Initialize/synchronize arrayfrom the Main Menu; then select Initialize logicaldrive to prepare the drives in the array to receivedata. This sets the drive to a predetermined state.Any data existing in the drive is overwritten withzeros, and corresponding parity is initialized to theproper value.
8. Insert a 3.5-inch formatted diskette in the primarydrive, select Advanced functions from the MainMenu; then select Backup config. to diskette .Follow the instructions on the screen.
9. Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Escor selecting Exit while on the Main Menu. A pop-upwindow will appear asking you to confirm your action.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 203
10. Reinstall your operating system and device drivers,then restore your data and programs.
Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or ELocate the drive you are removing. You do not have topower-off the server to remove a drive from banks C, D,and E.
Warning
If you are removing a failed hard disk drive that is partof a disk array in bank C, D, or E, you must notaccidentally remove a good drive. Before you attemptto remove a defective drive, thoroughly review theinformation displayed on your server's screen todetermine the location of the failed drive. “Logical andHard Disk Drive Status Indications” on page 190explains the codes that your server uses to indicate adefective drive. When a hard disk drive fails, ablinking green indicator light illuminates on the knob ofthe drive tray. When a hard disk drive is good, a solidgreen indicator light illuminates on the knob of thedrive tray.
If you partially or completely remove a good driveinstead of the defective one, your server might losevaluable data. This situation is especially relevant ifyou assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives inyour disk array. However, the RAID controller canrebuild the data you need, provided that certainconditions are met. See “Starting the RAIDConfiguration Program” on page 205 for more details.
If you have a non-disk-array model, an illuminated drivetray knob means the drive is a good one. An unilluminateddrive tray knob means the drive is defective, or no poweris being supplied to the drive.
To remove a drive from bank C, D, or E, do the followingsteps:
1. Find the drive you plan to remove.2. If you have a disk-array model and a drive has failed,
ensure that you have selected the correct drive forremoval by verifying that the light on the tray's knob isblinking.
3. Unlock the drive by turning the knob directly above it90 degrees.
4. Disconnect the drive from the connector on thebackplane, by grasping the handle on the drive trayand pulling the drive out of the server. Store thedrive in a safe place.
204 PC Server HMM
Note
If you have a disk-array model, you mustreconfigure your disk arrays after removing harddisk drives. See “Starting the RAID ConfigurationProgram” on page 205 for details.
Starting the RAID ConfigurationProgramTo start the RAID configuration program.
1. Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into theprimary drive and power-on the server.If the server is already on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.If you have more than one RAID adapter, you will getan adapter selection screen. Otherwise, the MainMenu appears.
RAID Program Keys
Main Menu Selections
Note
Whenever you make changes to the disk-arrayconfiguration and select Exit , the Confirm pop-upwindow will appear. You must select Yes to save andactivate the changes.
Key Program Response
F1 Selects Help from any menu
Esc Return to the previous screen orto the previous work area of ascreen
Up (↑) and Down (↓)Arrows
Highlights the item to be selected
Enter Selects the highlighted item
Selection Program Response
Help Provides additional information
View configuration: Displays the existing disk arrayconfiguration
Create/delete array: Selects the drives, defines ahot-spare drive for an array youwant to create, or to deletes anexisting array.This selection also has choicesfor defining a logical drive andformatting a drive.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 205
Selection Program Response
Initialize/synchronizearray:
Select this choice after creatingan array to:
� Set the drive to apredetermined value.
� For proper operation of RAIDlevels 1 and 5.
Note: Any data existing onthe drive isoverwritten withzeros, and thecorresponding parityinformation isinitialized to thecorrect value.
� Initialize more than onelogical drive at a time.
� Interrupt the initializationprocess at any time bypressing Esc .
� Restart the initializationprocess by pressing Enter
� End the process by pressingEsc again.
Synchronize logicaldrive
Recomputes and rewrites theparity data on the drive. You canselect this choice to recomputeparity data for RAID levels 1 and5. This selection does not alterdata on the drive. Thesynchronization process can bedone on multiple logical drives.
Rebuild device: Rebuilds logical drives. Therebuild operation is supportedonly for RAID levels 1 and 5.
Advanced functions: Changes the write policy (the waydata is written to the drive), tosaves your configurationinformation to a diskette, restoresit from a diskette, or changesRAID parameters. This choicealso allows you to do a low-levelformat.
Drive information: Displays information about theSCSI devices (hard disk,CD-ROM, tape, and so on)connected to the RAID adapter.
Exit: Leaves the Main Menu.
Viewing the RAID ConfigurationBefore creating or changing a disk array, you can look atthe current configuration by selecting View Configurationfrom the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program.
To view the disk-array configuration:
206 PC Server HMM
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 205.
2. Select View configuration . The current disk-arrayconfiguration information appears on the screen.
3. Press Enter to see the stripe order in the BaysOccupied (Ch:Bay) field.
4. Press any key to continue.5. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 207
Locations (System Board).1/ 32-bit expansion slots
(video extensions J25, J27) .2/ Processor slot .3/ Parallel ports .4/ Serial ports .5/ Keyboard/Pointing-device connectors
.6/ Power-on Features jumper
.7/ Privilege-access password jumper .8/ Memory-module connectors
.9/ Tamper-evident cable connector.1ð/ Power Supply connector.11/ Override jumper connector (JMP1)
.12/ Battery.13/ Diskette-drive cable connector.14/ Reserved (Pins 1 and 2 must be connected.).15/ Operator-panel cable connector
208 PC Server HMM
Symptom-to-FRU IndexAlways start with “General Checkout (Micro Channel)” onpage 18 in the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual
The Symptom-to-FRU Index lists symptoms, errors, andthe possible causes. The most likely cause is listed first.Use this index along with the “Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel)” on page 19 in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual to help you decide which FRUs tohave available when servicing the computer.
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Note
For IBM devices not supported by the Micro Channeldiagnostics code, refer to the manual for that device.
Beep SymptomsBeep/Symptom FRU/Action
Continuous beep and ablank display(Run he Display Self Test)
1. Display Adapter2. Video Memory (if used)
3. System Board
One long and three shortbeeps.(Run the Display Self Test)
1. Display Adapter2. Video Memory (if used)
3. System Board
RAID drives DDD, recoveryprocedure not effective.See“RAID RecoveryProcedure Not Effective” onpage 200 .
N/A
No Beep SymptomsNo Beep/Symptom FRU/Action
Memory count hangs duringPOST.
1. System BoardMemory
2. Memory Option (ifinstalled)
3. System Board 4. Processor
Error CodesError Code FRU/Action
0210XXXX (Internal bus,size unknown)
0210XXX1 (External bus,size unknown)
1. SCSI Hard Disk Drive2. SCSI Adapter or the
SCSI controller builtinto the system board.
3. SCSI Cable4. SCSI ID Switch (on
some models)
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 209
Error Code FRU/Action
02790XXX, 02791XXX0 2792XXX, 02793XXX0 27906XX, 027907XX(Eithernet adapter POSTerror)
1. Check power andreseat adapter.
2. Ethernet PeerMasterServer Adapter
02799XXX(Communications to theEthernet PeerMaster ServerAdapter failed or theadapter failed.)
1. Run Setup and verifythe EthernetPeerMaster ServerAdapterconfiguration.
2. Ethernet PeerMasterServer Adapter
0279XXXX 1. Fast/Wide StreamingRAID Adapter/A(FRU No. 06H3059)
2. System Board3. Signal Pass Through
Card (if installed)
Error MessagesError Message FRU/Action
Drive in channel X bay Xdoes not respond.Installation stopped.
1. Replace the drive inthe bay indicated.
Controller does not respondto commands; no logicaldrive installed.
1. RAID Adapter 2. System Board
SCSI Error Code FormatThis section provides an explanation of the encoded SCSIand non-SCSI Post error codes and detailed informationabout each code.
Error messages are displayed on the screen as three, four,five, eight, twelve or, thirteen digits. An “X” in an errormessage can be any number. The shorter POST errorsare highlighted in the Symptom-to-FRU Index. Some digitswill represent different information for SCSI errors versusnon-SCSI errors.
The following figure shows which digits display the shorterPOST errors. The figure also defines additional SCSIinformation.
Notes:
1. Non-IBM device error codes and documentationsupersede this list.
2. Duplicate SCSI ID settings will cause misleading errorsymptoms or messages.
210 PC Server HMM
RDDDPLSCB QEET│└┬┘│││││ │└┤└─ Test state│ │ │││││ │ └── Error code Extension│ │ │││││ └──── Qualifier│ │ │││││
│ │ ││││└───── Bus (ð=internal 1=external)
│ │ │││└────── Capacity of the device│ │ ││└─────── Slot number of the device│ │ │└──────── LUN (usually ð)│ │ └───────── PUN (SCSI ID #)│ │
│ └─────────── Device Number└───────────── Reserved Digit (usually ð)
As an example, if you have SCSI error code 021050A0,each digit decodes as follows:
RDDD Codes for Adapters
RDDD Codes for Devices
Digit Information
0 Reserved digit (usually 0)
210 Device number 210 indicates hard disk
5 SCSI ID assigned is 5
0 Logical Unit Number (not used, usually 0)
A The device capacity is 60MB (A = 60MB)
0 The device is connected to the internal bus
RDDD Device Type or Information
0037 SCSI on the system board
0096 SCSI adapter with cache
0112 SCSI adapter without cache
0206 SCSI-2 adapter
RDDD Device Type or Information
0208 Unknown device type
0209 Direct access - removable media, and/or otherthan 512 byte blocks
0210 Direct access - hard disk, 512 byte blocks
0211 Sequential access (tape)
0212 Printer
0213 Processor
0214 Write Once, Read Multiple (W.O.R.M.)
0215 Read only (CD-ROM)
0216 Scanner
0217 Optical memory (read/write optical disk)
0218 Changer (multiple tray CD-ROM)
0219 Communications
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 211
B Codes
QEET 0000 Codes
Refer to this list if the “DDD” indicates an adapter, followedby a QEET of 0000. For example, 01120100 0000.
QEET Errors (other than 0000)
These are specific “QEET” error codes (preceded by a“DDD” indicating an adapter).
Note: A number in slot “S” indicates an error on theadapter, (or device attached to the adapter) in slot"S." If "S" is 0, suspect the system board.
B Device Type or Information
0 Dual SCSI adapter (internal bus)
1 Dual SCSI adapter (external bus)
PLSC QEET Information
0100 0000 On systems with NVRAM, SCSI setupdata not located, or the checksum did notverify. On systems without NVRAM(Model 50 for example), setup data mustbe on the 1st hard disk.
0200 0000 Configuration error. No hard disk foundat PUN 6, LUN 0 for 161,162,165 systemerror path. Might be an unsupportedconfiguration.
0300 0000 No space available in extended BIOSdata area for SCSI data table (possiblytoo many adapters installed).
0400 0000 ROM modules not found on adapter (IMLbased systems only). Running setupmight correct it.
0500 0000 ROM checksum error on 2nd 16K portionof 32K ROM
0600 0000 ROM access control port error
QEET Information
001x 8032/80188/80C186 ROM test failure
002x Local RAM test failure
003x Bad fuse, or bad termination, or local RAM addressfailure on SCSI adapter if “RDDD” is 0112.
004x Internal peripheral test failure
005x Buffer control chip test failure, or LTB failed, (orsystem-board SCSI failed if “RDDD” is 0037)
006x Undefined error condition, or buffer RAM test failureon SCSI adapter if “RDDD” is 0096
007x System interface control chip test failure
008x SCSI internal interface test failed
212 PC Server HMM
QEET Information
00Ax SCSI external interface test failed
107x Adapter hardware failure
10Cx Command failed
10Ex Command error (invalid command or parameter)
10Fx Sequencing error
110x Adapter internal error log contains entries.(Reported if no other errors on adapter exist.)
180x Time out
181x Adapter busy error
182x Unexpected interrupt presented by adapter
183x Adapter register test failure
184x Adapter reset failure
185x Adapter buffer test failure (on cached adapters)
186x Adapter reset count expired
187x Adapter registers not cleared on reset
188x Card ID in adapter microcode did not match ID inPOS registers
190x Expected device did not respond
19Yx DMA arbitration level conflict (Y = assignedarbitration level)
220x Adapter hardware error
221x Global timeout on adapter (device did not respond)
222x Adapter DMA error
223x Adapter buffer defective
224x Command aborted by adapter
301x Invalid parameter in SCB
303x Command not supported
304x Command aborted by system
305x Command rejected (buffer not disabled)
306x Command rejected (Adapter diagnostic failure)
307x Format rejected
308x Assign rejected (command in progress)
309x Assign rejected (device already assigned)
30Ax Command rejected (device not assigned)
30Bx Command rejected (maximum LBA exceeded)
30Cx Command rejected (16 bit card slot address rangeexceeded)
313x Invalid device for command
3FFx Status not returned by adapter
401x Recovered error (not an error condition)
402x Device not ready
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 213
QEET Information
403x Device medium error
404x Device hardware error
405x Illegal request for device
406x Device unit attention would not clear
407x Device data protect error
409x Device vendor unique error
40Ax Copy operation aborted by device
40Bx Device command aborted
40Cx Device search data command satisfied
40Dx Device volume overview (residual data remains inbuffer)
40Ex Device mismatch (source data did not matchmedium data)
500x Check condition on device, no sense data returned
501x No index or sector
502x Seek incomplete
503x Write fault
504x Drive not ready
505x Drive not selected
506x No track zero found
507x Multiple drives selected
508x Logical unit communication failure
509x Head positioning error (track following error)
510x CRC or ECC error on ID field
511x Unrecoverable read error
512x No address mark (ID field)
513x No address mark (data field)
514x Record not found
515x Seek error
516x Data synchronization error
517x Recoverable read (without ECC) error
518x ECC recovered read error
519x Defect list error
51Ax Parameter overrun
51Bx Synchronous transfer error
51Cx Primary defect list not found
51Dx Compare error
520x Invalid command
521x Illegal logical block address (LBA)
522x Illegal function for device type
524x Illegal command block field
214 PC Server HMM
QEET Information
525x Invalid LUN
526x Illegal field in parameter list
528x Media changed
529x Power-on or bus device reset occurred (not anerror)
52Ax Mode select parameters changed (not an error)
531x Medium format corrupted
532x Defect spare location unavailable
540x Device RAM failure
541x Data path diagnostic failure
542x Power-on diagnostic failure
543x Message rejected
544x Internal controller error
545x Device was unable to reconnect
547x Interface parity error
548x Initiator detected error
549x Illegal command or command out of sequence error
5F0x Format in progress (not an error)
5F1x Spinup in progress
601x SCSI bus reset occurred
602x SCSI interface fault
610x Selection timeout error (device not available)
611x Unexpected bus free
612x Mandatory SCSI message rejected
613x Invalid SCSI phase sequence
620x Short length record error
702x Device not ready (removable media devices)
704x Device not ready (non-removable media devices)
728x Media changed error would not clear
731x Medium format corrupted (format unit interrupted -format must be issued again)
7F0x Format in progress (prior format unit issued beingcompleted)
7F1x Spinup in progress
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 215
Q Codes
All error codes with "Q" = 1 are developed usinginformation returned by either an adapter or device. The"Q" value defines the origin of the "EE" code that isreported. Error codes (EE) with "Q" = 4 or 5 may bereported that are not listed here or can actually have adefinition other than that given, depending on the device.
“Q” Information
2 Command error field of command complete statusblock returned by the adapter
3 SCSI Status field of the command complete statusblock or command error field values indicatingsoftware problems (< 20H)
4 Sense key value returned by a device
5 Additional sense byte (byte 12) of sense informationfrom device
6 Device error code field of command complete statusblock
7 Device errors not normally considered an error, butconsidered an error based on when the code wasreturned (medium corrupted error on device withnon-removable media)
216 PC Server HMM
Test Status Codes
“T” Information
O Not applicable for error code
A Adapter initialization error)
B Adapter reset
C Adapter register test
D Adapter buffer test phase 1 (on cached adapters)
E Adapter buffer test phase 2 (on cached adapters)
F Adapter buffer test phase 3 (on cached adapters)
G Adapter buffer test phase 4 (on cached adapters)
H Adapter (buffer enable, buffer size, retry, enable)
I Device assignment sequence
J Device not ready (initial unit attention clearing)
K Device reset
L Device starting phase
M Device in process of starting
N Device block size determination
O Device self-test
P Device single block read (LBA)
Q Device double block read (LBA)
S Error occurred after device testing completed
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 217
Parts Listing1
23
4
5
6
7
89
10
11
12
13
1415
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
252627
28
218 PC Server HMM
Index System Unit (Type 8641) 1 Base Frame 82G3593
2 LED Information Display Assembly 06H37663 System Board 92F2623
(without Memory and Processor)I/O Spring (bracket on system board) 06H3796Pentium 90MHz Processor Card 06H373916MB ECC Memory SIMM 96F9100
4 I/O Panel Die Cast 06H35935 SCSI RAID Hard Disk Drive Adapter 06H30595 SCSI Fast Wide Hard Disk Drive Adapter 92F0160
6 Video Adapter 71G0650 7 Fan Assembly 06H3407
8 Fan Mounting Support (without Fans) 82G36189 I/O Flex Plate 06H3594
10 Right Side Door 82G3594Right Side Door Hinges 82G3600
11 Pedestal Wheel (with Axle) 82G360912 434 Watt Power Supply 06H3596
13 Card Guide 82G360414 Processor Card Support 82G395915 Card Guide Support 82G3603
16 Pedestal 82G360817 Slim-Line CD ROM Drive 06H215018 2.88MB Diskette Drive 82G188819 1GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H337119 2GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H337220 DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly (Wide) 06H3956
DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 71G6291DASD Hot Swap Cam Spring (Shaft and Knob) 06H5059DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602
21 CD Storage Tray 06H506022 Front Bezel (with Shield) 82G359523 Keylock (with Keys) 82G3606
24 DASD Door 82G359625 IBM Logo (R) 82G360126 5.25-Inch Drive Bezel (with Spacer) 82G359927 Control Panel Bezel 06H359528 Control Panel Card Assembly 06H3755
Ethernet Quad-BT PeerMaster Server Adapter 06H4220Ethernet Quad-B2 PeerMaster Server Adapter 06H6042
Battery 33F8354See “Battery Notice” on page 461.
Keyboard (with Cable) 71G4646Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611
� C2 Spring (1 each) � EMI Ground Clips (4 each) � Hinge Screws 2 each) � Lock Pawl (1 each) � Planar Mounting Boss (2 each) � Screws (4 each)
Mouse 96F9258 Power Cord 62X1045
Speaker (with Bracket) 33F8444
PC Server 500 - Type 8641 219
Cables (Type 8641)
Index Cables (Type 8641)1 DASD Status Cable 06H50812 Planar/Control Panel Cable 06H34063 System Status Cable (1X4) 06H34044 Diskette Drive Signal Cable(with power) 06H34055 CD ROM SCSI Cable (for 2 drives) 06H37516 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (for 1 drive) 82G36137 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable (for 1 drive) 82G3610
C2 Cable (with Switch) 82G3612LED Display Cable 06H6138POS ID Select Cable (Wide) 06H3957
Index Options (Type 8641)DASD Hot Swap Tray Assembly (Narrow) 71G6292POS ID Select Cable (Narrow) 06H3592220 Watt Power Supply Assembly 06H3237
220 PC Server HMM
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 -Type 8641
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 223Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 223
CMS Commands and Utility Programs . . . . 223CMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223OS/2 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224VSE/ESA TMOUNT Utility . . . . . . . . . 226
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Configuration (Server 500) . . . . . . . . 226Microprocessor Complex Configuration (S/390) 226Configurator Structure (S/390) . . . . . . . 228
Device Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Device Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Diagnostic Flow Chart (S/390) . . . . . . . . 231Documentation and Related IBM Manuals (390) 232Error Reporting (P/390) . . . . . . . . . . . 234Icons (System/390) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Initialization (S/390) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Machine Check Error Messages . . . . . . . 235Power-On Self Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . 237Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Software Facilities (Server System/390) . . . . 238
Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics (S/390) 239Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette
(S/390) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 221
FeaturesThe following is a list of models of the IBM PC Server 500System/390 - Type 8641.
Note
All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup.
Microprocessor
� Pentium-90 MHz (PC Server Complex)390PC (390 Processor Complex)
Memory
� Standard: 32 MB� 70 ns, ECC
Diskette Drives
� Standard: one 3.5-inch
Hard Disk Drive
� Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent
Keyboard and Mouse
� 101-key keyboard � Mouse
Expansion
� 6 Micro Channel slots, 6 Standard slots(1 shared slot)
� Up to 10 drive bays
Video
� SVGA Adapter � Compatibility:
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)– Enhanced graphics adapter (EGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)– Multicolor graphics array (MCGA)
Integrated Functions
� Video port on an adapter� 2 serial ports� 1 parallel port
� Mouse port � Keyboard port� Battery-backed clock and calendar
Power Supply
� Standard Primary: 434 watt � Optional Secondary: 220 watt
SCSI Controller (varies by model)
� SCSI RAID Hard Disk Drive Adapter� SCSI Fast/Wide hard Disk Drive Adapter
222 PC Server HMM
Diagnostics and Test InformationIn addition to the error reporting capability of the S/390Microprocessor Complex, the PC Server System/390 hastwo sets of diagnostics to help locate hardware problems.See, “Error Reporting (P/390)” on page 234.
� PC Server 500 Reference and Diagnostics Diskettes.(See the diagnostic information for the Server 500 inyour manual.)
� S/390 Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics andOption Diskette. (See “Microprocessor ComplexDiagnostics (S/390)” on page 239.)
A diskette containing diagnostics and hard disk recoveryprograms is also provided for the RAID controller thatcomes with the Array model of the PC Server System/390.
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the PC Server 500System/390 - Type 8641.
� “CMS Commands and Utility Programs.”� “Configuration” on page 226.� “Device Managers” on page 228.� “Device Map” on page 230.� “Diagnostic Flow Chart (S/390)” on page 231.� “Documentation and Related IBM Manuals (390)” on
page 232.� “Error Reporting (P/390)” on page 234.� “Icons (System/390)” on page 235.� “Initialization (S/390)” on page 235.� “Machine Check Error Messages” on page 235� “Power-On Self Test (POST)” on page 237.� “Product Overview” on page 237.� “Software Facilities (Server System/390)” on
page 238.
CMS Commands and Utility ProgramsSeveral conversational monitor system (CMS) commandsand utility programs are supplied with the PC ServerSystem/390 software in addition to those provided by theOS/2, VM/ESA, and VSE/ESA operating systems. Theseare essential to the operation of the 370 functions on thePC Server System/500.
CMS Commands: CMS commands are includedwith the VM Starter System supplied with the PC ServerSystem/390 software. These commands can be invokedfrom VM sessions running on the PC Server System/390to access host VM data and OS/2 files and to interact withthe OS/2 environment. These are included with the VMStarter System supplied with the PC Server. The followingis a list of commands and their functions.
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 223
OS/2 Utilities: Several OS/2 utilities are providedwith the S/390 Microprocessor Complex programs to helpcontrol and operate the PC Server System/390. Theinteractive functions invoked by the PC Server System/390icons use some of these utilities to perform their tasks.See “Icons (System/390)” on page 235. The utilities canbe invoked from an OS/2 command prompt without usingone of the PC Server System/390 interactive interfaces.Some of the utilities can also be used to implementuser-written device managers.
Command Function
CACHE Install and control CMS minidiskcache in the PC ServerSystem/390 virtual machines
HDETACH Detach a host VM minidisk
HLINK Establish a link from a PCServer/390 VM session to thehost VM minidisk
HQUERY Display information about hostminidisks
LTRENAME Rename the title bar for a 3270session
MOUNT Associate an OS/2 filespecification with a PC ServerSystem/390 emulated tape drive
OS2 Execute an OS/2 command froma PC Server System/390 virtualmachine
PCOPY Copy (import/export) filesbetween OS/2 and VM
PIPE OS2 Uses the OS2FILE stagecommand in a pipeline runningunder CMS to read or write anOS/2 file on an associated OS/2system
TFA Activates the Transparent FileAccess functions in a PC ServerSystem/390 virtual machine
224 PC Server HMM
The OS/2 utilities and their functions are.
Utility Function
ALC.EXE Allocate files as FBA DASD,display volume information andchange volume labels
AWSCFG.CMD Invoke the PC Server System/390Configurator
AWSCMLT.EXE Configure logical terminalsessions on PC ServerSystem/390s and OS/2workstations
AWSMOUNT.EXE Change the DASD or tapeconfiguration dynamically
AWSPROF.EXE Record the name and location ofthe DEVMAP to use as thedefault for the Configurator andinitial program load (IPL)
AWSSTART.EXE Start PC Server System/390device managers
AWSSTAT.EXE Display or change the status ofthe 370 I/O subsystem anddevice managers
BLDLIST.CMD Build a file containing a list ofSEND/RECEIVE or COPYcommands for all the files in aspecified subdirectory
CLRIO.EXE Issue a CLEAR I/O instruction todevices attached to the S/370Channel Emulator/A
C370TRC.EXE Take low level trace of the S/370Channel Emulator/A
DEV2NAME.CMD Create an American NationalStandard Code for InformationInterchange (ASCII) file from aDEVMAP file
IPL.CMD Start the channel processor andIPL the 370 processor
LTRENAME.EXE Rename the title bar of a CM/23270 session
RDEVMAP.CMD Reconfigure directory and pathnames in a DEVMAP
SYSSOWN.CMD Avoid rebuilding the VM centralprocessor (CP) nucleus when youwant to add a new volume
9346CMD.EXE Issue tape positioning commandsto the 1/4" tape drive
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 225
VSE/ESA TMOUNT Utility: A PC ServerSystem/390 utility program called TMOUNT.JCL is alsoprovided for VSE/ESA. This program runs in a VSE/ESAbatch partition and performs the same functions forVM/ESA and OS/2 respectively.
ConfigurationIn addition to the configuration program for the Server 500(see “Configuration (Server 500)”), a configuration programis provided for configuring the S/390 Microprocessorcomplex (see “Microprocessor Complex Configuration(S/390)”).
Configuration (Server 500): The Server 500Configuration Program requires the following informationfor each card (adapter) and device installed in thecomputer.
� .ADF) and .DGF files. (Normally found on the optiondiskette for the card or device and must be installedon the default drive.)
� A device driver statement in the config.sys file.(Required for the computer to load the necessary filesrequired to support the card or device.)
Note
The device driver statement for the P/390 cardshould be the last statement (last line) in theconfig.sys file.
Microprocessor Complex Configuration(S/390): After the S/390 Microprocessor Complex hasbeen successfully initialized, the S/390 Configurationprogram can be accessed by clicking on the 390 (370)Configuration Icon in the System/390 (System 370)Group on the OS/2 Desktop. See “Icons (System/390)” onpage 235.
The Configuration program is a menu driven program thatprovides two main functions.
� It allows you to describe the mapping between theinput/output (I/O) devices available on the PC ServerSystem/390 and the System/370 I/O devices theyemulate. See “Device Map” on page 230.
� It provides an easy way for Virtual Machine/EnterpriseSystems Architecture (VM/ESA) users to create andmaintain new VM userids on the PC ServerSystem/390 and minidisks associated with theseuserids.
Changes are made to the system configuration bychanging the values in the data menus.
226 PC Server HMM
The following example of reading a 9336 DASDsummarizes how the 370 I/O subsystem emulates I/Ooperations on the PC Server System/390.
1. The 390 operating system does a system I/Oinstruction to real device 100.
2. The 390 Licensed Internal Code (LIC) passes all I/Oinstructions to the 370 I/O subsystem running on thePC Server Processor Complex.
3. The 370 channel emulator executes the 370 channelprogram and passes the request to the devicemanager that claims that range of devices inDEVMAP. In this example, it would be an fixed blockarchitecture (FBA) device manager.
4. The FBA device manager gets the request for device100. It looks in the DEVMAP entry for device 100 tofill out the OS/2 file name for 9336 device 100. Thedevice map points to the OS/2 file that emulates the370 disk drive, for example, D:\VM\MAINT.191 for aVM system or D:\VSDISRES.140 for a virtual storageextended (VSE) system.
5. A request is issued to OS/2 to read the data from theOS/2 file name MAINT.191 in the \VM directory ofdisk drive D: or from the OS/2 file nameDOSRES.140 in the \VSE directory of disk drive D:/
6. OS/2 issues the request for the data to the PC Serverdevice containing disk drive D:
7. The data is passed back up the line until it ispresented to the requesting VM or VSE program.
The Configurator requires the following four files tooperator correctly. (For information on the content of thesefiles, refer to the Introducing the PC Server 500System/390L manual (Form Number GC24-5717-00)supplied with the computer.
� DEVMAP.xxx � DMKRIO.ASM � DMKSYS.ASM � USER.DIR
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 227
Configurator Structure (S/390): The followingillustration shows the hierarchy of menus in the PC ServerSystem/390 Configurator. Online help is available for mostof the menus.
ConfiguratorLogo
ConfiguratorPassword
FunctionsMain Menu
F1 F2 F3 F4
Help Update Update Update ChangeSystem User System F5 ConfiguratorDevices Data Envioronment Password
Select EndUserid F6 Save All
Then Exit
UserFunction Update AllSelection F7 370 IT
Sessions
F2 F3 F4Save All
Update Update Update F8 Do NotSystem User User ExitEnvironment Minidisks Links
F9 DisplayNot Found
Quit DoF10 Not Save
Anything
Device ManagersThe PC Server System/390 supplies several devicemanagers to support emulation of 370 I/O devices. Thedevice managers are OS/2 applications that are startedwhen S/390 Microprocessor Complex is IPL'ed with adevice map containing device definitions that use thedevice managers.
Each device manager is identified by name on the PCServer/390 Configuration screen that is used to performdevice mapping. See “Microprocessor ComplexConfiguration (S/390)” on page 226. (Do not confuse thisconfiguration program with the PC Server 500Configuration program. See “Configuration (Server 500)”on page 226.)
The following is a list of device managers and theirfunction.
228 PC Server HMM
Note
For detailed information about device drivers, refer tothe Introducing the PC Server 500 System/390Lmanual (Form Number GC24-5717-00) supplied withthe computer.
Device ManagersName
Function
AWSCDK Count, Key, Data (CKD) DASDEmulator
AWSDEV General interface for device driveemulation of 370
AWSFBA Fixed Block Architecture (FBA) DASDEmulator
AWSICA Integrated Communications Adapter(ICA) support
AWSOMA Optical Media Attach
AWSPCSRV Allows communication directlybetween 390PC and OS/2
AWSPOSDD Supports dynamic POS mode ofAWSICADD
AWSSTART Starts 7432 managers under OS/2
AWSSTOP Stops 7432 managers under OS/2
AWSTAPE 3803/3420 Emulator
AWSTFA Transparent File Access (VM)
AWSWAIT Waits for 7437 managers to startunder OS/2
AWS2540 2540 Card Reader Emulator
AWS2703 2703 Emulator
AWS2821 Printer Manager
AWS3172 3172 Local Area Network (LAN)Gateway (SNA)der OS/2
AWS3215 OS/2 Typewriter Keyboard Emulator
AWS3274 3274 Control Unit Emulator(non-SNA)
AWS5080 5080 Driver
AWS9346 SCSI Quarter Inch Tape DriveManager
AWSC370 S/370 Channel Emulator DeviceManager
LAN3088 3088 Emulation over a LAN
LAN3274 LAN 3270 sessions (non-SNA)
LAN3172 3172 LAN channel Station fortransmission control protocol/internetprotocol (TCP/IP) (VM)
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 229
Device ManagersName
Function
LAN3172 3172 LAN channel Station fortransmission control protocol/internetprotocol (TCP/IP) (VM)
Device MapThe PC Server/390 I/O subsystem uses resourcesavailable on the PC Server System/390 to emulate thedevices available on larger System/390 systems. Thefollowing device mapping is used.
Host Device (System/390and System/370)
PC Server EquivalentDevice)
3270 Information Display Monochrome or ColorDisplay
CKD and FBA DASD OS/2 File
5088 Graphics Control Unit 5080 PC Server Adapter
3215 OS/2 Presentation Managersession
2703 Serial (COM) Ports
2540 Card Reader OS/2 File
1403 Printer OS/2 Print Spooler
3088 (CTC) Token Ring
3420 Tape OS/2 File
Special (VM) Host Transparent FileAccess
Special (VM) Import/Export PC Data
ICA SDLC/VTAM Connection
3172 LAN/VTAM Connection
3172 LAN/VM TCP/IP Connection
9346 1/4 inch tape
230 PC Server HMM
Diagnostic Flow Chart (S/390)
AlertBox
No
No
No No
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
User Gets Message
Customer’sResponsibility
Servicer’sResponsibility
Refer to the P/390 Software manuals1
shipped with the computer
Refer to the P/390 Software manuals1
shipped with the computer
1. Configuration Problem2. OS/2 Software Programming
Errors3. If you suspect a hardware
problem, go to "GeneralCheckout in your manualfor the system you areservicing
Contact SupportPossible Problems :1. Configuration (AWSERROR.LOG)2. Programming Error
1 Virtual Machine/Enterprise Systems Architecture (VM/ESA) .Virtual Storage Extended/Enterprise Systems Architecture (VES/ESA) or,Multiple Virtual Storage/Enterprise Systems Architecture (MVS/ESA) manuals
Run the P/390 DiagnosticsProgram
ReplaceFailingFRU
DisabledWaitState
MachineCheckError
FallingFRU
Identified
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 231
Documentation and Related IBMManuals (390)� PC Server System/390 Booklets and Manuals
– The PC Server System Library (form numberS19H-1252) contains two manuals: - User's Guide - User's Reference
– IBM PC Server 500 System/390 Introduction(form number GC24-5717
– IBM PC Server 500 System/390 Installation,Configuration, and User's Guide for VM/ESA(form number SC24-5718)
– IBM PC Server 500 System/390 Installation,Configuration, and User's Guide for VSE/ESA(form number SC24-5719)
– IBM PC Server 500 System/390 Installation,Configuration, and User's Guide for MVS/ESA(form number SA22-7210)
� OS/2 Manual– User's Guide to OS/2 Warp (part number
83G8300) � VM/ESA Manuals
– The Virtual Machine/Enterprise SystemsArchitecture Library Guide and Master Index forVM/ESA Release 2.2 (form number GC24-5518)
� VM/ESA Product Overview– VM/ESA General Information (form number
GC24-5651)– VM/ESA Introduction and Feature Summary
(form number SC24-5651)� VM/ESA Planning, Administration, Installation and
Service– VM/ESA Installation (form number SC24-5526)– VM/ESA Service Guide (SC24-557)– VM/ESA Introduction and Feature Summary
(form number SC24-5651)– VM/ESA Planning and Administration (form
number SC24-5519– VM/ESA Connectivity Planning, Administration,
and Operation (form number SC24-5448)– VM/ESA Group Control System Reference for
370 (form number SC24-5531)– VM/ESA Running Guest Operating Systems
(form number SC24-5522)� VM/ESA Operation and End Use
– VM/ESA System Operation (form numberSC24-5528)
– VM/ESA CMS User's Guide (form numberSC24-5460)
– VM/ESA CMS Command Reference (formnumber SC24-5461)
– VM/ESA Command and Utility Reference (formnumber SC24-5519)
232 PC Server HMM
� VM/ESA Diagnosis– VM/ESA System Messages and Codes (form
number SC24-5529)– VM/ESA Diagnosis Guide (form number
LY24-5250)– VM/ESA CP Diagnosis Reference (form number
LY24-5251)– VM/ESA Dump Viewing Facility (form number
SC24-5530) � VSE/ESA Manuals
– The VSE/Enterprise Systems Architecture LibraryGuide (form number GC33-6519)
� VSE/ESA Product Overview– VSE/ESA General Information (form number
GC33-6501)� VSE/ESA Planning and Installation
– IBM VSE/Enterprise System ArchitecturePlanning (form number SC33-6503)
– IBM VSE/Enterprise System ArchitectureInstallation and Service (form numberSC33-6504)
– VSE/Enterprise Unattended Node Support (formnumber SC33-6512)
� VSE/ESA Administration and Operation– VSE/ESA Administration (form number
SC33-6505)– IBM VSE/Enterprise System Architecture
Operation (form number SC33-6506)– VM/ESA Messages and Codes (form number
SC33-6507)– VM/ESA Networking Support (form number
SC33-6508)– VM/ESA Programming and Workstation Guide
(form number SC33-6509)– VM/ESA Guide for Solving Problems (form
number SC33-6510)– VM/ESA Guide to Systems Functions (form
number SC33-6511)– VM/ESA System Control Statements (form
number SC33-6513)– VM/ESA Diagnosis Tools (form number
SC33-6514) � MVS/ESA manuals
– One of the following:MVS/ESA SP V4 Library Guide (form numberGC28-1601)MVS/ESA SP V5 Library Guide with JES2 (formnumber GC28-1423)MVS/ESA SP V5 Library Guide with JES3 (formnumber GC28-1424)
– One of the following:DFSM/MVS V1R2 General Information—LibraryGuide (form number GC26-4902)
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 233
MVS/DFP V3R3 Guide and Master Index (formnumber GC26-4553)
– One of the following:VTAM V3R4.1 for MVS/ESA Release Guide(form number LY43-0054)VTAM V3R4.2 for MVS/ESA Release Guide(form number LY43-0062)VTAM V4R1 for MVS/ESA Release Guide (formnumber GC31-6441)VTAM V4R2 for MVS/ESA Release Guide (formnumber GC31-6492)
– One of the following:ISPF and ISPF/DPF V3r5 Getting Started (formnumber SC34-4256)ISPF Version 4 Getting Started (form numberSC34-4440)
– Both of the following:TSO/E Version 2 Library Guide (form numberCG28-1866)TCP/IP for MVS V3R1 Planning and MigrationGuide (form number SC31-7189)
� Operating System Architecture References– IBM System/370 Principles of Operation (form
number GA22-7000)– Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Principles
of Operation (form number SA22-7201)– Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Data
Compression (form number SA22-7208) � Softcopy
– The IBM Online Library Omnibus Edition: VMCollection (form number SK2T-2067)
– The IBM Online Library Omnibus Edition: VSECollection (form number SK2T-0060)
– The IBM Online Library Omnibus Edition: MVSCollection (form number SK2T-0710)
Error Reporting (P/390)The S/390 Microprocessor Complex uses the followingmethods of error reporting.
� POST Error 165 (configuration)If this error is displayed and the P/390 card does notappear on the installed devices list, it is an indicationthat one or more of the following problems exist:
– Missing or bad .ADF or .DGS files– Missing or incorrect statement in the config.sys
file. (The statement for the P/390 should be thelast line in the config.sys file.)
� Dialog Box (Machine Check Errors)If an error is detected during or after initialization ofthe P390 card, a Dialog Box with a Machine Checkerror is displayed. If this occurs, run the P/390Diagnostic and Option diskette. For a list of common
234 PC Server HMM
Machine Check errors, see “Machine Check ErrorMessages” on page 235.
� AWS Error LogContains ASKI test information about failures thatoccurred during operation. Located in the P390subdirectory on the hard disk drive (path =C:\P390\AWSERROR.LOG), this file can be editedwith a text editor.
Icons (System/390)The System/390 (System/370) Group located on the OS/2Desktop contains the following icons.
IPL 390 (370) Processor Starts the S/390Microprocessor Complexprograms
End 390 (370) Processor Stops the S/390Microprocessor Complexprograms
390 (370) Configuration Starts the 390 (370)Configurator Program
390 Manual Operations Debugging tool, see“Software Facilities (ServerSystem/390)” on page 238.
370 I/O Trace Debugging tool, see“Software Facilities (ServerSystem/390)” on page 238.
370 Snap Shot Dump Debugging tool, see“Software Facilities (ServerSystem/390)” on page 238.
Initialization (S/390)To Initialize (start) the S/390 Complex, click on the IPL 390(370) Processor icon in the System/390 (System/370)Group on the OS/2 Desktop. See “Icons (System/390).”
Machine Check Error Messages Note
The diagnostic and error reporting programs may referto the P/390 as a P/370.
If an error is detected during or after the P/390 card isinitialized, a dialog box containing a Machine Check erroris displayed on the screen. This error may be caused byone or more of the following:
� Missing or bad .ADF or .DGS files� Missing or incorrect statement in the congif.sys file
(The statement for the P/390 should be the last line inthe config.sys file.)
� Missing or incorrect code on the P/390 card � Defective hardware
The following is a list of common machine check errors.
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 235
� Can't open/find $s file. RC=$d2� Control Store Parity Error. Try END P/370 and IPL
again.� Uncorrectable memory error at ' $s'x (daughter card)
code= $s� No status available.� PS/2 used invalid S/370 address code= $s fic= $s
addr= $s� Internal use of invalid S/370 address. code= $s fic=
$s addr= $s� code = ' $s'x, fic= $s addr=' $s'x
236 PC Server HMM
Power-On Self Test (POST)When you power-on or re-boot the computer, the computerruns the following two power-on self tests (POSTs).
Note
These tests are run consecutively without intervention.
If you receive a POST error (165) from the P/390 LICcode, see “Error Reporting (P/390)” on page 234.
BIOS Code(resides on the systemboard)
Checks the memory, systemboard, direct access storagedevice (DASD),configuration, etc.. If youreceive a POST error fromthe BIOS code, refer to the"Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel)" on page26 in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual
Licensed InternalCode (LIC)(written to files on the harddisk drive)
Checks the P/390 processorcard and attached memorycard.
Product OverviewThe IBM PC Server 500 System/390 is a PC Server 500(see “PC Server 500 - Type 8641” on page 177) with anIBM S/390 Microprocessor Complex (see “Locations” onpage 241) installed. The S/390 Microprocessor Complexand S/390 programs provide the hardware and softwarerequired to run 390-based applications on the PC Server500 System/390.
PC Server Processor 390 ProcessorComplex Complex
OS/2 390 Operating SystemD
OS/2 Application 390 ApplicationE
Communications 390 LICV Manager/2
I OS/2 DeviceDrivers
C370 I/O Subsystem
E CommunicationBuffer
SShared memorywindows
PC Server Memory 390 Memory
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 237
Software Facilities (Server System/390) Note
Knowledge of System/390 and CP/390 architecture isessential to the proper use of these processor controlfunctions. Information about System architecture isfound in IBM Principles of Operation, GA22-7201.
VM/ESA and VSE/ESA use the same problemdetermination tools on the PC Server/390 for debugging390 operating system and applications problems as theydo on 390 mainframe systems.
Standard OS/2 debugging tools can be used to assist withproblems with the 390 environment on the PC Server/390since many of the functions use OS/2 facilities and PCServer devices.
The 390 Processor Complex Programs also have thefollowing tools for controlling and debugging the system.
390 Manual Operations Provides the function ofthe 390 hardware consoleas on mainframe systems.
390 Status Window Displays the processorstatus word (PSW) andcurrent status of the 390processor.
390 I/O Trace Used to trace I/O requestbetween the 390processor and its I/Osubsystem. The tracecan be selected by deviceand can be written to anOS/2 file. It can also bedisplayed in aPresentation Managerwindow by selecting the390 I/O trace icon. (See“Icons (System/390)” onpage 235.)
Snap Shot Dump Creates a binary file ofthe I/O subsystem to beused by IBM supportpersonnel during problemdetermination. Thisprogram is selected byclicking on the Snap ShotDump icon.
238 PC Server HMM
Microprocessor Complex Diagnostics(S/390): The IBM P/390 Advanced Diagnostics andOptions Diskette contains the programs used to test theS/390 Microprocessor Complex installed in the computer,and the ADF and DGF files required for configuration. Torun the S/390 Microprocessor Complex Diagnosticsprograms, see “Advanced Diagnostics and OptionsDiskette (S/390).”
Advanced Diagnostics and Options Diskette(S/390): The Advanced Diagnostics and OptionsDiskette is a self-booting diskette that contains the P/390diagnostic programs. The diagnostic programs aredesigned to be used with the diagnostic diskette anddiagnostic information in the IBM PS/2 HardwareMaintenance manual for the computer you are servicing.The results of the diagnostic tests are reported as asuccess or failure.
To run the P/390 diagnostic programs, do the following.
Note
First run the diagnostics program for the computer youare servicing. If the P/390 card is recognized by theconfiguration program (the P/390 appears on theinstalled devices list), the diagnostics program willinstruct you to run the P/390 Diagnostics and Optiondiskette. If the P/390 card is not recognized by theconfiguration program (does not appear on theinstalled devices list), go to “Error Reporting (P/390)”on page 234.
1. Power-off the computer; then power-off all externaldevices.
2. Insert the P/390 Diagnostics and Option diskette intodrive A.
3. Power-on all external devices; then power-on thecomputer.
4. When the Main Menu appears, a. Select 2
b. After the information message, press Enter .c. Select E to run the diagnostic programs with
expanded messages.
The diagnostic program will test the adapter andterminate with the message "P/390 in slot Xsuccessfully passed all tests, or a failuremessage that includes an error message anderror code. The error message will identify thefailing FRU.
d. If a failure message is displayed, it identifies thefailing FRU(s) as:
1) The adapter card, excluding the memorycard
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 239
2) The memory card3) Both the adapter card and the memory
daughter card (when the failure cannot beisolated).
e. Record the error code and replace the identifiedFRU.
240 PC Server HMM
LocationsThe S/390 Microprocessor Complex consists of a P/390Processor Card and an optional P/390 32MB, or P/39096MB Memory Card attached to the P/390 ProcessorCard.
When the processor card is installed with a memory cardattached, the voltages for the memory card are providedby the system-board slot adjacent to the slot occupied bythe processor card. Together the P/390 Processor Cardand a P/390 32MB, or P/390 96MB Memory Card occupytwo adjacent slots on the system board.
Processor Adapter BulkheadEnd
ConnectorEnd
MemoryConnector
MountingHoles
HeatSink
SnapSpacer
32 MB Memory Adapter
Parts Listing System Unit - Type 8641 P/390 Microprocessor Complex 17H5372P/390 32MB Memory Card 26H2931P/390 96MB Memory Card 26H2978S/370 Channel Emul./A Adapter 06F3160S/370 Channel Emul./A Cable 80F19394/10GB DDS2 4mm Drive 16G8454
IBM PC Server 500 System/390 - Type 8641 241
PC Server 520 - Type 8641
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE . . . . . . 245Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL . . . . . 246
Diagnostics and Test Information (Models EZO, EZV,EZL, EZS, EZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Diagnostic Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Installing Additional Test Programs . . . . . . 249USERDIAG.CFG Example . . . . . . . . . . 250
Diagnostics and Test Information (Models MZO, MZV,MZS, MZE, MZL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Reference and Diagnostic Diskettes . . . . . . 252Using the System Diskettes . . . . . . . . . 252Starting the Operating System . . . . . . . . 253Backing Up System Diskettes . . . . . . . . 253Setting Micro Channel Configuration . . . . . 253Copy an Option Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . 254Testing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 254System Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 255
Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 256Configuration (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE) 256
EISA, ISA, and PCI Adapters . . . . . . . 257ISA or EISA Features and Options . . . . . 258
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Sample Applications . . . . . . . . . . 259
PCI Features and Options . . . . . . . . . 260Assigning Interrupt Levels . . . . . . . . . 260Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260EISA Configuration Diskette . . . . . . . . 261
Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette 261Making Menu Selections . . . . . . . . 261Recording EISA Configuration Settings . 262Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette 263Using EISA Configuration Diskette
Advanced Function . . . . . . . . . 263Configuration (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE,
MZL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Using the Configuration/Setup Utility . . . . 265Changing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility Program 267System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Micro Channel Configuration . . . . . . . 267Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Configuring Devices and I/O Ports . . . . . 268Assigning Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . 269Configuring Video Options . . . . . . . . 269Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Defining System Security . . . . . . . . . 269Setting an Administrator Password . . . . . 270Setting a Power-on Password . . . . . . . 271Defining a System Owners Name . . . . . 272
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 243
Restricting Access to Diskette Drives . . . 272Defining the Start Options . . . . . . . . . 273Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Configuration Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Type 8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,
EZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 274Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts 276
Type 8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,EZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts 277Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts 277Changing the Software Configuration . . 277
Internal Drives (Type 8641) . . . . . . . . . . 278Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Power Supplies (Type 8641) . . . . . . . . . 283Power Supply LED and Button . . . . . . 283Primary Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . 284Optional Power Supply Drive Connector
Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Power Supply Shutdowns . . . . . . . . . 285
Setup Program (Type 8641) . . . . . . . . . 286Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641
(Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE) . . . . 287Setup Program Default Settings (Models MZO,
MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL) . . . . . . . . . . . 288Specifications (Type 8641) . . . . . . . . . . 289Symmetric Multiprocessors/Multiprocessing . . 290System Board Replacement (Type 8641) . . . 290Type 5 Adapter Installation (Type 8641, Models
MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL) . . . . . . . . 291Locations (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE) . . 294
Controls/Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Expansion Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 296Memory Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . 297System Board Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 298System Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . 299System Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Locations (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL) . 301Controls/Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Expansion Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 303Memory Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . 304System Board Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 305System Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . 306System Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Checkpoint Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Keyboards (101/102 Key) . . . . . . . . . . 323Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
244 PC Server HMM
FeaturesThe following features of the PC Server 520 Type 8641are divided into the following two categories.
� “Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE”� “Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL” on page 246
Note
All PC Server computers have Selectable Startup.
Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZEMicroprocessor
� Pentium with 16KB of internal cache� Expandable to two microprocessors
Cache Memory
� On each processor: 16KB of level-1 cache� 512KB of level-2 write-back cache
Memory
� 32MB EOS 70ns expandable to 256MB Note
Parity memory module kits are supported but must notbe installed in combination with EOS memory.
Diskette Drive
� Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44MB � Optional (internal):
– 3.5-inch, 1.44MB – 3.5-inch, 2.88MB – 5.25-inch, 1.2MB
CD-ROM Drive:
� Standard: SCSI-2 4X CD-ROM
Keyboard
� Standard: 101-key
Mouse
� Standard: IBM Mouse
Expansion Bays and Slots
� Three 32-bit PCI slots� Six 32-bit combination EISA/ISA slots� 22 drive bays, 18 of them hot-swap
Video
� SVGA controller � Compatibility:
– Video graphics array (VGA)– Enhanced graphics adapter (EGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)– Multicolor graphics array (MCGA)
Hard Disk Drive
� Number of drives and drive capacities are model dependent� Can support up to 20 hard disk drives, 18 of them hot-swap
Security Features
� Door lock � U-bolt enabled
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 245
� Selectable drive-startup� Cable cover (optional)
Integrated Functions
� Vital product data (VPD)� LED usability support
� Video connector� Two serial connectors
� Parallel connector � Mouse connector � Keyboard connector� Battery-backed clock and time/date calendar
Power Supply
� 434 watt with automatic range voltage selection(115–230 V ac)
� Built-in overload and surge protection� Power supply upgrade expansion option
– 220 watt automatic range voltage selection add-on– Built-in overload and surge protection
SCSI-2 Controller
� IBM PC Server SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter onnon-disk-array models
� IBM PC Server SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI RAID Adapter ondisk-array models
Upgradable POST and BIOS
� Two 256KB flash ROMs
Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZLThe features for the PC Server 520 Type 86451 MicroChannel Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, and MZL are:
Microprocessor
� Pentium with 16KB of internal cache; clock rate varies bymodel
� Expandable to two microprocessors
Cache Memory
� 512KB of level-2 cache
Memory
� 32MB EOS 70ns expandable to 256MB Note
Parity memory module kits are supported but must notbe installed in combination with EOS memory.
Diskette Drives
� Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44MB � Optional (internal):
– 3.5-inch, 2.88MB – 3.5-inch, 1.44MB – 5.25-inch, 1.2MB
Hard Disk Drive
� Number and capacity of standard drives varies by model� Supports up to 18 internal hard disk drives� Hot swap bays standard on some models; available on all
models
CD-ROM Drive
� Standard: SCSI-2
246 PC Server HMM
Keyboard and Mouse
� 101-key keyboard � Mouse
Expansion Bays and Slots
� Six 32-bit Micro Channel slots, two 32-bit PCI slots� 22 drive bays, 18 of them hot-swap
Video
� Super video graphics (SVGA) connector � Compatibility:
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)– Color graphics adapter (CGA)– Multicolor graphics array (MCGA)
Security Features
� Bolt-down capability � Door lock� Administrator and power-on passwords� Selectable startup drive� Security cover (optional)� C2 security (optional)
Upgradable POST and BIOS
� Upgradable EEPROM on the system board� POST/BIOS upgrades (when available)
Integrated Functions
� LED usability support � Video port� Two serial ports
� Parallel port� Auxiliary device port
� Keyboard port� Battery-backed clock and calendar
� SCSI-2– 1 16-bit external connector– 2 internal connectors (one 8-bit and one 16-bit)
IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAID Adapter (disk-arraysystem)
� Two 16-bit internal connectors� One 16-bit external connector
Power Supply
� 430 watt with voltage switch (115–230 V ac)� Built-in overload and surge protection� Power supply upgrade expansion option
– 220 watt automatic range voltage selection add-on– Built-in overload and surge protection
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 247
Diagnostics and Test Information(Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE)The following is a list of problems and references fordiagnosing the above named computers.
Notes
� The QAPlus/PRO diagnostic program recognizesthe primary processor as LUN 1 and thesecondary processor as LUN 2. During testingthe program automatically tests LUN 1. Youmust select LUN 2 if you want the program totest the secondary processor.
� The type of DASD diagnostics required to testthe hard disk controller (adapter) and drives isdetermined by the type of hard disk adapterinstalled in the computer.
� Always start “General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO)”on page 4.
The Diagnostic program supplied with the server is theprimary method of testing the server. Option-specificdiagnostic files are supplied with some optional devicesand adapters. These files provide a more specialized testof the option. “Installing Additional Test Programs” onpage 249 provides additional information about installingand using diagnostic files. Also, refer to thedocumentation supplied with the option for information oninstalling and running option-specific diagnostics.
Problem Reference
DASD, CD-ROM or SCSIProblems
For non-disk-array models, see“SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547. For array models, see “DiskArray Configuration” onpage 461.
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index”on page 308.
� “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” onpage 4.
Power Supply Voltages See “Power Supplies (Type8641)” on page 283.
Miscellaneous “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
Diagnostic FilesThe Diagnostic program supplied with the server is theprimary method of testing the server. Option-specificdiagnostic files are supplied with some optional devicesand adapters. These files provide a more specialized test
248 PC Server HMM
of the option. “Installing Additional Test Programs” onpage 145 provides additional information about installingand using diagnostic files. Also, refer to thedocumentation supplied with the option for information oninstalling and running option-specific diagnostics.
Installing Additional Test ProgramsYou can add other test programs to the DiagnosticDiskette. These other programs are usually provided onthe diskette supplied with a device. After you add theprograms to the Diagnostic Diskette, you can includeinformation from the programs in the Test Log.
Before the test programs can find these programs to runas the User Diags test group, information about them mustbe included in a file called USERDIAG.CFG. This is anASCII text file. It must include the following three items foreach test to run:
� Program Name (.COM and .EXE files only)� Test Description of the test to be run� Command-line parameters to be passed to the
program identified in the first item of this list
Notes
1. All of the information for a given test must be ona single line, and a semicolon (;) must separatethe items on the line.
2. Make sure you press Enter at the end of eachline of text in the USERDIAG.CFG file. Thiscreates a carriage return line feed (CR LF) whichis necessary for the User Diagnostics to be foundand executed.
3. If the program executable file is in a directoryother than the QA directory (or other directoryyou have designated to contain the QA files), thatdirectory must be listed in the PATH= section ofthe AUTOEXEC.BAT.
4. You can use a .CFG file other thanUSERDIAG.CFG if you use the command line“USRCONFIG=filename,” when running thediagnostic programs. For example, you mightuse: QAPLPRO /USRCONFIG=MYTESTS.CFG.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 249
USERDIAG.CFG ExampleAn example USERDIAG.CFG file might look like thefollowing:
Note
You can have more than one command-line parameterfor any given test.
When you view these tests on the Test Group window forthe User Diag test group, they appear as follows:
(♦) 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem(♦) Generic 1(♦) Generic 2(♦) CMD 1(♦) CMD 2(♦) CMD 3
The diagnostic program automatically assigns a testnumber to each test. The test numbers start at 201 andcontinue upward as needed. The numbers for the testslisted above are as follows:
202 9600 Baud 5 Line Modem203 Generic 1204 Generic 2205 CMD 1206 CMD 2207 CMD 3
Program Name TestDescription
Command-LineParameter
BBSMODEM.EXE; 9600 Baud 5Line Modem;
5
TEST1.EXE; Generic 1; TEST2.EXE; Generic 2; TESTALL.EXE; CMD 1; 1TESTALL.EXE; CMD 2; 2TESTALL.EXE; CMD 3; 3
250 PC Server HMM
Diagnostics and Test Information(Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)The following is a list of problems and references fordiagnosing the above named computers.
Notes
� The System Board Diagnostics tests are theprimary method for testing the computer. See“System Board Diagnostics” on page 255.
� The QAPlus/PRO diagnostic program recognizesthe primary processor as LUN 1 and thesecondary processor as LUN 2. During testingthe program automatically tests LUN 1. Youmust select LUN 2 if you want the program totest the secondary processor.
� The type of DASD diagnostics required to testthe hard disk controller (adapter) and drives isdetermined by the type of hard disk adapterinstalled in the computer.
� Always start with “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
Problem Reference
DASD, CD-ROM or SCSIProblems
For non-disk-array models, see“SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547. For array models, see “DiskArray Configuration” onpage 461.
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index”on page 308
� Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel) on page26 in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
� Symptom-to-FRU Index(QAPlus/PRO) on page 61in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
Power Supply Voltages See “Power Supplies (Type8641)” on page 283.
Miscellaneous “General Checkout(QAPlus/PRO)” on page 4.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 251
Reference and Diagnostic DiskettesThe Reference Diskette and Diagnostic Diskettes, suppliedwith the server, contain a copy of the system programs.Collectively, these diskettes are referred to as the SystemDiskettes.
The System Diskettes normally are used under thefollowing conditions:
� To configure and test Micro Channel adapters� To test computer hardware
Using the System Diskettes Note
Always use the backup copy of the system disketteswhen configuring and troubleshooting the server.
To start the System Diskettes:
1. Insert the backup copy of the Reference Diskette intothe primary diskette drive.
2. Power-on the system. Or, if the system ispowered-on, insert the Reference Diskette and pressCtrl +Alt +Del.
The system begins the power-on self test. If apower-on or administrator password is set, the systemprompts you to enter it.
Note
If an administrator password is set, you mustenter it to access the Reference and DiagnosticDiskettes.
After a few moments, the system programs MainMenu appears, and displays the following choices.
a. Start operating systemb. Backup of system diskettesc. Set/View Micro Channel Configurationd. Copy an option diskettee. Test the computer
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight a choice; then press Enter .
You can get help about any selection by highlighting it andpressing F1. The active keys are shown at the bottom ofthe screen.
When you finish making changes:
1. Press F3 to exit without saving the changes.2. Press Enter to save the changes. You are prompted
to restart the computer so that the changes will takeeffect.
You can get online help for each task by pressing F1.
252 PC Server HMM
Starting the Operating SystemTo start the operating system:
1. Select Start operating system from the Main Menu,and then follow the instructions on the screen.
2. When prompted, remove the Reference Diskette, thenpress Enter to restart the computer from a diskette orhard disk drive.
The server restarts.
Backing Up System DiskettesSelect Backup of system diskettes from the Main Menuto backup the system diskettes or to restore theconfiguration information from the system diskettes. Thisis useful in case the battery fails or a change that youmade to the configuration information causes a problemand you need to change it back to its previous setting.
Note
Store the original system diskettes in a safe place.Always use the backup copies when configuring andtroubleshooting the server.
The system prompts you to switch the diskettes and labelthe diskette.
Note
You will need to have a formatted diskette for eachsystem diskette that you copy.
Setting Micro Channel ConfigurationSelect Set/View Micro Channel Configuration from theMain Menu to view, change, backup, or restore systemconfiguration of Micro Channel adapters. Follow theinstructions on the screen.
The following figure shows a Micro Channel configurationscreen.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 253
Change Configuration
Slot 1 - IBM Ethernet Adapter/AAdapter Media Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Interrupt Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Micro Channel I/O Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Streaming Date Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fairness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Arbitration Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity Enable/Monitor Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Slot 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Autosense][Interrupt][IC00-ICFF][Enabled][Fairness ON][Level 5][Parity OFF/Monitor OFF][Empty][Empty][Empty][Empty]
F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Previous F6=Next F7=Bkwd F8=FwdF10=Save
Press F3 to return to the Main Menu.
Copy an Option DisketteSome options come with a diskette that includes test andconfiguration information. Select Copy an option diskettefrom the Main Menu to copy this information to the systemdiskettes.
To copy an option diskette:
1. Select Copy an option diskette from the Main Menu,and follow the instructions on the screen.
2. Remove the option diskette from the diskette drive.3. Repeat the preceding steps until all option diskettes
have been copied.4. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
Testing the ComputerThe Test the computer utility program tests the systemboard and installed options.
To verify that your server is working correctly:
1. Select Test the computer from the Main Menu.2. To test the system board, disk drives, video, and
other system components, select System boarddiagnostics ; then, press Enter . When prompted,remove the Reference Diskette and insert the SystemBoard Diagnostic Diskette. Follow the instructions onthe screen.
3. To test Micro Channel adapters, select MicroChannel diagnostics ; then press Enter . Whenprompted, remove the Reference Diskette and insertthe Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskette.
4. When all tests are completed, the system promptsyou to remove the Diagnostic Diskette and pressEnter to restart the system.
254 PC Server HMM
To get help information about any of the diagnostic tests,then press F1.
System Board DiagnosticsTo run the system board diagnostics, the system shouldfirst be booted from the reference diskette. Then, selecteither option 5 Test the computer or press Ctrl+A tobring up the test menu options in customer or advanceddiagnostic mode respectively. To run the system boarddiagnostic select option 1 from this menu and insert thesystem board diagnostic diskette when prompted. Foradditional information see “Diagnostics and TestInformation (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)” onpage 251.
The following is the step by step procedure for running thediagnostic diskette to test the system board. Thisprocedure can also be used with the Module Tests optionfrom the Diagnostics Menu.
1. Boot the Reference Diskette.2. From the Main Menu , select option 5 Test
Computer .3. From the Test the Computer menu, select option 1
System Board Diagnostics .4. Remove the Reference Diskette and insert the
QAPlus/PRO Diagnostics Diskette.5. Follow prompts. (Initialization takes approximately 4
minutes.)6. At the QAPlus/PRO Main Menu, select Diagnostics .7. Select Quick Check .8. At the System Board Group, look for LUN 1 of 2 or
LUN 2 of 2. This indicates which CPU thediagnostics are actually testing. Use the + and −keys to change the CPU selected. (The LUNmessage is at the top right of the display.)
9. Use the Spacebar and Cursor keys to select orde-select groups.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 255
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the PC Server 520 - Type8641.
� “Configuration (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE).”� “Configuration (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)”
on page 264.� “Configuration Conflicts” on page 274.� “Internal Drives (Type 8641)” on page 278.� “Power Supplies (Type 8641)” on page 283.� “Setup Program (Type 8641)” on page 286.� “Setup Program Default Settings Type 8641 (Models
EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE)” on page 287.� “Setup Program Default Settings (Models MZO, MZV,
MZS, MZE, MZL)” on page 288.� “Specifications (Type 8641)” on page 289.� “Symmetric Multiprocessors/Multiprocessing” on
page 290.� “System Board Replacement (Type 8641)” on
page 290.� “Type 5 Adapter Installation (Type 8641, Models
MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)” on page 291.
Configuration (Models EZO, EZV, EZL,EZS, EZE)
Note
DASD and other adapters may require additionalconfiguration information.
Configuration is the allocation of the server resources toorganize and interconnect hardware devices and softwareprograms. The steps required to configure the abovenamed servers depend on the number and variety ofdevices and programs installed.
For information about configuring the IBM SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAID Adapter, see “Starting the RAIDConfiguration Program” on page 465.
These servers support the following types of adapters.
� Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)� Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA)� Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)
The following hardware configuration utility programs aresupplied with the server.
� Built-in Setup programConfigures system board functions, such as theintegrated drive electronics (IDE) controller and serialand parallel port assignments that you install. It alsoallows you to set passwords for starting up andaccessing the Setup program.
� PC Server 520 EISA Configuration Diskette
256 PC Server HMM
Configures EISA and ISA adapters (boards).� Built-in SCSI-2 adapter utility program (SCSISelect
Utility program)Configures SCSI devices installed in non-disk-arraymodels
� Configuration Option DisketteConfigures SCSI devices in disk-array models
EISA, ISA, and PCI Adapters: Before installing anew device or program, read the documentation suppliedwith it. Reading the instructions helps you determine thesteps required for installation and configuration. Thefollowing list provides a preview of the actions that mightbe required to configure the server.
When installing different types of adapters at the sametime, install and configure them in the following sequence:
1. ISA 2. EISA 3. PCI
Note
During POST, the server automatically configures ISAPlug and Play and PCI devices.
1. Run the Setup program and record the currentconfiguration settings.
2. Backup the EISA Configuration Diskette.
See “Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette” onpage 261.
3. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette and:a. Record the current settings.b. Install configuration files (.CFG).
Note
If the .CFG files were not supplied with theadapter, see “Files” on page 258.
See “Recording EISA Configuration Settings” onpage 262 and “Starting the EISA ConfigurationDiskette” on page 263.
4. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “System Board Jumpers” on page 299.5. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions supplied with the adapter.6. Install the adapter in the server.7. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions supplied with thesoftware.
8. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Configuration Conflicts” on page 274.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 257
ISA or EISA Features and Options: Some ISAand most EISA devices are supplied with option diskettes.These diskettes can contain any or all of the followingtypes of information:
� Configuration files (.CFG)� Diagnostic files (.DGS)
� Device drivers� Sample applications (mini-applications)
Files: A configuration file is required to configure theserver for ISA or EISA adapters. You must copy thisconfiguration file, which has a file-name extension of .CFG,from the device diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskettebefore installing the device in the server. Theconfiguration file reserves the system resources that theadapter needs to function properly.
Some ISA adapters are supplied with a diskette thatcontains the CFG file for the adapter. If ISA adapters areinstalled that were not supplied with their own CFG files,you must use the PC Server EISA Configuration Diskettefor the system you are servicing to create a unique CFGfile for each adapter.
Note
The unique .CFG files are slot sensitive. That is, theyshould not be used to configure identical adapters inmultiple systems unless you install the adapters in thesame expansion slots within each system.
To create a unique CFG file for an ISA adapter, do thefollowing:
1. Insert the IBM PC Server EISA Configuration Diskettefor the system you are servicing into diskette drive A.
2. Start the configuration utility program.3. At the main menu, select Step 2, Add or remove
boards.4. At the next menu, select the slot in which you
installed the adapter.5. At the next screen, select OK.6. At the next screen, press F5; then select Create
.CFG file . 7. Press Enter .
8. At the Create a board CFG file screen, type in theadapter manufacturer and description (for exampleIBM Token Ring); then press Enter .
9. Refer to the adapter documentation for informationabout specific configuration parameters (such as IRQor DMA channel) required for the adapter. Then,follow the instructions on the screen to enter theappropriate parameters on the menu.
258 PC Server HMM
Notes:
a. Normally, ISA adapters do not use everyparameter. Most adapters require only a PORTaddress.
b. The SVGA video adapter in the server requiresspecific memory and I/O address assignments tofunction properly. To avoid configurationconflicts, do not assign the following SVGAmemory and I/O addresses to other adapters oroptions in the server:
� Memory address space:AðððH – C7FFH
� I/O address spaces:
ð2Eðh – ð2EFh
ð3Bðh – ð3DFh
46E8h
10. After you type in all of the appropriate parameters,press F10.
11. At the next screen, carefully verify that the informationis correct; then press Enter .
12. At the Add Confirmation window, press Enter again.13. In the next window (add), press Enter .
The adapter description appears in the selected slot.14. Verify the installation; then press F10.15. At the next menu, select Save and exit the
configuration utility .
Note
PCI devices do not require .CFG files.
Device Drivers: Device drivers are programs designedto support a specific type of hardware device. Theyprovide instructions that enable the computer to interactwith the device, or to take advantage of a device's specialfeature. The device driver might ship with the operatingsystem, the application program, or on the option diskette.Not all devices require device drivers. Refer to thedocumentation supplied with the option for additionalinformation.
Sample Applications: Some optional devices providesmall applications or sampler files. These applicationsdemonstrate the capabilities of the device and serve assoftware examples for programming the device. Refer tothe documentation supplied with the option for additionalinformation.
To configure the server for an ISA or EISA adapter:
1. Read the documentation supplied with the adapter.2. Copy any files with the extension of .CFG from the
option diskette to the EISA Configuration Diskette.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 259
See “Files” on page 258 for important informationabout configuring ISA adapters.
3. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 263).
4. Record the new configuration information (see“Recording EISA Configuration Settings” onpage 262).
5. Save the new configuration settings to the EISAConfiguration Diskette and to the nonvolatile randomaccess memory (NVRAM) (see “Starting the EISAConfiguration Diskette” on page 263).
6. Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter.7. Install the adapter in the server.
PCI Features and Options: PCI devicesautomatically communicate with the server's configurationinformation. This usually results in automatic configurationof a PCI device. If a conflict does occur, refer to“Configuration Conflicts” on page 274.
Assigning Interrupt Levels: A rotational interrupttechnique to is used to configure PCI adapters. Thistechnique enables you to install a variety of PCI adaptersthat currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
Always use the IBM PC Server EISA ConfigurationDiskette for the system you are servicing when assigninginterrupts for EISA and ISA adapters. You cannot assignan EISA or ISA adapter the same interrupt that you haveassigned to a PCI adapter. This is because the serverdoes not support interrupt sharing among PCI, EISA, andISA adapters.
If a situation occurs where you need an additionalinterrupt, you can use an interrupt from another functionthat you might not need, such as the IDE controller(Interrupt 14) or COM2 (Interrupt 3).
Memory: After you add (or remove) extended memory,you must update the EISA Configuration Diskette.
Note
Not performing the following procedure could result inmemory errors, and in the operating system notrecognizing the added (or removed) memory.
1. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 263).
2. Select Step 3: View or edit details . The systeminformation appears.
3. Under Advanced System Feature Setup , selectTotal System Memory .
4. Select the correct amount of memory, then press F10.
260 PC Server HMM
Note
It is possible to installsingle-inline-memory-modules (SIMMs) incombinations where the total amount of memoryinstalled does not appear on the memoryconfiguration screen. In the unlikely event thatthis occurs, select the next lower setting on thememory configuration menu, and all of theinstalled memory will be supported on the server.
5. Return to the Main Menu, save the configuration, andexit from the utility program.
EISA Configuration Diskette: You must use theEISA Configuration Diskette anytime you want to changeresource allocations, such as:
� Adding or removing devices � Moving devices� Changing device function
� Resolving conflicts� Adding or removing PCI adapters
Each time you use the EISA Configuration Diskette toconfigure the server, the configuration information is savedin a System Configuration Information (SCI) file and in theNVRAM configuration. Only devices that you install andconfigure correctly appear on the EISA Configurationscreens.
Backing Up the EISA Configuration Diskette:Use an operating system command, such as the DOSDISKCOPY command, to make a complete backup copy ofthe EISA Configuration Diskette. Using the backup copycan prevent damage to the original diskette. The operatingsystem documentation provides information on backing updiskettes.
Making Menu Selections: When you start the EISAConfiguration Diskette, an introductory screen appears.Type CF at the prompt. After you press Enter, the mainmenu, Steps in configuring the computer , appears. TheEISA Configuration program main menu contains fivesteps:
Step 1
Important EISA configuration information: This stepprovides information about the differences between the ISAconfiguration process and the EISA configuration process.
Step 2
Add or remove boards: If the server is configuredcorrectly, this step provides a list of the devices installed inthe EISA expansion slots. The Add choice allows you toadd ISA devices to the configuration. If EISA adapters are
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 261
installed in the server, and you have not copied the .CFGfile to the EISA Configuration Diskette, you are promptedto insert the adapter's configuration diskette into thediskette drive. The .CFG file is copied to your diskette. Ifthe adapter's .CFG file is copied to the EISA ConfigurationDiskette before starting the diskette, and the adapter isinstalled in the server, EISA devices are addedautomatically.
Step 3
View or edit details: After adding EISA or ISA adaptersin Step 2, use the Edit selection of this step to configurethem. Use the Edit Resources selection of this step forcomplex configurations. If you change a setting in thisstep, you might have to change a switch or jumper settingon the system board or on a device.
Step 4
Examine switches or print report: After Steps 1 and 2have been completed correctly, this step displays thecorrect switch and jumper settings for the installed devicesthat have switches and jumpers. Also, you can choose toprint a system configuration report.
Step 5
Save and exit: This step allows you to save theconfiguration or to discard the changes before exiting theprogram.
Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlightyour selection; then press Enter to make your selection.To help you track your progress, a checkmark (√) appearson the main menu next to the completed steps.
You can access help information through:
� Help windows, which remain active.� Information windows, which appear automatically as a
result of some configuration activities.� The Help=F1 prompt, which allows you to access the
Help Menu for screens displaying the prompt. Toremove the Help Menu, press Esc .
Recording EISA Configuration Settings: Recordthe configuration settings you made in Step 3, View oredit details and Step 4, Examine switches or printreport on a separate sheet and store it in a safe place forfuture reference. If a printer is attached to the server, youcan use the Print Screen key to print these settings. Thesettings are helpful when you install additional options.Also, record the new settings each time you makechanges. Be sure to record the current configurationsettings for the user.
262 PC Server HMM
Starting the EISA Configuration Diskette: Using abackup copy of the EISA Configuration Diskette canprevent damage to the original diskette (see “Backing Upthe EISA Configuration Diskette” on page 261).
To start the EISA Configuration Diskette, do the following:
1. Insert the EISA Configuration Diskette into thediskette drive.
2. Power-on the computer, or if it is already on, shutdown the operating system and restart the computer.
3. When the first screen appears, type CF and pressEnter . Follow the instructions on the screen until themain menu, Steps in configuring the computer ,appears.
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key toadvance through the items on the screen. Use theTab key to select choices on the bottom of thescreen. Press the Esc key to return to a previousmenu.
5. Press Enter to make a selection.6. Follow the instructions on the screen to view or
change (edit) the configuration information.
Note
Adapters installed in the server appearautomatically on the EISA Configuration screensafter you copy the adapter's configuration file (filewith an extension of .CFG) to the EISAConfiguration Diskette. If you want to manuallyadd an adapter that you have not yet installed inthe server, add it using Step 2 from the menu.To configure ISA adapters, follow the instructionson the screen.
Using EISA Configuration Diskette AdvancedFunction: Locking an ISA adapter reserves the selectedresources and prevents the system from using them toresolve resource conflicts. Use the Advanced function tolock ISA boards. An exclamation mark (!) appears next tolocked adapters.
To use the Advanced functions, do the following:
1. Start the EISA Configuration Diskette (see “Startingthe EISA Configuration Diskette”).
2. At the main menu, select Step 3, The View or editdetails screen appears.
3. Press F7. The Advanced functions screen appears.4. Follow the instructions on the screen to:
a. Lock or unlock boardsb. View additional system informationc. Set verification moded. Maintain SCI files
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 263
Configuration (Models MZO, MZV, MZS,MZE, MZL)The Configuration/Setup utility programs are stored inCMOS. These programs allow you to do the following.
� Set the system date and time� Define input and output device parameters� Define system security
The PC Server 520 Reference Diskette and the PC Server520 Diagnostic Diskettes, supplied with the server, provideadditional configuration and diagnostic support for thesystem board, disk drives, and other system components.The PC Server 520 Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskettesupports the Micro Channel adapters.
The PC Server 520 (Models MXO, MXT, MYO, MYT,MYR) supports the following types of adapters.
� Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)� Micro Channel Architecture
Three hardware configuration utility programs are suppliedwith the server.
� Configuration/Setup � SCSISelect� System programs on the Reference and Diagnostic
Diskettes
The built-in Configuration/Setup utility program configuressystem board functions, such as serial and parallel portassignments and the startup sequence for drives installedin the server. It also allows you to set passwords forstarting up and accessing the Configuration/Setup utilityprogram.
The built-in SCSI-2 utility program (SCSISelect Utilityprogram) allows you to configure the SCSI devices thatyou install in the server. Use SCSISelect to changedefault values, resolve configuration conflicts, and performa low-level format on a SCSI hard disk drive in a non-arraymodel. See, “SCSISelect Utility Program” on page 547.
264 PC Server HMM
The Reference and Diagnostic diskettes provide additionalsupport for configuration and diagnostic activities. TheReference Diskette provides options for backing up andrestoring the system diskettes, copying option diskettes,configuring Micro Channel adapters, and testing thecomputer. The PC Server 520 System Board DiagnosticDiskette provides diagnostic tests for the system board,disk drives, and other system components. The PC Server520 Micro Channel Diagnostic Diskette provides diagnostictests for Micro Channel adapters.
Note
Before installing a new device or program, read thedocumentation supplied with it. Reading theinstructions helps you determine the steps required forinstallation and configuration.
The following is a preview of the actions that might berequired to configure the server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup utility program andrecord the current configuration settings.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server's systemboard.
See “System Board Jumpers” on page 307.3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the device installation instructions.4. Install the device in the server.5. Start the Reference Diskette and:
a. Record the current settings.b. Install the configuration files (.CFG).
6. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions supplied with thesoftware.
7. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Configuration Conflicts” on page 274.
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility: Thebuilt-in Configuration/Setup utility program provides aconvenient method to configure various system settings.The configuration information is stored in CMOS. In mostcases, the server will operate using the default settings.
Always run the Configuration/Setup utility program if youhave added or removed any hardware option, or if youreceive an error message instructing you to do so. Reviewthe following information and the information supplied withthe device before making changes.
Note
Record the current settings before making anychanges.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 265
The following menu appears when you start theConfiguration/Setup utility program. Included with eachselection is a short description of its purpose.
Note
When a power-on password is entered and anadministrator password also is set, a limited version ofthe menu appears. To change the settings, theadministrator password must be entered.
� System Summary : Displays the current settings forall system functions, such as processor type, speed,and memory. You cannot change any informationfrom this screen.
� Micro Channel Configuration : Displays the statusof adapters in the Micro Channel expansion slots.For additional information, or to change theinformation displayed, you are prompted to insert theReference Diskette.
� Product Data : Displays specific information aboutthe server.
� Devices and I/O Ports : Displays a menu from whichyou can view or change the current settings for theserial and parallel ports, mouse, diskette drives, andvideo.
� Date and Time : Allows you to change the currentdate and time in the battery-backed memory.
� System Security : Allows you to set a power-onpassword, or to set an administrator (orsupervisor-level) password. You also use this optionto control access to a diskette drive, and to define asystem owners name that displays on startup.
� Start Options : Allows you to select startup optionssuch as the keyboard speed. You can also set thestartup sequence of diskette and hard disk drives.
� Advanced Setup : Allows you to change systemfunctions such as cache control and ROM shadowing.
Changing Settings: In most cases, the server willoperate using the default settings, and you need to changethe settings only to resolve configuration conflicts or toenable or change device function (for example, definingdiskette types).
You can advance through the screens by pressing thePage Up (PgUp) or Page Down (PgDn) key. Use the UpArrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to advance through theitems on the screen. Change selections by first advancingto the item you want to change, then use the Right Arrow(→) or Left Arrow keys (←) to make the change.
Press F1 for on-line Help information on for each selection.
266 PC Server HMM
Starting the Configuration/Setup UtilityProgram
Note
If a configuration error occurs, a prompt appearsbefore the operating system starts (see “ConfigurationConflicts” on page 274).
To access the Configuration/Setup utility program:
1. Power-on the server and watch the screen.2. When the message Press F1 to enter
Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.3. Follow the instructions on the screen to view or
change the configuration.4. Select Exit Setup and press Enter .
If you changed any settings, the utility programprompts you to confirm the changes. When youpress Enter , the system restarts.
Note
You must correctly exit from the Configuration/Setuputility program to save the configuration information.Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit Setupoption on the menu bar, and then select Savechanges and exit .
System Summary: Select System Summary toview information about the system, including the type andspeed of the microprocessor, amount of memory, and thenumber of disk drives connected to the server.
Changes that you make on other menus are reflected onthis summary screen. You cannot edit any of the fields.
The System Summary choice appears on the fullConfiguration/Setup menu, and also on the limitedConfiguration/Setup user's menu.
Micro Channel Configuration: Select MicroChannel Configuration to view or change theconfiguration of Micro Channel devices.
The Micro Channel Configuration screen appears,displaying the status of adapters in the Micro Channelslots.
To configure a Micro Channel adapter, or to changeconfiguration settings on a Micro Channel adapter, thesystem prompts you to insert the Reference Diskette.
The system programs Main Menu appears, and displaysthe following choices.
1. Start operating system
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 267
2. Backup of system diskettes3. Set/View Micro Channel Configuration4. Copy an option diskette5. Test the computer
The Set/View Micro Channel Configuration utility programallows you to work with the configuration information forMicro Channel adapters. See “Using the SystemDiskettes” on page 252 for additional instructions.
Press F3 to return to the Configuration/Setup menu withoutchanging the Micro Channel adapter configuration.
Micro Channel adapters and some other options aresupplied with an Option Diskette. This diskette has filesthat the server uses to recognize the new option and set itup to operate correctly.
The Micro Channel Configuration choice appears only onthe full Configuration/Setup menu.
Product Data: Select Product Data to view specificinformation about the PC Server 520, such as the machinetype and model, the system serial number, the systemboard identifier, and the revision level or issue date of theflash EEPROM and BIOS.
Changes that you make on other menus are reflected onthis summary screen. You cannot edit any of the fields.
The Product Data choice appears on the fullConfiguration/Setup menu, and also on the limitedConfiguration/Setup user's menu.
Configuring Devices and I/O Ports: You canview or change the assignments for devices and ports.Some programs and devices require specific assignments.Review the documentation that comes with the device formore information.
To view or change the assignments for devices, video, orserial or parallel ports:
1. Power-on the system. When the F1 prompt appears,press F1. The Configuration/Setup Utility menuappears.
2. Select Devices and I/O Ports .3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key
to highlight the assignment that you want to change.Use the Left Arrow (←) and Right Arrow (→) keys toscroll through the list of available choices and make aselection. If the assignment conflicts with anotherassignment, an asterisk appears next to theconflicting setting. You must change one of theconflicting settings to a value that does not conflict.
4. When you complete all changes to the menu, pressEsc to return to the Configuration/Setup menu.
268 PC Server HMM
Assigning Serial Ports: The system comes withtwo 9-pin serial ports. You can add serial ports byinstalling a serial adapter in one of the expansion slots.
Software recognizes serial ports from their serial-portassignments. No two serial ports can have the sameserial-port assignment. This normally is handled by theConfiguration/Setup utility program, but you might havespecial hardware or software that requires you to changethese assignments.
You can set either serial port as Serial 1 through Serial 4.
Configuring Video Options: The server supportsa wide assortment of displays. Because characteristics ofdisplay types vary, you should review the documentationthat came with the display to determine the display typeand refresh rate.
Select Video Setup , then use the Left Arrow (←) andRight Arrow (→) keys to advance through the list ofavailable choices and make your selection.
Date and Time: Select Date and Time to change orset values for the system date and time. You use thisoption to set the real-time clock in the server.
The system time is in a 24-hour format:hour/minute/second.
The system date is in standard format for your country, forexample, in the United States, the format isMonth/Day/Year .
Select Date and Time , then use the Left Arrow (←) andRight Arrow (→) keys to advance through each data field.Type the new information; the system saves theinformation as you type it.
The Date and Time choice appears only on the fullConfiguration/Setup menu.
Defining System Security: To control access tothe server, you can implement several of the securitymeasures described in the User's Reference, includingdefining two levels of password protection, securingdiskette access, and a system owners name that displaysduring startup.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 269
Notes
1. The default values for all security-related datafields are given in “Setup Program DefaultSettings Type 8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL,EZS, EZE)” on page 287 and “Setup ProgramDefault Settings (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE,MZL)” on page 288.
2. The System Security choice appears only onthe full Configuration/Setup menu.
After you set the power-on or administrator password,Enter password appears on the screen each time youpower-on the server. (The passwords do not appear onthe screen as you type them.) When you enter the correctpassword, OK appears on the screen. If you enter thewrong password, Incorrect password appears on thescreen, and Enter password is again displayed. Afterthree incorrect attempts, you must power-off the serverand start again.
Setting an Administrator Password: Theadministrator password (sometimes called the supervisorpassword) allows the administrator to control who hasaccess to some features of the server, including theConfiguration/Setup utility program. If an administratorpassword is set, the password must be entered to displaythe complete menu for the Configuration/Setup utilityprogram. Otherwise, a limited version of theConfiguration/Setup utility program menu appears; the usercannot change any settings.
Notes
1. If an administrator password is set and thenforgotten, it cannot be overridden or removed.
2. Before you set an administrator password, youmust set the administrator password jumper tothe change position.
To set an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password on the SystemSecurity screen; then press Enter .
The Administrator Password screen appears.2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator
Password data field.3. Verify that you typed the correct password. If you did
not type the correct password, press Esc , and typethe correct password.
270 PC Server HMM
4. Repeat steps 2 on page 270 through 3 on page 270for the Enter Administrator Password Again datafield.
5. Select Set or Change Administrator Password tosave the new password; then press Enter . Thesystem prompts you to change the administratorpassword jumper to the locked position after changingthe password.
The password becomes effective immediately after youselect Set or Change Administrator Password .
You can use any combination of up to seven characters(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for the administrator password. Keepa record of the password in a secure place.
To delete an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password on the SystemSecurity menu; then press Enter .
The Administrator Password screen appears.2. Select Delete Administrator Password ; then press
Enter .3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the administrator password. Press Esc tocancel the request and return to the System Securitymenu.
Setting a Power-on Password: When apower-on password is set, you must enter a passwordeach time you start the system.
If you forget the power-on password, and an administratorpassword has been set, use the administrator password atthe power-on prompt; then start the Configuration/Setuputility program and change the power-on password. If noadministrator password has been set, you must removethe battery before you can set a new password.
To set a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password on the System Securitymenu; then press Enter .
The Power-on Password screen appears.2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on password
data field.3. Verify that you typed the correct password. If you did
not type the correct password, press Esc , and typethe correct password.
4. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the Enter Power-onPassword Again data field.
5. Select Set or Change Power-on Password to savethe new password.
You can use any combination of up to sevencharacters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for the power-onpassword. Keep a record of the password in asecure place.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 271
To delete a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password on the System Securitymenu; then press Enter .
The Power-on Password menu appears.2. Select Delete Power-on Password ; then press
Enter .3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the power-on password. Press Esc to cancelthe request and return to the System Security menu.
Defining a System Owners Name: When youspecify a system owners name, that name will bedisplayed each time that your server is started. If theadministrator password is enabled, the password must beentered before you can set, change, or delete the systemowners name.
1. Select System Owners Name on the SystemSecurity screen, and press Enter .
The System Owners Name screen appears.2. Type the name in the Enter System Owners Name
String data field.3. Press the Down Arrow (↓) key to select the Set or
Change System Owners Name data field.4. Press Enter to set the name or change a previously
defined name.
You can use any combination of up to 15 characters andspaces in your system owners name.
To delete the system owners name, select Delete StoredSystem Owners Name and press Enter .
Restricting Access to Diskette Drives: Thesetting for the Secure Diskette Drives option controls whohas access to the diskettes (user and administrator, oradministrator only). Your server comes with this featureset to Enable , so that both the user and administratorhave access to diskette drives.
To change this setting so that the access to the diskettedrives is disabled, select the System Security menu optionand then select Secure Diskette Drives . Press the LeftArrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to toggle the entry toDisable in the Diskette Drive Access data field. If theadministrator password is enabled, the password must bebefore you can change this setting.
272 PC Server HMM
Defining the Start Options: Start options takeeffect when you start the server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such asthe keyboard speed. You can also specify whether thekeyboard number lock starts on or off.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine thediskette drive, hard disk drive, or network adapter fromwhich the operating system will be loaded. You canspecify up to four devices in the Startup Device datafields. For example, you can define a startup sequencethat checks for a startable diskette in the primary diskettedrive, then checks the hard disk drive in bay 1.
You can enable the server to run without checking for thepresence or state of a monitor, keyboard, or diskette drive.The devices are disabled after the power-on self test(POST) completes and the operating system has loaded.This allows you to enter a password and update theConfiguration/Setup utility program in keyboardlessoperation, and to start the system programs from theReference Diskette in disketteless operation.
You can select the tests that the server runs at startup.This includes the SureTest BIOS test tool and a virusdetection test. In addition, you can also choose whether torun the power-on self test (POST) in enhanced or quickmode.
Select Start Options , then use the Left Arrow (←) andRight Arrow (→) keys to advance through each data field.
The Start Options choice appears only on the fullConfiguration/Setup menu.
Advanced Setup: Select Advanced Setup tochange values for advanced hardware features such ascache control and ROM shadowing. A warning messageappears when you select this choice, to alert you that thesystem may malfunction if these options are configuredincorrectly. Follow the instructions on the screen carefully.
Select Advanced Setup , then use the Left Arrow (←) andRight Arrow (→) keys to advance through each data field.
When you restart the server after adding or replacing an&cash., you must enable the cache. Use the followingprocedure:
1. Start the Configuration/Setup utility program.2. Select Advanced Setup .3. Select Cache Control .4. Select Cache State .5. Press the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
change the cache state to Enabled .
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 273
The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the fullConfiguration/Setup menu.
Configuration ConflictsThe resources used by a server consist of interrupt requestlevels (IRQs), direct memory access channels (DMAs), I/Oports (for example, serial and parallel), and memory. Thisinformation is useful when a resource configuration conflictoccurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
� A device is installed that requires the same resourceas another device. (For example, if you install an ISAnetwork adapter and an EISA network adapter, bothrequesting IRQ 5, only one of the adapters can beconfigured.)
� A device resource is changed (for example, changingjumper settings).
� A device function is changed (for example, assigningCOM 1 to two different serial ports).
� An installed software program requires the sameresource as a hardware device (for example, anexpanded memory specification (EMS) device driverthat uses the address required by the SVGA videoadapter).
The steps required to resolve a configuration error aredetermined by the number and variety of hardware devicesand software programs install in the system.
The following information for resolving these types ofconflicts are divided by machine type and model number.
� General type and model information� Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts� Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts� Changing the Software Configuration
Type 8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,EZE): If a hardware configuration error is detected, aconfiguration error message appears after the servercompletes POST, but before the operating system starts.You can bypass the error or start one of the configurationutility programs. Press F1 to bypass the error and load theoperating system. Press F2 to start the Setup program.To start the EISA Configuration Diskette, insert the diskettein the diskette drive and press F1.
The Setup program and the EISA Configuration programconfigure only the system hardware. These programs donot consider the requirements of the operating system orthe application programs.
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts:Use the following information to help resolve hardwareconfiguration conflicts:
274 PC Server HMM
1. Run the Setup program to view and changeresources used by the system board functions.Record the current settings before making anychanges. (See “Setup Program (Type 8641)” onpage 286 for instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing theerror. The EISA Configuration program specifies howthe server checks for resource conflicts. Initially, thisverification mode is set to automatic. When the modeis set to automatic, the EISA Configuration programtries to resolve configuration conflicts for you. Usethe Advanced selection of the EISA ConfigurationDiskette's View or edit details screen to change thesetting (see “Using EISA Configuration DisketteAdvanced Function” on page 263).
If the automatic verification mode is set, theconfiguration program attempts to resolve conflicts foryou. However, this might disable adapters or systemboard features. For example, if you choose IRQ 4 foran adapter, the program disables Serial Port 1, whichuses IRQ 4. If this happens, and you do not wantthis feature disabled, choose another IRQ for theadapter.
If you set the verification mode to manual, theconfiguration utility program does not try to resolve aconflict. Instead, you have to determine if a resourceconflict has occurred and then resolve the conflict.When the verification mode is set to manual, anasterisk (*) appears on the View or edit details screennext to adapters in conflict.
If the EISA Configuration program cannot resolve aconfiguration error, it deactivates the adapter anddisplays the deactivated status (<>) on the View oredit details screen. Use the Advanced selection ofthe EISA Configuration Diskette's View or edit detailsscreen to update or copy the server's systemconfiguration information file (see “Using EISAConfiguration Diskette Advanced Function” onpage 263).
3. Change configuration resource allocations. Use thebuilt-in Setup program to view or change systemboard resource allocations. Use the Advancedselection of the EISA Configuration Diskette's View oredit details screen to view the available or the usedsystem resources (see “Using EISA ConfigurationDiskette Advanced Function” on page 263). Use theEdit Changes selection to change resourceallocations for complex configurations.
4. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Jumpers andswitches define the system resources that a devicecan use. If the settings are incorrect or set to use aresource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs andthe device remains deactivated by the configuration
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 275
program. Use the EISA Configuration Diskette's Step4, Examine switches or print report screen to verifyswitches (see “Making Menu Selections” onpage 136). Read the documentation supplied withthe device.
5. Change system board jumpers or switches. Removethe cover; then, refer to the system-board diagraminside the server.
6. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurationsare not supported (for example, you cannot operatethe server with two ISA SVGA adapters installed).
Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts: Thememory-address space and interrupt levels (IRQs) used bysome hardware options might conflict with addressesdefined for use through application programs or the EMS.(EMS is used only with DOS.)
If there is a conflict, one or more of the following conditionsmight exist:
� The system cannot load the operating system.� The system does not work.� An application program does not operate, or it returns
an error.� Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
You can resolve conflicts by changing either the softwareor the hardware configuration.
Note
Start the EISA Configuration Diskette to view theaddresses used by the system board functions. Usethe Advanced function of Step 3, View or edit detailsto view the addresses used by the adapters. (See“Using EISA Configuration Diskette AdvancedFunction” on page 263 for instructions.)
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is tochange the addresses used by the application program orthe device driver. To do this, use the EISA Configurationprogram.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict,refer to the operating-system documentation or thedocumentation supplied with the device drivers.
Type 8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,EZE): If a hardware configuration error is detected, aconfiguration error message appears after the servercompletes POST and before the operating system isloaded. You can bypass the error by pressing Esc whilethe error message is displayed.
The Configuration/Setup utility program configures only thesystem hardware. The program does not consider the
276 PC Server HMM
requirements of the operating system or the applicationprograms.
Resolving Hardware Configuration Conflicts:Use the following information to help resolve hardwareconfiguration conflicts:
1. Run the Configuration/Setup utility program to viewand change resources used by the system boardfunctions. Record the current settings before makingany changes. (See “Setup Program (Type 8641)” onpage 286 for instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing theerror.
3. Change configuration resource allocations. Use thebuilt-in Configuration/Setup utility program to view orchange system board resource allocations. Jumpersand switches define the system resources a deviceuses. If the settings are incorrect or set to use aresource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs andthe device will remain deactivated by the configurationprogram.
4. Change system board jumpers or switches. Refer tothe system-board diagram inside the server or“System Board Jumpers” on page 307.
5. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurationsare not supported (for example, you cannot operatethe server with two PCI SVGA adapters installed).
Resolving Software Configuration Conflicts: Thememory-address space and interrupt levels (IRQs) used bysome hardware options might conflict with addressesdefined for use through application programs or the EMS.(EMS is used only with DOS.)
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditionsmight exist:
� The system cannot load the operating system.� The system does not work.� An application program does not operate, or it returns
an error.� Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
You can resolve conflicts by changing either the softwareor the hardware configuration.
Note
Start the Configuration/Setup utility program to viewthe addresses used by the system board functions.
Changing the Software Configuration: The bestway to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change theaddresses used by the application program or the devicedriver. This can be done by using the Configuration/Setuputility program.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 277
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict,refer to the operating-system documentation or thedocumentation supplied with the device drivers.
Internal Drives (Type 8641)Adding different types of drives allows the server to readdifferent types of media and store more data. Severaltypes of drives are available, such as:
� Diskette � Hard disk� Rewritable optical disc
� Tape
The server has hardware that allows you to replace afailed hard disk drive without powering off the server.Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing tooperate your system while a hard disk drive is removed orinstalled. These drives are known as hot-swap drives.
Hot-swap drives have a green light on the knob of the traythat contains the drive. If the drive has a good electricalconnection upon installation, the light illuminates. The lightblinks briefly during power-on. For disk-array models, thelight also blinks if the drive malfunctions. Fornon-disk-array models, the light turns off if the drivemalfunctions.
Each hot-swappable drive that you plan to install musthave a hot-swap drive-tray attached. Trays are availablefor two drive types: narrow and wide. The narrow trayhas a 50-pin drive connector. The wide tray has a 68-pindrive connector.
Internal drives are installed in bays. A diskette drive and aCD-ROM drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models. Aremovable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1.You can install two drives in bay B. You can installhot-swappable hard disk drives in banks C, D, and E only.Banks C, D, and E each contain six bays. Bank Csupports up to six drives. However, the total number ofSCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank Ccombined is six, on a single SCSI cable. The number ofpreinstalled hard disk drives in bank C varies according tothe model. You can install up to six drives in bank D andup to six drives in bank E.
Note
The bank letter-designations are located on bothvertical rails on the front of the server. The bay-slotnumbers are located on the top of bank C and thebottom of bank E.
278 PC Server HMM
B1 B2
CD-ROM Drive (Bay A1)
Diskette Drive (Bay A2)
Open Bays
Bank CBays 1 - 6
Bank DBays 1 - 6
Bank EBays 1 - 6
Open Bays
A bezel (sometimes called a cover plate or face plate)covers the front of bay B2 only. If you install a drive thatuses removable media, such as diskettes, optical discs, ortapes, you might have to change this bezel.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 279
Considerations� Bay A comes with one SCSI CD-ROM drive and one
3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette drive. Bay A supports one5.25-inch and one 3.5-inch, half-highdiskette-interface device.
� Bay B supports:– One 5.25-inch, full-high, removable-media or
non-removable-media device, or– One 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media
device and one 3.5-inch, half-high or one-inchhigh, removable-media device, or
– Two 3.5-inch or two 5.25-inch, slim-high orhalf-high, removable-media devices
Note
Unless you install an additional SCSI cable, onlyone of the devices that is installed in bay B canbe a SCSI device.
� You cannot install hot-swappable drives in bay B.� The PC Server 520 supports eighteen 3.5-inch,
slim-high, hot-swap hard disk drives, or nine 3.5-inch,half-high hard disk drives in the bottom three banks(C, D, and E).
Banks C, D, and E can accommodate six slim-highdrives or three half-high drives, or a combination ofboth drive sizes. If you use a combination, rememberthat one half-high drive uses the equivalent space oftwo slim-high drives.
� If you install drives in bank D or E, you must removethe fan assembly on the rear of the server, install adirect access storage device (DASD) backplane inbank D or E, and install an optional 220-watt powersupply.
For non-disk-array models, you might need to installan additional SCSI-2 adapter.
� An address jumper is located on the rear of eachbackplane. You must set the jumpers on thesebackplanes as described in “Hot-Swap Backplane(FRU No. 06H8388)” on page 512.
SCSI Drives: Some drives have a special designcalled small computer system interface, or “SCSI.” Thisdesign allows you to attach multiple drives to a singleSCSI-2 adapter.
Note
Any information about SCSI drives also applies toother SCSI devices, such as scanners and printers.
The server comes with a SCSI-2 adapter. The number ofpreinstalled SCSI hard disk drives varies according tomodel. If you install additional SCSI devices, each SCSI
280 PC Server HMM
device that is connected to the adapter needs a uniqueidentification (ID) so that the SCSI-2 adapter can identifythe devices and ensure that different devices do notattempt to transfer data at the same time. If you need toset IDs for SCSI devices, refer to the instructions thatcame with those devices.
The server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swapdrives. These IDs are determined by the drive locations inthe bays. The SCSI ID for the preinstalled 4X CD-ROMdrive in bay A is set to 6, and the SCSI ID for the SCSI-2adapter is set to 7.
The processing sequence for SCSI devices is setaccording to their IDs. Through the SCSISelect utilityprogram, you can specify the scanning order for thesedevices. That is, you can specify whether the scanningsequence proceeds from 0 to the highest-numbered SCSIID, or whether it proceeds in descending order. Thestandard scanning sequence proceeds from 0 to 6, then 8to 15. However, this convention does not apply if you usethe reverse scan feature of the SCSISelect Utility program.Use the processing sequence that best suits the systemconfiguration. See “Configure/View Host Adapter Settings”on page 547 for information about setting the scanningorder.
The SCSI-2 adapter has both internal and external ports.Depending on the server configuration, you can attachadditional SCSI drives by chaining them (connecting themtogether with cables). Depending on the type of SCSI-2adapter installed in the server, the adapter supports a totalof 14 or 15 SCSI drives (internal and external).
To configure the SCSI devices that you install in anon-disk-array model, use the built-in SCSI-2 adapter utilityprogram, SCSISelect. See “SCSISelect Utility Program”on page 547. For disk-array models use the RAIDconfiguration program. See “Disk Array Configuration” onpage 461.
There are two types of SCSI devices: wide and narrow.You must use 16-bit cables to attach wide devices. Use8-bit cables to attach narrow devices. Wide device IDscan be set to any number from 0 to 15. Narrow devicescan only have their IDs set from 0 to 7. The preinstalled4X CD-ROM drive in bay A is a narrow device.
Two devices connected to the same bus (internal orexternal) cannot have the same ID; however, you can usethe same ID for an internal device and an external device.The primary partitions on SCSI drives that are connectedto the internal bus on a given adapter are assigned driveletters before the external drives that are connected to thesame adapter are assigned drive letters. If multipleadapters are installed in the server, the drives that are
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 281
connected to the adapter in the lowest number expansionslot are assigned drive letters first.
When SCSI devices are chained, both ends of the chain(cable) require a terminator. The purpose of theseterminators is to ensure that the quality of the signal ismaintained throughout the SCSI chain. If you attach SCSIdevices (internal or external), you must terminate the lastdevice in the chain, or the end of the cable must beterminated.
Note
The backplanes automatically set termination for allthe drives in the hot-swap bays.
ID 6
ID 5
ID 4 Terminator
The SCSI-2 adapter automatically adjusts for termination.
282 PC Server HMM
Power Supplies (Type 8641)The 520 computer is shipped with a primary power supply.An additional or optional power supply can be added to thecomputer. Connectors are used to transfer the primarypower supply voltages and signals from the primary powersupply to the optional power supply. The followingillustrations show how the two power supplies areconnected.
Attention
When replacing the primary power supply cover plate,rotate the plate 180°. (This will leave an opening forthe primary power supply connector cable thatconnects to the optional power supply.) Failure to doso will cause the power supply connector cable to becrimped when the plate is replaced.
Note
Tabs are located on the side of each power supply tosecure them together.
Power Supply LED and Button: Thepower-good LED and button are located on the side of theprimary power supply button. The LED (when lit) indicatesthat the power supply is good. If the LED fails to come onwhen the computer is powered-on, do the following:
� While observing the LED on the power supply, pressthe power supply button. If the LED fails to light(while you are holding the button in), you may have adefective power supply. If the LED lights when thebutton is pressed, go to “Power Supply Shutdowns”on page 285.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 283
Primary Power Supply Voltages: If thevoltages are correct and the power supply fan runs, thepower supply is OK.
1 4 7
2 3 5
A B C D
Power-Supply Connector
DriveConnector
Connectors P11, P12, and P13
Optional Power Supply Drive ConnectorVoltages: If the voltages are correct and the powersupply fan runs, the power supply is OK.
A B C D
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
5 5 5 B B
3 4 7 D A
+4.8+11.52−10.8+4.8+11.52
+ 5.25+12.6−13.2+ 5.25+12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2 1 +11.52 +12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
B B
D A
+ 4.8+ 11.52
+ 5.25+12.6
284 PC Server HMM
Power Supply Shutdowns: If the power supplyshuts down, or appears to fail at power-on, you might haveone of the following problems:
� Too many devices are set to start instantly. See“Setting the Motor-Start Jumper” on page 549.
� There are too many large-capacity devices installed(such as hard disk drives). The nominal operatingcurrent of the devices installed collectively exceedsthe available current of the power supply. See the“Personal System/2 Installation Planning” guide (formnumber G41G-2927) for more information.
Attention
Unplug the power cord and wait two minutes beforechecking voltages to give the power supply capacitorstime to discharge.
Note
Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable) isset for the correct voltage.
If the voltages are correct and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 285
Setup Program (Type 8641)To access the Setup program:
1. Remove all diskettes from the server.
Note
Never start the Setup program while using theEISA Configuration program.
2. Power-on the server and watch the screen. Be readyto act quickly.
3. After the IBM logo screen appears and then quicklydisappears, you are prompted to Press <F1> or <F2>
to enter SETUP. As soon as you see that prompt,press the correct F-key (F1 or F2) . If the Setupprogram screen doesn't appear, restart the systemand try again.
Note
If a configuration error occurs, a prompt appearsbefore the operating system starts (see“Configuration Conflicts” on page 274).
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to view orchange the configuration.
You must correctly exit from the Setup program tosave the configuration information.
5. Press Esc or move the cursor to the Exit menuoption on the menu bar.
6. Select Exit menu from the menu bar.7. Select Save changes and exit.
286 PC Server HMM
Setup Program Default Settings Type8641 (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS, EZE)
Option Default Value
Boot sequence A: then C:Cache State EnabledCOM1 Port 3F8, IRQ 4COM2 Port 2F8, IRQ 3Diskette access UserDiskette check DisabledDiskette controller EnabledDiskette Drive ADiskette Drive B
1.44MB, 3.5 in.Not installed
Hard disk boot sector NormalLarge disk DOS compatibility DOSLPT Port 378, IRQ 7LPT mode Output onlyMemory gap DisabledMemory (Extended) 15MB� Bank 0 Socket 1 8MB Kit� Bank 0 Socket 2 8MB Kit� Bank 1 Socket 3� Bank 1 Socket 4� Bank 2 Socket 5� Bank 2 Socket 6� Bank 3 Socket 7� Bank 3 Socket 8� Total Memory 16MBMemory (System) 640MBPassword on boot DisabledPost errors EnabledSet supervisor password Press EnterSet user password Press EnterSetup prompt EnabledSupervisor Password is DisabledSwap diskettes NormalUser password is DisabledVideo BIOS ShadowedVideo System SVGA
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 287
Setup Program Default Settings (ModelsMZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)
Option Default Value
Cache State EnabledCache Size 256KBDiskette Drive A: 1.44MB 3.5 inDiskette Drive B: not installed Disketteless Operation DisabledKeyboard Numlock State OnKeyboard Speed FastKeyboardless Operation Mode DisabledMachine Type/Model 8641Memory (Extended) 360KB� Bank 0 socket 16MB Kit� Bank 0 socket 16MB Kit� Bank 1 socket � Bank 1 socket � Bank 2 socket � Bank 2 socket � Bank 3 Socket � Bank 3 Socket � Total Memory 32MBMemory (System) 640KBMemory (Type) EOS Microprocessor PentiumMicroprocessor Speed 100 MHzMonitor Horizontal Frequency Not Used� Refresh Rate For (640x480) 60 Hz� Refresh Rate For (800x600) Undefined� Refresh Rate For (1024x768) Undefined� Refresh Rate For (1280x1024) Undefined� Refresh Rate For (1600x1200) UndefinedMonitorless Operation DisabledMouse Installed Parallel Port 3BCh – IRQ 7Parallel Port Mode StandardParallel Port Mode (Extended) Power On Self Test EnhancedROM Shadowing� F0000h – FFFFFh (System BIOS)
Enabled
� E8000h – EFFFFh Enabled� E0000h – E7FFFh Enabled� DC000h – DFFFFh Disabled� D8000h – DBFFFh Disabled� D4000h – D7FFFh Disabled� D0000h – D3FFFh Disabled� CC000h – CFFFFh Disabled� C8000h – CBFFFh Disabled� C0000h – C7FFFh
(Adapter Video BIOS)Enabled
Secure Diskette Drives DisabledSerial Port A Address 3F8h – IRQ 4Serial Port B Address 2F8h – IRQ 3Shadow RAM 384KBStartup Drive (First) Diskette Drive 0Startup Drive (Second) Hard Disk 0Startup Drive (Third) DisabledStartup Drive (Fourth) DisabledSureTest DisabledSystem ROM F000h — FFFFhVideo Controller SVGAVideo Display Type User DefinedVideo Memory 1024KBVirus Detection Enabled
288 PC Server HMM
Specifications (Type 8641) Size
� With pedestal:– Depth: 755 mm (29.7 in.)
835 mm (32.8 in.) with cable cover– Height: 622 mm (24.5 in.)– Width: 353 mm (13.9 in.)
Weight
� Minimum configuration as shipped: 31.29 kg (69 lb)
Environment
� Air temperature– System on: 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 mm (3000 ft.)– System on: 10° to 32° C (50° to 90° F)
Altitude: 914m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)– System off: 10° to 43° C (50° 110° F)
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.) � Humidity
– System on: 8% to 80%– System off 8% to 80%
� Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Heat Output
� Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units (BTU) perhour
– Minimum configuration: 150 BTU (44 watts)– Maximum configuration: 3600 BTU (1055 watts)
Electrical Input
� Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz is required � Input voltage
– Low range- Minimum: 90 V ac- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range- Minimum: 180 V ac- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.16 kVA
- Maximum configuration: 1.0 kVA
Total Power Available for Drives
� Nominal operating current allowed&:– +5 V dc line: 10 A base; 23 A with upgrade– +12 V dc line: 10 A base; 23 A with upgrade
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 289
SymmetricMultiprocessors/MultiprocessingSome PC Server computers incorporate a 100MHzPentium processor and a second upgradeability processorsocket on the system board to support SymmetricMultiprocessors/Multiprocessing (SMP). The SMPcapability extends processing performance by allowingtasks to be dispatched to the next available processorrather then being queued until the busy processor hascompleted its task. The SMP capability also provides alevel of high availability in that with some operatingsystems, such as OS/2 SMP, run in a uni-processor modeif one of the processors should experience a failure. Thisfunction will allow the LAN to continue operation so thatservice can be scheduled at a non-critical time.
System Board Replacement (Type 8641) Notes
� The clock speed jumper must be set to match thespeed of the processor(s) installed on the systemboard.
� For system board socket and jumper locations,see:
– “Locations (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,EZE)” on page 294 nopage., “System BoardLocations” on page 298 for PCI/EISAmodels
– “Locations (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE,MZL)” on page 301 nopage., “System BoardLocations” on page 305 for micro-channelmodels.
Type 8641 computers have one or two processors, andother components installed on the system board. Whenreplacing the system board, remove all of the installedcomponents from the old system board and install them onthe new system board. If the problem remains, check thefollowing:
� The primary processor is installed and seatedcorrectly in the primary processor socket on thesystem board
� If installed, the secondary processor is seatedcorrectly in the secondary processor socket on thesystem board.
� All other components removed from the old systemboard are installed and seated correctly on the newsystem board.
Note
If the processor(s) are not seated correctly,intermittent problems can occur.
290 PC Server HMM
Type 5 Adapter Installation (Type 8641,Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)The PC Server Type 8641 (Models MZO, MZV, MZS,MZE, MZL) supports type 5 Adapters in Micro Channelexpansion slots 5 and 6. However, because Type 5adapters are longer and wider than standard MicroChannel adapters, the adapter support bracket must berepositioned.
Note
If the server was shipped with a PeerMaster adapterinstalled, the bracket has already been repositioned.
1. Remove the fan assembly:a. Disconnect the three fan assembly cables from
the power supply.
Attention
To avoid damage and ensure proper serveroperation, handle the fan assembly carefully.
b. Remove the two screws that hold the fanassembly in place.
c. Remove the fan assembly by pulling it up andout.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 291
2. Press the raised area in the middle of the bracket;then, press the bracket toward the rear of the serverand lift out. You might need a screwdriver to releasethe bracket from the server.
3. Reposition the card guides on the adapter supportbracket:
a. Lift the tabs on the top of the top card guide torelease it from the bracket.
b. Align the card guide tabs with the slots closest tothe front of the bracket. The card guide willextend beyond the bracket.
c. Hook the tabs on the bottom edge of the cardguide on the flange on the back of the bracket;then press the card guide forward until it snapsinto place.
4. Holding the bracket at an angle, insert the tabs on theback of the card guide into the slots closer to the frontof the server.
5. Press the bracket to the right until it snaps into place.
6. Carefully reinstall the fan assembly with the twoscrews that you removed in step 1b on page 291.
292 PC Server HMM
7. Reconnect the fan assembly cables.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 293
Locations (Models EZO, EZV, EZL, EZS,EZE) � “Controls/Indicators.”� “Expansion Bays” on page 295.� “Input/Output Connectors” on page 296� “Memory Module Connectors” on page 297.� “System Board Locations” on page 298.� “System Board Connections” on page 299.� “System Board Jumpers” on page 299.
Controls/IndicatorsPower OK Indicator
Power On/Off Switch
Hard Disk DriveActivity Indicator
294 PC Server HMM
Expansion Bays
B1 B2
CD-ROM Drive (Bay A1)
Diskette Drive (Bay A2)
Open Bays
Bank CBays 1 - 6
Bank DBays 1 - 6
Bank EBays 1 - 6
Open Bays
Not
For additional internal drive information, see “InternalDrives (Type 8641)” on page 278.
The server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskettedrive, a SCSI CD-ROM drive, and a removable CD-ROMstorage compartment. The number of preinstalled harddisk drives in your server varies according to the model.
CD-ROM Drive: All models come with a SCSI-2CD-ROM drive.Diskette Drive: The 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette driveuses 1MB and 2MB diskettes.Open Bays: Your server has a special design thatgives you the flexibility to use up to 18hot-swappable, 3.5-inch hard disk drives. There isadditional open space in the top left bay for two morediskette drives or an additional SCSI drive. Forinstallation instructions and information on the typesof drives that you can install in each bay, see“Configuration (Models MZO, MZV, MZS, MZE, MZL)”on page 264 or “Configuration (Models EZO, EZV,EZL, EZS, EZE)” on page 256.Hard Disk Drive: All models come with a SCSI-2adapter. The number and capacity of the hard diskdrives varies, depending on your model.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 295
Input/Output Connectors
Power Connector
Display Connector
Serial Connectors
Parallel Connector
Expansion Slots
SCSI Connector(Non-Disk-Array Models)SCSI Connector(Disk-Array Models)
SCSI ConnectorKnockout
Keyboard Connector
Mouse Connector
Power Connector: The power cable connects here.
Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable connectshere.
Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects here.This port also is called an auxiliary-device orpointing-device port.
Parallel Connector: One 25-pin parallel connector isprovided. This is where the signal cable for a parallelprinter or other parallel device connects to your server.
SCSI Connector Knockout: This knockout allowsaccess to the internal connector on a second SCSI-2adapter.
Serial Connectors: Two 9-pin serial connectors (A andB) are provided. The serial signal cable for a modem orother serial device usually connects here. If you areusing a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pinadapter cable.
SCSI Connector : External small computer systeminterface (SCSI) devices attach here.
Display Connector: The display signal cable attaches tothe connector on this adapter.
296 PC Server HMM
Memory Module Connectors
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
Bank 0
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 297
System Board Locations Note
A black square (■) indicates pin 1.
W6
W16
W21
W10
W11
W17
FLASHBIOS
REAL TIMECLOCK
J26
W38
W31
W37
W32
W34
W33
W22
W23
W25
J11
J8
J6
J13
J23 PCI 3
U35
U36
U38
U39
U44
U43
U46
U47
J22 PCI 2
J21 PCI 1SharedPCI/EISASlot
J20 EISA Slot 6
J19 EISA Slot 5
J18 EISA Slot 4
J17 EISA Slot 3
J16 EISA Slot 2
UPGRADE
CPU
MAIN
CPU
W1
J12J2
J1
J9J1
0
W30
W20
W36W2
W15
W18
W14W13W24
W12
W35
W5 U28U27U26U25 U32
U31U30U29
J15 EISA Slot 1Secondary CacheMemory UpgradeSockets
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
298 PC Server HMM
System Board ConnectionsHeader Configuration Connect To
W12/W31 Speaker Speaker
W18/W37 Power LED Pins 1-3
W24/W38 IDE Hard Drive LED IDE Hard Drive
W35 CPU Fan Connector Fan
W36 CPU Fan Connector Fan
J1/J2/J26 Power SupplyConnector
P1 to J1P2 to J2P3 to J26
J6 Mouse Connector Mouse
J8 Keyboard Connector Keyboard
J9 Parallel PortConnector
Parallel Device
J10 Floppy DriveConnector
Diskette Drive
J11 Serial Port COMM AConnector
Serial Device
J12 Serial Port COMM BConnector
Serial Device
J13 ISA IDE Connector IDE Hard Drive
N/A SCSI LED SCSI Option Card
N/A SCSI DeviceConnector
SCSI Option Card
System Board JumpersJumper Description Setting
W1 L1 Cache Mode Open - L1Write-Back (Default) Closed - L1Write-Through
W2 Reserved Open
W5 L2 Cache Size Pins 1-2 - L2 CacheSize = 256K(Default) Pins 2-3 - L2 CacheSize = 512K
W6 CPU Clock Pins 1-2 Pentium60/90MHz Pins 2-3 Pentium66/100MHz
W10 Reserved Pins 2-3 (Default)
W16 Reserved Pins 1-2 (Default)
W17 Reserved Closed (Default)
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 299
Jumper Description Setting
W20 Monitor Selection Open - MonochromeMonitor Setting Closed - ColorMonitor Setting(Default)
W21 Reserved Open - AT StyleKeyboard Closed - PS/2 StyleKeyboard andMouse (Default)
W22 Reserved Open (Default)
W23 Reserved Open (Default)
W25 ISQ IDE IRQSelect
Pins 1-2 - ISA IDEusing IRQ 14Primary IDEController (Default) Pins 2-3 - ISA IDEusing IRQ 15Secondary Controller
W30 Reserved Open (Default)
300 PC Server HMM
Locations (Models MZO, MZV, MZS,MZE, MZL) � “Controls/Indicators.”� “Expansion Bays” on page 302.� “Input/Output Connectors” on page 303� “Memory Module Connectors” on page 304� “System Board Locations” on page 305� “System Board Connections” on page 306� “System Board Jumpers” on page 307
Controls/IndicatorsPower OK Indicator
Power On/Off Switch
Hard Disk DriveActivity Indicator
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 301
Expansion Bays
B1 B2
CD-ROM Drive (Bay A1)
Diskette Drive (Bay A2)
Open Bays
Bank CBays 1 - 6
Bank DBays 1 - 6
Bank EBays 1 - 6
Open Bays
Note
For additional internal drive information, see “InternalDrives (Type 8641)” on page 278.
Open Bays: Your server's special design gives youthe flexibility to use combinations of 3.5-inch or5.25-inch hard disk, tape, and rewritable optical diskdrives. Your server can use up to 18 hot-swappable3.5-inch hard disk drives. For additional internal driveinformation, see “Internal Drives (Type 8641)” onpage 278.CD-ROM Drive: All models come with a SCSI 4XCD-ROM drive.Diskette Drive: The 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette driveuses 1MB or 2MB diskettes.Hard Disk Drive: The number and capacities of thehard disk drives vary, depending on your model.
302 PC Server HMM
Input/Output Connectors
Power Connector
Monitor Connector
Expansion Slots
Keyboard ConnectorMouse Connector
Serial Connectors
SCSI Connector(Non-Disk-Array Model)
SCSI Connector(Disk-Array Model)
Parallel Connector
Display Connector: The display signal cable attaches tothis connector.
Mouse Connector: The mouse cable attaches to theserver through this connector. The mouse connectorsometimes is called an auxiliary-device or pointing-deviceport.
Keyboard Connector: The cable from your keyboardconnects here.
SCSI Connector: External SCSI devices attach here.
Serial Connectors: The server has two 9-pin serialconnectors (A and B). The serial signal cable for amodem or other serial device usually connects here. Ifyou are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable. For port assignments, see“Configuring Devices and I/O Ports” on page 268.
Parallel Connector: The server has one 25-pin parallelport. This is where the signal cable for a parallel printeror other parallel device connects to your server.
Power Connector: The server power cable connectshere.
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 303
Memory Module Connectors
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
304 PC Server HMM
System Board Locations Note
A black square (■) indicates pin 1.
J40
J26
J14BTY
J8
J9
J12
J6J43J4J3
J2
J10
J15J17
J16
J19
J20
J21J24
J25
J28
J38
J35J39
J42
J41
J27
MCA SLOT 6 J29
MCA SLOT 5 J30
MCA SLOT 4 J31
MCA SLOT 3 J32
MCA SLOT 2 J33
MCA SLOT 1 J34
PCI SLOT 2 J36
PCI SLOT 1 J37
J5
PrimaryCPUU1
SecondaryCPUU26
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 305
System Board ConnectionsHeader Configuration Connect To
J2 SCSI LED connector Yellow SCSI LED
J3 IDE Hard Driveconnector
IDE hard drive
J4 System Fanconnector
System fan
J5 Cache Card Slot Cache Card
J6 Speaker connector Speaker
J8 Primary CPU Fanconnector
Fan
J9 Secondary CPU Fanconnector
Fan
J10 Power LEDconnector
Pins 1-3
J13 IDE Hard Driveconnector
IDE hard drive
J19 Parallel Portconnector
Parallel device
J20 Diskette Driveconnector
Diskette drive
J21 Serial Port COM 'B'connector
Serial device
J24 Serial Port COM 'A'connector
Serial device
J28 SCSI Standardconnector
SCSI device
J35 SCSI Fast/Wideinternal connector
Internal SCSIFast/Wide device
J38 Power supplyconnector
P1 and P2
J39 SCSI Fast/Wideexternal connector
External SCSIFast/Wide
J40 Video connector Video
J41 Keyboard connector Keyboard
J42 Mouse connector Mouse
306 PC Server HMM
System Board JumpersJumpers Description Setting
J12 Spare Jumper Parked = Pin 1 onlyDefault
J15 Password Write Disabled = Pins 1-2 Enabled = Pins 2-3Default
J16 C2 Cover Open
J17 C2 Key Lock
J25 Reset switch
J26 SCSI Select System Board = Pins1-2 DefaultAdapter = Pins 2-3
J27 Video Select System Board = Pins1-2 Default Adapter = 2-3
J43 Clock Select 60MHz = Pins 1-250Mhz = Pins 2-3
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 307
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThis index supports Type 8641 computers.
Always start with “General Checkout (QAPlus/PRO)” onpage 4.
The Symptom-to-FRU Index (QAPlus/PRO) Supplementlists symptoms, errors, and the possible causes. The mostlikely cause is listed first. Use this Symptom-to-FRU Indexand the Symptom-to-FRU Index (QAPlus/PRO) in the PS/2Hardware Maintenance Manual to help you decide whichFRUs to have available when servicing the computer.
In the following error codes and model numbers, X can beany number or letter.
Where the model number is used to identify an error, XXused in place of the last 2 digits can be any number orletter.
Note
For IBM devices not supported by the QAPlus/PROdiagnostics code, refer to the manual for that device.
For information on: Go to:
Additional service help.(For example, voltagechecks, 0S/2 Trap errors,or processor boarderrors)
“Related Service Information”on page 107 in the PS/2Hardware MaintenanceManual.
Possible software andhardware mismatchproblems. (Notrepairable by replacingFRUs)
“Software/Hardware MismatchProblems” on page 181 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual.
Memory ConfigurationProblems
“Memory” on page 260. “Resolving Memory-AddressConflicts” on page 408 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual.
Replacing the systemboard does not correctthe problem.
See “System BoardReplacement (Type 8641)” onpage 290.
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
101, 102(System and microprocessorerror)
1. System Board
0103(System Timer error)
1. System Board
106(System and microprocessorerror)
1. System Board
308 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0110(Parity Check 1 XXXX, runSetup)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
111(I/O channel check error)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
114(Adapter read-only memoryerror)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. Failing Adapter
0115(Parity Check 1 XXXX, runSetup)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0120(Previous boot incomplete,default configuration used)
1. Run Setup 2. Battery/CMOS Chip 3. System Board
0130(Invalid NVRAM media type)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
151(Real time clock error)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. System Board
161(Real time clock batteryerror)
1. Battery
0162 (Models EXX)(Configuration error for slotXX, run Setup; then, run theEISA Configuration Utility)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
162 (Type 8641 ModelsMXX)(Configuration error)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
0163 (Models EXX)(Real-Time Clock error)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
163 (Type 8641 ModelsMXX)(Time of day not set)
1. Run Configuration,set time and date
164(Memory configurationchanged)
1. Run Configuration
165(Micro Channel adapterconfiguration changed)
1. Run Configuration,insert Referencediskette
0171(System battery is dead)
1. Battery/CMOS Chip 2. System Board
0173(System CMOS checksumbad)
1. Run Setup 2. Battery/CMOS Chip 3. System Board
0174(Invalid ISA Configuration)
1. Run Setup2. Look for configuration
conflicts. 3. Battery/CMOS Chip
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 309
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0175 (Models EXX)(EISA Configuration Error,run the configuration utility)
1. Run Setup 2. Run EISA
Configuration Utility 3. Battery/CMOS Chip 4. System Board
175 (Type 8641 ModelsMXX)(Hardware error)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. System Board
176(Computer cover or cablecover was removed withouta key being used)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
177, 178(Hardware error)
1. Run Diagnostics 2. System Board
184(Power-on passwordcorrupted)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
185(Drive startup sequenceinformation corrupted)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
186(System board or securityhardware error)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. System Board
189(An attempt was made toaccess the computer withan invalid password)
1. Run Configuration,enter theadministratorpassword
201(Memory test error)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0214(System RAM failed atoffset XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0215(Failing Bits XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0216(Extended RAM failed atoffset XXXX)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0221(Shadow RAM failed atoffset)
1. Memory SIMM 2. System Board
0254(System board Cache error,Cache disabled)
1. System Board Cache 2. System Board
229(Cache memory test error.Be sure the cache memoryis enabled.)
1. Cache memory 2. System Board
0301(Keyboard or keyboardcontroller error)
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
310 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
0302(Keyboard locked)
1. Unlock the keyboard 2. Keyboard 3. System Board
0303(Keyboard Error, stuck key)
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
604(Diskette drive error)
1. Diskette Drive 2. Drive Cable 3. System Board
0610(Incorrect drive A type)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
0612(Incorrect drive B type)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
0632(Diskette drive A error)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
0642(Diskette drive B error)
1. Run Setup 2. Diskette Drive 3. System Board
4. Diskette Drive Cable
662(Diskette drive configurationerror)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
762(Processor configurationerror)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. Run Diagnostics
962(Parallel port error)
1. Disconnect externalcable on parallel port.
2. Internal Cable 3. System Board
1162(System-board serial port 1or 2 error)
1. Disconnect externalcable on serial port.
2. Run Configuration
1300(Operating system notfound)
1. Run Setup withknown good diskette
2. Fixed Disk Drive3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. Diskette Drive 5. System Board
1701(Fixed Disk X failed)
1. Run Setup2. Fixed Disk Drive3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. System Board
1702(Fixed Disk Drive Controllerfailed)
1. Run Setup2. Fixed Disk Adapter3. Fixed Disk Drive
4. System Board
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 311
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
1801(No room for PCI optionROM)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Adapter 3. System Board
1802(No more I/O spaceavailable for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
1803(No more memory (above1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
1804(No more memory (below1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run ReferenceDiskette
2. Failing Card 3. System Board
1805(PCI option ROM checksumerror)
1. Remove Failing PCICard
2. System Board
1962(No valid boot device found,be sure the drive you wantto start from is the bootsequence)
1. RunConfiguration/Setup
2. Run Diagnostics 3. Drive Cable
4. Hard Disk Drive 5. System Board
2401(Monitor type does notmatch CMOS)
1. Run Setup and entercorrect monitor type
2. Video Display 3. Video Adapter 4. System Board
2462(Video controller error)
1. Display 2. System Board
000247100 (Type 8641)L2 processor cache wasdisabled, do the following
� Boot the systemdiagnostics.
� Run the processortests.
� When asked if youwant to turn on theprocessor cache, reply,"yes," and the error willbe cleared.
1. N/A
I9990301(Fixed boot sector error, nooperating system installed)
1. Install operatingsystem to hard diskdrive.
8601, 8603(Pointing Device Error)
1. Pointing Device 2. System Board
312 PC Server HMM
Checkpoint CodesDuring POST, the computer displays the status of thecomponents being tested in the form of Checkpoint (CP)codes in the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Thefollowing is a list of the CP codes followed by the routine inprocess and the boot mode.
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
01 Its_A_Reset Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
0D Init Chip_NS Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
12 Periph Init Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
03 Disable Video Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
05 Phase 1 EnterBig Real
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B0 Enable LocalAPIC
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
06 Cache Init Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
07 Init Refresh Cold+Restore+Mfg
08 Wait For RTC Cold+Restore+Mfg
0A Std CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0B Mid CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0C Ext CMOSChecksum NS
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
0E C SET_INIT Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
10 Check ParityNonParity
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
11 Disable Parity Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B1 Init Seattle Cold+Restore+Mfg+SAD
13 Test CPU Regs Cold+Restore+Mfg
14 Init RTC Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
16 Init Timer 0 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
17 Init Timer 2 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
18 Test DMA Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
19 Test Page Regs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
1A Verify Refresh Cold+Restore+Mfg
1B Enable Parity Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
1C Save ID Warm SAD
1D Test First 64k Cold+Restore+Mfg
1E Clear First 64k Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
1F POST with Stack Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
20 EnableBIOSE000
SAD
21 BIOS Shadow Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B2 Shadow SCSI Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
23 Phase 2 POST Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
24 Enable BIOSF000
SAD
24 Shadow VPD Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 313
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
25 Init Key BoardData
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
26 Save ID Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B3 Check P54C Cold+Mfg
27 Init Q Boot Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
28 Periph Config Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
2A Init TimeoutTables
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
2B Pos_Setup Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
2F Test DMALocations
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
B4 Init DMA Regs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
30 Test PICs Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
31 Init Vector Table Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
32 Enable Timer Int Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
33 Init Keyboard Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
34 Clear MemorySize Error
Cold+Restore+Mfg
35 CheckConfiguration
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
36 Mfg Boot Fork Cold+Restore+Mfg
37 PCI Reset Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B5 NVRAM check Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
38 PCI Video Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
3B Sign On Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
3C Test Timer Tick Cold+Restore+Mfg
3F Enable Video SAD
40 CSET BFRSIZMEM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
41 Size MemoryAbove 64k
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
42 CSET AFT SIZMEM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
43 Test Timer 2 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
44 Password NotEntered
Cold+Restore
45 Test PS/2 Mouse Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
46 Check ForMouse Buttons
Cold+Restore
47 Init Key BoardFlags
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
48 Test Key Board Cold+Warm+Restore
4B Memory TestPrompt
Cold+Warm+Mfg
4C Test Memory Cold+Restore+Mfg
4D Clear EBDA Warm
4E CSET AFT MTEST
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
4F Allocate EBDA Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B6 Set Planar Info Cold+Restore+
314 PC Server HMM
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
50 xfer ebda vars Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B7 Init P54M Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B8 Init MPStructures
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
B9 CPU Speed Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
51 Set Warm BootFlag
Warm
52 Clear Speed Bits Cold+Warm+Mfg+SAD
53 E FLOB Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
54 Enable SystemInterrupts
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
55 C2 SecurityCheck
Restore
56 Init Key Board Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
57 Test RTC Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
58 Check For NPX Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
59 reset hdctl Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5A FD INIT Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5B Set FloppyConfig
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
BA Unlock Early Cold+Restore
5C Init A20 Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5D Cache Config Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
5E HD SETUP Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
62 Verify CMOSConfig
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
70 Check For SetupHot Key
Cold+Warm
63 Clear Screen Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
BB Init IRQ Levels Cold+Restore
65 IBM Cirrus DDC Cold
BC PACP Arbitration Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
BD Enable PlanarSCSI
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
66 CSET BFROPROM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
BE Do ROM Scan Cold+Warm+Restore
2C TCPC Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
49 TCPC Errors Cold+Warm+Restore
2D Find Serial Ports Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
2E Find ParallelPorts
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
68 CSET AFTOPROM
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
BF Get MC Data Cold+Warm+Restore
69 PCI Configure Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
6A MFG Hook 65 MFG
6B Init Time Of Day Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 315
The following codes also produce a series of beeps. Theseries of beeps are listed for each code followed by anexplanation of the code.
CPCode
Routine Boot Mode
6C Check ForLocked KeyBoard
Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
6D Init Enable NMI Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
6E Set Boot Speed Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
6F Set Key BoardLEDs
Cold+Warm+SAD
71 Init Flush KeyBoard
Cold+Warm+Restore+SAD
72 Move Error LogTo EBDA
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg
73 Init DisableMouse
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
74 Sys Reset MFG
75 Phase 2 Exit BigReal
Cold+Warm+Restore+Mfg+SAD
76 BOOT STRAP 1 Cold+Warm+MFG+SAD
78 SAD BOOTPROC
SAD
79 Start BootSequence
N/A
7A Read BootSector
N.A
7B Boot SectorRead Complete
N.A
7C Check for CEBoot Override
N.A
7F Xfer to boot code N.A
CP Code Beeps Definition
82 1-1-3 CMOS write/read failure
83 1-1-4 BIOS ROM checksum failure
84 1-2-1 Programmable Interval Timer testfailure
85 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure
86 1-2-3 DMA page register write/read testfailure
87 1-2-4 RAM refresh verification failure
88 1-3-1 1st 64K RAM test failure
89 1-3-2 1st 64K RAM parity test failure
90 2-1-1 Slave DMA register testin-progress or failure
91 2-1-2 Master DMA register testin-progress or failure
92 2-1-3 Master interrupt mask registertest failure
93 2-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register testfailure
95 2-2-2 Key-board controller test failure
316 PC Server HMM
CP Code Beeps Definition
99 2-3-2 Screen memory test in-progressor failure
9A 2-3-3 Screen retrace tests in-progressor failure
9B N/A Search for video ROMin-progress
9C N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9D N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9E N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
9F N/A Screen believed operable - modein low two bits
A0 3-1-1 Timer tick interrupt test failure
A1 3-1-2 Interval timer channel 2 testfailure
A3 3-1-4 Time-Of-Day clock test failure
A7 3-2-4 Comparing CMOS memory sizeagainst actual
A8 3-3-1 Memory size mismatch occurred
D0 N/A Cache State
D1 N/A Cache Init
D2 N/A Cache Restore
D3 N/A Cache Config
D4 N/A Cache Flush
D5 N/A Cache Enable
D6 N/A Cache Disable
D7 N/A Cache Custom
e1h N/A CSET BFR VIDROM
e5h N/A CSET AFT CMCFG
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 317
Parts Listings1
23
44A
5
6
7 89
1011
12
1314
15
16
17
18
19
202122
23
318 PC Server HMM
System Note
The model(s) listed for the following FRUs indicatesFRUs that the models may contain at the time ofshipping. However, other FRUs are supported in eachmodel as options.
Index System Unit (PC Server 520 - Type 8641) 1 Base Frame 06H8028
2 LED Panel Assembly 06H80313 System Board with 512K Cache, without 06H9989
SVGA, SCSI (Models ED1, EDE, EDL, EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
3 System Board with SVGA & SCSI, without 96G2648Cache (Models MDE, MDL, MZS, MZE,MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV)
4 Die Cast Assembly (Models ED1, EDE, 06H9360EDL, EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
4A Die Cast Assembly (Models MDE, MDL, 06H9361MZS, MZE, MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV)
5 Fan Mounting Support 82G36186 Right Side Door 82G3594
7 3-Fan Assembly 06H34078 Pedestal Wheel with Axle 82G36099 434W Power Supply Assembly 06H3596
10 8-Card Guide 06H805711 4-Card Guide Support (Models MDE, MDL, 82G3603
MZS, MZE, MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV) 12 Pedestal 82G3608 13 CD-ROM Drive,
see DASD (PC Server 520 - Type 8641) 14 Diskette Drive
see DASD (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)15 Hard Disk Drive,
see DASD (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)16 DASD Tray Assembly - Hot Swap with Cable 06H8631
(Models ED1, EDE, EDL, ED0, EDV, MDE, MDL, MD0, MDV)
16 DASD Tray Assembly - Hot Swap Wide 06H3956(Models EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, EZ0, EZV, MZS, MZE, MZL, MZO, MZV)
17 Front Bezel with Shield 06H897318 Keylock with Key 82G3606
19 DASD Door 82G359620 IBM Logo (restricted) 82G360121 5.25-Inch Hard Disk Drive Bezels 06H8684
with Spacer22 Control Panel Bezel 06H359523 CD Storage Tray 06H5060
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 319
Index System Unit (PC Server 520 - Type 8641 continued)16/8 Bit SCSI Converter 92F0324512K Cache (Models MDE, MDL, MZS, 96G2413MZE, MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV)
16MB EOS Memory SIMM (Models ED1, 11H0634EDE, EDL, EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
16MB EOS Memory SIMM (Models MDE, 11H0646MDL, MZS, MZE, MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV)
DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 06H8629(Models ED1, EDE, EDL, ED0, EDV, MDE, MDL, MD0, MDV)
DASD Hot Swap Backplane Assembly 06H8388Models EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, EZ0, EZV, MZS, MZE, MZL, MZO, MZV)
DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602Ethernet PCI Card 82G3602(Models EDL, EZL, MDL, MZL)
Hinges (2 each) 82G3600Hot Swap Cam Spring, Shaft & Knob 06H5059Keyboard with Cable,see “Keyboards (101/102 Key)” on page 323)
LED/Speaker, Power Switch 06H8037 Cable Assembly
Memory High Rise Card 96G3692(Models MDE, MDL, MD0, MDV)
Memory High Rise Card 96G1339(Models MZS, MZE, MZL, MZ0, MZV)
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611 � C2 Spring � EMI Ground Clips (4 each) � Lock Pawl � Screws (4 each) � System Board Mounting Boss (2 each)
Mouse 06H4595P54C 66/100MHz Processor Chip 75H8846with Heat Sink (Models EZ1, EZS, EZE,EZL, EZ0, EZV)
P54C 66/100MHz Processor Chip 96G2415with Heat Sink (Models MZS, MZE, MZL, MZO, MZV)
P54C 66/133MHz Processor Chip 96G2423with Heat Sink (Models ED1, EDE, EDL,
ED0, EDV)P54C 66/133MHz Processor Chip 06H9492Models MDE, MDL, MD0, MDV)
Power Supply Adapter Board 06H8977SCSI-2 Hard File Card 06H5078(Models ED1, EDE, EDL)
SCSI-2 RAID PCI Card 06H5078(Models EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL)
SCSI Fast/Wide Card 06H8574(Models ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
Speaker with Bracket 33F8444SVGA Card 06H9114(Models ED1, EDE, EDL, ED0, EDV)
SVGA Card 71G0031(Models EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, EZ0, EZV)
320 PC Server HMM
Index Power (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)Battery (Models MDE, MDL, MZS, MZE, 33F8354MZL, MD0, MDV, MZO, MZV)see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Power Cord,see “Power Cords” on page 324.Real-Time Clock with Battery 06H3398(Models ED1, EDE, EDL, EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)see “Battery Notice” on page 461
Index DASD (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)13 4X CD-ROM Drive 88G492114 1.44MB Diskette Drive 93F236115 2GB Hard Disk Drive 06H3372
Index Options (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)220W Power Supply Assembly 06H3237P54C 66/100MHz Processor Chip 06H6063with Heat Sink
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 321
Cables (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)
1
2
3
4
5
Index Cables (PC Server 520 - Type 8641)1 System Status Cable (1X4) 06H34042 Diskette Drive Signal Cable 06H9345
Diskette Drive Power Cable 06H89823 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (1X) 06H68763 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (2X) 06H37513 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (3X) 06H6675
(Models ED0, EDV, MD0, MDV SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (3X) 06H6661(Models ED1, EDE, EDL, MDE, MDL)
4 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable (1X) 82G36105 SCSI Fast/Wide Flex Cable (1X) 06H6145
DASD Status Cable 06H9343C2 Cable 82G3612(Models MDE, MDL, MD0, MDV)
C2 Cable 06H8059(Models MZS, MZE, MZL, MZ0, MZV)
Parallel Data Cable (Models ED1, EDE, EDL, 06H2166EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
POS ID Select Cable (Narrow) 06H3592SCSI Fast/Wide ID Select Cable 06H3957Serial Data Cable 2x (Models ED1, EDE, 06H2165EDL, EZ1, EZS, EZE, EZL, ED0, EDV, EZ0, EZV)
322 PC Server HMM
Keyboards (101/102 Key)Keyboards (101/102 Key)
Arabic 1391490 Belgium-Dutch 1391414 Belgium-French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian-Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian-Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia/Croatia/Bosnia 1393669
South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss-French 1391412 Swiss-German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286
U.K. English 1391406U.S. English 06H9743U.S. English (E/ME/A use only) 1396790
PC Server 520 - Type 8641 323
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520
Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520
324 PC Server HMM
PC Server 720 - Type 8642
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 330
Administration Monitoring Utilities . . . . . . . 331Advanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Backing Up Your Disk-Array Configuration . 331Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration . . . 332Using the Advanced Functions . . . . . . 332
Changing the Write Policy . . . . . . . 332Formatting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 334Changing the RAID Parameters . . . . 334
Configuring the Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . 336RAID Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Hard Disk Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . 337Additional Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . 337The RAID Configuration Program Screens . 337
DASD Tray SCSI IDs/LED (Hot-Swap) . . . . 339Drive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Obtaining Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . 340Bay/Array Selection List . . . . . . . . 340
Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure . . . . 341Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications 342Replacing a Faulty Drive . . . . . . . . . 342
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Front Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Front Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 344Menu Buttons and Enter Button . . . . 344Power Enable Button . . . . . . . . . 344Start/Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642) . . . . . 345Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
LEDs—System Board and Adapter . . . . . . 346Light Emitting Diodes/Liquid Crystal Display . . 349
Light Emitting Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . 349Liquid Crystal Display . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Performing Common Tasks (RAID Configuration) 349Defining a Hot-Spare Drive . . . . . . . . 350Deleting a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 350Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 351Adding Drives to Create an Additional Array 352Defining Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . 353
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Power Supply LED and Button . . . . . . 356Primary Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . 357Optional Power Supply Drive Connector
Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Power Supply Shutdowns . . . . . . . . . 358
Redefining Space in an Array . . . . . . . . . 359Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or E . . . . 361Service Processor Requirements . . . . . . . 362Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 325
Starting or Stopping the System . . . . . . . 365Starting or Powering-On the System . . . . 365Stopping or Powering-Off the System . . . 365Power-On/Off Scenarios . . . . . . . . . 366
Starting the RAID Configuration Program . . . 366RAID Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . 366Main Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . 367
Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics . 369Viewing the RAID Configuration . . . . . . . 369
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Connectors (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . 371Controls/Indicators (Front View) . . . . . . 372Hot-Swap Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 373
SCSI ID Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . 373ROM Address Jumper Setting . . . . . 373Termination (Hot-Swap Back Plane) . . 373
SCSI-2 Fast/Wide RAID Adapter/A . . . . 374SCSI Fast/Wide Adaptec Adapter . . . . . 374System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Corollary Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Checkpoint Codes (CP) . . . . . . . . . . 377Test Error Indication (EP) . . . . . . . . . 379Test Point Codes (TP) . . . . . . . . . . 380Multiprocessor Error Indication (IP and FP
Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Halt Indications (HALT) . . . . . . . . . . 383
Micro Channel Error Symptoms/Codes . . . . 384No Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . 384Beep Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
SCSI/Non-SCSI Error Code Format . . . . . . 388PCI Error Format and Error Codes/Messages . 395Testing PCI Adapter Cards . . . . . . . . . . 398Accessing/Checking the PCI Device List . . . 398
Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Keyboards (101/102 Key) . . . . . . . . . . 402Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
326 PC Server HMM
FeaturesIn addition to the following features, the Type 8642 Serveris shipped with a ServerGuide package that contains a setof ServerGuide Compact Discs (CDs). The easiest andmost efficient way to set up the Type 8642 server, installan operating system, and take advantage of the latestsoftware for the network environment is to use theServerGuide compact discs. See the ServerGuide CDdocumentation.
PC Server 720 computers incorporate additional processorslots on the system board for installing up-to six66/100MHz Pentium processor cards to support SymmetricMultiprocessors/Multiprocessing (SMP). The SMPcapability extends processing performance by allowingtasks to be dispatched to the next available processorrather then being queued until the busy processor hascompleted its task. The SMP capability also provides alevel of high availability in that with some operatingsystems, such as OS/2 SMP, the system will run in auni-processor mode if one of the processors shouldexperience a failure. This function will allow the LAN tocontinue operation so that service can be scheduled at anon-critical time.
Note
The following is a list of minimal requirements for theType 8642 computer to successfully complete POST:
� Bridge Card (1 each)� Memory Card 64MB (1 each)� Processor Card (1 each)
Type →————Feature ↓
8642-0Z0 8642-1Z0 8642-2ZS 8642-4ZS
Processor Pentium Pentium Pentium Pentium
Speed 66/100MHz 66/100MHz 66/100MHz 66/100MHz
ProcessorQty
1 1 2 4
Memory(60ns ECC)
64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB
Video SVGA SVGA SVGA SVGA
Hard DiskDrive
Open Open 2x225GB
4x225GB
RAID No Yes Yes Yes
CD-ROMDrive
Yes Yes Yes Yes
DisketteDrive
2.88MB 2.88MB 2.88MB 2.88MB
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 327
Diagnostic InformationThe Server 720 is supported by the following diagnosticinformation and procedures. Additional information may berequired for optional features not originally shipped with thecomputer.
Important
� “General Checkout (Micro Channel)” on page 19in the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual.
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index (Micro Channel)” onpage 26 in the PS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual.
� “Related Service Information” on page 107 in thePS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual.
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 376.� “Additional Service Information” on page 330.� “Self Diagnostics (AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)”
on page 543.
The following list contains problems and references fordiagnosing a PC Server 720.
Problem Reference
Adapter LEDs “LEDs—System Board andAdapter” on page 346.
Adaptec adapter LEDstays on.
“LED (AHA-2940/2940WAdapters)” on page 531.
Hot-Swap Tray LED failsto light or blinkscontinuously
“DASD Tray SCSI IDs/LED(Hot-Swap)” on page 339.
Diagnostic errors � “Symptom-to-FRU Index”on page 376.
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel)” on page26 in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
Display problems � “Micro Channel ErrorSymptoms/Codes” onpage 384.
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel)” in thePS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
� “Related ServiceInformation” on page 107in the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
Check point codes “Corollary Error Codes” onpage 376.
328 PC Server HMM
Problem Reference
Memory “General Checkout (MicroChannel)” on page 19 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual. (Run the memorytests.)
Micro Channel adapterproblems/errors
� “Micro Channel ErrorSymptoms/Codes” onpage 384.
� “Symptom-to-FRU Index(Micro Channel)” in thePS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual.
Miscellaneous “General Checkout (MicroChannel)” on page 19 in thePS/2 Hardware MaintenanceManual.
PCI error “PCI Error Format and ErrorCodes/Messages” onpage 395.
POST errorcodes/messages
“Corollary Error Codes” onpage 376.
Power supply shutsdown, or appears to fail,at power-on.
“Power Supply Shutdowns” onpage 358.
Power supply light goesout while the computer ispowered-on.
“Corollary Error Codes” onpage 376.
Power supply voltages “Power Supplies” on page 356.
SCSI Fast/Wide AdaptecAdapter (AHA-2940W,FRU No. 06H6431)problems
“Self Diagnostics(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)”on page 543.
SCSI-2 Fast/Wide RAIDAdapter (FRU No.06H3059) problems
“SCSI/Non-SCSI Error CodeFormat” on page 388.
System board LEDs “LEDs—System Board andAdapter” on page 346.
System slows down orboots slowly.See “UndeterminedFailing ProcessorDiagnostics” onpage 369.
Check the processors and thesystem board.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 329
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the PC Server 720 Type8642.
� “Administration Monitoring Utilities” on page 331.� “Advanced Functions” on page 331.� “Configuring the Disk Array” on page 336.� “DASD Tray SCSI IDs/LED (Hot-Swap)” on page 339.� “Drive Maintenance” on page 340.� “Drivers” on page 343.� “Front Operator Panel” on page 344.� “Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642)” on page 345.� “LEDs—System Board and Adapter” on page 346.� “Light Emitting Diodes/Liquid Crystal Display” on
page 349.� “Performing Common Tasks (RAID Configuration)” on
page 349.� “Power Supplies” on page 356.� “Redefining Space in an Array” on page 359.� “Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or E” on
page 361.� “Service Processor Requirements” on page 362.� “Specifications” on page 363.� “Starting or Stopping the System” on page 365.� “Starting the RAID Configuration Program” on
page 366.� “Undetermined Failing Processor Diagnostics” on
page 369.� “Viewing the RAID Configuration” on page 369.
330 PC Server HMM
Administration Monitoring UtilitiesSeveral of the operating systems that your server supportsalso support (for disk-array models) RAID monitoringprograms. The monitoring programs are:
� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor� OS/2 RAID NetFinity/Alert Manager� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration for NetWare� IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan Vines
These programs include many of the functions contained inthe IBM RAID configuration program, but unlike thatprogram, they reside on top of your operating system anddo not require you to start the program from a startablediskette or from a startable compact disc. You can startthese programs from your active operating systemdesktop.
Each of these monitoring programs allow you view theRAID configuration, reconfigure the array when replacing adefective drive, and perform tuning tasks such as changingthe write policy.
To monitor the drive status with OS/2, Novell NetWare,Microsoft Windows, and Banyan Vines, you must run theadministration programs. The RAID controller diskettecontains files that must be installed when you use OS/2,NetWare, or Banyan Vines.
See the README file on the RAID controller diskette forinstallation and usage instructions for OS/2 RAIDController Administration and Monitor, OS/2 RAIDController Administration for NetWare, and IBM RAIDController Administration for Banyan Vines. For OS/2RAID NetFinity Alert Manager, see the ServerGuide CDdocumentation.
Advanced FunctionsYou can select several utilities from the AdvancedFunctions menu. They include:
� Backup configuration to diskette� Restore configuration to diskette� Change the write policy� Change the RAID parameters� Format a drive
Backing Up Your Disk-Array Configuration:The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk-arrayconfiguration information in its EEPROM (electronicallyerasable programmable read-only memory) module. Thedisk-array configuration is vital information. To protect thisinformation, back up the information to diskette as soon asyou have completed your tasks. You need a blank,formatted, 3.5-inch diskette.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 331
To back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette:
1. Label the blank diskette “Disk Array ConfigurationBackup,” and date it.
2. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
3. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.4. Select Backup config. to diskette .5. Remove the RAID controller diskette from the drive
and insert the blank diskette.6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration: Torestore the disk-array configuration information in the RAIDadapter EEPROM module, use the RAID controller disketteand an up-to-date Disk Array Configuration Backupdiskette.
Note
Because dynamic changes in the configuration of yourdisk array occur due to hot-spare drive replacement orother drive maintenance activity, the configurationbackup information on the diskette might be differentfrom that in the adapter. It is important that you backup the disk-array configuration information frequently,to keep the backup information on the diskette current.
To restore the RAID configuration information:
1. Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into theprimary drive and power-on the system. If the systemis already on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.3. Select Restore config. from diskette .4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Using the Advanced Functions: This sectiongives the procedures for using the advanced functions,such as changing the write policy, changing the RAIDparameters, and formatting a drive.
Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you topotential loss of data and should be heeded beforeanswering yes to the confirmations requested by the RAIDconfiguration program.
Changing the Write Policy: When you configure alogical drive, the RAID adapter automatically sets the writepolicy to write-through (WT) mode, where the completionstatus is sent after the data is written to the hard diskdrive. To improve performance, you can change this writepolicy to write-back (WB) mode, where the completionstatus is sent after the data is copied to cache memory,but before the data is actually written to the storagedevice.
332 PC Server HMM
Although you gain performance with write-back mode, itcreates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure.This is because the system gets a completion statusmessage when the data reaches cache memory, butbefore data is actually written to the storage device.
To change the write policy:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.3. Select Change write policy from the Advanced
Functions menu. The cursor will be active in theLogical Drive list.
4. Select the logical drive for which you want to changethe write policy. The Advanced Functions screenappears.
Note
Your information might be different from thatshown in this screen.
The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID,the size in megabytes of each logical drive, the RAIDlevel you assigned to that logical drive, and the dateyou created it.
The status of the logical drive is also shown.Good All is well with the drive.Critical Replace the hard disk drive and rebuild
the logical drive. (You will have receiveda message telling you what hashappened to the drive.)
Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata in that drive is lost.
5. Locate the Wrt pol (Write Policy) field in the LogicalDrive list.
The write policy is shown as either WT (write-through,which is the default setting) or WB (write-back).
6. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto select the logical drive for which you want tochange the write policy.
Warning
If you change the write policy to write-back, waitat least 10 seconds after your last operationbefore you power-off the server. It takes thatlong for the system to move the data from thecache memory to the storage device. Failure tofollow this practice can result in lost data.
7. Press Enter to change the write policy.
Notice that WT changes to WB. You can press Enterto alternate between WT and WB.
8. When you have made your choice, press Esc toreturn to the Advanced Functions menu.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 333
9. Select Exit . The Confirm pop-up window appearsasking you to confirm your action.
10. To return the setting to its original state, select No.To save your changes, select Yes.
11. Back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette. Refer to “Backing Up Your Disk-ArrayConfiguration” on page 331 for more information.
Formatting Drives: You can perform a low-levelformat on drives with RDY (ready), OFL (offline), or UNF(unformatted) status.
Note
The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functionsmenu provides a low-level format. If you install a newhard disk drive that requires a standard format, usethe Format command provided by your operatingsystem.
The Format program works like the low-level formatprogram in the advanced diagnostics portion of the systemprograms. It is provided in the IBM RAID configurationprogram so that you can perform a low-level format on adrive controlled by the RAID adapter.
To perform a low-level format:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.
Warning
A low-level format erases all data and programsfrom the drive.
3. Select Format drive . The low-level format programstarts.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
You can perform a low-level format on more than onedrive at a time.
Changing the RAID Parameters: You can changethe RAID parameters using the advanced functions byselecting Change RAID parameters .
The default settings are:
� Stripe unit size — 8K
The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on agiven disk before writing on the next disk. Tomaximize the overall performance, this stripe unitshould be chosen such that the stripe-unit size isclose to the size of the system I/O request. Thedefault is set to 8K data bytes.
334 PC Server HMM
Warning
Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is storedin the logical drives, the stripe unit cannot bechanged without destroying data in the logicaldrives.
� Rebuild priority — Equal.
Rebuild priority can be set to equal, high, or low.When set to equal, the rebuild I/O request andsystem I/O request get equal priority in the executionorder.
When set to high, the rebuild I/O request will get ahigher priority than a system I/O request. In a heavilyloaded system (with a high rate of system I/Orequests), the high-priority rebuild can significantlyreduce the disk rebuild time at the expense ofdegraded handling of I/O requests.
When the rebuild priority is set to low, the rebuild I/Orequests can execute only if there is no pendingsystem I/O requests. In a moderate to heavily loadedsystem, low rebuild priority will increase the diskrebuild time significantly and provide better systemperformance.
Note
Rebuild priority can be changed without affectingdata in the logical drives.
� Parity placement — RA.
Warning
Once a parity placement scheme is chosen anddata stored, it cannot be changed withoutdestroying data.
Parity placement defines how parity is placed in thedisk array with respect to data. The followingillustration shows both the Left Symmetric (LS) andRight Asymmetric (RA) parity placement in afour-drive disk array. Here AAA, BBB, and CCC arethe data stripe units, and PP0 is the correspondingparity. Similarly DDD, EEE, and FFF are the datastripe units, and PP1 is the corresponding parity.
Right Asymmetric (RA) Left Symmetric (LS)
Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PPð AAA BBB CCC AAA BBB CCC PPð
DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD
GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH
JJJ KKK LLL PP3 PP3 JJJ KKK LLL
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 335
In some situations you may want to try LS parityplacement to improve performance. The defaultparity placement is RA.
� Read ahead — On.
Normally the IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAIDAdapter transfers data from disk to its local cache insteps of stripe-unit size. This provides excellentoverall performance when workloads tend to besequential. However, if the workload is random andsystem I/O requests are smaller than stripe-unit size,reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will resultin a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted diskutilization. When read-ahead is set to Off, the size ofdata transfer from the disk to local cache is equal tothe system I/O request size, and no read-ahead tothe end of the stripe unit is performed.
Notes
1. The Read-ahead setting can be changed withoutdestroying data in a logical drive.
2. When the configuration is saved on a diskette,the RAID parameters are saved also.
Configuring the Disk ArrayThe following information applies only to disk array models.Use this information to perform the tasks necessary toconfigure, add, change, or delete one or more disk arrays.
� If you did not create an IBM RAID controller diskette,see the ServerGuide CD documentation.
� Familiarize yourself with the information contained inthis manual and the RAID (redundant array ofindependent disks) information in the User'sReference shipped with the server.
� Verify the disk-array configuration. The disk-arraymodel comes configured as one logical drive.
– To view the disk-array configuration, go to“Viewing the RAID Configuration” on page 369and select View Configuration from the MainMenu.
– To create a disk array, go to“Creating a DiskArray” on page 351.
� Back up the disk-array configuration. See “BackingUp Your Disk-Array Configuration” on page 331.
After you configure the disk array, you can complete setupby installing an operating system (from the ServerGuidecompact disc that was shipped with the server or from thediskettes that came with the operating system). To installan operating system from the ServerGuide CD, see theServerGuide CD documentation.
336 PC Server HMM
RAID Technology: RAID is the technology ofgrouping several hard disk drives in a server into an arraythat can be defined as a single logical drive. This logicaldrive then appears to the operating system as a singlephysical drive. This grouping technique greatly enhanceslogical-drive capacity and performance. In addition, if oneof the hard disk drives fails (becomes defective), the servercontinues to run (with no operator intervention required) atreduced performance. The defective drive can be replacedwithout powering off the server (hot-swap). For moreinformation about hot-swappable hard disk drives, see“Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642)” on page 345.
Hard Disk Drive Capacities: With a server, it isimportant to understand the implications of hard disk drivecapacities and how they influence the way you create diskarrays.
Drives in the disk array can be of different capacities. Forexample, if the model came with two 1GB hard disk drivesand you install a 2GB hard disk drive to create a RAID 5disk array, the total capacity of the array is 3GB instead of4GB. Therefore, when creating arrays it is wise to adddrives of equal capacity.
Additional Storage Capacity: When you addhard disk drives to the server, you must configure a newdisk array before the drives can be used. You can eitherreconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacityoffered with the added drives, or group the added drivesinto their own array (see “Adding Drives to Create anAdditional Array” on page 352). You also can create anarray with only one drive.
The RAID Configuration Program Screens:When you configure the disk array, or even just view itsconfiguration, you will be using the IBM RAID configurationprogram on the IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Streaming-RAIDAdapter/A Option Diskette (also called the IBM RAIDcontroller diskette). The following figure is a compilation ofmany of the IBM RAID Controller Disk Array Configuration(also called the IBM RAID configuration program) screens.The list below the figure gives explanations of thenumbered areas of the figure.
1. This pop-up allows you to select the RAID level youwant to assign to the logical drive you are defining,and it allows you to select the logical drive size. Youcan enter the size, in megabytes, or you can acceptthe default value shown.
When you need to confirm an action, the Confirmpop-up appears in this area.
2. You can select any of the choices that appear on themenus.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 337
3. The Bay/Array selection list shows each bay in theserver (for each channel) numbered 1 through 7. Theabbreviation in the bay indicates the status of thedrive installed in the bay. Selections are made fromthis list to determine which bays (hard disk drives) arein the arrays. The letter to the right of the bay,identifies the array in which the hard disk drive in thatbay is grouped.
Note
The Channel/Bay/Array area on the screen doesnot reflect the physical configuration of theserver. The hard disk drives are installed inhorizontal banks of bays (in banks C, D, and Ethere are 6 bays, numbered 1 through 6 from leftto right). See “Installing Internal Drives (Type8642)” on page 345 to see the physical locationof the hard disk drives.
4. The Array list shows you the array ID and the size (inmegabytes) of the array.
Note
The capacity (size) is shown in binary equivalent.
When a drive is being rebuilt, this area, along with theLogical Drive list area, shows the progression of therebuilding process.
5. The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive (forexample, A1), the size of the logical drive, the RAIDlevel assigned to the logical drive, the date it wascreated, and the write policy.
The status of the logical drive also is shown.
Good All is well with the drive.
Critical You must replace the drive or do arebuild operation. (You will havereceived a message telling you thedrive is in a Critical state.)
Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata in that drive is lost.
When a drive is being rebuilt, this area, along with theArray list area, shows the progression of therebuilding process.
Note
The capacity (size) is shown in binary equivalent.
During an initialization process, the Write Policy areadisplays the percent initialized; during asynchronization process, it displays the percentsynchronized.
6. The information area tells you the action you canperform on this screen or pop-up.
338 PC Server HMM
DASD Tray SCSI IDs/LED (Hot-Swap)The SCSI IDs for DASD installed in the DASD Hot-SwapTray Assembly (FRU number 06H3956) are set by theautomatic configuration program for the computer.
When a drive is initialized, the LED (mounted on the backof the tray in which the drive is installed) should blink a fewtimes and then stay on. Continuous blinking or failure ofthe LED to stay on might be caused by one of thefollowing.
Note
Always run the diagnostic programs for the computeryou are servicing before replacing a FRU.
� The tray is not seated properly� The computer is not configured properly� The tray, backplane, or drive is defective
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 339
Drive MaintenanceThe following section provides information about statusindicators for logical and hard disk drives, and the resultsof a hard disk drive failure. It also contains procedures forreplacing defective drives and for redefining the space inan array by replacing logical drives.
Obtaining Drive Status: To see the ID, capacity,and other information about each of the hard disk drivesattached to the RAID adapter:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select Drive information .3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key
to highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay/Arrayselection list. As a drive is highlighted, theinformation for that drive is shown at the bottom ofthe screen.
4. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
Note
The status of the hard disk drive determines the statusof the logical drives in the array in which the hard diskis grouped.
Bay/Array Selection List: The status of the drives inthe Bay/Array selection list is defined as follows:
Status Meaning
CDR CD-ROM drive installed.
DDD Disk Drive Defunct. The drive is anonline or hot-spare drive that does notrespond to commands. If a RDY drive isdefective or powered down, it shows anempty bay (a blank status), not a DDDstatus.
FMT Format. The drive is being reformatted.
HSP Hot spare. The drive will replace asimilar drive that becomes defective inreal time. At that time, its status changesto ONL, and its array association isdisplayed.
OFL Offline. The drive is a good drive thathas replaced a defective drive in a RAIDlevel 1 or level 5 array. It is associatedwith an array, but does not contain anyvalid data. The drive state remains OFLduring the rebuild phase.
340 PC Server HMM
Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure:Depending on the circumstances, there can be severalpossible results from a drive failure.
Example 1 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is defined that is the same or
greater size than the failed drive.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
level 1, level 5, or a combination of these two levels.
Then the hot spare will take over immediately.
Note
Data for logical drives assigned RAID levels 1 and 5 ismaintained; however, system performance will bereduced. Hot-spare drive capability does not apply tological drives assigned RAID level 0.
Example 2 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is not defined.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
levels 1, 5, or a combination of these two levels.
Status Meaning
ONL Online. The drive is part of an array. Ifthis drive fails, logical drives defined inthe array in which this drive is groupedwill have a status of offline (if the logicaldrive is assigned RAID level 0 with agood status) or Critical (if the logical driveis assigned RAID level 1 or level 5 with agood status).
RDY Ready. The drive is recognized by theadapter and is available for definition.
TAP Tape drive installed.
UFM Unformatted. The drive requires alow-level format before it can be used inan array.
Blank Status Any of the following circumstances cancause the status area to be blank:
� No hard disk drive is installed in thatbay.
� The bay contains a hard disk drive,but the drive is not insertedcorrectly.
� An array was deleted and adefective drive is still in the bay.
� A new drive was installed and theconfiguration program has not beenrestarted. (The status will change toRDY when the RAID configurationprogram is restarted.)
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 341
Then no data will be lost, but the system will operate atreduced performance until the defective drive is replacedand rebuilt.
Example 3 :
If more than one drive fails, all data is lost. Therefore, it isimportant that you replace and rebuild a defective drive assoon as possible.
Logical and Hard Disk Drive StatusIndications: The status of the hard disk drivedetermines the status of the logical drives in the array inwhich the hard disk is grouped.
� A single hard disk drive failure (indicated by a DDDstatus in the Bay/Array selection list) causes logicaldrives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 tohave a Critical status. Data remains in logical driveswith a Critical status, but you must replace the onedefective hard disk drive promptly, because if twohard disk drives were to fail, all of the data in thearray would be lost.
After you install a new hard disk drive, the Replaceprocess changes the drive status from DDD to OFL ifthere is a Critical logical drive. After the Rebuildprocess, the hard disk drive status changes from OFLto ONL.
� A single or multiple hard disk drive failure causeslogical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 tohave an offline status. Data in logical drives with anoffline status is lost. However, with a multiple diskdrive failure, when the defective drives are part of thesame array, logical drives in that array will have anoffline status. This means that data is lost in all thelogical drives in that array, regardless of which RAIDlevel is assigned.
Replacing a Faulty Drive
Note
The hard disk drive indicator light will blink when thedrive has failed and needs to be replaced (DDD stateonly).
To replace a faulty drive:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
If the drive failed while the system was powereddown, a screen appears the next time the system ispowered on showing you which drive is defective.
2. If the drive is not damaged (for example, it is notinserted correctly):
a. Power-off the system.
342 PC Server HMM
b. Correct the problem.c. Remove the diskette from the drive.d. Restart the system.
3. If the drive is defective:a. Press Y (Yes) to reconfigure the system.b. Press Ctrl +Alt +Del when instructed to restart the
system. The Main Menu appears.c. Select Rebuild device .
At this point, the drive status shows DDD.
Warning
Removing the wrong hard disk drive cancause loss of all data in the array.
d. Replace the defective drive. Refer to “Removinga Drive from Bank C, D, or E” on page 361.
e. After you have replaced the drive, press Enter .The system will reconfigure to include the drive,and the status of the drive will change to OFL.
f. Allow the system to complete the configuration(the screen displays a completion message);then select Rebuild drive .
g. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓)key to highlight the OFL (offline) drive you wantto rebuild; then press Enter .
The progress of the rebuilding process appearson the screen.
h. When the rebuilding process completes, pressEsc to return to the Main Menu. The newconfiguration will be saved automatically.
i. Back up the new configuration (see “Backing UpYour Disk-Array Configuration” on page 331).
j. Select Exit to end the RAID configurationprogram.
k. Remove the diskette and press Ctrl +Alt +Del torestart the system.
DriversThe RAID adapter requires the installation of devicedrivers. See the README file on the RAID controllerdiskette for detailed instructions.
If you install OS/2 from the ServerGuide CD, the devicedrivers will be installed automatically. If, however, youinstall OS/2 from diskette, you will need to install thedevice drivers. See the README file on the RAIDcontroller diskette.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 343
Front Operator PanelThe front panel (front operator panel) incorporates thestandard function for System Maintenance AdapterReporting Trouble (SMART).
This panel consist of the following:
� “Light Emitting Diodes” on page 349.� A 2-line by 16-character LCD display� “Menu Buttons and Enter Button.”� “Power Enable Button.”� “Start/Stop Button” on page 345.
Front Panel Buttons: The front operator panelcontains seven buttons.
MenuButtons
Enter
Start/Stop
Power Enable
Menu Buttons and Enter Button: These buttonsare currently non-functional.
Power Enable Button: The power enable button actsas a logical emergency power-off switch. When pressed(set to off), the computer's power is immediately removed,all automatic and remote power-on functions are disabled,and the computer will not power-on until the power enablebutton is pressed again.
Note
This power enable button does not remove AC powerfrom the power supply or the service processor logicon the system board. (See also “Starting or Stoppingthe System” on page 365.)
344 PC Server HMM
Start/Stop Button: The start/stop button implementsmanual power-on/off functions under software control.(See also “Starting or Stopping the System” on page 365.)
Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642)The Type 8642 server supports the following drive types:
� Diskette � Hard disk� Rewritable optical disc
� Tape
The server has hardware that lets you replace a failedhard disk drive without powering-off the server. Therefore,you have the advantage of continuing to operate yoursystem while a hard disk drive is removed or installed.These drives are also known as hot-swappable drives.
Hot-swappable drives have a green LED that shinesthrough the knob on the tray containing the drive. If thedrive has a good electrical connection upon installation, theLED illuminates. The LED blinks briefly during power-up,and also blinks if the drive malfunctions.
Internal drives are installed in bays. A diskette drive and aCD-ROM drive are preinstalled in bay A in all models. Aremovable CD storage compartment is shipped in bay B1.You can install two drives in bay B. You can installhot-swappable hard disk drives in banks C, D, and E only.Banks C, D, and E each contain six bays. Bank Csupports up to six drives. However, the total number ofSCSI drives that you can install in bay B and bank C is six.The number of preinstalled hard disk drives in bank Cvaries according to the model you purchased. You caninstall up to six drives in bank D and up to six drives inbank E.
Note
The bank letter-designations are located on bothvertical rails on the front of the server. The bay-slotnumbers are located on the top of bank C and thebottom of bank E.
A cover plate (sometimes called a bezel or face plate)covers the front of bay B2 only. If you install a drive thatuses removable media (diskette, optical disc, tape), youmight install and adjust the cover plate after you install thedrive in bay B2.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 345
Considerations� Bay A comes with one SCSI CD-ROM drive and one
3.5-inch, 2.88MB diskette drive.� Bay B supports:
– One 5.25-inch, full-high, removable-media ornon-removable-media device, or
– One 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-mediadevice and one 3.5-inch, half-high,removable-media device, or
– Two 3.5-inch or two 5.25-inch, slim-high orhalf-high, removable-media devices.
Note
Only one of the devices installed in bay B can bea SCSI device.
� You cannot install hot-swappable drives in bay B.� Supports eighteen 3.5-inch, slim-high, hot-swappable
hard disk drives, or nine 3.5-inch, half-high hard diskdrives in the bottom three banks (C, D, and E).
Banks C, D, and E can accommodate six slim-highdrives or three half-high drives, or a combination ofboth drive sizes. If you use a combination, rememberthat one half-high drive uses the equivalent space oftwo slim-high drives.
� If you install drives in bank D or E, you will removethe fan assembly on the rear of the server, install adirect access storage device (DASD) backplane inbanks D and E, and install an optional 220-wattpower supply.
� Each backplane has six connectors, to support up tosix hard disk drives.
LEDs—System Board and AdapterLED(s) are located on the system board, bridge card,processor card, and memory card. The LEDs indicateconditions listed on the following pages.
346 PC Server HMM
LED
Off
Sof
twar
e pr
oble
m p
reve
ntin
g in
itial
izat
ion
of t
he c
ard
Def
ectiv
e LE
DD
efec
tive
brid
ge c
ard
Suc
cess
ful i
nitia
lizat
ion
of t
he m
emor
y ca
rd c
ompl
ete
Suc
cess
ful i
nitia
lizat
ion
of t
he m
emor
y ca
rd c
ompl
ete
No
activ
ity o
n th
e pr
oces
sor
Sof
twar
e pr
oble
m p
reve
ntin
g in
itial
izat
ion
of t
he c
ard
Def
ectiv
e LE
DD
efec
tive
proc
esso
r ca
rd N
o ac
tivity
on
the
proc
esso
rS
oftw
are
prob
lem
pre
vent
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
car
dD
efec
tive
LED
Def
ectiv
e pr
oces
sor
card
Whe
n th
e co
mpu
ter
is p
ower
ed-o
n
LED
On
Dur
ing
and
afte
r no
rmal
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
brid
ge c
ard
Dur
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
mem
ory
card
Dur
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
mem
ory
card
Dur
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n an
d w
hen
ther
e is
act
ivity
on
the
proc
esso
r D
urin
g in
itial
izat
ion
and
whe
n th
ere
is a
ctiv
ity o
n th
epr
oces
sor
Whe
n th
e co
mpu
ter
is p
ower
ed-o
ff
Com
pone
nt
Sys
tem
Boa
rd S
lot
LED
s:�
B1
(brid
ge c
ard
slot
) �
M1
(mem
ory
card
slo
t) �
M2/
P1
(with
mem
ory
card
inst
alle
d) �
M2/
P1
(with
pro
cess
or c
ard
inst
alle
d) �
P2
thru
P6
(with
pro
cess
or c
ard
in
stal
led)
�M
icro
Cha
nnel
slo
ts
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 347
LED
Off
Sof
twar
e pr
oble
m p
reve
ntin
g in
itial
izat
ion
of t
he c
ard
Def
ectiv
e LE
DD
efec
tive
brid
ge c
ard
Suc
cess
ful i
nitia
lizat
ion
of t
he m
emor
y ca
rd c
ompl
ete
No
activ
ity o
n th
e pr
oces
sor
Sof
twar
e pr
oble
m p
reve
ntin
g in
itial
izat
ion
of t
he c
ard
Def
ectiv
e LE
DD
efec
tive
proc
esso
r ca
rd
LED
On
Dur
ing
and
afte
r no
rmal
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
brid
ge c
ard
Dur
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n of
the
mem
ory
card
Dur
ing
initi
aliz
atio
n an
d w
hen
ther
e is
act
ivity
on
the
proc
esso
r
Com
pone
nt
Brid
ge c
ard
LED
Mem
ory
card
LE
D(s
)
Pro
cess
or c
ard
LED
(s)
348 PC Server HMM
Light Emitting Diodes/Liquid CrystalDisplay
4
5
6
1
2
3
Light Emitting Diodes: The following is a list ofthe front operator panel light emitting diodes (LEDs)followed by the definition for each LED.
Color Indications
� Green = proper operation� Yellow = alert condition
Liquid Crystal Display: The Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) on the front operator panel contains a 2-line by16-character LCD (front panel display) driven by the80C752 microprocessor. The front panel display receivesand transmits ASCII characters. The LCD supports theupper- and lower-case ASCII character set.
Errors detected by the computer might be displayed on theLCD and/or on the standard display attached to thecomputer. This is helpful when a display is not attached tothe computer or the attached display is inoperative.
LED Number Definition
1 Hard disk drive activity
2 DASD error
3 Processor Complex Error
4 Color green (POWER GOOD)
5 Color green (POWER Enabled)
6 Color green (All subsystems good)
Performing Common Tasks (RAIDConfiguration)The Create/Delete Array menu of the RAID configurationprogram contains the more common tasks for configuringdisk arrays. Procedures to complete these tasks arecontained in this section as follows:
� “Defining a Hot-Spare Drive” on page 350� “Deleting a Disk Array” on page 350� “Creating a Disk Array” on page 351� “Defining Logical Drives” on page 353
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 349
Defining a Hot-Spare Drive: To define a drive asa hot-spare drive:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu. TheCreate/Delete Array screen appears.
3. Select Define hot-spare drive . The cursor willbecome active in the Bay/Array selection list.
Note
Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY,ONL, DDD, OFL, or HSP state. SCSI tape andCD-ROM drives are not shown. They appearwhen you select drive information. Refer to“Bay/Array Selection List” on page 340 for thedrive status meanings.
The numbers shown on the left are the bay IDs. See“Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642)” on page 345for an explanation of the bay IDs.
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RDY (ready) drive you want to defineas the hot spare; then press Enter. The RDYchanges to HSP (hot spare). You can press Enteragain to toggle between HSP and RDY.
5. Press Esc when you have finished. The cursor willbecome active in the Create/Delete Array menu.
6. If you want to create a disk array, go to “Creating aDisk Array” on page 351.
7. If you are finished:a. Select Exit or press Esc . A pop-up window will
appear asking you to confirm your change.
Note
The changes you make are not saved untilyou confirm them by selecting Yes in theConfirm pop-up window.
b. Select No if you do not want the drive youselected to be a hot spare; select Yes to defineit as a hot-spare drive.
c. Back up the disk-array configuration informationto diskette. Refer to “Backing Up YourDisk-Array Configuration” on page 331 forinstructions.
Deleting a Disk Array: The last array createdmust be the first deleted.
Warning
All the data and programs in the array are lost duringthis procedure. Before proceeding, back up any dataand programs that you want to save.
350 PC Server HMM
To delete a disk array:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.3. Select Delete disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu. The cursor will be active in the Arraylist.
4. Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drivelist; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or the DownArrow (↓) key to highlight the most recently definedarray.
5. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up window appears.6. If you do not want to delete the array, select No. To
delete the array, select Yes.
Note
To use hard disks from the existing array whencreating a new array, you must confirm thedeletion of the existing array.
If a defective drive is still in a bay, the status shows ablank bay, as though there is no drive in that bay. Whenyou replace the drive, the status will show RDY after youreconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop-up window.
Note
In some operating systems, deleting an array andassociated logical drives might change the drive lettersassigned to the existing drives.
Creating a Disk Array: To create a disk array:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
Note
To create an array using hard disks in an existingarray, refer to “Redefining Space in an Array” onpage 359.
2. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.3. Select Create disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu.
The cursor will be active in the Bay/Array selectionlist.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 351
Important
In the following step, when you press Enter toselect a drive for an array, you cannot deselect itby pressing Enter again, as you can with thehot-spare selection process. Carefully determinewhich drives you want to include in the arraybefore beginning the selection process.
If you change your mind after selecting the drivesfor an array, you can delete the array (byselecting Delete disk array from theCreate/Delete Array menu) and begin again.
4. Select each drive you want in the array by using theUp Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key tohighlight the drive and then pressing Enter . As youselect each drive, the status will change from RDY(Ready) to ONL (Online).
5. When you have selected all the drives you want toinclude in the array, press Esc . The cursor willbecome active in the menu.
6. If you have drives you did not use in this array andyou want to create another array, you can do one ofthe following:� Define the logical drive or drives for this array;
then create another array and its logical drives.See “Defining Logical Drives” on page 353.
� Create another array now by repeating steps 2through 5 in this procedure; then define logicaldrives for both arrays.
Note
You must define at least one logical drive foreach created array before you can exit theconfiguration program.
� Continue with “Defining Logical Drives” onpage 353.
Adding Drives to Create an AdditionalArray: To add storage capacity to your server withoutdisturbing existing data:
1. Install the additional hard disk drive or drives. (See“Installing Internal Drives (Type 8642)” on page 345.)
2. Start the RAID configuration program. (See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.)
3. Create a new disk array and define logical drives.(See “Creating a Disk Array” on page 351 foradditional information.)
352 PC Server HMM
Defining Logical Drives: After you have createdan array, you must define a logical drive. (You cannotleave the RAID configuration program until you define thelogical drives for any created arrays.)
To define a logical drive:
1. Select Define Logical drive from the Create/DeleteArray menu. The Create/Delete Array menu screenappears; the cursor is active in the Array list.
2. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the array you want to define; then pressEnter . The Select RAID Level pop-up windowappears, and the cursor is active in the window.
Note
The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 toany logical drives defined in an array containingonly one hard disk drive. When this is the case,the Select RAID Level pop-up window will notappear.
If you have only two hard disk drives in the array, theSelect RAID Level pop-up window appears, but RAIDlevel 5 is not selectable because you need at leastthree hard disk drives in an array to assign RAIDlevel 5 to one of the logical drives. You can definemore than one logical drive for your array. The onlyrestriction is that the maximum number of logicaldrives you can define is eight.
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RAID level you want to assign tothese logical drives, then press Enter .
Note
Because the level you assign can influence thespace needed for the drive, you must assign aRAID level before you enter the size of thelogical drive.
The Logical Drive list shows you the logical drive ID,the size of each logical drive, the RAID level youassigned to that logical drive, and the date that thelogical drive was created.
The status of the logical drive also is shown.Good All is well with the drive.Critical You must replace the hard disk drive or
do a rebuild operation. (You will havereceived a message telling you whathas happened to the drive.)
Offline The logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata on that drive is lost.
The Logical Drive Size pop-up window shows thespace in this array that is available for logical drives.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 353
4. Type the size, in megabytes, that you want for the
logical drive; then press Enter . A pop-up windowappears asking you to confirm your action.
Information about the new logical drive appears in theLogical Drive list.
Note
The size appearing in the Logical Drive list mightbe different from the size you typed because itappears in binary equivalent.
The size of a logical drive is determined by a numberof factors, but basically the size must be divisible bythe number of drives in the array.
Consider the following examples:
Example 1:There are three 1GB drives in the array. You assignRAID level 0 (which uses all the drives in the arraywith no parity storage), and type “1000MB.” The“Size (MB)” will be 999, which is the number closestto and lower than 1000 that is divisible by 3.
Example 2:There are three 1GB drives in the array, and youassign RAID level 5. Data is striped across all threedrives in the array, but the space equivalent to that ofone drive is used for redundant storage. Therefore, ifyou type “1000MB,” the “Size (MB)” remains 1000because it is divisible by 2 (drives), which is thespace available for data.
If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive,you can create another by assigning either the sameor a different RAID level for an additional logical drive.You can have as many as eight logical drives amongfour disk arrays.
5. To return to the Create/Delete Array menu, pressEsc . To define more logical drives, repeat steps 1through 5 of this procedure.
6. To leave this screen, select Exit or press Esc . Apop-up window appears asking you to confirm youraction.
7. To save your changes, select Yes. To maintain thedisk-array configuration that was in place before youmade changes, select No.
8. If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5, youmust select Initialize logical drive for properoperation. This sets the drive to a predeterminedstate. Any data existing on the drive is overwrittenwith zeros, and corresponding parity is initialized tothe correct value.
a. Select Initialize/synchronize array from theMain Menu; then select Initialize logical drive .
354 PC Server HMM
b. Select the logical drives you want to initializefrom the Logical Drive list by pressing theSpacebar (the selected drives will appearhighlighted). To start the initialization, pressEnter . A pop-up window appears asking you toconfirm your action.
Warning
If you select Yes in the Confirm pop-upwindow, information in the logical drive willbe overwritten with zeros.
c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to initializethis logical drive.
The initialization process begins, and you cansee its progress in the Pct. Int. (PercentInitialized) column of the Logical Drive list.
d. To stop the initialization at any time, press Esc .Then press Esc again to return to the menu, orpress Enter to continue initializing the drive.
9. To back up the disk-array configuration to diskette,you will need a 3.5-inch formatted diskette. To backup the disk-array configuration:
a. Select Advanced functions from the MainMenu.
b. Select Backup config. to diskette .
Follow the instructions on the screen. A pop-upwindow shows the default file name of CONFIG.You can change the file name by typing over thedefault.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 355
Power Supplies Caution
Always unplug the power cord and wait two minutesbefore replacing the power supply to give the powersupply capacitors time to discharge.
The Type 8642 computer is shipped with a primary powersupply. An additional or optional power supply can beadded to the computer. Connectors are used to transferthe primary power supply voltages and signals from theprimary power supply to the optional power supply. Thefollowing illustrations show how the two power supplies areconnected.
Caution
When replacing the primary power supply cover plate,rotate the plate 180°. (This will leave an opening forthe primary power supply connector cable thatconnects to the optional power supply.) Failure to doso will cause the power supply connector cable to becrimped when the plate is replaced.
Note
Tabs are located on the side of each power supply tosecure them together.
Power Supply LED and Button: Thepower-good LED and button are located on the side of theprimary power supply button. The LED (when lit) indicatesthat the power supply is good. If the LED fails to come onwhen the computer is powered-on, do the following:
� While observing the LED on the power supply, pressthe power supply button. If the LED fails to light(while you are holding the button in), you may have adefective power supply. If the LED lights when thebutton is pressed, go to “Power Supply Shutdowns”on page 358.
356 PC Server HMM
Primary Power Supply Voltages: If thevoltages are correct and the power supply fan runs, thepower supply is OK.
1 4 7
2 3 5
A B C D
Power-Supply Connector
DriveConnector
Connectors P11, P12, and P13
Optional Power Supply Drive ConnectorVoltages: If the voltages are correct and the powersupply fan runs, the power supply is OK.
A B C D
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
5 5 5 B B
3 4 7 D A
+4.8+11.5−10.8+4.8+11.5
+ 5.25+12.6−13.2+ 5.25+12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2 1 +11.5 +12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
B B
D A
+ 4.8+ 11.5
+ 5.25+12.6
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 357
Power Supply Shutdowns: If the power supplyshuts down, or appears to fail at power-on, you might haveone of the following problems:
� Too many devices are set to start instantly. See“Setting the Motor-Start Jumper” on page 549.
� There are too many large-capacity devices installed(such as hard disk drives). The nominal operatingcurrent of the devices installed collectively exceedsthe available current of the power supply. See the“Personal System/2 Installation Planning” guide (formnumber G41G-2927) for more information.
Also ensure that the fans operate when the machine ispowered on.
Note
Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable) isset for the correct voltage.
If the voltages are correct and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
358 PC Server HMM
Redefining Space in an ArrayYou can redefine space in a disk array in a number ofways. For example, you can combine a number of smalllogical drives to create a larger one or you can redefinethe existing logical drive into several smaller drives. Also,you can install additional hard disk drives to create a largerlogical drive than was possible with the existing storagecapacity.
One method to redefine space in an array is to change theRAID level assigned to a logical drive. For example, if youassigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decidedyou needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5, youcan use this procedure to replace the existing logical drivewith a logical drive assigned the new RAID level.
To redefine the space in a disk array, first you must deletethe array. The last disk array defined must be the firstdeleted.
Warning
In all cases, when you delete an array, all the dataand programs in the array are lost.
If you have data and programs that you want to save, theymust be backed up and then restored. It is suggested youuse a high-speed backup device, such as a tape drive.
To redefine the space in an array:
1. Back up all data and programs in the array.
2. If needed, install additional hard disk drives.
Refer to the User's Reference for information aboutselecting drive sizes.
3. Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette; then pressCtrl +Alt +Del to start the RAID configuration program.
4. Delete the existing array:a. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.
The Create/Delete Array menu will disappear.b. Select Delete disk array . The cursor will be
active in the Bay/Array list.c. Review the Logical Drive List Date Created
column; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or theDown Arrow (↓) key to highlight the mostrecently defined array.
Note
You must delete disk arrays in descendingorder; the last one created must be the firstone deleted.
d. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up windowappears.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 359
Warning
All the data in the array will be lost duringthis procedure. Be sure to back up all dataand programs that you want to save.
e. If you do not want to delete the array, select No.To delete the array select, Yes.
Note
To use the hard disks from the existingarray when creating a new array, you mustconfirm the deletion of the existing array.After you make your selection, the Confirmpop-up window will disappear, and thecursor will be active in the menu.
5. If you want a drive defined as a hot spare, refer to“Defining a Hot-Spare Drive” on page 350 forstep-by-step instructions.
6. Create a new disk array and define logical drives.
See “Creating a Disk Array” on page 351 forinstructions on creating a disk array and defininglogical drives.
7. After you have established the new array and logicaldrive or drives, select Initialize/synchronize arrayfrom the Main Menu; then select Initialize logicaldrive to prepare the drives in the array to receivedata. This sets the drive to a predetermined state.Any data existing in the drive is overwritten withzeros, and corresponding parity is initialized to theproper value.
8. Insert a 3.5-inch formatted diskette in the primarydrive, select Advanced functions from the MainMenu; then select Backup config. to diskette .Follow the instructions on the screen.
9. Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Escor selecting Exit while on the Main Menu. A pop-upwindow will appear asking you to confirm your action.
10. Reinstall your operating system and device drivers,then restore your data and programs.
360 PC Server HMM
Removing a Drive from Bank C, D, or ELocate the drive you are removing. You do not have topower-off the server to remove a drive from banks C, D,or E.
Warning
If you are removing a failed hard disk drive that is partof a disk array in bank C, D, or E, you must notaccidentally remove a good drive. Before you attemptto remove a defective drive, thoroughly review theinformation displayed on your server's screen todetermine the location of the failed drive. “Logical andHard Disk Drive Status Indications” on page 342explains the codes that your server uses to indicate adefective drive. When a hard disk drive fails, ablinking green indicator light illuminates on the knob ofthe drive tray. When a hard disk drive is good, a solidgreen indicator light illuminates on the knob of thedrive tray.
If you partially or completely remove a good driveinstead of the defective one, your server might losevaluable data. This situation is especially relevant ifyou assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives inyour disk array. However, the RAID controller canrebuild the data you need, provided that certainconditions are met. See “Starting the RAIDConfiguration Program” on page 366 for more details.
If you have a non-disk-array model, an illuminated drivetray knob means the drive is a good one. An unilluminateddrive tray knob means the drive is defective, or no poweris being supplied to the drive.
To remove a drive from bank C, D, or E, do the following:
1. Find the drive you plan to remove.2. If you have a disk-array model and a drive has failed,
ensure that you have selected the correct drive forremoval by verifying that the light on the tray's knob isblinking.
3. Unlock the drive by turning the knob directly above it90 degrees.
4. Disconnect the drive from the connector on thebackplane, by grasping the handle on the drive trayand pulling the drive out of the server. Store thedrive in a safe place.
Note
If you have a disk-array model, you mustreconfigure your disk arrays after removing harddisk drives. See “Starting the RAID ConfigurationProgram” on page 366 for details.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 361
Service Processor RequirementsThe service processor (SP) follows the following rules foreach power-on and -off cycle.The following functions are complete at power-up. (Seealso “Starting or Stopping the System” on page 365.)
� Because the SP runs continuously in this version, aninternal interrupt is generated each time theStart/Stop button is pressed. This interrupt will setthe Power-State bit in the RTC's SRAM and set thePAB bit to zero (0) turning on the power supply.
� At SP power-on, the RTC's Power-State bit ischecked to determine if the system should staypowered-on after an AC power failure.
362 PC Server HMM
Specifications Size
� Depth: 755 mm (29.7 in.)� Height: 622 mm (24.5 in.)� Width: 353 mm (13.9 in.)� Depth with cable cover: 807 mm (31.8 in.)
Weight
� Configured with one hard disk drive: 31.3 kg (69 lb)
Environment
� Air temperature– System on: 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 mm (3000 ft.)– System on: 10° to 32° C (50° to 90° F)
Altitude: 914m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)– System off: 10° to 43° C (50° 110° F)
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)– Storage: 1° to 60° C (34° to 140° F)
� Humidity– System on: 8% to 80%– System off: 8% to 80%
� Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Heat Output
� Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units(BTU) per hour
– Minimum configuration: 155 BTU (44 watts)– Maximum configuration: 3.600 BTU (1055 watts)
Electrical Input
� Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz is required � Input voltage
– Low range- Minimum: 90 V ac- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range- Minimum: 180 V ac- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.16
kVA - Maximum configuration: 1.0 kVA
Total Power Available for Drives
� Nominal operating current allowed (base withexpansion upgrade)
– +5 V dc line: 10 A base/23 A with upgrade– +12 V dc line: 10 A base/23 with upgrade
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 363
Acoustical Noise Emission Values
� Average sound pressure levels at operator position– 1 hard disk drive (low fan speed)
- 40 dB operating- 38 dB idle
– 1 hard disk drive (high fan speed)- 42 dB operating- 41 dB idle
– 3 hard disk drives (low fan speed)- 40 dB operating- 38 dB idle
– 3 hard disk drives (high fan speed)- 42 dB operating- 42 dB idle
� Average sound pressure at bystander position (1meter)
– 1 hard disk drive (low fan speed)- 36 dB operating- 35 dB idle
– 1 hard disk drive (high fan speed)- 38 dB operating- 38 dB idle
– 3 hard disk drives (low fan speed)- 36 dB operating- 35 dB idle
– 3 hard disk drives (high fan speed)- 38 dB operating- 38 dB idle
� Declared (upper limit) sound power levels– 1 hard disk drive (low fan speed)
- 5.5 bels operating- 5.4 bels idle
– 1 hard disk drive (high fan speed)- 5.7 bels operating- 5.6 bels idle
– 3 hard disk drives (low fan speed)- 5.5 bels operating- 5.4 bels idle
– 3 hard disk drives (high speed)- 5.7 bels operating- 5.7 bels idle
364 PC Server HMM
Starting or Stopping the SystemSee the following topics:
� “Starting or Powering-On the System”� “Stopping or Powering-Off the System”� “Power-On/Off Scenarios” on page 366
(See also “Service Processor Requirements” onpage 362.)
Starting or Powering-On the System: Topower-on the computer under normal conditions, you musthave the power enable button active and push thestart/stop button.
When the computer is powered-on, it may be shut down bypressing the start/stop button. This causes one of thefollowing scenarios to occur in the service processor (SP):
� A non-maskable interrupt (NMI) is generated and sentto the host processor and a count-down timer topower-off the computer is started. When the timerreaches zero (0) the system is powered-off. Thisoption requires a NMI device driver to flush cacheand close the file system before the time out.
� An SP interrupt is generated and sent to the hostprocessor and a count-down timer to power-off thecomputer is started. When the timer reaches zero,the computer is powered-off. This option requires anSP device driver to interface to the operating systemto close the file system before the timeout.
� No interrupt is generated and the computer ispowered-off after the count-down timer times out.The default value for the count down timer is zero orpower-off immediately.
� A message is displayed requesting that the enterbutton be pressed to power-off the computer.
Note
When changing the Real-Time Clock module orresetting the CMOS RAM, you must press and holdthe start/stop button in until a message is displayedsaying the real-time clock (RTC) has been updated orreset.
Stopping or Powering-Off the System: Whenthe Start/Stop button is pressed, the service processor(SP) sends an interrupt causing the count-down timer tostart. When the timer reaches zero (0), the computer ispowered-off. The default value for this timer is zero (0)seconds. The SP also interrupts the host system throughthe SP or NMI interrupts if these features are enabled.The SP will display a message on the LCD indicating thatthe computer will power-off in XX seconds. If enabled, thisfeature can be canceled by pressing the Enter button.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 365
Power-On/Off Scenarios: The computer isdesigned with a soft power-on and -off function. Thisfunction requires the following changes in how thecomputer is powered on and off. The SMART functionlooks at the hardware at power-on and takes control of thepower-off function.
� The first change is a Power Enable button. Thisbutton is a logical emergency power off (EPO) switchthat does not remove all power from the computer; itcontinues power to the bus as long as AC isconnected, but it will power-off all other componentsof the computer immediately and prevent it from beingpowered-on until the Power Enable button is pressedagain.
� The second change is that after any AC powerinterruption to the computer, the computer willpower-on to determine what state it should be in (onor off). If the computer was powered-off before theAC power interruption, it will power-off when power isrestored. If the computer was powered-on before theAC power interruption, it will power-on when power isrestored.
Note
If the Power Enable button is not on and the AC isinterrupted, the system will not power-on and check tosee if it should be on until the next time the PowerEnable button is pressed.
The white power-on button is used to power-on or -off thecomputer. You must press and hold this button for abouttwo seconds on some models.
Starting the RAID ConfigurationProgramIf you have not yet created the SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-BusAdapter Configuration Option Diskette (RAID controllerdiskette), see the ServerGuide CD documentation.
To start the RAID configuration program:
Insert the IBM RAID controller diskette into theprimary drive and power-on the server.If the server is already on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.If you have more than one RAID adapter, you will getan adapter selection screen. Otherwise, the MainMenu appears.
RAID Program Keys
Key Program Response
F1 Selects Help from any menu
366 PC Server HMM
Main Menu Selections
Note
Whenever you make changes to the disk-arrayconfiguration and select Exit , the Confirm pop-upwindow will appear. You must select Yes to save andactivate the changes.
Key Program Response
Esc Returns to the previous screen orto the previous work area of ascreen
Up (↑) and Down (↓)Arrows
Highlights the item to be selected
Enter Selects the highlighted item
Selection Program Response
Help Provides additional information.
View configuration: Displays the existing disk arrayconfiguration.
Create/delete array: Selects the drives, defines ahot-spare drive for an array youwant to create, or deletes anexisting array.This selection also has choicesfor defining a logical drive andformatting a drive.
Initialize/synchronizearray:
Select this choice after creatingan array to:
� Set the drive to apredetermined value.
� For proper operation of RAIDlevels 1 and 5.
Note: Any data existing onthe drive isoverwritten withzeros, and thecorresponding parityinformation isinitialized to thecorrect value.
� Initialize more than onelogical drive at a time.
� Interrupt the initializationprocess at any time bypressing Esc .
� Restart the initializationprocess by pressing Enter .
� End the process by pressingEsc again.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 367
Selection Program Response
Synchronize logicaldrive:
Recomputes and rewrites theparity data on the drive. You canselect this choice to recomputeparity data for RAID levels 1 and5. This selection does not alterdata on the drive. Thesynchronization process can bedone on multiple logical drives.
Rebuild device: Rebuilds logical drives. Therebuild operation is supportedonly for RAID levels 1 and 5.
Advanced functions: Changes the write policy (the waydata is written to the drive), savesyour configuration information to adiskette, restores it from adiskette, or changes RAIDparameters. This choice alsoallows you to do a low-levelformat.
Drive information: Displays information about theSCSI devices (hard disk,CD-ROM, tape, and so on)connected to the RAID adapter.
Exit: Leaves the Main Menu.
368 PC Server HMM
Undetermined Failing ProcessorDiagnosticsIf the diagnostics identified a processor failure on amultiprocessor computer but could not identify whichprocessor is failing (the FRU replacement is anyprocessor in the “Symptom-to-FRU Index”), do thefollowing:
1. Power-off the computer and remove all of theinstalled processors.
2. Reinstall one of the processors and run thediagnostics.
3. If the processor is good, remove the good processorand follow this procedure for each processorpreviously removed from the computer, until youlocate the defective processor.
4. When you locate the defective processor, replace itand reinstall the remaining processors you removedfrom the computer.
Viewing the RAID ConfigurationBefore creating or changing a disk array, you can look atthe current configuration by selecting View Configurationfrom the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program.
To view the disk-array configuration:
1. Start the RAID configuration program. See “Startingthe RAID Configuration Program” on page 366.
2. Select View configuration . The current disk-arrayconfiguration information appears on the screen.
3. Press Enter to see the stripe order in the BaysOccupied (Ch:Bay) field.
4. Press any key to continue.5. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 369
Locations
Bays
370 PC Server HMM
Connectors (Rear View)
Power Connector
Display Connector
Serial Connectors
Parallel Connector
Expansion Slots
SCSI 2 Connectoreither/or
Keyboard Connector
Mouse Connector
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 371
Controls/Indicators (Front View)
All SubsystemsGood Indicator
Information Panel
Power OK Indicator
Power Enable Indicator
Hard Disk DriveActivity Indicator
DASD Error Indicator
Processor Complex Error Indicator
Power On/Off ButtonPower Enable Switch
Keypad (4 Menu Buttons)
Enter Button
372 PC Server HMM
Hot-Swap Backplane: Front View
LOHI
SCSI ID Jumper: If two backplanes are connected tothe same adapter, one backplane must be set to high andthe other one to low.
Rear View
EDC
Address Jumper
ROM Address Jumper Setting
Notes
� The following settings are for PC Server 720computers only.
� If more than one backplane is installed in thecomputer, each backplane must have a differentROM address setting.
� Do not install a ROM address jumper onbackplanes installed in PC Server 320computers.
Termination (Hot-Swap Back Plane): The hot-swapback plane is automatically terminated. Drives connectedto the hot-swap back plane should not be terminated.
SCSI ROM Address IDJumper Setting
Description
HI = High Assigns SCSI IDs 8 to D tothe backplane
LO = Low Assigns SCSI IDs 0 to 5 tothe backplane
Jumper Position Description
C Address for a backplane installed inBank C (location shown on page 370)
D Address for a backplane installed inBank D (location shown on page 370)
E Address for a backplane installed inBank E (location shown on page 370)
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 373
SCSI-2 Fast/Wide RAID Adapter/A
Channel 1 Channel 2System Status Connectors
Channel 2
SCSI Fast/Wide Adaptec Adapter
J4
External LEDConnector
J4
68-pin Wide InternalSCSI Connector
50-pin InternalSCSI Connector
374 PC Server HMM
System Board.1/ PCI/Micro Channel connectors.2/ PCI-speed-select jumper (J24, CE use only).3/ Power-on-features jumper (JMP4)
.4/ Serial connector .5/ Video port
.6/ Password-write-enable jumper (JMP2) .7/ Parallel port .8/ Pointing-device port .9/ Keyboard port
.1ð/ 3.3V power connector
.11/ Remote-update jumper (J25, CE use only) .12/ Power connector
.13/ 5V power connector
.14/ Bank-select jumper (JMP5)
.15/ Processor board slots
.16/ Power-on-password jumper (JMP1) .17/ Memory/processor slot .18/ Fan connector
.19/ Memory card slot .2ð/ Bus slots
.21/ Bridge card slot
.22/ Diskette-drive cable connector
.23/ Bad-CMOS jumper (J42)
.24/ Operator-panel cable connector
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 0
Note
For default settings, refer to the label located insidethe system.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 375
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThe information in this index should be used with the“Symptom-to-FRU Index (Micro Channel)” on page 26 inthe PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual.
This index contains the following information:
� Corollary error codes (CP, EP, TP, IP, FP and HALT),pages 376 through 384.
� “Micro Channel Error Symptoms/Codes” onpage 384. (See also the additional error symptomsand codes for the Symptom-to-FRU Index (MicroChannel) in the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual.)
� SCSI/non-SCSI error codes (“SCSI/Non-SCSI ErrorCode Format” on page 388)
� PCI error codes/messages (“PCI Error Format andError Codes/Messages” on page 395)
� “Testing PCI Adapter Cards” on page 398� “Accessing/Checking the PCI Device List” on
page 398
Always start with “General Checkout (Micro Channel)” onpage 19 in the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual.
The Symptom-to-FRU Index lists symptoms, errors, andthe possible causes. The most likely cause is listed first.Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to haveavailable when servicing the computer.
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.See Symptom-to-FRU Index (Micro Channel) on page 19in the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual for additionalerror codes.
Note
For IBM devices not supported by this supplement orthe PS/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual, refer to themanual for that device.
Corollary Error CodesCorollary error codes can be displayed on the informationpanel during early portions of the Power-On Self-Test(POST) code. If the system hangs with one of thesecheckpoints displayed, a Halt code may also be displayed,see “Halt Indications (HALT)” on page 383. FRUreplacement is listed with the first FRU being the first itemreplaced and so on.
The types of Corollary Error Codes are:
� “Checkpoint Codes (CP)” on page 377� “Test Error Indication (EP)” on page 379� “Test Point Codes (TP)” on page 380� “Multiprocessor Error Indication (IP and FP Codes)”
on page 382
376 PC Server HMM
� “Halt Indications (HALT)” on page 383
Checkpoint Codes (CP): The followingcheckpoints can be displayed on the information panelduring early portions of the Power-On Self-Test (POST)code. If the system hangs with one of these checkpointsdisplayed, the FRU replacement should be as listed withthe first FRU being the first item and so on.
The checkpoint code information is displayed on theinformation panel in the following format:
CP: 1XX
1XX Checkpoint values as described below.
Notes
1. The checkpoint code will only be displayed by thedefault (lowest slot number ) processor card.Therefore, only the default processor card isbeing tested during this time.
2. If a 2 digit checkpoint code (CP: XX) is displayedwithout a beep symptom, go to “No BeepSymptoms” on page 384 and diagnose the nobeep symptom.
3. If a 2 digit checkpoint code (CP: XX) is displayedwith a beep symptom, go to “Beep Symptoms”on page 385 and diagnose the beep symptom.
CP Code FRU
141Start of COM 1 Test
1. System Board 2. Bridge Card
3. Default Processor Card
142Start of SRAM Test
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card
3. Default Processor Card 4. System Board
143SRAM Test
1. Memory Card2. Default Processor Card
3. System Board
144SRAM Test
1. Memory Card2. Default Processor Card
3. System Board
145SRAM Test
1. Memory Card2. Default Processor Card
3. System Board
146Transition to ProtectedMode
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 377
CP Code FRU
147Port Initialization
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
148Jump to 32-Bit AssemblyCode
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. Memory Card 4. System Board
149Execution of 32-BitProtected Mode
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. Memory Card 4. System Board
14ATransition to 'C' Code
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
14CDefault Processor CardSetup Routines
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
14DAdditional Default ProcessorCard Setup Routines
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
14EAdditional Default ProcessorCard Setup Routines
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
14FAdditional Default ProcessorCard Setup Routines
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
150ROM Checksum
1. System Board 2. Bridge Card
3. Default Processor Card
151L2 Cache Flush on DefaultProcessor Card
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. Memory Card 4. System Board
152Default Processor CardConfiguration
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
153Default Processor Card andBridge Card Initialization
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
378 PC Server HMM
Test Error Indication (EP): In some cases, theearly POST code will detect errors during the running ofthe test cases and display corresponding test errors to theinformation panel. The information is displayed in thefollowing format:
EP: 1XXS
1XX Error values as described below. S Slot number of the card/board issuing the
error.
CP Code FRU
154Bridge DMA Initialization
1. Bridge Card 2. System Board
3. Default Processor Card 4. Memory Card
155Enable Fault/Error Detectionand Enable Interrupts
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
156Enable Default ProcessorCard Parity and L1 Cache
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board 4. Memory Card
157Start of Test Cases
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
158Video Initialization
1. Default ProcessorCard
2. System Board 3. Bridge Card
159Keyboard Initialization
1. Keyboard 2. System Board
15AGlobal Initialization.Try removing the wrap plugfrom the serial port.
1. System Board2. Default Processor Card
EP Code FRU
1043 (104X)Memory Error (First reseatthe memory adapter.)
1. Memory Adapter
106sProcessor Card Error
1. Processor Card
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 379
Test Point Codes (TP): The following list containstest points that can be displayed on the information panelduring early portions of the POST code. If the systemhangs with one of these test points displayed, replace theFRU(s) in the order listed.
Test point information is displayed on the information panelas follows:
TP: 1XXS
1XX Test point values as described below. S Slot number of the card/board issuing the
error.
TP Code FRU
101sReset All
1. Current ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
102sInterrupt Initialization
1. Current ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
103sCache Flush
1. Next Processor Card 2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
104sMemory Sizing
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Current Processor
Card 4. System Board
105sMemory Testing
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Current Processor
Card 4. System Board
106sMemory Testing
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Current Processor
Card 4. System Board
107sMultiprocessor Cache Test.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Any Processor Card 2. System Board 3. Memory Card 4. Bridge Card
108sMemory Testing
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Current Processor
Card 4. System Board
380 PC Server HMM
TP Code FRU
109sLED Blink Test
1. System Board 2. Current Processor
Card 3. Bridge Card
10AsInterrupt Testing.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Current ProcessorCard
2. Bridge Card 3. System Board
4. Any Processor Card
10BsBridge Interrupt Testing
1. Bridge Card 2. Current Processor
Card 3. System Board
10CsMultiprocessor Test.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Any Processor Card 2. System Board 3. Bridge Card
10DsMultiprocessor MemoryTest.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. System Board 4. Bridge Card
10EsMultiprocessor Memory Test
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. System Board 4. Bridge Card
10FsMultiprocessor MemoryTest.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. System Board 4. Bridge Card
110sMultiprocessor MemoryTest.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. System Board 4. Bridge Card
111sMultiprocessor MemoryTest.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. System Board 4. Bridge Card
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 381
Multiprocessor Error Indication (IP and FPCodes): During the early POST code, variousmultiprocessor bus errors might occur; if they do, the earlyPOST code will display error information to the informationpanel in one of the following formats:
IP: 1xx D S xxFP: 1xx D S xx
D Character denoting the type of board/cardissuing the error as follows.
C for Processor CardM for Memory CardB for Bridge Card
S Slot number of the board/card issuing the
error.
If you receive an IP or FP error, do the following.
1. Replace the board/card issuing the error.2. If replacing a FRU does not correct the problem,
reinstall the FRU you removed from the computer;then, continue with the next step.
3. Remove all cards/boards of the same type identifiedby the error code one at a time until you locate thefailing card/board. (Example, if the error codeidentified a memory card and replacing the memorycard in the slot identified by the error code does notcorrect the problem, remove all memory cards one ata time until you locate the failing board)
If the problem remains, replace the FRUs in thefollowing order. a. Memory Card b. Processor Card c. Bridge Card d. System Board
382 PC Server HMM
Halt Indications (HALT): If during the early POSTcode, a fatal error is detected, the system will display a“halting” message with a corresponding error code toindicate the reason for the halt condition. The messagewill be displayed on the information panel in the followingformat:
HALT: XXXxxx
Where “XXX” is the following code number, replace theFRU(s) in the order listed. If present, ignore the last threedigits (xxx).
Note
The exceptions to the above three or six digit errorcode format are the following error codes.
� HALT: 02 � HALT: 107C
Halt Code FRU
02COM 1 failure
1. System Board 2. Bridge Card
101COM 1 failure
1. System Board 2. Bridge Card
3. Default Processor Card
102Memory failure
1. Memory Card 2. System Board
3. Default Processor Card
103Bridge failure
1. Bridge Card2. Default Processor Card
3. System Board
104Processor card failure.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Any Processor Card 2. System Board 3. Bridge Card
105Memory failure
1. Memory Card 2. System Board
3. Default Processor Card
106Unknown POST path.Note: This is a softwareerror and the system shouldbe re-flashed with the latestlevel of the POST code. Ifthe error persists, a faultyprocessor card may be thecause.
1. Processor Card 2. System Board
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 383
Halt Code FRU
107Unexpected interrupt ortrap.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Bridge Card 2. System Board
3. Any Processor Card 4. Memory Card
107CNMI error
1. Processor Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Any remaining
Processor Cards 4. System Board
108Not enough memory found
1. Memory Card2. Default Processor Card
3. System Board
109Memory error
1. Memory Card 2. System Board
3. Default Processor Card
1FFMiscellaneous fatal error.See “Undetermined FailingProcessor Diagnostics” onpage 369.
1. Memory Card2. Any Processor Card
3. Bridge Card 4. System Board
Micro Channel Error Symptoms/Codes
No Beep Symptoms
No Beep Symptom FRU/Action
The computer hangs whileloading the operatingsystem, the CD-ROMdoesn't install during theAdaptec BIOS routines, orthe CD-ROM is notavailable to the operatingsystem.
1. CD-ROM Drive 2. SCSI Cable
Blank display, otherwisecomputer operates normally.(Run the Display Self Test)
1. Display Adapter2. Video Memory (if used)
3. System Board
Memory count hangs duringPOST.
1. System BoardMemory
2. Memory Option (ifinstalled)
3. System Board 4. Processor 5. Bridge Card
No beep, fan runs,power-on indicator is on,and computer hangs duringPOST without message onthe display.See “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. System Board 2. Processor Card 3. Bridge Card 4. Memory Card
384 PC Server HMM
Beep Symptoms
No Beep Symptom FRU/Action
No beep, fan runs,power-on indicator is on,and computer hangs duringPOST with a message onthe display.See “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. System Board 2. Processor Card 3. Bridge Card 4. Power Supply
System slows down 1. Check theprocessors
2. System Board
Beep/Symptom FRU/Action
One beep and the computerhangs.See “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. Any Device orAdapter
One beep and the displayedmemory size is incorrect.
1. Memory Card
Continuous beep and ablank display.(Run the Display Self Test)
1. Display Adapter2. Video Memory (if used)
3. System Board
One long and three shortbeeps.(Run the Display Self Test)
1. Display Adapter2. Video Memory (if used)
3. System Board
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 385
Error Codes: The following codes might appear onthe display and/or the information panel.
Error Code FRU/Action
000095XX(System complex failure)
1. Memory Card 2. Bridge Card 3. Processor Card 4. System Board
000113XX(The first memory card ismissing or not operational.)
1. Memory Card
000114XX 1. Any Adapter 2. System Board
00016400(Memory size changed)
1. Memory Card
00021700(Multi-bit ECC error)
1. Memory Card
00024000000297XX
1. Memory Card
009503XX009505XX009506XX
1. System Board 2. Processor Card 3. Bridge Card 4. Memory Card
01290050, 0129005101290052, 0129005301290054, 0129005501290056
1. System Board 2. Bridge Card 3. Processor Card 4. Memory Card
5. Any PCI Card
01296000(Processor not supported)
1. Replace theProcessor Card
0129910X(Adapter in slot X has aninvalid serial number)
1. Replace the adapterin the slot indicated
013010XX(I2C failed to respond)
1. System Board
01300AXX(Slot LED problem)
1. System Board
01300BXX(Display panel problem)
1. Display Panel2. Power Switch Panel
3. System Board
0210XXXX (Internal bus,size unknown) 0210XXX1 (External bus,size unknown)
1. SCSI Hard Disk Drive2. SCSI Adapter or the
SCSI controller builtinto the system board.
3. SCSI Cable4. SCSI ID Switch (on
some models)
026109XX(Display problem)
1. Display
026111XX(Video adapter problem)
1. Video Adapter
386 PC Server HMM
Error Messages
Error Code FRU/Action
02790XXX, 02791XXX02792XXX, 02793XXX027906XX, 027907XX(Ethernet adapter POSTerror)
1. Check power andreseat adapter.
2. Ethernet PeerMasterServer Adapter
02799XXX(Communications to theEthernet PeerMaster ServerAdapter failed or theadapter failed.)
1. Run Setup and verifythe EthernetPeerMaster ServerAdapterconfiguration.
2. Ethernet PeerMasterServer Adapter
0279XXXX 1. Fast/Wide StreamingRAID Adapter/A(FRU No. 06H3059)
2. System Board3. Signal Pass Through
Card (if installed)
028309XX(Display problem)
1. Display
028310XX(System board videoproblem)
1. System Board
028331XX(System board video)
1. System Board
Error Message FRU/Action
Drive in channel X bay Xdoes not respond.Installation stopped.See “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552.
1. Replace the drive inthe bay indicated.
2. Any PCI Adapter 3. System Board
Controller does not respondto commands; no logicaldrive installed.
1. RAID Adapter 2. System Board
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 387
SCSI/Non-SCSI Error Code FormatThis section contains an explanation of the encoded SCSIand non-SCSI POST error codes and detailed informationabout each code.
Error messages are displayed on the screen as three, four,five, eight, twelve, or thirteen digits. An “X” in an errormessage can be any number. The shorter POST errorsare highlighted in the Symptom-to-FRU Index. Some digitswill represent different information for SCSI errors versusnon-SCSI errors.
The following figure shows which digits display the shorterPOST errors. The figure also defines additional SCSIinformation.RDDDPLSCB QEET│└┬┘│││││ │└┤└─ Test state│ │ │││││ │ └── Error code Extension│ │ │││││ └──── Qualifier│ │ │││││
│ │ ││││└───── Bus (ð=internal 1=external)
│ │ │││└────── Capacity of the device│ │ ││└─────── Slot number of the device│ │ │└──────── LUN (usually ð)│ │ └───────── PUN (SCSI ID #)│ │
│ └─────────── Device Number└───────────── Reserved Digit (usually ð)
Notes
1. Non-IBM device error codes and documentationsupersede this list.
2. Duplicate SCSI ID settings will cause misleadingerror symptoms or messages.
For example, SCSI error code 0210501A0 decodes asfollows:
RDDD Codes for Adapters
Digit Information
0 Reserved digit (usually 0)
210 Device number 210 indicates hard disk
5 SCSI ID assigned is 5
0 Logical Unit Number (not used, usually 0)
1 The adapter is installed in slot 1
A The device capacity is 60MB (A = 60MB)
0 The device is connected to the internal bus
RDDD Device Type or Information
0037 SCSI on the system board
0096 SCSI adapter with cache
388 PC Server HMM
RDDD Codes for Devices
B Codes
QEET 0000 Codes
Refer to this list if the “DDD” indicates an adapter, followedby a QEET of 0000. For example, 01120100 0000.
RDDD Device Type or Information
0112 SCSI adapter without cache
0206 SCSI-2 adapter
RDDD Device Type or Information
0208 Unknown device type
0209 Direct access - removable media, and/or otherthan 512 byte blocks
0210 Direct access - hard disk, 512 byte blocks
0211 Sequential access (tape)
0212 Printer
0213 Processor
0214 Write Once, Read Multiple (W.O.R.M.)
0215 Read only (CD-ROM)
0216 Scanner
0217 Optical memory (read/write optical disk)
0218 Changer (multiple tray CD-ROM)
0219 Communications
B Device Type or Information
0 Dual SCSI adapter (internal bus)
1 Dual SCSI adapter (external bus)
PLSC QEET Information
0100 0000 On systems with NVRAM, SCSI setupdata not located, or the checksum did notverify. On systems without NVRAM(Model 50 for example), setup data mustbe on the 1st hard disk.
0200 0000 Configuration error. No hard disk foundat PUN 6, LUN 0 for 161,162,165 systemerror path. Might be an unsupportedconfiguration.
0300 0000 No space available in extended BIOSdata area for SCSI data table (possiblytoo many adapters installed).
0400 0000 ROM modules not found on adapter(IML-based systems only). Runningsetup might correct it.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 389
QEET Errors (other than 0000)
These are specific “QEET” error codes (preceded by a“DDD” indicating an adapter).
Note: A number in slot “S” indicates an error on theadapter, (or device attached to the adapter) in slot“S.” If “S” is 0, suspect the system board.
PLSC QEET Information
0500 0000 ROM checksum error on second 16Kportion of 32K ROM
0600 0000 ROM access control port error
QEET Information
001x 8032/80188/80C186 ROM test failure
002x Local RAM test failure
003x Bad fuse, or bad termination, or local RAM addressfailure on SCSI adapter if “RDDD” is 0112
004x Internal peripheral test failure
005x Buffer control chip test failure, or LTB failed, (orsystem-board SCSI failed if “RDDD” is 0037)
006x Undefined error condition, or buffer RAM test failureon SCSI adapter if “RDDD” is 0096
007x System interface control chip test failure
008x SCSI internal interface test failed
00Ax SCSI external interface test failed
107x Adapter hardware failure
10Cx Command failed
10Ex Command error (invalid command or parameter)
10Fx Sequencing error
110x Adapter internal error log contains entries.(Reported if no other errors on adapter exist.)
180x Time out
181x Adapter busy error
182x Unexpected interrupt presented by adapter
183x Adapter register test failure
184x Adapter reset failure
185x Adapter buffer test failure (on cached adapters)
186x Adapter reset count expired
187x Adapter registers not cleared on reset
188x Card ID in adapter microcode did not match ID inPOS registers
190x Expected device did not respond
19Yx DMA arbitration level conflict (Y = assignedarbitration level)
220x Adapter hardware error
390 PC Server HMM
QEET Information
221x Global timeout on adapter (device did not respond)
222x Adapter DMA error
223x Adapter buffer defective
224x Command aborted by adapter
301x Invalid parameter in SCB
303x Command not supported
304x Command aborted by system
305x Command rejected (buffer not disabled)
306x Command rejected (Adapter diagnostic failure)
307x Format rejected
308x Assign rejected (command in progress)
309x Assign rejected (device already assigned)
30Ax Command rejected (device not assigned)
30Bx Command rejected (maximum logical blockaddress, LBA, exceeded)
30Cx Command rejected (16-bit card slot address rangeexceeded)
313x Invalid device for command
3FFx Status not returned by adapter
401x Recovered error (not an error condition)
402x Device not ready
403x Device medium error
404x Device hardware error
405x Illegal request for device
406x Device unit attention would not clear
407x Device data protect error
409x Device vendor unique error
40Ax Copy operation aborted by device
40Bx Device command aborted
40Cx Device search data command satisfied
40Dx Device volume overview (residual data remains inbuffer)
40Ex Device mismatch (source data did not matchmedium data)
500x Check condition on device, no sense data returned
501x No index or sector
502x Seek incomplete
503x Write fault
504x Drive not ready
505x Drive not selected
506x No track zero found
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 391
QEET Information
507x Multiple drives selected
508x Logical unit communication failure
509x Head positioning error (track following error)
510x CRC or ECC error on ID field
511x Unrecoverable read error
512x No address mark (ID field)
513x No address mark (data field)
514x Record not found
515x Seek error
516x Data synchronization error
517x Recoverable read (without ECC) error
518x ECC recovered read error
519x Defect list error
51Ax Parameter overrun
51Bx Synchronous transfer error
51Cx Primary defect list not found
51Dx Compare error
520x Invalid command
521x Illegal logical block address (LBA)
522x Illegal function for device type
524x Illegal command block field
525x Invalid LUN
526x Illegal field in parameter list
528x Media changed
529x Power-on or bus device reset occurred (not anerror)
52Ax Mode select parameters changed (not an error)
531x Medium format corrupted
532x Defect spare location unavailable
540x Device RAM failure
541x Data path diagnostic failure
542x Power-on diagnostic failure
543x Message rejected
544x Internal controller error
545x Device was unable to reconnect
547x Interface parity error
548x Initiator detected error
549x Illegal command or command out of sequence error
5F0x Format in progress (not an error)
5F1x Spinup in progress
601x SCSI bus reset occurred
392 PC Server HMM
Q Codes
All error codes with “Q” = 1 are developed usinginformation returned by either an adapter or device. The“Q” value defines the origin of the “EE” code that isreported. Error codes (EE) with “Q” = 4 or 5 might bereported that are not listed here or can actually have adefinition other than that given, depending on the device.
QEET Information
602x SCSI interface fault
610x Selection timeout error (device not available)
611x Unexpected bus free
612x Mandatory SCSI message rejected
613x Invalid SCSI phase sequence
620x Short length record error
702x Device not ready (removable media devices)
704x Device not ready (non-removable media devices)
728x Media changed error would not clear
731x Medium format corrupted (format unit interrupted -format must be issued again)
7F0x Format in progress (prior format unit issued beingcompleted)
7F1x Spinup in progress
“Q” Information
2 Command error field of command complete statusblock returned by the adapter
3 SCSI Status field of the command complete statusblock or command error field values indicatingsoftware problems (< 20H)
4 Sense key value returned by a device
5 Additional sense byte (byte 12) of sense informationfrom device
6 Device error code field of command complete statusblock
7 Device errors not normally considered an error, butconsidered an error based on when the code wasreturned (medium corrupted error on device withnon-removable media)
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 393
Test Status Codes
“T” Information
O Not applicable for error code
A Adapter initialization error)
B Adapter reset
C Adapter register test
D Adapter buffer test phase 1 (on cached adapters)
E Adapter buffer test phase 2 (on cached adapters)
F Adapter buffer test phase 3 (on cached adapters)
G Adapter buffer test phase 4 (on cached adapters)
H Adapter (buffer enable, buffer size, retry, enable)
I Device assignment sequence
J Device not ready (initial unit attention clearing)
K Device reset
L Device starting phase
M Device in process of starting
N Device block size determination
O Device self-test
P Device single block read (LBA)
Q Device double block read (LBA)
S Error occurred after device testing completed
394 PC Server HMM
PCI Error Format and ErrorCodes/Messages
PCI Error Code Format
The following is an explanation of the encoded PCI errorcodes.
Error codes are displayed on the screen as eight orsixteen digits as follows:DDDD DDSð VVVVIIII
│ │││ │ ││ │
└──┬──┘││ └┬─┘└┬─┘
│ ││ │ └─PCI Device ID
│ ││ └─PCI Vendor Number
│ │└──Reserved (usually ð)
│ └─PCI Slot Number (ð = System board)
└─PCI Device Error
For example, PCI error code 005A0210vvvviiii decodes asfollows:
PCI Error Codes
Digit(s) Information
005A 02 PCI device disabled due to Built-in Self Testfailure.
1 The device is in PCI slot number one.
0 Reserved.
vvvv Could be any number (PCI vendor ID).
iiii Could be any number (PCI device ID).
Error Code FRU/Action
00900100vvvviiii(System board PCI devicedoes not respond)
1. System Board
009002s0vvvviiii(PCI device Built-in SelfTest failure)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
009003s0vvvviiii(PCI device resourceallocation failure. Noresource available for therequested memory, I/O, orC0000-DFFFF ROMaddress space.)
1. Run the PCI Utility orthe Micro ChannelChangeConfiguration Utilityto change systemresource allocation.
009004s0vvvviiii(PCI device ROM checksumfailure)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 395
PCI Error Messages
Error Code FRU/Action
009005s0vvvviiii(Unsupported PCI device)
1. Remove theunsupported PCIadapter
009010s0vvvviiii(PCI data parity error)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
009011s0vvvviiii(PCI data parity error)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
009020s0vvvviiii(PCI address parity error)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
009030s0vvvviiii(PCI system error)
1. If S <> 0, replace thePCI adapter.OrIf S = 0, replace thesystem board.
Error Message FRU/Action
PCI device(s) removedsince last power up:PCI vendor ID=xxxx, deviceID=xxxx previously in slot x
1. One or more PCIadd-in devicesappears to have beenremoved since thelast execution ofPOST. This could bedue to a catastrophicfailure of the PCIdevice rather than itsactual physicalremoval.
PCI device(s) added sincelast power up:PCI vendor ID=xxxx, deviceID=xxxx in slot x
1. One or more PCIadd-in devices hasbeen added since thelast execution ofPOST. It may havebeen moved fromanother slot. This isnot an error. Thedevice was enabledand had resourcesassigned.
396 PC Server HMM
Error Message FRU/Action
Unable to assign requestedresources:PCI vendor ID=xxxx, deviceID=xxxx in slot x
1. A requested PCIresource (from thePCI DeviceConfiguration Block)could not beassigned asrequested due to aconflict with anon-PCI device or toa conflict withanother requestedPCI resource.
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 397
Testing PCI Adapter CardsSome, but not all, adapter cards are supplied withdiagnostic tests.
If diagnostics are available:
� Run the appropriate diagnostics for the adaptersuspected of failing.
� If the test fails, or is unable to locate the adapter, theadapter is defective. Replace the adapter and retest.
If diagnostics are not available:
� Use the customer's reported symptom(s) to locate thefailing PCI adapter; then replace it.
� Also see “Accessing/Checking the PCI Device List.”
If multiple PCI adapters are failing:
� Remove all PCI adapters.� Install the adapters one at a time to isolate the failing
adapter.
If isolation to a single adapter is not possible, replace: 1. Bridge Card 2. System Board
Note: Failing PCI adapters may cause the system to“hang” when loading the operating system or diagnostics.If this symptom occurs, remove all non-essential PCIadapters and retest the system to diagnose this type offailure.
Accessing/Checking the PCI Device ListTo access and check the PCI device list, do the following:
1. Access the list:
a. Restart the system from the Reference Diskette.b. From the Main Menu, select Set Configuration .c. From the Set Configuration menu, select View
PCI Device Configuration .
2. Compare the devices listed for each PCI slot withwhat is physically installed in the system.
If an installed device does not appear on the list, youmay have one of the following conditions:
a. The missing device may be defective or requirean additional diagnostic diskette or servicemanual.
b. A defect may have caused the PCI adapter todisappear from the list.
398 PC Server HMM
Parts Listing
12
34
5
67
89 10
11
1213
1415
16
1718
19
202122
23
24
25
26
272829
3031
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 399
Index System Unit (Type 8642)1 Base Frame (2X CD-ROM) 82G3593
Base Frame (4X CD-ROM) 06H86852 Information Display Assembly (LED) 82G3614
Display Panel Support 06H79613 System Board (without Memory 06H1810
and Processor)8MB ECC (X36) Memory SIMM 06H7760
4 I/O Panel Die Cast 06H35735 SCSI Fast/Wide Adaptec Adapter (0Z0 Only) 06H6431
(AHA-2940W)6 SCSI-2 Fast/Wide RAID Adapter 06H3059
(1Z0, 2ZS and 4ZS) 7 Fan 82G3616
8 Fan Mounting Support (without Fans) 82G36189 I/O Flex Plate 06H3574
10 Right Side Door 82G3594Right Side Door Hinges (with Screws) 82G3600
11 Pedestal Wheel (with Axle) 82G360912 470-Watt Power Supply Assembly 06H358913 Processor Card Support 06H868314 PCI Bridge Card 71G069415 512MB Memory Card 71G069616 P54C-100/66MHz Processor Card 71G069217 3-Cards Guide Support 06H8524
4-Cards Guide Support 06H8523 18 Card Guide 82G3604
Adjustable Card Guide Arm 06H8525 19 Pedestal 82G3608
20 Slim-Line CD-ROM Drive (2X) 06H2150CD-ROM Drive (4X) 88G4921
21 2.88MB Diskette Drive 82G188822 DASD Hot-Swap Tray Assembly (Wide) 06H3956
DASD Hot-Swap Backplane Assembly 71G8388DASD Hot-Swap Cam Spring (Shaft and Knob) 06H5059SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable Flex (for 1 drive) 06H6145DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602
23 2GB SCSI Hard Disk Drive 06H3372(2ZS and 4ZS)
24 Front Bezel (with Shield - 2X CD-ROM) 06H7874Front Bezel (with Shield - 4X CD-ROM) 06H8686
25 Keylock (with Keys) 82G3606 26 DASD Door 82G3596
27 IBM Logo (R) 82G360128 5.25-Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer 2X CD-ROM 82G359928 5.25-Inch Drive Bezel with Spacer 4X CD-ROM 06H868429 Control Panel Bezel 82G3607
Slim Bezel (4X CD-ROM) 06H868430 Control Panel Card 06H7097
Speaker (with Bracket) 33F8444Rubber Dome Switch Pad 06H7873
31 CD Storage Tray 06H5060Keyboard (with Cable) 71G4646
Mouse 06H4595 Power Cord 62X1045
Real-Time Clock (with Battery) 82G3620(See “Battery Notice” on page 461.)
400 PC Server HMM
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611 � C2 Spring (1) � EMI Ground Clips (4) � EMI Ground Springs (4) � Lock Pawl (1) � System Board Mounting Clips (2) � Screws (4) � Side Cover Foam Gasket (1)
Cables (Type 8642)
1
2
3
4
5
Index Cables (Type 8642)1 System Status Cable (1X4) 82G36172 Diskette Drive (3X) Signal Cable (with power) 06H34053 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (for 3 drives) 06H6661
(1Z0, 2ZS, and 4ZS)SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable (for 3 drives) (0Z0 Only) 06H6675
4 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable (for 1 drive) 82G3610SCSI-Fast/Wide ID Select Cable 06H3957
5 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable Flex (for 1 drive) 06H6145C2 Cable (with Switch) 82G3612Fan Cable Assembly 06H7870Information Display Cable (2X13) 06H8679Dual Serial Cable Assembly 06H7868
Options (Type 8642)4mm DAT Autoloader 06H754116MB ECC Memory SIMM 06H776132MB ECC Memory SIMM 06H7762220-Watt Power Supply Assembly 06H3237C2 Cable Cover 71G6290Cable Cover Thumbscrew 61G3842DASD Hot-Swap Tray Assembly (Narrow) 71G6292P54C-100/66MHz Processor Card 71G0692Eithernet PeerMaster Quad-BT Adapter 06H4220(with coax cable connector)
Eithernet PeerMaster Quad-B2 Adapter 06H6042(with twisted-pair cable connector)
SCSI PCI Option CD-to-Backplane Cable 06H6876SCSI Backplane to CD-ROM Terminator Cable 06H3751RAID Controller to Backplane Cable 83G3613
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 401
Keyboards (101/102 Key)Keyboards (101/102 Key)
Arabic 1391490 Belgium-Dutch 1391414 Belgium-French 1391526 Bulgarian 1399583 Czech 1399570 Danish 1391407 Dutch 1391511 Finnish 1391411 French 1391402 German 1391403 Greek 1399046 Hebrew 1391408 Hungarian 1399581 Iceland 1391495 Italy 1393395 Latvia 1391406 Norwegian 1391409 Polish 1399580 Portuguese 1391410 Romanian 1399582 Russian-Cyrillic 1399579 Serbian-Cyrillic 1399578 Slovak 1399571 Slovenia/Croatia/Bosnia 1393669
South Africa 1396790 Spanish 1391405 Swedish 1391411 Swiss-French 1391412 Swiss-German 1391412 Turkish 179 8125409 Turkish 440 1393286
U.K. English 1391406U.S. English 06H9743U.S. English (E/ME/A use only) 1396790
402 PC Server HMM
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 1339520 Bulgaria 1339520
Czech Republic 1339520 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 1339520 France 1339520 Germany 1339520 Hungary 1339520 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 1339520 Netherlands 1339520 Norway 1339520 Poland 1339520 Portugal 1339520 Serbia 1339520 Slovakia 1339520
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 1339520 Switzerland 1339520
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 1339520
PC Server 720 - Type 8642 403
SCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure - Type3517
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 407Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 407
Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Manual-Plug Tape Drive (8-Bit, 4-mm) . . . 407
Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Symptom-to-FRU Index Supplement . . . . . . . 416Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 405
Features Important
For additional information about the 3517, refer to the3517 Model 001 SCSI Multi-Storage EnclosureService Guide, SY32-0400.
Media Bays
Two media bays support 8-bit, 4-mm tape drives.
Hot-Swap Bays
Five hot-swap bays support 1.1 gigabyte (GB), 2.2GB, and4.5GB single-ended SCSI-2 disk drives mounted on easilyremovable carriers.
Hot-Swap Carriers
Each carrier contains the following features, as shown atthe bottom of the illustration on page 412.
� A pushbutton power switch that allows power to beremoved from and returned to the disk drive.
� A green light to indicate that power is being suppliedto the disk drive. (The green light will flash if thepower switch on the carrier is pushed off or if thecooling fan is malfunctioning.)
� A yellow light to indicate that the 3517 is connected tothe system and the disk drive is available.
� A latch to lock the disk drive into the hot-swap bay tomaintain connection with the bus. (The carrier islocked into the bus when the latch is in the horizontalposition.)
Power Supply
� Non-autoranging (see Attention on page 416)
� Low voltage (115 volts setting)
90–137 V ac 6.3 Amps 0.76 kVA 378 Watts
� High voltage (230 volts setting)
180–265 V ac
4.0 Amps
0.96 kVA
480 Watts
Servers Supported
The 3517 can be attached to any PC Server that supportsa SCSI-2 adapter.
406 PC Server HMM
Diagnostics and Test InformationIf a problems occurs with the 3517, see “Symptom-to-FRUIndex Supplement” on page 416.
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the SCSI Multi-StorageEnclosure - Type 3517.
� “Address Settings.”� “Specifications” on page 411.
Address SettingsManual-Plug Tape Drive (8-Bit, 4-mm): Twotypes of manual-plug tape drives (8-bit, 4-mm) can beused in the 3517: type 1 and type 2. They can beidentified by the location of the SCSI signal cableconnector on the rear of the drive assembly, as shownunder “Type 1” on page 408 and “Type 2” on page 409.(When viewing the rear of a type-1 tape drive, the SCSIsignal cable connector is located on the top-half of the rearof the drive assembly. When viewing the rear of a type-2tape drive, the SCSI signal cable connector is located onthe bottom-half of the rear of the drive assembly.)
Set the address switches or pins (as applicable) on themanual-plug tape drives before installing the drives in themedia bays. See pages 408 and 409.
Encolsure - Type 3517 407
Type 1
To set the address on a type-1 tape drive:
1. Remove the SCSI bus terminators if they areinstalled.
2. Move the switches on the switch bank, as illustrated.
Manual-PlugTape Drive
SCSI Connector(50 to 68 Pin Interposer)
Switch Bank
OffOn8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
On On Off <---6 <--- Upper Media Bay Position
SCSI BusTerminators
On Off On <---5 <--- Lower Media Bay Position
408 PC Server HMM
Type 2
To set the address on a type-2 tape drive:
1. Remove the SCSI bus terminator jumpers (pins 6and 8).
2. Use the address pin jumpers provided with the tapedrive to connect the upper and lower pins thatcorrespond to the SCSI ID you want to use, asillustrated.
...............................................................................................................................
11
1
SCSI ID Jumpers(Pins 1-3)
Address Pins
Address Pins
Address6 Upper Media
Bay Position
Lower MediaBay Position
Address5
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
}
Encolsure - Type 3517 409
Devices: The following illustration shows the sevendevice addresses for the 3517 storage unit.
DeviceAddress
Media Bays
Hot Swap Bays
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
410 PC Server HMM
Specifications Note
If more than one 3517 is installed, you must leave aminimum space of 2.5 cm (1 in.) between them, and15 cm (6 in.) in the back, to meet coolingrequirements.
Size
� Depth: 483 mm (19 in.) � Height: 407 mm (16 in.) � Width: 197 mm (7.75 in.)
Weight
� Minimum configuration (2 devices): 20 kg (44 lb.)
Note
The weight of the 3517 is between 18 and 32 kg(39.7 and 70.5 lb.). It takes two persons tosafely lift the unit.
Operating Environment
� Air temperature: 16° to 32° C (60.8° to 89.6°F)� Relative Humidity: 20% to 80%� Wet Bulb: 23.0° C (73.4°F) maximum
� Voltage: 115/230 � Maximum altitude: 2135 m (7000 ft)
Electrical Input
� Input voltage – Low range
- Minimum: 90 V ac- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range- Minimum: 180 V ac- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately- Low range input: 0.76 kVA- High range input: 0.96 kVA
Encolsure - Type 3517 411
Locations
Front View
Latch
LatchHandle
Power Switch
Power Switch
Green LightYellow Light
Hot SwapHard Drive
Top Cover
Front Cover
Green Light
Control Panel
43210
HotSwapBays
MediaBay 6
MediaBay 5 Lock
412 PC Server HMM
Rear View
Voltage SelectionSwitch
Power Cord
SystemSCSI Cable
Blank SCSI Panel
Encolsure - Type 3517 413
Internal View
Manual-PlugDevices
Chassis
InternalSCSI Cable
Cable Tie
Screwlock (2X)
To Manual-PlugDevices
Backplane
To Backplane
414 PC Server HMM
Backplane
FanConnector
Backplane
SCSIConnector
12 V PowerConnector
Hot-Swap DriveConnector (5X)
5 V PowerConnector
Encolsure - Type 3517 415
Power SupplyThe power supply is mounted at the top back of the 3517.
Power CordConnector
Mounting &GroundingScrew Holes(4X)
VoltageSelectionSwitch
Screws (2X)LED Cable
To Manual-Plug Devices
To Backplane
Power Switch
Attention
The Voltage Selection Switch is a two-position switchon the power supply. The switch can be set to115 V ac (in USA) or 230 V ac (in some othercountries). The switch must be set to match the inputvoltage at the wall outlet before connecting the powercord. If the 3517 is connected to the wrong level ofvoltage input, the 3517 will not operate and the powersupply can be damaged. The power supply is notautoranging.
Symptom-to-FRU Index SupplementThe information in this supplemental index supports theSCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure (Type 3517).
The index lists symptoms and the possible causes. Themost likely cause is listed first. Use the index to help youdecide which FRUs to have available when servicing thisunit.
416 PC Server HMM
Important
The information in this manual is intended for servicerepresentatives who are trained to repair the IBM 3517SCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure.
Before servicing an IBM product, be sure to review“Safety Information” on page 456.
For additional information, refer to the3517 Model 001 SCSI Multi-Storage EnclosureService Guide, SY32-0400.
Symptom FRU/Action
The green lightfor the powerswitch is noton, and/or thepower supplyfan is notrunning.
1. Verify that the power cord to the3517 has continuity.
2. Verify that the power source hasbeen wired correctly and has thecorrect voltage.
3. Verify that the voltage selectionswitch is set to match the powersource.
4. Verify that the power cord isplugged into the 3517 and thepower source.
5. Verify that the power switch is on.
6. If the problem still exists, replace thepower supply.
The green lightis flashing, andthe yellow lightis off for allhot-swap harddisk drives.
1. Press the power switch on thehot-swap hard disk drive inhot-swap bay 0.
2. If the green light on the hot-swaphard disk drive continues to flash,replace the cooling fan.
3. If the green light on the hot-swaphard disk drive is on and notflashing, press the power switch onthe remaining hot-swap hard diskdrives to turn their green lights on.The green light should not beflashing.
Encolsure - Type 3517 417
Symptom FRU/Action
The green lightfor the powerswitch is on,and the greenlight on allhot-swap harddisk drives isnot flashing,but no devicesare availableto the system.
1. Verify that the system SCSI cable.is correctly connected to the 3517storage unit and the system.
2. Verify that the internal SCSI cableand all power cables to thebackplane are correctly connected.
3. Send the command from the systemto spin-up the drives. Refer to thesystem publications for moreinformation. Remove the followingFRUs; then run the systemdiagnostics after each FRU isreplaced.
a. System SCSI Cable.b. Internal SCSI cable.
c. Backplane.
4. If there is still a problem after all theFRUs have been replaced, one ofthe hot-swap hard disk drives maybe defective.
a. Unseat all of the hot-swap harddisk drives except the one inhot-swap bay 0.
b. Disconnect the internal SCSIcable, if installed, from themanual-plug devices.
c. Send the command from thesystem to spin-up the drives.Refer to the systempublications for moreinformation.
5. If the command is successful, reseatthe next hot-swap hard disk driveand send the command from thesystem to spin-up the drive.
6. Repeat step 5 on page 418 until thefailure symptom returns. Thenremove and replace the FRUs in thefollowing order, and run the systemdiagnostics after each FRU isreplaced.
a. Hot-swap hard disk drivecarrier.
b. Hot-swap hard disk drive.
418 PC Server HMM
Symptom FRU/Action
One hot-swaphard disk driveis not availableto the system.
1. Verify that the hot-swap hard diskdrive carrier cables are correctlyconnected.
2. If the green light on the hot-swaphard disk drive is flashing, press thepower switch on the drive.
3. Send the command from the systemto spin-up the drive. Refer to thesystem publications for moreinformation.
4. If the hot-swap hard disk drive is stillnot available to the system, removeand replace the FRUs in thefollowing order, and run the systemdiagnostics after each FRU isreplaced.
a. Hot-swap hard disk drivecarrier address cable.
b. Hot-swap hard disk drivecarrier.
c. Hot-swap hard disk drive. d. Backplane.
Onemanual-plugdevice is notavailable to thesystem.
1. Verify that all cables are properlyconnected.
2. Send the command from the systemto start the drive.
3. If the manual-plug device is still notavailable to the system, exchangethe FRUs in the following order;then run the system diagnosticsafter each FRU is replaced.
a. Interposer on the manual-plugtape drives.
b. Manual-plug device.c. Internal SCSI cable.
Encolsure - Type 3517 419
Parts Listing
1
2
34
5
6
7
891011
1213
14
15
1617
18
19
420 PC Server HMM
Index SCSI Multi-Storage Enclosure (Type 3517)1 Top Cover Assembly 05H4680
Screws, Top Cover Assembly (4 each) 27H23382 4GB/8GB 4-mm Tape Drive 16G8454
Screws, 4-mm Tape Drive (4 each) 27H23383 SCSI Cable Assembly, Internal 05H4827
Screw-locks, SCSI Cable (2 each) 27H0863 Cable Tie 1159519
4 Backplane Assembly (with 5-bay, 26H9180 hot-swap cage)
Screws, Backplane Assembly (8 each) 27H08405 Control Panel Assembly 26H91916 Blank Media-Bay Panel 06H2187
7 IBM Logo 44H76278 Front Cover Assembly 26H92069 16-Bit Power Carrier, Hot-Swap Hard Disk 06H8631
DriveScrews, Hot-Swap Hard Disk Drive to 1147429
Carrier (4 each)10 16-Bit 1.1GB Hot-Swap Hard Disk Drive 06H8560
16-Bit 2.2GB Hot-Swap Hard Disk Drive 06H856116-Bit 4.5GB Hot-Swap Hard Disk Drive 06H8563
11 Cable, 16-Bit Address, Disk Drive to Carrier 06H8631 12 Latch 26H9207
13 Feet (4 each) 26H9234Screws, Feet (4 each) 49G5445
14 Blank SCSI Panel 27H0862Screws, Blank SCSI Panel (2 each) 27H2338
15 Fan Assembly, includes Isolators and 27H0922 Finger Guard Cable Tie 1159519
16 SCSI Fast/Wide 1X Cable 06H3231SCSI Wide 1X Cable 70G9857
17 Interposer, 2 x 25 to 68 Pin 92F032418 Power Cord (See page 422.)
19 Power Supply 26H9205Screws, Power Supply (4 each) 34H8186Screws, Power Switch (2 each) 34H8186
Cable Tie 1159519Media Kit, 4GB/8GB 4-mm Tape Drive 8191149� 4GB/8GB 4-mm Tape Drive Data Cartridge
(8191160)� 4GB 4-mm Tape Drive Diagnostic Cartridge
(8191146)� 4-mm Tape Drive Cleaning Cartridge
(21F8763)
Encolsure - Type 3517 421
Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 13F9979 Bulgaria 13F9979 Czechoslovakia 13F9979 Denmark 13F9979 Finland 13F9979 France 13F9979 Germany 13F9979 Hungary 13F9979 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 13F9979 Netherlands 13F9979 Norway 13F9979 Poland 13F9979 Portugal 13F9979 Serbia 13F9979 Slovakia 13F9979 South Africa 14F0015 Spain 13F9979 Switzerland 13F9979 Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051 U.S. English 6952301 U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 13F9979
422 PC Server HMM
PC Server Enterprise ExpansionEnclosure - Type 3518
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Diagnostics and Test Information . . . . . . . . 425Additional Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 426
Power-on Self-Test (POST . . . . . . . . . . 426Power-on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Power Supply LED and Button . . . . . . 428Primary Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . 429Optional Power Supply Drive Connector
Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Power Supply Shutdowns . . . . . . . . . 431
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Systems Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434DASD Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Expansion Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 438Hot Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8629) . . . 439
J12 Backplane SCSI ID Jumper Settings . . 440Hot Swap Tray (FRU No. 06H8631, 07H0774) . 441Front Panel LED Status Indicators . . . . . . 442Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
System Board Connections . . . . . . . . 444U-Bolt Security (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . 445
Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Cables (Type 3518) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 423
FeaturesExpansion Bays
� 20 drive bays, 18 of which are hot-swap bays
Options Supported
� Up to 18 slim-high or 9 half-high hot-swap hard disk drives(1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB)
� Tape autoloader� 4/10 GB 3.5 Inch DAT tape drive
� CD-ROM drive
Security Features
� Bolt-down capability� DASD Door lock� Security cover (optional)
Information Panel
� Two 16-character lines� LCD display of diagnostic and status information
Integrated Functions
� LED usability support
Power Supply
� 470-watt with automatic range voltage selection(115-230 V ac)
� Built-in overload and surge protection� Power supply upgrade expansion option
– 220-watt automatic range voltage selection– Built-in overload and surge protection
424 PC Server HMM
Diagnostics and Test InformationThe following is a list of problems and references fordiagnosing the Type 3518 Expansion Enclosure.
Problem Reference
Error Codes/ErrorMessages
“Symptom-to-FRU Index” onpage 446
Hot Swap Drives “Hot Swap Tray (FRU No.06H8631, 07H0774)” onpage 441
Hot Swap Tray LEDindications
“Hot Swap Tray (FRU No.06H8631, 07H0774)” onpage 441
Power Supply Voltages See “Power Supplies” onpage 428
PC Server Type 3518 425
Additional Service InformationThe following information is for the PC Server EnterpriseExpansion Enclosure - Type 3518
� “Power-on Self-Test (POST.” � “Power-on Sequence.”� “Power Supplies” on page 428.� “Specifications” on page 432.� “Systems Supported” on page 433.
Power-on Self-Test (POSTEach time the expansion enclosure is powered on, itperforms a series of tests called the power-on self-test, orPOST. If the tests detect a problem, an error/messageappears on the information panel. If you suspect aproblem or an error/message appears, refer to“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 446.
Power-on Sequence Note
The expansion enclosure can be powered on withoutconnecting it to a server. However, the expansionenclosure must be connected to a server before thedrives installed in the enclosure can be used.
To power-on the expansion enclosure, do the following.
1. Locate the keys; then unlock and open the door onthe front of the expansion enclosure.
2. If the server is powered-on, power it off.3. Lift the transparent Power Enable Switch cover on the
front panel and press the Power Enable Switch; thePower OK indicator will illuminate.
4. Then, press the Power On/Off switch (located justabove the Power Enable Switch). The informationpanel will display IBM 3518.
5. Power-on the server. The power-on self-test (POST)begins.
6. Check the monitor connected to the server. Thescreen displays the IBM logo and a number thatrepresents the amount of available server memory.The server beeps once to indicate that it is workingproperly.
426 PC Server HMM
Notes
1. If you hear more than one beep or no beep,check the monitor and the information panel.
2. If an error message appears on the informationpanel or the expansion enclosure stops runningduring testing or normal operation, see“Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 446.
3. If an error message appears on the monitorscreen, the monitor screen is blank, or the serverstops during normal operation, refer to thediagnostic information for the server.
PC Server Type 3518 427
Power Supplies Attention
Always unplug the power cord and wait two minutesbefore replacing the power supply to give the powersupply capacitors time to discharge.
The expansion tower is shipped with a primary powersupply. An additional or optional power supply can beadded to the computer. Connectors are used to transferthe primary power supply voltages and signals from theprimary power supply to the optional power supply. Thefollowing illustrations show how the two power supplies areconnected.
Attention
When replacing the primary power supply cover plate,rotate the plate 180°. (This will leave an opening forthe primary power supply connector cable thatconnects to the optional power supply.) Failure to doso will cause the power supply connector cable to becrimped when the plate is replaced.
Note
Tabs are located on the side of each power supply tosecure them together.
Power Supply LED and Button: Thepower-good LED and button are located on the side of theprimary power supply button. The LED (when lit) indicatesthat the power supply is good. If the LED fails to come onwhen the computer is powered-on, do the following:
� While observing the LED on the power supply, pressthe power supply button. If the LED fails to light(while you are holding the button in), you may have adefective power supply. If the LED lights when thebutton is pressed, go to “Power Supply Shutdowns”on page 431.
428 PC Server HMM
Primary Power Supply Voltages: If thevoltages are correct and the power supply fan runs, thepower supply is OK.
Connector P1
1 4
Key
Connector P2, P2A
1 4
Key
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
4 4
1 2
+ 4.8+ 4.8
+ 5.25+ 5.25
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
4 4
1 2
+ 3.3+ 3.3
+ 3.5+ 3.5
PC Server Type 3518 429
Connector P3
1 12
Connector P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10
A B C D
Optional Power Supply Drive ConnectorVoltages: If the voltages are correct and the powersupply fan runs, the power supply is OK.
A B C D
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
2 2 2 2
4 5 8 10
+ 11.52+ 11.52- 10.8+ 4.8
+ 12.6+ 12.6- 13.2+ 5.25
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
B B
A D
+ 4.8+ 11.52
+ 5.25+12.6
−Lead Pin
+Lead Pin
V dcMinimum
V dcMaximum
B B
A D
+ 4.8+ 11.52
+ 5.25+12.6
430 PC Server HMM
Power Supply Shutdowns: If the power supplyshuts down, or appears to fail at power-on, you might haveone of the following problems:
� Too many devices are set to start instantly. See“Setting the Motor-Start Jumper” on page 549.
� There are too many large-capacity devices installed(such as hard disk drives). The nominal operatingcurrent of the devices installed collectively exceedsthe available current of the power supply. See the“Personal System/2 Installation Planning” guide (formnumber S41G-2927) for more information.
Also ensure that the fans operate when the machine ispowered on.
Note
Verify that the voltage-select switch (if applicable) isset for the correct voltage.
If the voltages are correct and the Symptom-to-FRU indexdoes not solve the problem, go to “UndeterminedProblems” on page 552
PC Server Type 3518 431
Specifications Size
� With pedestal:– Depth: 635 mm (25 in.)
835 mm (32.8 in.) with cable cover– Height: 635 mm (25 in.)– Width: 247 mm (9.75 in.)
Weight
� Minimum configuration as shipped: 29.1 kg (64 lb)
Environment
� Air temperature– System on: 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 mm (3000 ft.)– System on: 10° to 32° C (50° to 90° F)
Altitude: 914m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)– System off: 10° to 43° C (50° 110° F)
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.) � Humidity
– System on: 8% to 80%– System off: 8% to 80%
� Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Heat Output
� Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units (BTU) perhour
– Minimum configuration: 150 BTU (44 watts)– Maximum configuration: 3600 BTU (1055 watts)
Electrical Input
� Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz is required) � Input voltage
– Low range- Minimum: 90 V ac- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range- Minimum: 180 V ac- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.16 kVA
- Maximum configuration: 1.0 kVA
Total Power Available for Drives
� Nominal operating current allowed:– +5 V dc line: 7.5 A base; 20.5 A with upgrade– +12 V dc line: 4.7 A base; 17.7 A with upgrade
432 PC Server HMM
Systems SupportedThere are two requirements for system units to support thePC Server Enterprise Expansion Enclosure (Type 3518).The requirements are:
1. Code to support up to 4 or more SCSI adapters2. Already support 68 pin SCSI-2 adapters
The systems currently supported are:
� Model 85 � Model 95 � Server 300 � Server 320 � Server 500 � Server 520 � Server 720� Any future servers that meet the above requirements.
PC Server Type 3518 433
Locations� “DASD Door” on page 435� “Expansion Bays” on page 436� “Front Cover” on page 437� “Front Panel Controls” on page 437� “Identification Numbers” on page 438� “Input/Output Connectors” on page 438� “Hot Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8629)” on
page 439� “Hot Swap Tray (FRU No. 06H8631, 07H0774)” on
page 441� “Front Panel LED Status Indicators” on page 442� “Side Cover” on page 443� “System Board” on page 444� “U-Bolt Security (Optional)” on page 445
434 PC Server HMM
DASD Door
PC Server Type 3518 435
Expansion Bays
B1 B2
Open Bays
Bank CBays 1 - 6
Bank DBays 1 - 6
Bank EBays 1 - 6
Open Bays
Bays/Banks Supported Devices
Bays B1 and B2 CD-ROM drives, internal SCSI harddisk drives, or tape drives
Banks C, D, and E Up to 18 SCA, hot-swap, 3.5-inchhard disk drives
436 PC Server HMM
Front Cover
Front Panel Controls
Power On/Off ButtonPower Enable Switch
Enter Button
PC Server Type 3518 437
Identification Numbers
Key Tag
Serial Number
Machine Type/Model
Handle
Input/Output Connectors Note
The following illustration shows the rear view of theType 3518 Expansion Enclosure.
Power Connector
SCSI Connector
SCSI ConnectorKnockouts
438 PC Server HMM
Hot Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8629)
Hot-Swap DriveConnectors
ChainingConnector
SCSI-2Connector
SCSI ID
Power Connectors
System StatusConnector
ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 5
SCSI-2 InputConnector
SCSI-2 Output(Daisy-Chain) Connector
Power Connectors
J2
J9J1
J12
PC Server Type 3518 439
J12 Backplane SCSI ID Jumper Settings:The Backplane SCSI ID Address Jumper, a pin block withfour pairs of pins (J12), is located on the rear of thebackplanes in banks C, D, and E. When two backplanesare daisy-chained in the enclosure, the first backplaneaddress jumper (for example, Bank C) must be set to LO,defining the SCSI IDs as 0 through 5. The secondbackplane (in this example, bank D), must be set to eitherReverse, defining the SCSI IDs as 5 through 0, or HI,defining the SCSI IDs as 8 through D. The default, nojumper installed, is to set the addresses to LO.
If the SCSI adapter supports more than eight SCSI devicesper SCSI channel, the second backplane can be set eitherHI or Reverse. However, if the SCSI adapter supportseight or less SCSI devices per channel, the secondbackplane must be set to Reverse.
The following jumper settings are for SCSI ID jumper J12.
Jumper Position Description
LOJ12
5 7
4 62 8
31
Sets SCSI IDs to low,starting from 0 (bay 1) to5 (bay 6)
LOJ12
5 7
4 62 8
31
Sets SCSI IDs to reverse,starting from 5 (bay 1) to0 (bay 6)
HIJ12
5 7
4 62 8
31
Sets SCSI IDs to high(SCSI IDs 8 to D)
440 PC Server HMM
Hot Swap Tray (FRU No. 06H8631,07H0774)
Notes
1. The following trays are shown with drivesinstalled.
2. Each hot-swap drive installed must have a HotSwap Drive Tray attached.
The Hot Swap Drive Tray for the expansion enclosure hasa small switch that stops the movement of the disk drive.The tray also provides two LEDs (one green and oneamber) to indicate the current state of the drive and tray.The following table summarizes the LED states on thehot-swap tray and their meanings.
LockedPosition
GreenLight
AmberLight
Power-OffSwitch
UnlockedPosition
Green Amber Description
On Off The Drive tray is powered on; thehard disk drive is inactive; and thedrive should not be removed.
Blinking Off The hard disk drive is inactive.The hot-swap drive can beremoved safely.
On On orBlinking
The hard disk drive is in use, andshould not be removed.
Off Off The drive is defective, or no poweris being supplied to the drive. Thehot-swap drive can be removedsafely.
PC Server Type 3518 441
Front Panel LED Status IndicatorsPower OK Indicator
Power Enable Indicator
All SubsystemsGood Indicator
Processor ComplexError Indicator
Information Panel
442 PC Server HMM
Side Cover
PC Server Type 3518 443
System BoardJ7
PCI Slots
ISA Slots
J11
J4 J3 J6 J12 J13
0
12
34
1
System Board Connections
Note
The following slots/connectors on the system boardare not currently supported.
Connector Description Connect To
J3 Power SupplyConnector
P1
J6 Power SupplyConnector
P3
J7 Operator PanelConnector
Operator Panel
J12 Power SupplyConnector
P2
J13 Power SupplyConnector
P2A
Slots/Connectors Description
PCI Slot 0 64 Bit PCI connector
PCI Slots 1 to 4 32 Bit PCI connectors
ISA Slot 1 System Maintenance Adapterfor Reporting Trouble(SMART) ISA Card
J11 C2 Security Connector
444 PC Server HMM
U-Bolt Security (Optional)
PC Server Type 3518 445
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThis index supports the PC Server Enterprise ExpansionEnclosure (Type 3518).
The system management subsystem consists of a mainprocessor that acts as the controller. The controllermonitors the system temperature, the power supply, thefan rotation, and the system voltages. If a non-fatal erroris detected, an error code or error message is displayedon the information panel. Fatal errors are logged to thesystem EEPROM and displayed at the next power-on.
Use this Symptom-to-FRU Index to help you decide whichFRUs to have available when servicing the expansionenclosure.
For information on: Go to:
Power supply problems “Power Supplies” on page 428
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
E700 AC Failure(Power lost while theenclosure was running. Theerror is displayed the nextpower-on.)
1. Power Cord 2. Power Supply
E701 Power Supply(Redundant power supplyindicates a bad condition.Error is non-fatal and canbe cleared by pressing thefront panel Enter button.)
1. Power Supply
E702 5V Failure(Enclosure 5V input is lowor too high. If too low,non-fatal error is written tothe information panel. If tohigh, enclosure is shutdownand the error is displayedthe next power-on.)
1. Power Supply2. System Board (Planar)
703 12V Failure(Enclosure 12V input is lowor too high. If too low,non-fatal error is written tothe information panel. If tohigh, enclosure isshutdowns and the error isdisplayed the nextpower-on.)
1. Power Supply2. System Board (Planar)
446 PC Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action
E704 Fan Failure(In a non-fatal situation , afan has failed. If multiplefans fail, the enclosure isshutdown and the enclosurewill not run until the failureis corrected.)
1. Fan2. System Board (Planar)
E705 Overheat(Power supply overheatedand the enclosure wasshutdown.)
1. Power Supply 2. Fan
3. System Board (Planar)
Blank information panel(If the Power OK indicator ison and the fans are running,operation will probably notbe affected. However, nodiagnostic errors/messageswill be displayed.)
1. Information DisplayCable
2. Information DisplayAssembly
3. System Board (Planar)
No power(Be sure the power cordsand cables are properlyplugged in, the expansionenclosure is properlyenabled and powered on,and the electrical powersource is active.)
1. Power Cord 2. Power Supply
PC Server Type 3518 447
Parts Listings1
23 4
5
6
7 89
10
11
1213
14
15
16
171819
2021
22
448 PC Server HMM
Index System Unit (Type 3518)1 Base Frame (4X CD-ROM) 06H86852 Information Display Assembly 82G3614
Display Panel Support 06H79613 I/O Panel Die Cast 06H8657
(Additional Micro Channel Blanks)4 I/O Flex Plate 06H86275 Fan Mounting Support 82G36186 Right Side Door 82G3594
7 Fan Assembly 82G3616 8 Pedestal Wheel 82G3609
9 470 Watt Power Supply 06H3589220 Watt Power Supply Upgrade 06H3237
10 System Board (Planar) 06H8625 11 Pedestal 82G3608
12 DASD Tray - Hot Swap (Wide) 06H863112 DASD Tray - Hot Swap (Narrow) - Optional 07H0744
(for Option 70G8492)13 Hard Disk Drive - Optional14 Front Bezel with Shield (4X CD-ROM) 06H937915 Keylock with Keys 82G3606
16 DASD Door 82G359617 IBM Logo (Restricted) 82G360118 5.25-Inch Blank Bezel (4X CD-ROM) 06H868419 Diskette Drive Bezel 06H867020 Rubber Dome Switch Pad 06H787321 Control Panel Bezel 82G360722 Control Panel Card Assembly 75H7652
4 mm DAT Autoloader - Optional 06H7514Control Panel Cable Jumper 06H8663DASD Mounting Plate 82G3602Hinges with Screws 82G3600Hot Swap Back Plane Assembly 06H8629Hot Swap Cam Spring, Shaft/Knob 07H0498Miscellaneous Parts Kit 82G3611
� Screws (4 each) � Lock Pawl (1 each) � EMI Ground Clip (4 each) � System Board Mounting Clip (2 each) � C2 Spring (1 each) Miscellaneous Parts Kit (Blackplane) 07H0745
� Jumpers (4 each) � Screws (4 each) � Standoff (4 each)Power Cord (see “Power Cords” on page 451)
PC Server Type 3518 449
Cables (Type 3518)
1
2
3
4
Index Cables (Type 3518)1 System Status Cable 1X4 82G3617
(with 4 connectors)2 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 2X 06H8640
(with 2 connector)3 Hard Disk Drive Power Cable 2X Short 06H8641
(with 2 connectors)4 SCSI-Fast/Wide Cable 1X Short 06H7957
(with 1 connector)C2 Cable with Switch 82G3612Fan Cable Assembly 06H7870Information Display Cable 06H8679Hot Swap Back Plane Chaining - Optional 06H8644DASD ID Cable - Optional 07H1696(for Option No. 96G3055, 94G3057, 94G3052)
DASD ID Cable 06H8664(for Option No. 71G9743)
4X Non-Hot Swap SCSI Cable - Optional 06H8647
450 PC Server HMM
Power Cords Power Cords Arabic 14F0033 Belgium 13F9979 Bulgaria 13F9979
Czech Republic 13F9979 Denmark 13F9997 Finland 13F9979 France 13F9979 Germany 13F9979 Hungary 13F9979 Israel 14F0087 Italy 14F0069 Latvia 13F9979 Netherlands 13F9979 Norway 13F9979 Poland 13F9979 Portugal 13F9979 Serbia 13F9979 Slovakia 13F9979
South Africa 14F0015 Spain 13F9979 Switzerland 13F9979
Switzerland (French/German) 14F0051U.S. English 62X1045
U.K./Ireland 14F0033 Yugoslavia 13F9979
PC Server Type 3518 451
Related Service Information
Important
The service procedures are designed to help youisolate problems. They are written with theassumption that you have model-specific training onall computers, or that are familiar with the computers,functions, terminology, and service informationprovided in this supplement and the PS/2 HardwareMaintenance Manual (part number 83G8990, formnumber S52G-9971-02).
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457Safety Inspection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 458Handling Electrostatic Discharge-Sensitive
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Battery Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Disk Array Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Administration Monitoring Utilities . . . . . . . 462
RAID Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Hard Disk Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . 463Additional Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . 463The RAID Configuration Program Screens . 463
Starting the RAID Configuration Program . . . 465Viewing the RAID Configuration . . . . . . . 468Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . 469
Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 469Defining Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . 470Defining a Hot-Spare Drive . . . . . . . . 474Deleting a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . 476Redefining Space in an Array . . . . . . . 477
Drive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Obtaining Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . 479Bay/Array Selection List . . . . . . . . . . 480Blank Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure . . . . 481Logical and Hard Disk Drive Status Indications 482Replacing a Faulty Drive . . . . . . . . . 482
Advanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Backing Up the Disk-Array Configuration . . 483Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration . . . 484Using the Advanced Functions . . . . . . 485
Changing the Write Policy . . . . . . . . . . 485Formatting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Changing the RAID Parameters . . . . . . . 488
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Ethernet Quad-BT and -B2 PeerMaster Micro
Channel Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 453
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Supported Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Network Operating System Requirements . . . 492IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette 492Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Traditional Adapter Mode . . . . . . . . . 493VNET Switch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . 494Traditional Adapter Mode . . . . . . . . . 495VNET Switch Mode Configurations . . . . 496
VNET Switch Mode: Single VNET . . . 496VNET Switch Mode: Multiple VNETs . . 498VNET Switch Mode: Combined VNETs and
Traditional Nets . . . . . . . . . . . 499Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
10Base-T Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 50010Base2 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Cabling for 10Base-T Networks . . . . . . . . 501Straight-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Cabling for 10Base2 Networks . . . . . . . . 502Symptom-to-FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . 502
LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503NetWare Load-Time Error Messages . . . 504NetWare Run-Time Messages . . . . . . . 507
Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508External SCSI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Termination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 508Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 509Setting SCSI IDs for External Devices . . . . . 511
Hot-Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8388) . . . . 512SCSI ID Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513ROM Address Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . 513Termination (Hot-Swap Back Plane) . . . . . 513
IDE Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . 514Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement (RAID Array) 515Network Adapters Supported (Dual Processor
Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518OS/2 Trap Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
OS/2 Problems during a New Installation . . . 521OS/2 Version Level Check . . . . . . . . . . 521
PC Server Flash/Diagnostics/CMOS AccessInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524SCSI Fast/Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters
(AHA-2940/2940W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525Adapter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526BIOS Startup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 527Booting the Computer from a SCSI Drive . . . 528Computer Hangs, or HOST Adapter Cannot
Always Find the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 529
454 PC Server HMM
Connectivity (Cables/Devices) . . . . . . . . 530Disk Drive Configuration Problems . . . . . . 531LED (AHA-2940/2940W Adapters) . . . . . . 531Other Problems and Solutions . . . . . . . . 532Problems Detected During Installation . . . . . 533SCSISelect Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . 534
SCSISelect Configuration Utility Control Keys 535Starting the SCSISelect Configuration Utility 535
From the BIOS Banner . . . . . . . . 535From the SCSISelect Configuration Utility
Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535SCSISelect Configuration Utility Menus/Options 536Configuration/View Host Adapter Settings
Menu/Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536Self Diagnostics (AHA-2940/2940W Adapters) . 543Termination (Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . 544Termination (AHA-2940/2940W Adapters) . . . 544Termination (for Multiple-Computer Configurations) 545Troubleshooting Checklist — SCSI
(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters) . . . . . . . . 545Using a SCSI Drive as C and Another SCSI Drive
as D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546Using a Standard Drive as C and a SCSI Drive as
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546SCSISelect Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Starting the SCSISelect Utility Program . . . . 547SCSISelect Utility Program Options . . . . . . 547
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings . . . 547SCSI Controller Settings/Description . . . . 548SCSI Disk Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 548Using the Low-Level Format Program . . . 549When To Use the Low-Level Format Program 549Starting the Low-Level Format Program . . 549
Setting the Motor-Start Jumper . . . . . . . . . 549ServerGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550Software/Hardware Mismatch Problems . . . . . 550Undetermined Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552Problem Determination Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 553Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . 555
Related Service Information 455
Safety InformationThe following section contains the safety information thatyou need to be familiar with before servicing an IBMmobile computer.
General SafetyFollow these rules to ensure general safety:
� Observe good housekeeping in the area of themachines during and after maintenance.
� When lifting any heavy object:1. Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.2. Distribute the weight of the object equally
between your feet.3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly
or twist when you attempt to lift.4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg
muscles; this action removes the strain from themuscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift anyobjects that weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) orobjects that you think are too heavy for you.
� Do not perform any action that causes hazards to thecustomer, or that makes the equipment unsafe.
� Before you start the machine, ensure that otherservice representatives and the customer's personnelare not in a hazardous position.
� Place removed covers and other parts in a safeplace, away from all personnel, while you areservicing the machine.
� Keep your tool case away from walk areas so thatother people will not trip over it.
� Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in themoving parts of a machine. Ensure that your sleevesare fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If yourhair is long, fasten it.
� Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothingor fasten it with a nonconductive clip, approximately 8centimeters (3 inches) from the end.
� Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses,or metal fasteners for your clothing.
Remember: Metal objects are good electricalconductors.
� Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering,drilling soldering, cutting wire, attaching springs, usingsolvents, or working in any other conditions that mightbe hazardous to your eyes.
� After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards,labels, and ground wires. Replace any safety devicethat is worn or defective.
� Reinstall all covers correctly before returning themachine to the customer.
456 PC Server HMM
Electrical SafetyObserve the following rules when working on electricalequipment.
Important
Use only approved tools and test equipment. Somehand tools have handles covered with a soft materialthat does not insulate you when working with liveelectrical currents.
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubberfloor mats that contain small conductive fibers todecrease electrostatic discharges. Do not use thistype of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
� Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch,disconnecting switch, or electrical outlet. If anelectrical accident occurs, you can then operate theswitch or unplug the power cord quickly.
� Do not work alone under hazardous conditions ornear equipment that has hazardous voltages.
� Disconnect all power before:– Performing a mechanical inspection– Working near power supplies– Removing or installing main units
� Before you start to work on the machine, unplug thepower cord. If you cannot unplug it, ask the customerto power-off the wall box that supplies power to themachine and to lock the wall box in the off position.
� If you need to work on a machine that has exposedelectrical circuits, observe the following precautions:
– Ensure that another person, familiar with thepower-off controls, is near you.
Remember: Another person must be there toswitch off the power, if necessary.
– Use only one hand when working withpowered-on electrical equipment; keep the otherhand in your pocket or behind your back.
Remember: There must be a complete circuit tocause electrical shock. By observing the aboverule, you may prevent a current from passingthrough your body.
– When using testers, set the controls correctlyand use the approved probe leads andaccessories for that tester.
– Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally,if necessary) to insulate you from grounds suchas metal floor strips and machine frames.
Observe the special safety precautions when youwork with very high voltages; these instructions are inthe safety sections of maintenance information. Useextreme care when measuring high voltages.
Related Service Information 457
� Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical handtools for safe operational condition.
� Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.� Never assume that power has been disconnected
from a circuit. First, check that it has beenpowered-off.
� Always look carefully for possible hazards in yourwork area. Examples of these hazards are moistfloors, nongrounded power extension cables, powersurges, and missing safety grounds.
� Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflectivesurface of a plastic dental mirror. The surface isconductive; such touching can cause personal injuryand machine damage.
� Do not service the following parts with the power onwhen they are removed from their normal operatingplaces in a machine:
– Power supply units – Pumps
– Blowers and fans – Motor generators
and similar units. (This practice ensures correctgrounding of the units.)
� If an electrical accident occurs:– Use caution; do not become a victim
yourself.– Switch off power.– Send another person to get medical aid.
Safety Inspection GuideThe intent of this inspection guide is to assist you inidentifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products.Each machine, as it was designed and built, had requiredsafety items installed to protect users and servicepersonnel from injury. This guide addresses only thoseitems. However, good judgment should be used to identifypotential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBMfeatures or options not covered by this inspection guide.
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determinehow serious the apparent hazard could be and whetheryou can continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards theypresent:
� Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primaryvoltage on the frame can cause serious or fatalelectrical shock).
� Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face orbulging capacitor
� Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missinghardware
458 PC Server HMM
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in achecklist. Begin the checks with the power off, and thepower cord disconnected.
Checklist:
1. Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, orsharp edges).
2. Power-off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.3. Check the power cord for:
a. A third-wire ground connector in good condition.Use a meter to measure third-wire groundcontinuity for 0.1 ohm or less between theexternal ground pin and frame ground.
b. The power cord should be the appropriate typeas specified in the parts listings.
c. Insulation must not be frayed or worn.4. Remove the cover.5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use
good judgment as to the safety of any non-IBMalterations.
6. Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafeconditions, such as metal filings, contamination, wateror other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.8. Check that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws
or rivets) have not been removed or tampered with.
Related Service Information 459
Handling ElectrostaticDischarge-Sensitive DevicesAny computer part containing transistors or integratedcircuits (ICs) should be considered sensitive to electrostaticdischarge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when there is adifference in charge between objects. Protect against ESDdamage by equalizing the charge so that the machine, thepart, the work mat, and the person handling the part are allat the same charge.
Notes:
1. Use product-specific ESD procedures when theyexceed the requirements noted here.
2. Make sure that the ESD protective devices you usehave been certified (ISO 9000) as fully effective.
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:
� Keep the parts in protective packages until they areinserted into the product.
� Avoid contact with other people.� Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to
eliminate static on your body.� Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most
clothing is insulative and retains a charge even whenyou are wearing a wrist strap.
� Use the black side of a grounded work mat to providea static-free work surface. The mat is especiallyuseful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.
� Select a grounding system, such as those listedbelow, to provide protection that meets the specificservice requirement.
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirablebut not required to protect against ESDdamage.
– Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground,ground braid, or green-wire ground.
– Use an ESD common ground or reference pointwhen working on a double-insulated orbattery-operated system. You can use coax orconnector-outside shells on these systems.
– Use the round ground-prong of the AC plug onAC-operated computers.
Grounding RequirementsElectrical grounding of the computer is required foroperator safety and correct system function. Propergrounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by acertified electrician.
460 PC Server HMM
Battery Notice CAUTION
Pour éviter tout risque d'explosion, remplacez la pileselon les instructions du fabricant qui en définit leséquivalences. Ne cherchez pas à la démonter ou à larecharger. Ne l'exposez ni au feu, ni à l'eau. Ne lamettez pas en court-circuit. Pour le reyclage ou lamise au rebut des piles usagées, conformez-vous à laréglementation en vigueur.
Die Batterie kann bei unsachgemäßem Austauschenexplodieren. Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch einegleichwertige, vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterieersetzen. Die Batterie nicht zerlegen, wiederaufladenoder kurzschließen. Die Batterie vor Feuer und Nässeschützen. Bei der Entsorgung der aufladbarenBatterie die örtlichen Richtlinien für Sondermüll sowiedie allgemeinen Sicherheitsbestimmungen beachten.
Se la batteria è sostituita in modo non correttopotrebbe esserci pericolo di esplosione. Siraccomanda di sostituirla con una batteria dello stessotipo o equivalente. Non smontarla, ricaricarla, gettarlanell'acqua o nel fuoco, o cortocircuitarla. Smaltire labatteria secondo la normativa in vigore (DPR 915/82,successive disposizioni e disposizioni locali).
Hay peligro de explosión si la batería se sustituyeincorrectamente. No la desmonte, recargue, eche alfuego o al agua, ni la cortocircuite. Deseche la bateríatal y como disponga la normativa local.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer's instructions. Donot disassemble it, recharge it, throw it into fire orwater, or short-circuit it. Dispose of the battery asrequired by local ordinances or regulations.
Disk Array ConfigurationThe following information contains step-by-step proceduresto perform the tasks necessary to configure, add, change,or delete one or more disk arrays. The hard disk drive indisk-array model comes configured as one logical drive.
� To view the disk-array configuration, go to “Viewingthe RAID Configuration” on page 468.
� To create a disk array, go to “Creating a Disk Array”on page 469.
� To backup the disk-array configuration, see “BackingUp the Disk-Array Configuration” on page 483.
Related Service Information 461
Device DriversThe RAID adapter requires the installation of devicedrivers. See the README file on the SCSI-2 Fast/WidePCI-Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette for detailedinstructions.
If you install an operating system from the ServerGuideCD, the device drivers will be installed automatically. If,however, you install an operating system from diskettes,you will need to install the device drivers. See theREADME file on the RAID Adapter Option Diskette forinstallation instructions.
Administration Monitoring UtilitiesThe RAID Adapter Option Diskette contains RAIDmonitoring utility programs for several operating systemsthat the disk-array system supports. The monitoringprograms are:
� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration and Monitor� OS/2 RAID NetFinity Alert Manager� OS/2 RAID Controller Administration for Novell
NetWare� IBM RAID Controller Administration for Banyan
VINES
These programs include many of the functions contained inthe IBM RAID configuration program, but unlike thatprogram, they reside on top of the operating system anddo not require you to start the program from a startablediskette or from a startable compact disc. You can startthese programs from the active operating system desktop.
Each of these monitoring programs allows you to view theRAID configuration, reconfigure the array when replacing adefunct drive, and perform tuning tasks such as changingthe write policy.
To monitor the drive status with OS/2, NetWare, MicrosoftWindows, and VINES, you must be running theadministration programs. The RAID Adapter OptionDiskette contains files that you must install when you runOS/2, NetWare, or VINES.
See the README file on the RAID Adapter OptionDiskette for installation and use instructions for thesemonitoring utilities. For OS/2 RAID NetFinity AlertManager, also see the ServerGuide CD documentationsupplied with the server.
RAID Technology: RAID is the technology ofgrouping several hard disk drives in a server into an arraythat can be defined as a single logical drive. This logicaldrive then appears to the operating system as a singlephysical drive. This grouping technique greatly enhanceslogical-drive capacity and performance. In addition, if one
462 PC Server HMM
of the hard-disk drives fails (becomes defunct) the systemcontinues to run, with no operator intervention required, atreduced performance.
Hard Disk Drive Capacities: With a server, it isimportant to understand the implications of hard disk drivecapacities and how they influence the way you create diskarrays. Different capacity drives are treated as if they allhave the capacity of the smallest disk drive. Therefore, ifyou have four drives of 1GB, 1GB, 1GB, and 2GB groupedin one disk array, the total capacity of the array is 1GBtimes 4, or 4GB (instead of the 5GB physically available).
Note
The total capacity of the array without protection wouldbe 4GB. With RAID level 5, the usable data capacitywould be 3GB.
Additional Storage Capacity: When hard diskdrives are added to the server, you must configure a newdisk array before the drives can be used. Eitherreconfigure the existing disk array to include the capacityoffered with the added drives, or group the added drivesinto their own array (see “Creating a Disk Array” onpage 469). You also can create an array with only onedrive.
The RAID Configuration Program Screens:When you configure or view the disk array you will beusing the IBM RAID configuration program on the SCSI-2Fast/Wide PCI-Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette(also called the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette). Thefollowing figure is a compilation of many of the IBM RAIDController Disk Array Configuration (also called the IBMRAID configuration program) screens followed by anexplanations of the numbered areas of the figure.
Related Service Information 463
1 2 3
4 65
1. This pop-up allows you to select the RAID level youwant to assign to the logical drive you are defining,and it allows you to select the logical drive size. Youcan enter the size, in megabytes, or you can acceptthe default value shown.
When you need to confirm an action, the Confirmpop-up appears in this area.
2. You can select any of the choices that appear on themenus.
3. The Bay/Array selection list shows each bay in theserver (for each channel) numbered 1 through 7. Theabbreviation in the bay indicates the status of thedrive installed in the bay. Selections are made fromthis list to determine which bays (hard disk drives) arein the arrays. The letter to the right of the bayidentifies the array in which the hard disk drive in thatbay is grouped.
Note
The Channel/Bay/Array area on the screen doesnot reflect the physical configuration of theserver. The hot-swappable hard disk drives arenumbered 1 through 6 (from top to bottom).
4. The Array list indicates the array ID and the size (inmegabytes) of the array. When a drive is beingrebuilt, this area, along with the Logical Drive listarea, shows the progression of the rebuildingprocess.
5. The Logical Drive list identifies the logical drive (forexample, A1), the size of the logical drive, the RAIDlevel assigned to the logical drive, the date it wascreated, and the write policy.
The status of the logical drive is also shown.
464 PC Server HMM
Good means that all is well with the drive.Critical means that you must replace the drive or doa rebuild operation. (You will have received amessage telling you the drive is in a Critical state.)Offline means that the logical drive is unrecoverable;the data in that drive is lost.
When a drive is being rebuilt, this area, along with theArray list area, shows the progression of therebuilding process.
During an initialization process, the Write Policy areadisplays the percent initialized; during asynchronization process, it displays the percentsynchronized.
6. The information area tells you the action you canperform on this screen or pop-up.
Starting the RAID ConfigurationProgramTo start the RAID configuration program, insert the IBMRAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primary diskettedrive and power-on the system. If the system already ispowered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del. From the PC DOSstart-up menu, select Start RAID Configuration Program ,then press Enter .
If you have more than one RAID adapter installed, you willget an adapter selection screen similar to the following;otherwise, the Main Menu appears.
Notes
1. The version numbers and slot numbers on thescreens might be different.
2. The primary diskette drive is the first diskettedrive that the system tries to start from.
Vendor ID : IBM
Model : DFHSS2W 17170014
Version : 6728
Capacity : 2150 MB
Soft Error : 229
Hard Error : 62
Misc : 91
You can select Help from any menu. To return to theprevious screen or to the previous work area of a screen,press Esc . To select a menu item, press the number ofthe item or use the Up Arrow (↑) key or Down Arrow (↓)key to highlight the item, then press Enter .
Related Service Information 465
Select a choice using the Up Arrow ( ) and Down Arrow ( ) keys and press Enter.Press escape to return to previous menu.
Select Configuration Source
1. Flash EEprom as Source2. NVRAM as Source3. NVRAM+POCL as Source4. Hard Disk Drive-HDD as Source5. HDD as Source with Rearrange6. Specific HDD as Source7. Exit
IBM PC ServeRaid Adapter Disk Array Configuration Ver. 1.XX
Adapter Bus: 0 Host: 2 ID = Null Configuration
The Main Menu contains the following choices:
� Help: Select this choice when you need additionalinformation.
� View configuration: Select this choice to see theexisting disk array configuration.
� Create/delete array: Select this choice to define ahot-spare drive, to select the drives for an array youwant to create, or to delete an existing array. TheCreate/delete array screen also has choices fordefining a logical drive and formatting a drive.
Whenever you make changes to the disk-arrayconfiguration and select Exit , the Confirm pop-upwindow will appear. You must select Yes to saveand activate the changes.
466 PC Server HMM
� Initialize/synchronize array: Select this choiceafter creating an array to:
– Set the drive to a predetermined value. Forproper operation of RAID levels 1 and 5, youmust select Initialize/synchronize array. Anydata existing on the drive is overwritten withzeros, and the corresponding parity informationis initialized to the correct value.
You can choose to initialize more than onelogical drive at a time. Also, you can interruptthe initialization process at any time by pressingEsc . Then, you can either restart theinitialization process by pressing Enter , or youcan end the process by pressing Esc again.
– Synchronize logical drive : Select this choiceto recompute and rewrite the parity data on thedrive for RAID levels 1 and 5. This selectiondoes not alter data on the drive. Thesynchronization process can be done on multiplelogical drives.
� Rebuild device: Select this choice to rebuild logicaldrives. The rebuild operation is supported only forRAID levels 1 and 5.
� Advanced functions: Select this choice to changethe write policy (the way data is written to the drive),to save the configuration information to a diskette, torestore it from a diskette, or to change RAIDparameters. This choice also allows you to do alow-level format.
� Drive information: Select this choice to viewinformation about the SCSI devices (hard disk,CD-ROM, tape, and so on) connected to the RAIDadapter.
� Exit: Select this choice to leave the Main Menu.
Related Service Information 467
Viewing the RAID ConfigurationBefore creating or changing a disk array, you can look atthe current configuration by selecting View Configurationfrom the Main Menu of the RAID configuration program.
To view the disk-array configuration:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is powered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
3. Select View configuration . The current disk-arrayconfiguration information appears on the screen.
4. Press Enter to see the stripe order in the BaysOccupied (Ch:Bay) field. In the following example,data for the B array is striped across Channel 1 bay4, Channel 1 bay 5, and Channel 2 bay 1.
5. Press any key to return to the View Configurationscreen.
6. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
468 PC Server HMM
Performing Common TasksThe Create/Delete Array menu of the RAID configurationprogram contains the more common tasks for configuringdisk arrays. The procedures to complete these tasks are.
� “Creating a Disk Array”� “Defining Logical Drives” on page 470� “Defining a Hot-Spare Drive” on page 474� “Deleting a Disk Array” on page 476� “Redefining Space in an Array” on page 477
Creating a Disk Array: You can create disk arraysfrom the existing drives. Later, storage capacity can beadded to the server without disturbing existing data byinstalling additional hard disk drives and creating additionalarrays.
To create a disk array:
1. Insert the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into theprimary diskette drive and power-on the system. Ifthe system already is powered-on, pressCtrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
Note
To create an array using hard disks in an existingarray, refer to “Redefining Space in an Array” onpage 477.
3. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.4. Select Create disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu.
The cursor will be active in the Bay/Array selectionlist.
5. Select each drive you want in the array by using theUp Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) key tohighlight the drive and then pressing Enter . As you
Related Service Information 469
select each drive, the status will change from RDY(Ready) to ONL (Online).
If you change your mind after selecting the drives foran array, you can delete the array (by selectingDelete disk array from the Create/Delete Arraymenu) and then begin again.
6. When you have selected all the drives you want toinclude in the array, press Esc . The cursor willbecome active in the menu.
7. If you have drives you did not use in this array andyou want to create another array, you can do one ofthe following:� Define the logical drive or drives for this array;
then create another array and its logical drives.See “Defining Logical Drives.”
� Create another array now by repeating steps 2through 5 in this procedure; then define logicaldrives for both arrays.
Note
You must define at least one logical drive foreach created array before you can exit fromthe configuration program.
Defining Logical Drives: After you have createdan array, you must define a logical drive. (You cannotleave the RAID configuration program until you define thelogical drives for any created arrays.)
To define a logical drive:
1. Select Define Logical drive from the Create/DeleteArray menu. The following screen appears; thecursor is active in the Array list.
2. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the array you want to define; then press
470 PC Server HMM
Enter . The Select RAID Level pop-up windowappears, and the cursor is active in the window.
Note
The system automatically assigns RAID level 0 toany logical drives defined in an array containingonly one hard disk drive. When this is the case,the Select RAID Level pop-up window will notappear.
If you have only two hard disk drives in the array, theSelect RAID Level pop-up window appears, but RAIDlevel 5 is not selectable because you need at leastthree hard disk drives in an array to assign RAIDlevel 5 to one of the logical drives. You can definemore than one logical drive for the array. The onlyrestriction is that the maximum number of logicaldrives you can define is eight.
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RAID level you want to assign tothese logical drives; then press Enter .
Note
Because the level you assign can influence thespace needed for the drive, you must assign aRAID level before you enter the size of thelogical drive.
The Logical Drive list contains the logical drive ID, thesize of each logical drive, the RAID level youassigned to that logical drive, and the date that thelogical drive was created.
The status of the logical drive also is shown. Goodmeans that all is well with the drive. Critical meansthat you must replace the hard disk drive or do arebuild operation. (You will have received a messagetelling you what has happened to the drive.) Offline
Related Service Information 471
means that the logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata on that drive is lost.
The Logical Drive Size pop-up window shows thespace in the array that is available for logical drives.
4. Type the size, in megabytes, that you want for the
logical drive; then press Enter . A pop-up windowappears asking you to confirm your action.
Information about the new logical drive appears in theLogical Drive list.
Note
The size appearing in the Logical Drive list mightbe different from the size you typed. The size ofa logical drive is determined by a number offactors, but basically the size must be divisible bythe number of drives in the array.
Consider the following scenarios:
Scenario 1:The array consists of three 1GB drives. You assignRAID level 0 (which uses all the drives in the arraywith no parity storage), and type 1ðððMB. Thenumber in the Size (MB) field will be 999, which is thenumber closest to and lower than 1000 that isdivisible by 3.
Scenario 2:The array consists of three 1GB drives, and youassign RAID level 5. Data is striped across all threedrives in the array, but the space equivalent to that ofone drive is used for parity storage. Therefore, if youtype 1ðððMB, the number in the Size (MB) fieldremains 1000 because it is divisible by 2 (drives),which is the space available for data.
If you do not use the entire array for this logical drive,you can create another by assigning either the same
472 PC Server HMM
or a different RAID level for an additional logical drive.You can have as many as eight logical drives amongfour disk arrays.
5. To return to the Create/Delete Array menu, pressEsc . To define more logical drives, repeat steps 1through 5 of this procedure.
6. To leave this screen, select Exit or press Esc . Apop-up window appears asking you to confirm youraction.
7. To save the changes, select Yes. To maintain thedisk-array configuration that was in place before youmade changes, select No.
8. If you are using RAID level 1 or RAID level 5, youmust select Initialize logical drive for properoperation. This sets the drive to a predeterminedstate. Any data existing on the drive is overwrittenwith zeros, and corresponding parity is initialized tothe correct value.
a. Select Initialize/synchronize array from theMain Menu; then select Initialize logical drive .
b. Select the logical drives you want to initializefrom the Logical Drive list by pressing theSpacebar (the selected drives will appearhighlighted). To start the initialization, pressEnter . A pop-up window appears asking you toconfirm your action.
Attention
If you select Yes in the Confirm pop-upwindow, information in the logical drive willbe overwritten with zeros.
c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to initializethis logical drive.
The initialization process begins, and you cansee its progress in the Pct. Int. (PercentInitialized) column of the Logical Drive list.
d. To stop the initialization at any time, press Esc .Then press Esc again to return to the menu, orpress Enter to continue initializing the drive.
9. To back up the disk-array configuration to diskette,you will need a 3.5-inch formatted diskette. To backup the disk-array configuration:
a. Select Advanced functions from the MainMenu.
b. Select Backup config. to diskette .
Follow the instructions on the screen. A pop-upwindow shows the default file name of CONFIG.You can change the file name by typing over thedefault. The Backup program will assign afile-name extension of .dmc.
Related Service Information 473
Defining a Hot-Spare Drive: To define a drive asa hot-spare drive:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is powered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
3. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu. Thefollowing screen appears.
474 PC Server HMM
4. Select Define hot-spare drive . The cursor willbecome active in the Bay/Array selection list.
Note
Only SCSI hard disk drives are shown as RDY,ONL, DDD, OFL, or HSP state. SCSI tape andCD-ROM drives are not shown. They appearwhen you select drive information. Refer to“Bay/Array Selection List” on page 480 for thedrive status meanings.
The numbers shown on the left in the Bay/Arrayselection list area in the previous figure are the bayIDs.
5. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight the RDY (ready) drive you want to defineas the hot spare; then press Enter. The RDYchanges to HSP (hot spare). You can press Enteragain to toggle between HSP and RDY.
6. Press Esc when you have finished. The cursor willbecome active in the Create/Delete Array menu.
Related Service Information 475
7. If you want to create a disk array, go to “Creating aDisk Array” on page 469.
8. If you are finished:a. Select Exit or press Esc . A pop-up window will
appear asking you to confirm your change.
Note
The changes you make are not saved untilyou confirm them by selecting Yes in theConfirm pop-up window.
b. Select No if you do not want the drive youselected to be a hot spare; select Yes to defineit as a hot-spare drive.
c. Back up the disk-array configuration informationto diskette. Refer to “Backing Up the Disk-ArrayConfiguration” on page 483 for instructions.
Deleting a Disk Array: The last array createdmust be the first deleted.
Attention
All the data and programs in the array are lost duringthis procedure. Before proceeding, back up any dataand programs that you want to save.
To delete a disk array:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and turning on the system. If thesystem already is turned on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
3. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.4. Select Delete disk array from the Create/Delete
Array menu. The cursor will be active in the Arraylist.
5. Review the Date Created column in the Logical Drivelist; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or the DownArrow (↓) key to highlight the most recently definedarray.
Attention
All the data and programs in the array will be lostduring this procedure.
6. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up window appears.
476 PC Server HMM
7. If you do not want to delete the array, select No. Todelete the array, select Yes.
Note
To use hard disks from the existing array whencreating a new array, you must confirm thedeletion of the existing array.
If a defunct drive is still in a bay, the status shows a blankbay, as though there is no drive in that bay. When youreplace the drive, the status will show RDY after youreconfigure and select Yes in the Confirm pop-up window.
Note
In some operating systems, deleting an array andassociated logical drives might change the drive lettersassigned to the existing drives.
Redefining Space in an Array: You canredefine space in a disk array in a number of ways. Forexample, you can combine a number of small logicaldrives to create a larger one, or you can redefine theexisting logical drive into several smaller drives. Also, youcan install additional hard disk drives and create a largerlogical drive than was possible with the existing storagecapacity.
One method to redefine space in an array is to change theRAID level assigned to a logical drive. For example, if youassigned RAID level 1 to a logical drive and then decidedyou needed the capacity offered with RAID level 5, youcan use this procedure to replace the existing logical drivewith a logical drive assigned the new RAID level.
To redefine the space in a disk array, first you must deletethe array. The last disk array defined must be the firstdeleted. In all cases, when you delete an array, all thedata and programs in the array are lost.
Related Service Information 477
If you have data and programs that you want to save, theymust be backed up and then restored. You might want touse a high-speed backup device, such as a tape drive, tobackup large amounts of data.
To redefine the space in an array:
1. Back up all data and programs in the array.
2. If needed, install additional hard disk drives.
Refer to the User's Reference for information aboutselecting drive sizes.
Attention
In all cases, when you delete an array, all thedata and programs in the array are lost.
3. Insert the IBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into theprimary diskette drive; then press Ctrl +Alt +Del tostart the RAID configuration program.
4. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
5. Delete the existing array:a. Select Create/delete array from the Main Menu.
The Create/Delete Array menu will disappear.b. Select Delete disk array . The cursor will be
active in the Bay/Array list.c. Review the Logical Drive List Date Created
column; then press the Up Arrow (↑) key or theDown Arrow (↓) key to highlight the mostrecently defined array.
Note
You must delete disk arrays in descendingorder; the last one created must be the firstone deleted.
d. Press Del. The Confirm pop-up windowappears.
Attention
All the data in the array will be lost duringthis procedure. Be sure to back up all dataand programs that you want to save.
e. If you do not want to delete the array, select No.To delete the array, select Yes.
Note
To use the hard disks from the existingarray when creating a new array, you mustconfirm the deletion of the existing array.After you make your selection, the Confirmpop-up window will disappear, and thecursor will be active in the menu.
478 PC Server HMM
6. If you want to define a hot spare drive, refer to“Defining a Hot-Spare Drive” on page 474 forstep-by-step instructions.
7. Create a new disk array and define logical drives.
See “Creating a Disk Array” on page 469 forinstructions on creating a disk array and defininglogical drives.
8. After you have established the new array and logicaldrive or drives, select Initialize/synchronize arrayfrom the Main Menu; then select Initialize logicaldrive to prepare the drives in the array to receivedata. This sets the drive to a predetermined state.Any data existing in the drive is overwritten withzeros, and corresponding parity is initialized to theproper value.
9. Insert a 3.5-inch formatted diskette in the primarydiskette drive, select Advanced functions from theMain Menu; then select Backup config. to diskette .Follow the instructions on the screen.
10. Exit the RAID configuration program by pressing Escor selecting Exit from the Main Menu. A pop-upwindow will appear asking you to confirm your action.
11. Reinstall the operating system and device drivers,then restore the data and programs.
Drive MaintenanceDrive maintenance consists of the following.
� How to obtain drive status information� Results of a hard disk drive failure� Procedure for replacing defunct drives� Procedure for redefining the space in an array by
replacing logical drives
Obtaining Drive Status: To see the ID, capacity,and other information about each of the hard disk drivesattached to the RAID adapter:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID option diskette into the primary diskettedrive and turning on the system. If the systemalready is turned on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; then press Enter .
3. Select Drive information from the Main Menu.
Related Service Information 479
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto highlight each of the drives shown in the Bay/Arrayselection list. As a drive is highlighted, theinformation for that drive appears at the bottom of thescreen.
5. Press Esc to return to the Main Menu.
Note
The status of the hard disk drive determines the statusof the logical drives in the array in which the hard diskis grouped.
Bay/Array Selection List: The status of the drivesin the Bay/Array selection list is defined as follows:
Status Meaning
CDR CD-ROM drive installed.
DDD Defunct. The drive is an online or hot-sparedrive that does not respond to commands. (Ifa RDY drive is defunct or powered down, itshows as an empty bay (a blank status), not aDDD status).
FMT Format. The drive is being reformatted.
HSP Hot spare. The drive will replace a similardrive that becomes defunct in real time. Atthat time, its status changes to ONL, and itsarray association appears.
OFL Offline. The drive is a good drive that hasreplaced a defunct drive in a RAID level 1 orlevel 5 array. It is associated with an array,but does not contain any valid data. The drivestate remains OFL during the rebuild phase.
ONL Online. The drive is part of an array. If thisdrive fails, logical drives defined in the array inwhich this drive is grouped will have a statusof Offline (if the logical drive is assigned RAIDlevel 0 with a good status) or Critical (if the
480 PC Server HMM
logical drive is assigned RAID level 1 or level5 with a good status).
RDY Ready. The drive is recognized by theadapter and is available for definition.
TAP Tape drive installed.
UFM Unformatted. The drive requires a low-levelformat before it can be used in an array.
Blank Status: Any of the following circumstances cancause the status area to be blank:
� No hard disk drive is installed in that bay.� The bay contains a hard disk drive, but the drive is
not inserted correctly.� An array was deleted and a defunct drive is still in the
bay.� A new drive was installed and the configuration
program has not been restarted. (The status willchange to RDY when the RAID configuration programis restarted.)
Results of a Hard Disk Drive Failure:Depending on the circumstances, there can be severalpossible results from a drive failure.
Scenario 1 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is defined that is the same size as
the failed drive.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
level 1, level 5, or a combination of these two levels.
The hot spare will take over immediately.
Note
Hot-spare drive capability does not apply to logicaldrives assigned RAID level 0. Data for logical drivesassigned RAID levels 1 and 5 is not lost, even thoughthe drives function with reduced performance.
Scenario 2 :
� Only one hard disk drive fails.� A hot-spare drive is not defined or is a different size
from the failed drive.� The logical drives in the array are assigned RAID
levels 1, 5, or a combination of these two levels.
No data will be lost, but the system will operate at reducedperformance until the defunct drive is replaced and rebuilt.
Related Service Information 481
Scenario 3 :
If more than one drive in an array fails, all the data is lostin all of the logical drives of the array. For this reason, it isimportant that you replace and rebuild a defunct drive assoon as possible.
Logical and Hard Disk Drive StatusIndications: The status of the hard disk drivedetermines the status of the logical drives in the array inwhich the hard disk is grouped.
� A single hard disk drive failure (indicated by a DDDstatus in the Bay/Array selection list) causes logicaldrives in that array that are assigned levels 1 and 5 tohave a Critical status. Data remains in logical driveswith a Critical status, but you must replace the onedefunct hard disk drive promptly, because if two harddisk drives were to fail, all of the data in the arraywould be lost.
After you install a new hard disk drive, the Replaceprocess changes the drive status from DDD to OFL ifthere is a Critical logical drive. After the Rebuildprocess, the hard disk drive status changes from OFLto ONL.
� A single or multiple hard disk drive failure causeslogical drives in that array that are assigned level 0 tohave an Offline status. Data in logical drives with anOffline status is lost. However, with a multiple diskdrive failure, when the defunct drives are part of thesame array, logical drives in that array will have anOffline status. This means that data is lost in all thelogical drives in that array, regardless of which RAIDlevel is assigned.
Replacing a Faulty Drive: To replace a faultydrive:
Note
The hard disk drive indicator light blinks when thedrive has failed and needs to be replaced (DDD statusonly).
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is powered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu.
If the drive failed while the system was powereddown, a screen appears the next time the system ispowered on showing you which drive is defunct.
3. If the drive is not damaged (for example, it is notinserted correctly):
482 PC Server HMM
a. Power-off the system.b. Correct the problem.
Make sure that the cables to the power supplyand the SCSI-2 controller are connectedcorrectly. Check the SCSI-2 controller, and theSCSI-2 connector on the RAID Adapter.
c. Restart the system.4. If the drive is defunct:
a. Press Y (Yes) to reconfigure the system.b. Press Ctrl +Alt +Del when instructed to restart the
system. The Main Menu appears.
At this point, the drive status indicates DDD.
Attention
Removing the wrong hard disk drive cancause loss of all data in the array.
c. Replace the defunct drive.
d. After you have replaced the drive, press Enter .The system will be reconfigured to include thedrive, and the drive's status will change to OFL.
e. When you see the configuration completionmessage, select Rebuild drive .
f. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓)key to highlight the OFL (offline) drive you wantto rebuild; then press Enter .
Information and status messages about eachstage of the rebuilding process appears on thescreen.
g. When the rebuilding process is completed, pressEsc to return to the Main Menu. The newconfiguration will be saved automatically.
h. Backup the new configuration (see “Backing Upthe Disk-Array Configuration”).
i. Select Exit to end the RAID configurationprogram.
j. Remove the diskette and press Ctrl +Alt +Del torestart the system.
Advanced FunctionsYou can select several utility programs from the AdvancedFunctions menu. These include:
� Back up configuration to diskette� Restore configuration to diskette� Change the write policy� Change the RAID parameters� Format a drive
Backing Up the Disk-Array Configuration:
The RAID adapter maintains a record of the disk-arrayconfiguration information in its electronically erasableprogrammable read-only memory (EEPROM) module. The
Related Service Information 483
disk-array configuration is vital information. To protect thisinformation, back up the information to diskette as soon asyou have completed the tasks. You need a blank,formatted, 3.5-inch diskette.
To back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette:
1. Label a blank diskette “Disk Array ConfigurationBackup,” and date it.
2. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is powered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
3. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu and press Enter .
4. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.5. Select Backup config. to diskette .6. Remove the RAID Adapter Option Diskette from the
drive and insert the blank diskette.7. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Restoring the Disk-Array Configuration: Torestore the disk-array configuration information in the RAIDadapter EEPROM module, use the RAID Adapter OptionDiskette and an up-to-date Disk Array ConfigurationBackup diskette.
Note
Because dynamic changes in the configuration of thedisk array occur due to hot-spare drive replacement orother drive maintenance activity, the configurationbackup information on the diskette might be differentfrom that in the adapter. It is important that you backup the disk-array configuration information frequently,to keep the backup information on the diskette current.
To restore the RAID configuration information:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is powered-on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu and press Enter .
3. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.4. Select Restore config. from diskette .5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
484 PC Server HMM
Using the Advanced Functions: This sectiongives the procedures for using the advanced functions,such as changing the write policy, changing the RAIDparameters, and formatting a drive.
Warnings appear throughout this section to alert you topotential loss of data. Read these warnings carefullybefore answering yes to the confirmations requested bythe RAID configuration program.
Changing the Write PolicyWhen you configure a logical drive, the RAID adapterautomatically sets the write policy to write-through (WT)mode, where the completion status is sent after the data iswritten to the hard disk drive. To improve performance,you can change this write policy to write-back (WB) mode,where the completion status is sent after the data is copiedto cache memory, but before the data is actually written tothe storage device.
Although you gain performance with write-back mode, itcreates a greater risk of losing data due to a power failure.This is because the system gets a completion statusmessage when the data reaches cache memory, butbefore data is actually written to the storage device.
Attention
If you change the write policy to write-back, wait atleast 10 seconds after the last operation before youpower-off the server. It takes that long for the systemto move the data from the cache memory to thestorage device. Failure to follow this practice canresult in lost data.
To change the write policy:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and turning on the system. If thesystem already is turned on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu and press Enter .
3. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.4. Select Change write policy from the Advanced
Functions menu. The cursor will be active in theLogical Drive list.
5. Select the logical drive whose write policy you want tochange. A screen similar to the following appears:
Related Service Information 485
Note
The information might be different from thatshown in this screen.
The Logical Drive list contains the logical drive ID, thesize in megabytes of each logical drive, the RAIDlevel you assigned to that logical drive, and the dateyou created it.
The status of the logical drive is also shown. Goodmeans that all is well with the drive; Critical meansthat you must replace the hard disk drive and rebuildthe logical drive. (You will have received a messagetelling you what has happened to the drive.) Offlinemeans that the logical drive is unrecoverable; thedata in that drive is lost.
6. Locate the Wrt pol (Write Policy) field in the LogicalDrive list.
The write policy is shown as either WT (write-through,which is the default setting) or WB (write-back).
7. Use the Up Arrow (↑) key or the Down Arrow (↓) keyto select the logical drive whose write policy you wantto change.
Attention
If you change the write policy to write-back, waitat least 10 seconds after the last operationbefore you power-off the server. It takes thatlong for the system to move the data from thecache memory to the storage device. Failure tofollow this practice can result in lost data.
8. Press Enter to change the write policy.
Notice that WT changes to WB. You can press Enterto alternate between WT and WB.
9. When you have made your choice, press Esc toreturn to the Advanced Functions menu.
486 PC Server HMM
10. Select Exit . The Confirm pop-up window appearsasking you to confirm your action.
11. To return the setting to its original state, select No.To save the changes, select Yes.
12. Back up the disk-array configuration information todiskette. Refer to “Backing Up the Disk-ArrayConfiguration” on page 483 for more information.
Formatting DrivesYou can perform a low-level format on drives with RDY(ready), OFL (offline), or UNF (unformatted) status.
Note
The Format drive choice on the Advanced Functionsmenu provides a low-level format. If you install a newhard disk drive that requires a standard format, usethe Format command provided by the operatingsystem.
The Format program is provided in the IBM RAIDconfiguration program so that you can perform a low-levelformat on a drive controlled by the RAID adapter.
To perform a low-level format:
1. Start the RAID configuration program by inserting theIBM RAID Adapter Option Diskette into the primarydiskette drive and powering-on the system. If thesystem already is turned on, press Ctrl +Alt +Del.
2. Select Start RAID Configuration Program from thePC DOS start-up menu; the Main Menu appears.
3. Select Advanced functions from the Main Menu.
Note
A low-level format erases all data and programsfrom the hard disk drive. Before proceeding,back up any data and programs that you want tosave.
4. Select Format drive . The low-level format programstarts.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
You can perform a low-level format on more than onedrive at a time.
Related Service Information 487
Changing the RAID ParametersYou can change the RAID parameters using the advancedfunctions by selecting Change RAID parameters .
The default settings are:
� Stripe unit size — 8K
Attention
Once the stripe unit is chosen and data is storedin the logical drives, the stripe unit cannot bechanged without destroying data in the logicaldrives.
The stripe unit size is the amount of data written on agiven disk before writing on the next disk. Tomaximize the overall performance, choose the stripeunit such that the stripe-unit size is close to the sizeof the system I/O request. The default is set to 8Kdata bytes.
� Rebuild priority — Equal
Rebuild priority can be set to equal, high, or low.When the rebuild request is set to equal, the rebuildI/O request and system I/O request get equal priorityin the execution order.
When the rebuild request is set to high, the rebuildI/O request will get a higher priority than a system I/Orequest. In a heavily loaded system (with a high rateof system I/O requests), the high-priority rebuild cansignificantly reduce the disk rebuild time at theexpense of degraded handling of I/O requests.
When the rebuild priority is set to low, the rebuild I/Orequests can execute only if no pending system I/Orequests are pending. In a moderate to heavilyloaded system, low rebuild priority will increase thedisk rebuild time significantly and provide bettersystem performance.
488 PC Server HMM
Note
Rebuild priority can be changed without affectingdata in the logical drives.
� Parity placement — RA
Attention
Once a parity placement scheme is chosen anddata stored, it cannot be changed withoutdestroying data.
Parity placement defines how parity is placed in thedisk array with respect to data. The followingillustration shows both the Left Symmetric (LS) andRight Asymmetric (RA) parity placement in afour-drive disk array. Here AAA, BBB, and CCC arethe data stripe units, and PP0 is the correspondingparity. Similarly DDD, EEE, and FFF are the datastripe units, and PP1 is the corresponding parity.
Right Asymmetric (RA) Left Symmetric (LS)
Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk Disk
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PPð AAA BBB CCC AAA BBB CCC PPð
DDD PP1 EEE FFF EEE FFF PP1 DDD
GGG HHH PP2 III III PP2 GGG HHH
JJJ KKK LLL PP3 PP3 JJJ KKK LLL
In some situations you may want to try LS parityplacement to improve performance. The defaultparity placement is RA.
� Read ahead — On
Normally the IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus RAIDAdapter transfers data from disk to its local cache insteps of stripe-unit size. This provides excellentoverall performance when workloads tend to besequential. However, if the workload is random andsystem I/O requests are smaller than stripe-unit size,reading ahead to the end of the stripe unit will resultin a wasted SCSI bus bandwidth and wasted diskutilization. When read-ahead is set to Off, the size ofdata transfer from the disk to local cache is equal tothe system I/O request size, and no read-ahead tothe end of the stripe unit is performed.
Notes
1. The read-ahead setting can be changed withoutdestroying data in a logical drive.
2. When the configuration is saved on a diskette,the RAID parameters are saved also.
Related Service Information 489
DisplayIf the screen is rolling, replace the display assembly. Ifthat does not correct the problem, replace the systemboard.
If the screen is not rolling, do the following to run thedisplay self-test:
1. Power-off the computer and display.2. Disconnect the display signal cable.3. Power-on the display.4. Turn the brightness and contrast controls clockwise to
their maximum setting.5. Check for the following conditions:
� You should be able to vary the screen intensityby adjusting the contrast and brightness controls.
� The screen should be white or light gray, with ablack margin (test margin) on the screen.
Note
The location of the test margin varies with thetype of display. The test margin might be on thetop, bottom, or one or both sides.
If you do not see any test margin on the screen,replace the display. If there is a test margin on thescreen, replace the system board.
Note
During the first two or three seconds after thedisplay is powered on, the following might occurwhile the display synchronizes with the computer.
� Unusual patterns or characters� Static, crackling, or clicking sounds� A “power-on hum” on larger displays
A noticeable odor might occur on new displays ordisplays recently removed from storage.
These sounds, display patterns, and odors arenormal; do not replace any parts.
If you are unable to correct the problem, go to“Undetermined Problems” on page 552.
Ethernet Quad-BT and -B2 PeerMasterMicro Channel AdaptersThe following service information supports the IBMEithernet Quad-BT (10Base-T) and -B2 (10Base2)PeerMaster Micro Channel adapters.
490 PC Server HMM
Warning
Do not install a PeerMaster adapter in slot 4 of an IBMPS/2 Model 85 or 95 server. Pressure resulting fromcontact with foam mounted to the side panel mightresult in damage to the adapter or computer.
� “Features” on page 492� “Supported Systems” on page 492� “IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette” on
page 492� “Operation Modes” on page 492� “Configuration Examples” on page 494� “Locations” on page 500� “Cabling for 10Base-T Networks” on page 501� “Cabling for 10Base2 Networks” on page 502� “Symptom-to-FRU Index” on page 502� “Parts Listing” on page 508
Related Service Information 491
FeaturesThe IBM Quad-BT or -B2 PeerMaster Micro ChannelAdapters provide the ability to connect your PS/2 MicroChannel server to four separate 10Mbps Ethernet LANsegments. Quad-BT refers to a 10Base-T adapter;Quad-B2 refers to a 10Base2 adapter.
These adapters:
� Perform high performance data transfers between thehost PC and adapter
� Provide high performance data transfers among portson an adapter
� Provide high performance data transfers among portsacross multiple adapters with no host processorintervention
� Provide a cost efficient, high performance means toforward cross-segment traffic without impacting serverperformance
� Perform 64-bit data transfers across the MicroChannel at burst rates of 640Mbps, which equals thetotal bandwidth of 64 Ethernet ports
Supported SystemsThese adapters are type 5 Micro Channel adapters. Youcan install them only in type 5 adapter system-bus slots.(You can install type 5 adapters in IBM PS/2 Models 85and 95 and later-version PS/2 Micro Channel servers.)
Network Operating SystemRequirementsUse one of the following network operating systems:
� OS/2 LAN Server 2.x or 3.x� Novell NetWare 3.1x or 4.0x
IBM PeerMaster Server Adapter OptionDisketteThe PeerMaster Server Adapter Option Diskette is shippedwith the PeerMaster Server Adapter options. The diskettecontains the following:
� Device drivers � Setup programs � NetFinity enablers � Diagnostic programs
Operation ModesMode Description
Traditional Adapter Used when you expect little or nocross-subnetwork traffic.
VNET Switch Used when you need to build subnetsto provide cross-segment traffic.
492 PC Server HMM
Traditional Adapter Mode: When the adapter isoperating in this mode, the drivers for the adapter registereach individual LAN segment with the network operatingsystem (NOS) as a unique subnet. The NOS views theadapter as four separate adapters. Each network segmentmust be configured with a unique network number.
Notes
� Do not externally join (using bridges, switches, orconcentrators) ports of adapters.
� You can configure as many nodes as you need;the adapter places no limit on the number ofnodes per port.
� Ensure that each port is bound to the protocolwith a unique network number.
VNET Switch Mode
Notes
� Do not externally join (using bridges, switches, orconcentrators) ports of adapters that comprise aVNET.
� Nodes can be configured as needed; the adapterplaces no limit on the number of nodes per port.
� Ensure that all ports in a VNET are bound to theprotocol (by way of VNET) with a commonnetwork number.
When the adapter is operating in this mode, multiple LANsegments are registered with the NOS as a single subnet,called a VNET. VNETs are multisegment virtual subnets.
VNETs are made possible by a layer of virtual networksoftware that binds to multiple instances of the adapterLAN driver and registers them with the NOS as a singlesubnet. Multiple PeerMaster adapters may be configuredto interoperate in various ways, such as:
� Traditional subnets� One large VNET� Multiple independent VNETs� Any combination of VNETs and traditional subnets
All physical segments within a VNET are configured to thesame network number. Cross-segment traffic within aVNET is switched by the adapter instead of by the server,allowing the server to be more productive.
External internetworking devices are not required toprovide communication between segments with a VNET.
Related Service Information 493
Configuration Examples
You can use PeerMaster adapters to create a variety ofnetwork configurations. The following examples illustratesome basic network configurations that you can create.Use these examples as guidelines to determine the bestconfiguration for your needs.
ConfigurationExamples
Description(s)
Traditional Adaptermode
An 8-port network with twoPeerMaster adapters configured inthe Traditional Adapter mode, see“Traditional Adapter Mode” onpage 495.
VNET Switchmode
An 8-port network with twoPeerMaster adapters configured inthe VNET Switch mode, see “VNETSwitch Mode: Single VNET” onpage 496. An 8-port network with twoPeerMaster adapters each configuredas an independent VNET, see“VNET Switch Mode: MultipleVNETs” on page 498. An 8-port network with twoPeerMaster adapters, one configuredin the VNET Switch mode and theother in the Traditional Adapter mode,see “VNET Switch Mode:Combined VNETs and TraditionalNets” on page 499.
494 PC Server HMM
Traditional Adapter Mode
This illustration shows:
� A server with two Quad-BT PeerMaster adaptersconfigured in the Traditional Adapter mode.
The network protocol views each LAN segment as aseparate subnet with its own network number.Clients on all ports have direct access to the server.
Note
The same principles apply to Quad-B2configurations; however, concentrator hubs arenot required for 10Base2 operation.
� A configuration of eight separate network numbers.� Curved arrows illustrating the basic flow of
cross-subnet traffic.
The server-based router accepts and forwards allframes that require routing between subnets.
� Software layers illustrated above the adaptersindicating software that is required to route trafficinternally, running on the server.
Cross-subnet traffic, such as traffic from Net 1 to Net 2,must be forwarded by a router. The router can be internalto the server or an external stand-alone device.
The advantage of the Traditional Adapter mode is that arouter restricts cross-subnet traffic to only those datapackets that are uniquely addressed to the target network.The disadvantage of this mode is that serverresponsiveness might be heavily impaired due to theburden of packet routing. This mode should be used onlywhen little or no cross-subnet traffic is expected.
Related Service Information 495
VNET Switch Mode Configurations: Thefollowing information describes three configurations usingthe VNET switch mode.
VNET Switch Mode: Single VNET
This illustration above shows two Quad-BT PeerMasteradapters (Card 1 and Card 2) forming a single VNET.
The adapter provides the functions of a high-performancenetwork adapter combined with the power of an Ethernetswitching hub.
Note
The same principles apply to Quad-B2 configurations;however, concentrator hubs are not required for10Base2 operation.
� All segments configured as Network number 1(Net 1).
� Curved arrows indicating the flow of data acrossports connected by the VNET switch.
496 PC Server HMM
The VNET switch performs all cross-segment traffic and,therefore, server responsiveness is not impaired by heavycross-segment traffic. The adapters perform two types offrame switching: port-to-port and peer-to-peer.
Port-to-port Occurs when the source and destinationports both reside on the same adapter.(The adapter forwards data packetsbetween ports 1 and 2 of adapter 1(Card 1)).
Note
Port-to-port switching is completelytransparent to the servermicroprocessor.
Peer-to-peer Occurs when the source and destinationports reside on separate adapters.Peer-to-peer switching is accomplishedthrough peer data transfers across theMicro Channel bus. (The adaptersforward data packets between port 1 ofadapter 1 (Card 1) and port 1 of adapter 2(Card 2)).
Related Service Information 497
VNET Switch Mode: Multiple VNETs
This illustration above shows:
� A configuration of two network numbers (Net 1 andNet 2).
� An 8-port network with two Quad-BT PeerMasteradapters (Card 1 and Card 2), each configured as anindependent VNET (two VNETs).
Note: The same principles apply to Quad-B2configurations; however, concentrator hubsare not required for 10Base2 operation.
� The curved arrow that passes through the LANdrivers, protocol stacks, and router in the serverrepresents the connection between the two subnets(Net 1 and Net 2). Cross-subnet traffic, such astraffic from Net 1 to Net 2, must be forwarded by arouter. The router can be internal to the server or anexternal stand-alone device.
Each VNET may represent a separate department orworkgroup. The four switched ports within each VNETprovide a multisegment workgroup environment. Isolatingthe two VNETs by way of the server-based router allowsyou to create a separation between the two departments.You can configure the router to permit restricted traffic topass between the departments.
498 PC Server HMM
VNET Switch Mode: Combined VNETs andTraditional Nets
Note
Use this configuration only when you expect little or nocross-VNET traffic.
This illustration above shows:
� A five-subnet network (Net 1, Net 2, Net 3, Net 4, andNet 5) configured as one four-segment VNET(VNET1) on Card 1 and four traditional networks onCard 2.
� A network using PeerMaster adapters.
Note: The same principles apply to Quad-B2configurations; however, hubs are not requiredfor 10Base2 operation.
� Cross-subnet traffic, such as traffic from Net 1 to Net2, must be forwarded by a router. The router can beinternal to the server or an external stand-alonedevice.
This VNET may represent a large department while thetraditional networks may represent small workgroups. Youcan configure the router to restrict traffic betweendepartments.
Related Service Information 499
Locations 10Base-T Adapter
10Base2 Adapter
500 PC Server HMM
Cabling for 10Base-T NetworksTwo types of network cables may be connected to theQuad-BT PeerMaster adapter: straight-through andcrossover.
Note
Use straight-through cables when connecting youradapter to an external 10Base-T concentrator hub.
Straight-Through
Use crossover cables to directly connect your adapter toanother 10Base-T device, such as a workstation, server, oranother adapter. Crossover cables create dedicatedsegments. A dedicated segment is two point-to-pointdevices connected to a dedicated link.
Crossover
Attention
Ensure that you do not externally join ports ofadapters (using bridges, switches, or concentrators).
Related Service Information 501
Cabling for 10Base2 NetworksTo connect any port of the Quad-B2 PeerMaster adapter toa 10Base2 thin Ethernet cable segment. (A thin Ethernetcable segment is the length of the cable between therepeaters.), do the following.
Notes
1. Avoid severe bending of the cable.2. Do not exceed 185 meters (600 feet) of
interconnection without using a signal repeater toattach another network segment.
3. Do not attach more than one Quad-B2PeerMaster 10Base2 port to the same 10Base2network segment.
1. Attach a bayonet connector (BNC) T-connector to theBNC network port at the rear of the computer.
2. Attach the end of the coaxial cable to an open end ofthe T-connector.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to an open end ofthe T-connector at the rear of the next workstation inwhich a 10Base2 is installed; then, continue makingconnections to the rest of the workstations.
4. Attach a 50-ohm cable terminator at each end ofevery segment.
Symptom-to-FRU IndexThe Symptom-to-FRU index contains the followingdiagnostic information:
� LED Indications � Error Codes� NetWare load-time error messages� NetWare run-time messages
LED Indications
Notes
The PeerMaster adapter LED is normally off prior toadapter download, and is normally on after successfuldownload.
LED Indication FRU/Action
.5 seconds ON then .5seconds OFF. Repeatscontinuously.DRAM Failure. DRAMmemory stick may bemissing or loose.
Insert or reseat memory andtry again.
.5 seconds ON then .5seconds OFF. LED flashes3 times, then stays off.POST Failure
Run the adapter diagnosticsto get the exact error andrecommended action.
502 PC Server HMM
LED Indication FRU/Action
.5 second ON then .5second OFF. Flashes 5times, then stays off.Flash Checksum Failure
Replace Flash withprogrammed part.
Error Codes
Error Code FRU/Action
027601S0, 027602S0,027603S0, 027604S0POST Flash Main SectorChecksum Failure
1. 10Base-T Adapter
027605S0, 027606S0,027607S0, 027608S0,027609S0, 027610S0,027611S0, 027612S0Verify proper seating of theDRAM SIMM on theadapter.
1. 10Base-T Adapter
027613S0, 027614S0,027615S0, 027616S0,027617S0, 027618S0,027619S0, 027620S0POST SRAM failure
1. 10Base-T Adapter
027621S0, 027622S0,027623S0, 027624S0,027625S0
1. 10Base-T Adapter
027626S0POST Ethernet Port 1External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 1.
2. 10Base-T Adapter
027627S0POST Ethernet Port 2External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 2.
2. 10Base-T Adapter
027628S0POST Ethernet Port 3External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 3.
2. 10Base-T Adapter
027629S0POST Ethernet Port 4External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 4.
2. 10Base-T Adapter
027630S0, 027631S0,027632S0, 027633S0
1. 10Base-T Adapter
027691S0, 027692S0,027693S0, 027699S0
1. Run Setup and verifythe adapterconfiguration.
2. 10Base-T Adapter
027701S0, 027702S0,027703S0, 027704S0POST Flash Main SectorChecksum Failure
1. 10Base2 Adapter
Related Service Information 503
Error Code FRU/Action
027705S0, 027706S0,027707S0, 027708S0,027709S0, 027710S0,027711S0, 027712S0Verify proper seating of theDRAM SIMM on theadapter.
1. 10Base2 Adapter
027713S0, 027714S0,027715S0, 027716S0,027717S0, 027718S0,027719S0, 027720S0POST SRAM failure
1. 10Base2 Adapter
027721S0, 027722S0,027723S0, 027724S0,027725S0
1. 10Base2 Adapter
027726S0POST Ethernet Port 1External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 1.
2. 10Base2 Adapter
027727S0POST Ethernet Port 2External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 2.
2. 10Base2 Adapter
027728S0POST Ethernet Port 3External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 3.
2. 10Base2 Adapter
027729S0POST Ethernet Port 4External Loopback Failure
1. Verify correct cablingof Port 4.
2. 10Base2 Adapter
027730S0, 027731S0,027732S0, 027733S0
1. 10Base2 Adapter
027791S0, 027792S0,027793S0, 027799S0
1. Run Setup and verifythe adapterconfiguration.
2. 10Base2 Adapter
NetWare Load-Time Error Messages
Error Message FRU/Action
050: The board cannot befoundThe driver assumes that theadapter has not beeninstalled.
1. Verify that theadapter is properlyinstalled.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
058: The board does notrespond ,070: The board has failedThe driver cannotcommunicate with theadapter.
1. Restart the computeror run your systemconfigurationprogram to check forpossible systemconflicts.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
504 PC Server HMM
Error Message FRU/Action
073: Unable to allocatememoryThe driver was not able toallocate sufficient memory toperform its functions.
1. Unload the driver andunnecessary NLMsand try again.
2. Reload the server andtry again.
3. Install additionalmemory into theserver.
110: Unable to downloadthe firmwareThe driver is not able tocommunicate with theadapter.
1. Restart yourcomputer or run thesystem configurationprogram to check forpossible systemconflicts.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
203: Board diags failed tocompleteThe driver is not able tocommunicate with theadapter.
1. Restart yourcomputer or run thesystem configurationprogram to check forpossible systemconflicts.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
301: POST Flash MainSector Checksum Failure ,302: POST was notperformed - board303: POST TestSequencer Internal Failure304: POST Flash BootSector Checksum
1. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
305: POST DRAM SizeDetection FailureThe power unit is down.
1. Verify proper seatingof the DRAM SIMMon the adapter.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
306: POST DRAM Byte(8-bit) Wide Failure307: POST DRAM Short(16-bit) Wide Failure308: POST DRAM Word(32-bit) Wide Failure309: POST DRAM Long(64-bit) Wide Failure310: POST DRAM Trip(96-bit) Wide Failure311: POST DRAM Quad(128-bit) Wide Failure312: POST DRAMAddressability FailureThe power unit is down.
1. Verify proper seatingof the DRAM SIMMon the adapter.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
Related Service Information 505
Error Message FRU/Action
313: SRAM Size DetectionFailure ,314: SRAM Byte (8-bit)Wide Failure ,315: SRAM Short (16 bit)Wide Failure ,316: SRAM Word (32-bit)Wide Failure ,317: SRAM Long (64 bit)Wide Failure ,318: SRAM Trip (96-bit)Wide Failure ,319: SRAM Quad (128-bit)Wide Failure ,320: SRAM AddressabilityFailure ,321: Timer Failure ,322: Port 1 InternalLoopback Failure ,323: Port 2 InternalLoopback Failure ,324: Port 3 InternalLoopback Failure ,325: Port 4 InternalLoopback Failure
1. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
326: Ethernet Port 1External LoopbackFailure ,327: POST Ethernet Port2 External LoopbackFailure ,328: POST Ethernet Port3 External LoopbackFailure ,329: POST Ethernet Port4 External LoopbackFailure
1. Verify correct cablingof the port.
2. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
330: Port 1 DeviceVerification Failure ,331: Port 2 DeviceVerification Failure ,332: Port 3 DeviceVerification Failure ,333: Port 4 DeviceVerification Failure
1. 10Base-T or 10Base2Adapter
506 PC Server HMM
NetWare Run-Time Messages: It is possiblethat an Unrecoverable, or recoverable, error might occurduring normal operation of the adapter. The followingtable describes the run-time errors that might be displayed.
Recoverable Errors and Warnings
Error Message FRU/Action
58: The board does notrespond ,110: Unable to downloadthe firmware ,111: Invalid PipeCommand ,112: The board watchdogfailed ,113: Adapter resetting...please waitThese messages indicatethat errors have occurredduring the recovery process.The driver will attempt torecover control of theadapter at periodic intervals.
1. If the driver is notable to recover fromany of these errorsafter several minutes,replace the 10Base-Tor 10Base2 adapter.
229: The adapter alertcondition has beencorrectedThis message indicates thesuccessful recovery fromone of the above run-timeerror conditions.
1. N/A
388: Ethernet Media Port1 Tx Carrier Sense Errors,check your cable ,389: Ethernet Media Port2 Tx Carrier Sense Errors,check your cable ,390: Ethernet Media Port3 Tx Carrier Sense Errors,check your cable ,391: Ethernet Media Port4 Tx Carrier Sense Errors,check your cable
1. Check cables,adapter cables, orconcentrator.
395: Ethernet Media Port1 Tx Carrier Sense Errorscorrected ,396: Ethernet Media Port2 Tx Carrier Sense Errorscorrected ,397: Ethernet Media Port3 Tx Carrier Sense Errorscorrected ,398: Ethernet Media Port4 Tx Carrier Sense ErrorscorrectedProblem is solved.
1. N/A
Related Service Information 507
Unrecoverable Errors
If you receive an error that is not described in thepreceding error-message lists, you might have anUnrecoverable (fatal) error. The error message indicatesthat the adapter has experienced an Unrecoverablerun-time error.
To make the adapter functional, unload the drivers, thenreload them. If unloading and reloading the drivers doesnot make the adapter functional, restart the computer andtry again.
If the above procedures do not correct the problem,replace the 10Base-T or 10Base2 adapter.
Parts Listing
Quad-BT (10Base-T) PeerMaster MicroChannel Adapter
06H4220
Quad-B2 (10Base2) PeerMaster Micro ChannelAdapter
06H6042
Quad-BT and Quad-B2 Option Diskette 06H6380
External SCSI Devices Note
You cannot use both internal connectors on theSCSI-2 adapter and also use the external connector.For disk-array models with the SCSI-2 Fast/WidePCI-Bus Adapter, you cannot use the internal channel1 connector and the external connector at the sametime. If you intend to use the external connector,connect internal SCSI-2 devices to the internalchannel 2 connector. See the following figure.
ExternalChannel 1
InternalChannel 1
InternalChannel 2
Termination RequirementsThe requirements for terminating external SCSI devicesare:
� If you attach both internal and external SCSI devices,you must terminate the last internal device and thelast external device. For non-disk-array models, youmust also change the termination setting of the
508 PC Server HMM
SCSI-2 adapter in the SCSISelect utility program, asdescribed in “SCSISelect Utility Program” onpage 547, so that the SCSI-2 adapter is no longerterminated.
� If you attach only external devices to the SCSI-2adapter, you must terminate the last device on thecable. If you install only one external device, it mustbe terminated. Since the SCSI-2 adapter is alreadyterminated, do not change the termination setting.
Cabling RequirementsBefore you install external SCSI devices, you must havethe correct external SCSI cables. See Table 4 onpage 510 for information on cable lengths. The cablesmust have the proper connector for the SCSI-2 adapter onone end, and the proper connector for the first externaldevice on the other end.
The SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus adapter can support a totalof 15 devices and the SCSI-2 PCI-Bus RAID adapter cansupport a total of 14 devices, provided that you do notexceed the maximum cable lengths listed in Table 4 onpage 510.
If you are using a SCSI data transfer rate greater than5MB per second, the maximum length of the SCSI bus(cable) must not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet). If you areusing a SCSI data transfer rate of 5MB per second orslower, the maximum length of the SCSI bus cable mustnot exceed 6 meters (19.7 feet). These lengths apply tothe combined lengths of the internal and external cables.Adhering to these standards ensures that the serveroperates properly.
Related Service Information 509
The following table shows the maximum cable lengths forconnecting SCSI devices, based on data-transmissionrates.
Note
The maximum cable length for an external cable isdetermined by subtracting the length of the internalcable being used from the maximum length of SCSIcable that can be used based on the speed of thedata transfer.
Table 4. Maximum External SCSI Cable Lengths
5MB Per Second or Slower Data Transmission Rates
Note
Maximum cable length − internal cable length =external cable length.
� Maximum Length of SCSI cable = 6 meters (19.7 ft.)
Length of 4-drop, SCSI narrow cable = 1 meter (3.3 ft.)
Length of 7-drop, SCSI Fast/Wide cable = 1.5 meters(4.9 ft.)
� When a narrow internal cable is used, the maximumlength of the SCSI external cable = 5 meters (16.4 ft.)
6 meters − 1 meter = 5 meters, or
19.7 ft. − 3.3 ft. = 16.4 ft.� When a Fast/Wide internal cable is used, the
maximum length of the SCSI external cable = 4.5meters (14.8 ft.)
6 meters − 1.5 meter = 4.5 meters, or
19.7 ft. − 4.9 ft. = 14.8 ft.
Greater Than 5MB Per Second Data Transmission Rate
Note
Maximum cable length − internal cable length = externalcable length.
� Maximum Length of SCSI cable = 3 meters (9.8 ft.)
Length of 4-drop, SCSI narrow cable = 1 meter (3.3 ft.)
Length of 7-drop, SCSI Fast/Wide cable = 1.5 meters(4.9 ft.)
� When a narrow internal cable is used, the maximumlength of the SCSI external cable = 2 meters (6.5 ft.)
3 meters − 1 meter = 2 meters, or
9.8 ft. − 3.3 ft. = 6.5 ft.� When a Fast/Wide internal cable is used, the
maximum length of the SCSI external cable = 1.5meters (4.9 ft.)
3 meters − 1.5 meter = 1.5 meters, or
9.8 ft. − 4.9 ft. = 4.9 ft.
510 PC Server HMM
Setting SCSI IDs for External DevicesThe internal channel connector (you can only use one ofthe two internal channel connectors) and the externalchannel connector on the SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-BusAdapter accept SCSI IDs from 0 through 7. Each deviceattached to the external channel connector must have aunique SCSI ID and each device attached to the internalchannel connector must have a unique SCSI ID.
For example, you can have a SCSI ID of 0 on a deviceattached to the channel 1 connector and a SCSI ID of 0 ona device attached to the channel 2 connector of the sameSCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI-Bus Adapter. However, you cannothave a SCSI ID of 0 on two devices attached to the samechannel connector.
Note
Read the README file on the SCSI-2 Fast/WidePCI-Bus Adapter Configuration Option Diskette forupdated information. Select Option Diskette from thefirst menu screen.
Related Service Information 511
The following table shows an example of using oneinternal and one external channel on the RAID adapter.Channel 2 is connected to bank A and Channel 1 isattached to an external DASD storage enclosure. Refer tothe documentation supplied with the storage enclosure forphysical locations.
Table 5. One Internal and One External Channel Mapping
You must set a unique SCSI ID for each external SCSIdevice connected to the SCSI-2 Fast/Wide PCI Adapter.Therefore, do not set the SCSI IDs for external devices tothe values that you use for internal devices. Refer to theinstructions supplied with the SCSI devices for moreinformation about setting a SCSI ID. The default ID for theSCSI-2 adapter is 7. The ID for the preinstalled CD-ROMdrive is 3 on non-disk-array models, and 6 on disk-arraymodels. If the disk-array server was supplied with apreinstalled hard disk drive in bay 1, the ID is 0.
Note
If you install a second SCSI-2 adapter, you can usethe same SCSI IDs that you use for the preinstalledSCSI-2 adapter.
DisplayedChannelNumber
DisplayedBayNumber
Bank andBayPhysicalLocation
SCSI ID
1 1 External 0 1 2 External 1 1 3 External 2 1 4 External 3 1 5 External 4 1 6 External 5 2 1 A1 0 2 2 A2 1 2 3 A3 2 2 4 A4 3 2 5 A5 4 2 6 A6 5 2 7 (CD-ROM) 6
Hot-Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8388)Front View
LOHI
512 PC Server HMM
SCSI ID JumperIf two backplanes are connected to the same adapter, onebackplane must be set to high and the other one to low.
Rear View
EDC
Address Jumper
SCSI ROM Address IDJumper Setting
Description
HI = High Assigns SCSI IDs 8 to D tothe backplane
LO = Low Assigns SCSI IDs 0 to 5 tothe backplane
ROM Address Jumper Setting Notes
� If more than one backplane is installed in thecomputer, each backplane must have a differentROM address setting.
� Do not install a ROM address jumper onbackplanes installed in PC Server 320computers.
� To identify the location for the backplane jumper,see “Hot-Swap Backplane (FRU No. 06H8388)”on page 512.
Jumper Position Description
C Address for a backplane installed inBank C.
D Address for a backplane installed inBank D.
E Address for a backplane installed inBank E
Termination (Hot-Swap Back Plane)The hot-swap back plane is automatically terminated.Drives connected to the hot-swap back plane should notbe terminated.
IDE Controllers Note
This information applies to non-Micro Channelcomputers.
Related Service Information 513
Some severs have an IDE controller on the system board.You can connect two drives to the IDE controller onnon-disk-array models, and one drive to the IDE controlleron disk-array models. If you plan to do this, you mustpurchase an IDE cable.
The IDE controller is for low-speed devices, such as tapedrives, but you can connect hard disk drives.
When you connect two drives to the IDE controller, onedrive is the primary (master), and the other is thesecondary or alternate (subordinate). To set the jumpersto the secondary mode, follow the instructions in thedocumentation supplied with the drives.
Installing an Uninterruptible PowerSupplyA 9-pin, serial-port cable is supplied with the server. Youcan use this cable to attach an American PowerConversion (APC) uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
After the UPS is installed, the software support must beloaded on the server. To do this refer to the ServerGuideCD documentation.
514 PC Server HMM
Keyboard Note
If a mouse or other pointing device is attached,remove it to see if the error symptom goes away. Ifthe symptom goes away, the mouse or pointing deviceis defective.
001
– Power-off the computer.– Disconnect the keyboard cable from the system unit.– Power-on the computer and check the keyboard cable
connector on the system unit for the voltages shown.All voltages are ± 5%.
Pin123456
Voltage (Vdc)+5 .0Not UsedGround+5 .0+5 .0Not Used 1
6
2
345
ARE THE VOLTAGES CORRECT?Yes No
002
Replace the system board.
003
On keyboards with a detachable cable, replace the cable.If the problem remains or if the cable is permanentlyattached to the keyboard, replace the keyboard. If theproblem remains, replace the system board.
Multiple Fixed Disk Drive Replacement(RAID Array)Use the following procedure for fixed disk replacementunder 8641 ECA002, which provides for the replacementof specific 2.25 GB fixed disk drives. Refer to RETAINrecord # H13646 for important additional information. Thisprocess may also be used any time multiple fixed disks arebeing replaced in a RAID Array.
Related Service Information 515
Important
1. Keeping track of which drives are located inwhich bays.
2. Have a backup copy of the current RAIDconfiguration.
3. The drives might have been swapped multipletimes. Always inspect the connectors fordamage.
4. If the fixed disks are being replaced due tosuspected STICTION problems (the drive head isbound to the drive disk), the main Idea is not topower-off the server . If the IBM F/WStreaming RAID Adapter Option Diskette is atversion 2.3, it is strongly recommended thatversion 2.22. be obtained and used during thisprocedure. Version 2.3 turns off all the fixeddisks the array during the rebuild process. Thiswill expose the remaining drives to possiblestiction. Use version 2.3 after all drives havebeen replaced.
1. Make a Chart of Bays 1 through 6 and write in eachbay the original disk drive Serial Number and the Newdisk drive serial number for that particular bay.
2. While still installed in the system, place stickers onthe drives indicating what bays they are in. Do thesame to the new drives once they are installed.
3. Insert the IBM F/W Streaming RAID Adapter OptionDiskette Version 2.22 into the default diskette drive(Do not use Version 2.3)
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to soft boot the system; then,select “Advanced Options.”
5. Select “Backup Configuration to Diskette” from thismenu.
6. Insert a blank diskette into drive A and put in afilename for this backup. The default filename is“config.” If you use the same backup diskette formore than one system, be sure to give each system adifferent filename and keep track of the specificfilenames.
7. Exit the “Advanced Options” menu; then, select “ViewConfiguration” from the “Main Menu.”
8. If applicable, identify which bay contains the hot sparedrive.
9. Pull the Hot Spare drive out of its bay; then, exit outof “View Configuration” and the “Main Menu.”
10. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del When prompted, press Y toupdate the configuration with the HSP bay as “DDD.”
11. You are now ready to pull out the first drive to bereplaced. The first drive to replace should be thedrive suspected of having the highest probability ofstiction. If there is not a SUSPECT drive, thenchoose an order you would like to replace them in,
516 PC Server HMM
such as Bays 1, 2, 3, 4,etc. Just remember thereplacement order. Check off the bays on your chartafter each drive has been successfully replaced.
Note
Remember, the hot spare drive is pulled out firstand is left out during replacement/rebuilding ofthe other drives. It then becomes the last drivereplaced and its status turns to HSP. The hotspare doesn't require rebuilding (it's a spare).
12. In the order you have chosen, do the following foreach drive being replaced.
a. Pull out the drive and reboot the RAID SupportDiskette. "Press Y to update configuration asDDD.
b. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to reboot the system.c. Install the new drive into the bay.d. Select “Rebuild Drive” from the “Main Menu”;
then, select “Replace Drive.”e. Highlight the correct DDD Drive in the bay you
are replacing. The system will start the drive.After starting successfully, the drive status willchange from DDD to OFL.
f. Select “Rebuild Drive” from the “Rebuild Menu”(The “Rebuild Menu” is a selection on the “MainMenu.”)
g. Highlight the correct OFL Drive in the bay youare rebuilding. The system will rebuild the drivefrom 0 to 100%. After the system hassuccessfully rebuilt the drive it will change thedrive from OFL to ONL and save theconfiguration.
13. If a fatal error occurs during the above procedure,replace only the original drive back into the systemthat has not been rebuilt successfully yet. Then, dothe following to restore the configuration fromdiskette.
a. Insert the Option Diskette into the defaultdiskette drive; then, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
b. Select “Restore Configuration” from diskette onthe “Advanced Options Menu” from the “MainMenu.”
c. Remove the “Option Diskette” and insert thediskette with the backup configuration into thedefault diskette drive and type in the file namefor that particular system. Then, proceedreplacing and rebuilding drives wherever you leftoff.
14. If during the restoring from diskette an “Adapter Is NotResponding To Controller Commands” messageappears, do the following:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del and restore the configurationfrom the backup copy of the “RAID Support
Related Service Information 517
Diskette” again until it comes back and saysrestoration completed successfully.
15. After all drives are replaced and rebuilt successfully,power-off, then power-on the server.
Network Adapters Supported (DualProcessor Servers)If you are having trouble with the installation or operationof a network adapter using OS/2 for SMP 2.11 and OS/2LAN Server 4.0, ensure that the network adapter devicedriver supports dual processors.
The following list of network adapters and device drivers,which support dual processors, have been verified to workwith IBM PC Servers with dual processors, OS/2 for SMP2.11, and OS/2 LAN Server 4.0.
Important
The architecture of the adapter and the architecture ofthe slot the adapter is installed in must be the same.(Examples: An EISA adapter must be installed in aEISA slot, and a Micro Channel adapter must beinstalled in a Micro Channel slot.
If OS/2 LAN Server provides a device driver for thenetwork adapter, use the table above to determine the
Network Adapter Device Driver LAN Server 4.0MPTS
3Com Token-LinkIII EISA
IBMTOKMP.OS2 IBM SMPToken-RingNetwork Adapter
3Com EtherLink II3C503-16 ISA
ELNKII.OS2 3Com 3C503EtherLink IIAdapter
3Com EtherLink IIIEISA
ELNK3.OS2 3Com Etherlink IIIFamily OS/2
3Com EtherLink IIIISA
ELNK3.OS2 3Com Etherlink IIIFamily OS/2
IBM Token-RingNetwork 16/4 ISA
IBMTOKMP.OS2 IBM SMPToken-RingNetwork Adapter
IBM Token-Ring16/4 ISA-16
IBMTOKMP.OS2 IBM SMPToken-RingNetwork Adapter
IBM LAN Adapterfor Ethernet ISA
IBMENI.OS2 IBM LAN Adapterfor Ethernet
Intel TokenExpress16S ISA
OLITOK16.OS2 Use the NDISdriver on theadapter diskette
Intel EtherExpress16C ISA
EXP16.OS2 Intel EtherExpress16 Family
SMC EtherCardElite 16 Ultra ISA
SMC8000.OS2 Use the NDISdriver on theadapter diskette
518 PC Server HMM
appropriate device driver to select during the installationprocess. If OS/2 LAN Server does not provide the devicedriver, use the NDIS device driver located on the diskettessupplied with the adapter. (Check the adapterdocumentation for installation instructions.)
OS/2 Trap ErrorsThe following information will be helpful in diagnosing traperrors.
ErrorCode
Information
00000001
See note 7 (Application software error, contact thesoftware vendor's support).
0002 See notes 4, 6, 8, and 9. Install CSDs, runCHKDSK. Replace the defective memory.
000300040005
See note 7 (Application software error, contact thesoftware vendor's support).
000600070008
Check the memory. Run CHKDSK. Contact theapplication software vendor's support.
0009000A000B
See note 7 (Application software error, contact thesoftware vendor's support).
000C If “SYS1942” appears, contact the softwarevendor's support. If “Exception in Device...”appears, refer to note 4. Run CHKDSK. All othermessages: Run CHKDSK and check the memory.If a 113 error appears, see ECA024.
000D If “SYS1943 A Prog...” appears, contact thesoftware vendor's support.If “Int Proc Error at 0220:3557” appears, set theToken Ring to 16K RAM window, install CSD's.If “double trap 000D” appears, install the latestCSDs.For all other messages or conditions, contact thesoftware vendor's support.
000E See note 7 (Application software error, contact thesoftware vendor's support).
0010 Hardware of software error. Run diagnostics tocheck math coprocessor. If diagnostics find noproblem, see note 7 (contact the softwarevendor's support).
Related Service Information 519
Notes:
1. Memory intensive operating systems such as OS/2,AIX*, or UNIX based operating systems are capableof revealing highly intermittent errors not detected bydiagnostics.
2. Highly intermittent errors might go undetected bydiagnostics tests. If no error occurs during the test,multiple replacements of memory might be required toresolve the problem.
3. Install all software updates. This applies toapplications and operating systems.
4. The enhanced memory adapter (FRU 34F2825) mightexperience Trap 0002 errors if it does not havediagonal resistors across U21-U24. See ECA042.(The enhanced memory adapter has been redesignedwithout resistors, so this note might not apply to thecomputer you are servicing.)
5. Intermittent errors can be caused by outside sourcesof static, noise, or power.
6. Trap 0002 can be caused by a memory or adapterfailure. Read the message details. It might be thesystem board, system-board memory, or adapter.
7. Trap 000D errors are software errors. The customershould contact the software vendor for possiblepatches.
8. For 8570 systems, refer to ECA059, ECA051.
9. For 8580-AXX Models, see ECA051 for possiblesystem board replacement to correct Trap 002, NMI,or DOS parity errors.
System Aid Diskette
A system aid diskette is now available for Trap 0002errors. Dealers can download it from the TechnicalAdvisors Bulletin Board as file “TRAP2LOG.” The diskettewill read NVRAM and indicate which of four possiblesources caused the error. The four possible errors andtheir causes are listed below.
ErrorCode
Information
110 Usually a system-board memory error. If replacingthe memory does not fix the problem, suspect thesystem board.
111 I/O Channel Check. Any adapter could cause thiserror, but usually a memory adapter is the cause.
112 Watchdog Timeout. Could be hardware orsoftware. If replacing the system board does not fixthe problem, suspect the software.
520 PC Server HMM
ErrorCode
Information
113 DMA Timeout. Usually a software error, butpossibly a hardware failure (system board). If it is a70-A21 with a 113 error, see ECA056, runCHKDSK. Contact the software vendor for moreinformation.If it is any other system with a 113 error, refer toECA023. Check the hardware.
OS/2 Problems during a NewInstallationIf you have determined that you do not have a hardwarefailure, and you cannot get the operating system to work,assist the customer in recopying the OS/2 software to thehard disk. If this is not a new installation, have thecustomer order the replacement diskettes. If this is anew installation and the customer does not have thediskettes, order replacement diskettes by doing thefollowing:
1. Write down the machine type and serial number.2. Call 1-800-342-6672 (weekdays 9 a.m to 9 p.m
eastern time).3. Identify yourself as an IBM service representative or
IBM authorized servicer.4. For OS/2 Version 2.0, request diskette package P/N
41G3329. For OS/2 Version 2.00.1, request diskettepackage P/N 52G9973. The IBM telephone operatorwill supply the correct package part number for laterversions of OS/2. (Supply the machine informationand shipping address for either package.)
After you receive the OS/2 diskettes, refer to the pamphletsupplied with the diskettes for OS/2 installationinstructions.
The PS/2 diagnostic tests are intended to test onlyIBM-marketed products. Products not marketed by IBM,prototype cards, or modified options can give false errorsand invalid system responses.
Refer to the PS/2 Hardware Maintenance manualReference section related PS/2 reference information.
OS/2 Version Level CheckTo determine the OS/2 level on the computer you areservicing, type SYSLEVEL at the OS/2 prompt, then pressEnter.
Related Service Information 521
PC Server Flash/Diagnostics/CMOSAccess InformationThe following table provides the access information forFlash/BIOS, Diagnostics, CMOS, and Setup programs forPC Servers.
522 PC Server HMM
Fla
sh
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Acc
ess
CM
OS
/Set
up
F1
F1
Ctr
l+A
lt+S
F2
F1
N/A F2
N/A
CM
OS
/Set
up
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes No
Yes No
Acc
ess
Dia
gs P
rogr
am
Boo
t D
iske
tte
F1
- C
trl+
Alt
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Boo
t D
iske
tte
Dia
gs P
rogr
amD
iske
tte/IM
L
Dis
kette
IML
Dis
kette
Dis
kette
Dis
kette
Dis
kette
Dis
kette
Dis
kette
Bus ISA
MC
/A
EIS
A
EIS
A
MC
/A
MC
/A
EIS
A
MC
/A
Mod
el
310
310
300
320
320
500
520
720
Typ
e
8639
8639
8640
8640
8640
8641
8641
8642
Related Service Information 523
Printer1. Make sure the printer is properly connected and
powered on.2. Run the printer self-test.
If the printer self-test does not run correctly, the problem isin the printer. Refer to the printer service manual.
If the printer self-test runs correctly, install a wrap plug inthe parallel port and run the diagnostic tests to determinewhich FRU failed.
If the diagnostic tests (with the wrap plug installed) do notdetect a failure, replace the printer cable. If that does notcorrect the problem, replace the system board or adapterconnected to the printer cable.
524 PC Server HMM
SCSI Fast/Wide PCI Adaptec Adapters(AHA-2940/2940W)The AHA-2940 and AHA-2940 Wide are PCI Fast andPCI/Wide SCSI adapters. These adapters are supportedon computers with a PCI 5v bus master slot.
Note
The Type 8642 computer is shipped with theAHA-2940 Wide SCSI adapter only.
The adapters support the following:
Adapter Connectors Devices Supported
AHA-2940Adapter
1 each internal8-bit SCSIconnector,1 each external8-bit SCSIconnector.
Supports a maximumof seven 8-bitsingle-ended SCSIdevices.
AHA-2940WAdapter
1 each internal8-bit SCSIconnector,1 each internal16-bit SCSIconnector,1 each external16-bit SCSIconnector.
Supports a maximumof fifteen 8-bit and16-bit single-endedSCSI devices.
Related Service Information 525
Adapter Locations
J4
External LEDConnector
J4
68-pin Wide InternalSCSI Connector
50-pin InternalSCSI Connector
.J4/ Termination jumper for multiple-computerconfigurations. See “Termination (forMultiple-Computer Configurations)” on page 545.
526 PC Server HMM
BIOS Startup MessagesAfter you have installed the host adapter, BIOS displays amessage when you boot the computer. Normally, thismessage lists the SCSI ID, manufacturer, model numberand other information for each SCSI device that the BIOSdetects.
If an initialization failure occurs, the host BIOS displays aspecific error message followed by a BIOS InstallationFailure message. The following are some of theinstallation failure messages and their meaning:
A drive larger than 1 gigabyte has been detected with64 head / 32 sector partitioning. This drive is notcompatible with the 255 head / 63 sector translationwhich has been enabled on this adapter. Data couldbe corrupted! Please check your system setup. Pressany key to continue.
This message occurs only if Extended BIOS Translation isenabled in the SCSISelect utility. It means that the BIOSdetected a large-capacity drive invalid partition in themaster boot record.
Extended BIOS Translation is used only with MS-DOS 5.0or above. You do not need to enable this option if you areusing another operating system such as OS/2 or UNIX.
If you are using a driver larger than 1GB under MS-DOS5.0 or above and this message appears, do the following:
1. Run the SCSISelect utility and set Extended BIOSTranslation to Disabled.
2. Exit from the SCSISelect utility and back up the dataon the disk drive, if you want to save it.
3. Perform a SCSI low-level format with the Format Diskutility under SCSI Disk Utilities in the SCSISelectutility.
Note
All data on the target drive will be lost when yourun the Format Disk utility. Back up your databefore you run it.
4. In the SCSISelect Advanced Configuration Optionsmenu, set Extended BIOS Translation to Enabled.
5. Partition the drive again.6. Restore data to the drive, if necessary.
Device connected, but not ready.
This message appears if the host adapter receives noanswer when it requests data from an installed SCSIdevice. The host adapter skips this device and moves tothe next device on the bus.
Related Service Information 527
Do the following if you see this message when you requestdata from the SCSI drive:
1. Run the SCSISelect utility and access SCSI DeviceConfiguration. Locate the SCSI ID of the hostadapter and set Send Unit Commands to yes.
2. Exit the SCSISelect utility and request data from thedrive again.
3. If the message still appears, follow the drivemanufacturer's instructions to make sure the drive isset to spin-up when the power is switched on.
Start unit request failed.
The BIOS was unable to send a Start Unit Command tothe device. Run the SCSISelect utility and disable SendStart Unit Command for the device.
Time-out failure during SCSI Inquiry command! or
Time-out failure during SCSI Test Unit Readycommand! or
Time-out failure during Start Unit command!
An unexpected time-out occurred. Try disconnecting theSCSI device cables from the host adapter and thenstarting the computer. If the computer successfully restartscheck the following.
� SCSI bus termination (See, “Termination (Devices)”on page 544, “Termination (AHA-2940/2940WAdapters)” on page 544, and “Termination (forMultiple-Computer Configurations)” on page 545),
� Cable connections.
One of the devices on the SCSI bus may be defective.
Booting the Computer from a SCSIDrive� Be sure the standard hard disk drives are not
configured in the system, using the Setup program.
Note
Standard hard disk drive means the disk drives(s)attached to the system by a standard ISA/EISA,non-SCSI disk adapter (example, IDE drives).Standard hard disk drives can be set to theinstalled or not installed state by the Setupprogram supplied with the computer. The Setupprogram allows you to select a number ofstandard hard disk drives that are recognized bythe system, regardless of whether they arephysically installed. SCSI drives are notcontrolled through the Setup program.
528 PC Server HMM
� Be sure the SCSI boot drive address is set to SCSIID 0 and that there are no SCSI ID conflicts. You canuse the Adaptec SCSISelect Configuration Utility todetermine the SCSI address of the devices attachedto the SCSI bus.
� Be sure that SCSI parity is consistently enabled ordisabled on all devices on the SCSI bus.
Note
All SCSI devices currently supported on PCServers support parity checking.
To check the parity setting(s) of the devices on theSCSI bus, do the following:
1. Start the SCSISelect utility.2. Select the Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
menu.3. Set SCSI Parity Checking to Enable for all the
devices connected to the SCSI bus.
Note
Some early developed SCSI devices maynot support parity checking. If one or moreof the devices connected to SCSI bus donot support parity checking, set SCSI ParityChecking to Disabled for all of the SCSIdevices connected to the SCSI bus.
� Try enabling Include in BIOS Scan in the SCSIDevice Configuration option of the SCSISelect utility.
� Be sure to power-off; then, power-on the computerafter changing any value on a host adapter, in aSetup program, or on a SCSI device.
� Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated. See,“Termination (Devices)” on page 544, “Termination(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)” on page 544, and“Termination (for Multiple-Computer Configurations)”on page 545.
� Be sure the intended boot disk has an active DOSpartition and has been formatted.
� Check cable connections.
Computer Hangs, or HOST AdapterCannot Always Find the Drives� Check SCSI parity for consistency and be sure SCSI
termination is set correctly. See, “Termination(Devices)” on page 544, “Termination(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)” on page 544, and“Termination (for Multiple-Computer Configurations)”on page 545.
� Check cable length and integrity.� If the host adapter LED remains on when the
computer hangs, the host adapter may be interferingwith the operation of the computer. It may not
Related Service Information 529
support First-Parity DMA (that is, Bus Master) datatransfers.
Connectivity (Cables/Devices)If you attach both internal and external SCSI devices to thehost adapter, you must terminate the last external deviceand the last internal device. (This applies to both theAHA-2940 and AHA-2940W adapters.)
Important
If you connect external devices to the AHA-2940Wadapter, you can only attach devices to one of theinternal SCSI connectors.
If you connect both internal and external SCSI devices,you must also change the host adapter termination settingsfrom the default, because the host adapter is now in themiddle of the SCSI bus. See “Termination(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)” on page 544.
.
Component Requirement
Maximum external cablelength
3 m (9.8 ft.)
Maximum combined lengthof all cables connectedinternally and externally toeach adapter
6 m (19.7 ft.)
SCSI Devices Supports single-endeddevices only
CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive has a50-pin connector. If it isconnected to the 68-pinconnector on the adapterusing a 68-pin to 68-pincable, a 16/8 Bit Convertermust be used to connectthe CD-ROM drive to the68-pin cable.
AHA-2940 and AHA-2940W50-pin internal connector
50-pin to 50-pin SCSIribbon cable
AHA-2940W 68-pin internalconnector
68-pin to 68-pin SCSIribbon cable
AHA-2940 50-pin externalconnector
50-pin to 50-pin SCSIshielded cable
AHA-2940W 68-pin externalconnector
68-pin to 68-pin SCSIshielded cable
530 PC Server HMM
Disk Drive Configuration ProblemsProblems may occur if a combination of standard andSCSI drives are installed in the computer.
Standard hard disk drives can be set to the installed or notinstalled state by the Setup program supplied withcomputer. SCSI drives are not controlled through theSetup program.
If SCSI and non-SCSI drives are installed, the non-SCSIdisk drive is always the boot drive.
Note
If too many large-capacity drives are set to startinstantly at system power-on, this could cause thepower supply to shut down. See “Power SupplyShutdowns” on page 285.
LED (AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)The red light emitting diode (LED) on theAHA-2940/2940W adapter lights up when the host adapteris performing activity on the SCSI interface or when otherSCSI devices are using the SCSI bus. An external LEDconnector is provided on the adapter so you can attach acable to an externally visible LED.
Note
If the light stays on when there is no activity on theSCSI bus, one of the following failures may beindicated:
� The bus is hung.� The processor(s) failed.� Unexpected activity is occurring or the SCSI
cables are incorrectly installed. (If the SCSIcables are installed in reversed position, the hostadapter is forced into a solid SCSI reset state,which halts normal operation.)
Related Service Information 531
Other Problems and SolutionsThe screen is difficult to read when running theSCSISelect utility.Press F5 to toggle the display between color andmonochrome modes. This may make the screen easier toread.
Important
When the format/verify utility is attempted on adisk device, an Unexpected SCSI CommandFailure pop-up box containing error information isdisplayed.
This probably means that the utility encountered a problemwith the disk device or the media and cannot run. Thefollowing information is displayed in the pop-up window:
� SCSI Target ID of the device� SCSI CDB Sent (for example, 2F 00 00 00 00 00 00
08 00 00)� Host Adapter Status (for example, 11h - Selection
Timeout)� Target Status (for example, 00h - Good Status)� Sense Key (for example, 06h - Unit Attention)� Additional Sense Code� Additional Sense Code Qualifier
You can probably determine from the Sense Keyinformation both the cause of the problem and its solution.The following are more common Sense Key values andtheir meanings:
� 02h - Not readyThe media is not ready to format. Be sure that mediais inserted in the drive.
� 03h - Medium errorThe disk media may be defective. If it is aremovable-media drive, try using a different mediadisk. If it is a hard disk drive, the disk may bephysically damaged. Verify and format the mediawith SCSISelect.
� 04h - Hardware errorThe disk drive may be defective. Consult thehardware documentation and contact themanufacturer.
� 05h - Illegal requestThe Adaptec formatting utility does not support alow-level format of this device; however, the devicemay already be low-level formatted by themanufacturer.
� 06h - Unit attentionThe removable media may be write-protected.Disable write protection and run the utility again.
532 PC Server HMM
The Additional Sense Code field provides more informationabout the error.
The computer locks up when the Esc key is pressed toexit SCSI Select.If this happens, power-off; then, power-on the computer.Any settings you changed before you tried to exit theprogram were recorded in the EEPROM and will not belost.
One of the SCSI devices in the computer will not allowyou to disable termination. How can it be attached tothe SCSI bus?Attach the device on the end of the SCSI bus so that youdo not need to disable termination.
After connecting the LED cable to the host adapter,the light stays on all the time and the computer hangs.The red LED on the AHA2940/2940W normally lights whenthere is activity in the SCSI bus.If the light stays on when there is no activity on the SCSIbus, the SCSI cables might be installed in a reverseposition.
Problems Detected During InstallationIf the system will not boot from the standard hard diskdrive or a boot program on the diskette drive (after theinitial hardware installation), check the following:
� If the AHA-2940/2940W LED and the SCSI drive LEDare always on, the SCSI cables might be installed ina reverse position between the host adapter and thedrive.
� If the AHA-2940/2940W BIOS message is notdisplayed on the screen during system boot, thesystem does not recognize the host adapter BIOS.Be sure that host adapter BIOS is enabled.
� Be sure there are no address conflicts between a PCIdevice and an EISA or ISA device.
� If you see the message Host adapter not found, thehost adapter has detected an internal failure. Be surethe host adapter is firmly seated in the PCI slot.
� If you see the message Host adapter found but notconfigured, run the SCSISelect utility to configure thehost adapter. See “SCSISelect Configuration Utility”on page 534.
Related Service Information 533
SCSISelect Configuration UtilityThe SCSISelect Configuration Utility program, located onthe ROM of the AHA-2940 and AHA-2940W adapters,allows you to change the default settings for the adapterand the devices connected to the adapter. The followingare the default settings for the AHA2940 and AHA2940Wadapters.
The following settings are for the adapter and the devicesconnected to the adapter:
Individual Settings
The following settings are for each SCSI device connectedto the adapter:
Setting Default Value
Host Adapter SCSI ID 7
SCSI Parity Checking Enabled
Host Adapter SCSITerminationAHA-2940AHA-2940W
EnabledLow On / High On
Reset SCSI Bus at HostAdapter Initialization
Enabled
Host Adapter BIOS1 Enabled
Support Removable DisksUnder BIOS as Fixed Disks1
Boot only
Extended BIOS Translationfor DOS, 1GB1
Enabled
BIOS Support for More Than2 Drives1
Enabled
1 Settings are valid only if the adapter BIOS is enabled.
Setting Default Value
Initiate Sync Negotiation Yes
Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 10MB per second2
Enable Disconnection Yes
Send Start Unit SCSICommand1
No
Include In BIOS Scan1 Yes
Initiate Wide Negotiations3 Enabled
1 Settings are invalid only if the adapter BIOS is enabled.2 20MB per second maximum synchronous transfer on AHA-2940W.3 AHA-2940W adapters only.
534 PC Server HMM
SCSISelect Configuration Utility ControlKeys
Starting the SCSISelect ConfigurationUtility: You can start the SCSISelect utility programfrom the BIOS banner if the adapter BIOS is enabled, orfrom the SCSISelect Configuration Utility diskette shippedwith the computer.
From the BIOS Banner: The BIOS banner isdisplayed when you power-on or reboot the computer.The banner lists the model number and SCSI ID of theSCSI devices connected to the adapter. To start the utility,do the following:
1. Power-off; then, power-on the computer (or reboot thecomputer).
2. When the BIOS banner is displayed on the screen,press Ctrl+A .
From the SCSISelect Configuration UtilityDiskette: To start the utility from the SCSISelectConfiguration Utility diskette, do the following:
1. Insert the SCSISelect Configuration Utility disketteinto diskette drive A.
2. At the DOS prompt type, A:2940cfg.exe 3. Press Enter .
Keys Action/Response
↓ and ↑ Moves the highlighted bar from one adapterselection to another. If more than oneadapter is displayed, the PCI bus numberand the PCI device number that correspondto the highlighted adapter are alsohighlighted.
Enter Selects the highlighted item.
Esc Returns to the previous menu.
F5 Switches between color and monochromedisplay modes.
F6 Resets all settings to the host adapterdefault settings.
Related Service Information 535
SCSISelect Configuration UtilityMenus/Options: If the SCSISelect utility detects onlyone AHA-2940/2940W host adapter in your system, itdisplays the following Options menu:
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
Would you like to configure the host adapter or run
the SCSI disk utilities? Select the option and press
<Enter>. Press <F5> to switch between color and
monochrome modes.
Options
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
SCSI Disk Utilities
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Note
If the SCSISelect utility finds multipleAHA-2940/2940W host adapters in your system, thePCI Bus and PCI device number of each adapter isdisplayed. As you move the highlighted bar todifferent host adapters (using the up and down arrowkeys), the red light on the corresponding adapterinstalled in the system lights to allow you to identifythe correct adapter. The Option menu is displayedafter you select a host adapter.
Configuration/View Host Adapter SettingsMenu/Options
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
Configuration
SCSI Channel Interface Definitions
Host Adapter SCSI ID .................... 7
SCSI Parity Checking .................... Enabled
Host Adapter SCSI Termination ........... Enabled
Additional Options
SCSI Device Configuration ............... Press <Enter>
Advanced configuration Options .......... Press <Enter>
<F6> - Reset to Host Adapter Defaults
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
536 PC Server HMM
Host Adapter SCSI ID : changes the host adapter SCSIID from its default value of 7.
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
ð
1
2
3
4
5
6
\ 7
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Note
The menu for the A-2940W adapter displays SCSI IDs#0 to #15.
SCSI Parity Checking : enables or disables host adapterSCSI parity checking.
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
\ Enabled
Disabled
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Host Adapter SCSI Termination : configures host adapterSCSI termination.
The following menu is displayed if an AHA-2940 adapter isinstalled:
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
\ Enabled
Disabled
Both ends of the SCSI bus should be terminated. Host Adapter
termination should be disabled if you attach SCSI devices to
both internal and external connectors, since the host adapter
would then be in the middle of the SCSI bus.
Device Connection | Termination
_______________________________|__________________
Internal devices only | Enabled
External devices only | Enabled
Internal and External devices | Disabled
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Related Service Information 537
The following menu is displayed if an AHA-2940W adapteris installed:
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
\ Low ON / High ON
Low OFF / High OFF
Low OFF / High ON
Both ends of the SCSI bus should be terminated. Host Adapter
termination should be disabled if you attach SCSI devices to
both internal and external connectors, since the host adapter
would then be in the middle of the SCSI bus.
Device Connection | Termination
_______________________________|__________________
Internal devices only | Enabled
External devices only | Enabled
Internal and External devices | Disabled
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
SCSI Device Configuration : allows you to configurecertain parameters of each SCSI device on the SCSI bus.If selected, the following information for each SCSI ID isdisplayed even if some SCSI IDs are not assigned to adevice:
à ðSCSI Device Configuration
SCSI Device ID #ð #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
______________________________________________________________________________
Initiate Sync Negotiation yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð 1ð.ð
Enable Disconnection yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
------ Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if BIOS is Disabled ------------
Send Start Unit Command no no no no no no no no
Include in BIOS Scan yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Note
The menu for the AHA-2940W adapter displays SCSIIDs #0 to #15
� Initiate Sync Negotiation : determines whether thehost adapter initiates synchronous negotiation withthe SCSI device. However, the host adapter alwaysresponds to synchronous negotiation if the SCSIdevice initiates it.
Note
If Initiate Sync Negotiation is set to yes and theattached SCSI devices do not supportsynchronous negotiation, the system may operateerratically or hang.
538 PC Server HMM
� Maximum Sync Transfer Rate : determines themaximum synchronous data transfer rate that the hostadapter can support. The host adapter supports ratesup to the FAST SCSI maximum of 10MB per second.The default value is 10.0. The AHA-2940W has a16-bit (2-byte) channel that provides an effectivemaximum synchronous transfer rate of 20.0MB persecond (10MB per 8-bit channel). The valid settingsare:
Notes
1. In most cases, you can use the maximumvalue of 10.0. If the host adapter is set notto negotiate for synchronous data transfer(Initiate Sync Negotiation is set to no), thevalue selected here is the maximum ratethat the host adapter accepts from thedevice during negotiation.
2. Some older SCSI devices do not supportFast SCSI data transfer rates (10.0, 8.0, and6.7). This might cause the computer tooperate erratically or hang if the transfer rateis set to high. Select a Maximum SyncTransfer Rate of 5.0 for these devices. IfInitiate Sync Negotiation is set to yes andthe attached SCSI devices do not supportsynchronous negotiation, the system mayoperate erratically or hang.
� Enable Disconnection : determines whether the hostadapter allows a SCSI device to disconnect from theSCSI bus (sometimes called Disconnect/Reconnect).Disconnect/Reconnect allows the host adapter toperform other operations on the SCSI bus while theSCSI device is temporarily disconnected.
Note
You should leave Enable Disconnection set toyes if two or more SCSI devices are connectedto the host adapter. This optimizes SCSI busperformance. If only one SCSI device isconnected to the SCSI adapter, set EnableDisconnection to no for optimum performance.
SCSISelectTransfer Rate
AHA-2940Effective TransferRate
AHA-2940WEffective TransferRate
10.0 10MB per second 20MB per second
8.0 8MB per second 16MB per second
6.7 6.7MB per second 13.4MB per second
5.0 5MB per second 10MB per second
Related Service Information 539
� Send Start Unit Command : is supported by someSCSI devices and determines whether the Start Unitcommand (SCSI command 1B) is sent to the SCSIdevice (most devices do not require this). Enablingthis option reduces the load on the power supply byallowing the host adapter to power-on SCSI devicesone at a time when you boot the computer.Otherwise, the devices all power-on at the same time.Most devices require that you set a jumper beforethey can respond to this command. If this option isenabled for more than one SCSI device, the StartUnit Command is sent first to the SCSI device withthe lowest SCSI ID. After this device responds to thehost adapter, the Start Unit Command is sent to thenext highest SCSI ID with a setting of yes. Thedefault setting is no.
Note
The Send Start Unit command setting is validonly if the host adapter BIOS is enabled.
� Include in BIOS Scan : determines whether the hostadapter BIOS supports devices attached to the SCSIbus without the need for device driver software.When set to yes, the host adapter BIOS controls theSCSI device. When set to no, the host adapter BIOSdoes not search the SCSI ID for devices to controland device driver software is needed to control theSCSI device. The default setting is yes.
Note
The host adapter BIOS must be enabled for thissetting to be valid.
Advanced Configuration Options Menu
à ðAdvanced Configuration Options
Reset Bus at HOST Adapter Initialization......................... Enabled
-------Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if the BIOS is Disabled---------
Host Adapter BIOS (Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS).......... Enabled
Support Removable Disk Under BIOS as Fixed Disks................. Enabled
Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives > 1 GByte............... Enabled
BIOS Support for More Than 2 Drives (MS-DOS (R) 5.ð and above)... Enabled
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Note
Do not change these file options unless absolutelynecessary.
540 PC Server HMM
� Reset SCSI Bus at Host Adapter Initialization :allows you to enable or disable a SCSI bus resetgenerated by the host adapter during its power-oninitialization and after a hard reset. If enabled, theSCSI bus resets the first time the host adapter isinitialized. If the host adapter BIOS is enabled, theBIOS resets the SCSI bus, then waits two secondsbefore scanning the bus for SCSI devices. If ResetSCSI Bus at Host Adapter Initialization is disabled,there is no two-second delay. The default setting isenabled.
Note
Normally, SCSI Bus Reset at Host AdapterInitialization should always be enabled.
� Host Adapter BIOS : enables or disables the hostadapter BIOS. The default setting is Enabled.
Note
The host adapter must be enabled for thecomputer to boot from a SCSI hard disk driveconnected to the host adapter.
The following SCSISelect options cannot be usedunless the host adapter BIOS is enabled:
– Support Removable Disks Under BIOS as FixedDisks
– Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drivers > 1GByte
– BIOS Support for More Than 2 Drives– Send Start Unit SCSI Commands– Include In BIOS Scan
� Support Removable Disk Under BIOS as FixedDisk : allows you to control which removable-mediadrives are supported by the host adapter BIOS. It isonly valid if the host adapter BIOS is enabled. Thedefault setting is Boot Only. The following choicesare available:
– Boot only : Only the removable-media drivedesignated as the boot device is treated as ahard disk drive.
– All Disks : All removable-media drivessupported by the BIOS are treated as hard diskdrives.
Related Service Information 541
– Disabled : Removable-media drives are nottreated as hard disk drives. In this situation,software drivers are needed because the driversare not controlled by the BIOS.
Note
Support for removable-media drives means onlythat the host adapter BIOS allows you to use aremovable-media drive as if it were a hard diskdrive. If you remove the media while the drive ispowered-on, data may be lost. If you want to beable to remove the media while the drive ispowered-on, install the removable-media devicedriver and set this option to Disabled.
� Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives morethan 1GB : allows you to enable or disable extendedtranslation for SCSI hard disk drives with a capacitygreater than 1GB. It is only valid if the BIOS isenabled. The default setting is Enable. If this optionis enabled, the following translation schemes areused:
– SCSI hard disk drives with a capacity of 1GB orless use a translation scheme of 64 heads, 32sectors per track.
– SCSI hard disk drives with a capacity greaterthan 1GB use a translation scheme of 255heads, 63 sectors per track.
� BIOS Support for more than 2 Drives : allows youto enable or disable BIOS support for more than twoand up to eight SCSI hard disk drives. The hostadapter BIOS must be enabled. This feature issupported by DOS 5.0 and above. The defaultsetting is Enable.
SCSI Disk Utility
à ðAHA-294ð/294ðW at Bus:Device xx:xxh
Select SCSI Disk and press <Enter>
SCSI ID# 1 : Quantum P14ðS 94ð-4ð-94xx
SCSI ID# 2 : No Device
SCSI ID# 3 : SyQuest SQ 511ð
SCSI ID# 4 : No Device
SCSI ID# 5 : No Device
SCSI ID# 6 : No Device
SCSI ID# 7 : AHA-294ð/294ðW
Arrow keys to move cursor, <Enter> to select option, <Esc> to exit (\=default)
á
ñ
Note
The menu for the AHA-2940W adapter displays SCSIIDs #0 to #15
542 PC Server HMM
When you select SCSI Disk Utilities from the Optionsmenu, the SCSISelect utility scans the SCSI bus and listsall SCSI devices installed on the SCSI bus. When youhighlight a device by moving to it with the cursor keys andpressing Enter , a small window appears. You can selectFormat Disk or Verify Media from this menu.
� Format Disk : performs a low-level format on diskdevices.
Note
A low-level format destroys all data on the drive.Be sure to back up all data before performing thisoperation. You cannot abort a low-level formatonce it is started.
Most SCSI disk devices are pre-formatted and do notneed to be formatted again. The Adaptec FormatDisk utility is compatible with most SCSI disk drives.Run it on hard disk drives or removable-media drivesthat were previously used with non-Adaptec hostadapters.
� Verify Disk Media : scans the selected device'smedia for defects.
Note
Press Esc at any time to abort the Verify DiskMedia utility.
If this utility finds bad blocks, it prompts you toreassign them. If you select yes, the blocks will nolonger be used.
Self Diagnostics (AHA-2940/2940WAdapters)AHA-2940/2940W host adapters execute a self-diagnosticsPower-On Self-Test (POST) during BIOS initialization. Ifthe diagnostics fails, the BIOS displays the messageInitialization failed and halts any further operation of theadapter. If this occurs, remove the adapter and check forthe following:
� Components that are not correctly installed orproperly seated
� Broken wires� Missing or damaged components� Conductive debris on the adapter.
If you see any physical damage, replace the adapter.
Related Service Information 543
Termination (Devices) Note
Hot-Swap Back Planes are automatically terminated.Do not terminate devices connect to a Hot-Swap BackPlane.
Each connector on the adapter and the devices attachedto the connector make up a separate daisy-chain.Termination is required on the last device in each chain. Ifonly one device is attached, termination is required for thatdevice.
Termination (AHA-2940/2940WAdapters)Use the following information to determine the terminationrequired for the adapter; then, run the SCSISelect UtilityConfiguration program if required. (To run the SCSISelectConfiguration Utility program, see “SCSISelectConfiguration Utility” on page 534 and “Starting theSCSISelect Configuration Utility” on page 535.)
AHA-2940 Adapter
AHA-2940W Adapter
Adapter Termination Devices Connected To
Enabled Internal connector only
Enabled External connector only
Disabled Internal and externalconnectors
Adapter Termination Devices Connected To
Low On / High On 68-pin internal connector only
Low On / High On 68-pin external connector only
Low On / High On 50-pin internal connector only
Low Off / High Off 68-pin internal and 68-pinexternal connectors
Low Off / High On 50-pin and 68-pin internalconnectors
Low Off / High On 50-pin internal and 68-pinexternal connectors
Invalid 50-pin and 68-pin internalconnectors, and 68-pinexternal connector
544 PC Server HMM
Termination (for Multiple-ComputerConfigurations)If more than one computer is attached to the SCSI bus,you can configure the adapter to provide termination whenthe adapter host computer is powered off. The terminationis applied only when the computer containing the adapteris powered off and another computer connected to theSCSI bus accesses the device.
To activate this termination, install a jumper on J4 on theadapter.
Troubleshooting Checklist — SCSI(AHA-2940/2940W Adapters)Most problems that occur during installation result fromerrors in preparing and connecting devices on the SCSIbus.
Answer these questions first if a problem occurs duringinstallation:
1. Are the power cables and SCSI cables properlyconnected?
2. Is the Host adapter firmly seated and secure in a5-volt PCI slot that is capable of bus mastering?
3. Is the SCSI cable installed correctly throughout theSCSI bus?
4. Are the PCI bus slot parameters set correctly in thecomputer's Setup program?
Note
The PCI bus is designed to assign the IRQ portaddress, and BIOS address settings. You mayneed to assign some of these values manually inthe Setup program.
5. Is each adapter, including the host adapter, set to aunique SCSI ID (0-7 for the AHA-2940 and 0-15 forthe AHA2940W)?
6. Is the termination set correctly?
Related Service Information 545
Using a SCSI Drive as C and AnotherSCSI Drive as D
1. Be sure the computer's CMOS Setup is set to NoDrives Installed, as required for SCSI host adapters.
2. Be sure the SCSI drive to be used as drive C is set toSCSI ID 0. See “SCSI Disk Utility” on page 542.
3. Set the SCSI drive to be used as drive D to SCSIID 1.
4. Try enabling Include in BIOS Scan in the SCSIDevice Configuration option of the SCSISelect utility.See “SCSI Device Configuration” on page 538.
5. Be sure to power-off, then power-on the computerafter changing any values on the host adapter, inSetup, or on a SCSI device.
6. Be sure that SCSI parity checking is consistentlyenabled or disabled on the SCSI bus.
7. Verify that the host adapter and the SCSI devices areproperly configured and installed.
8. Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated.9. Be sure the disk is formatted and has a DOS
partition. Run the Format Disk utility accessiblethrough SCSISelect. See “SCSI Disk Utility” on page542.
Using a Standard Drive as C and a SCSIDrive as D
1. If a second hard disk drive is installed, use the Setupprogram to map the second hard disk drive out of theconfiguration.
2. Be sure the SCSI drive to be used as drive D is set toSCSI ID 0. You can use the SCSISelect utility todetermine the SCSI address of the peripherals on theSCSI bus.
3. Be sure the SCSI parity checking is consistentlyenabled or disabled on all devices on the SCSI bus.
4. Verify that the host adapter and the SCSI devices areproperly configured and installed.
5. Be sure to power-off, then power-on the computerafter changing any values on the host adapter, inSetup, or on a SCSI device.
6. Be sure the SCSI bus is properly terminated.7. Be sure the disk is formatted and has a DOS
partition. Run the Format Disk utility accessiblethrough SCSISelect. See “SCSI Disk Utility” on page542.
8. Check cable connections.
546 PC Server HMM
SCSISelect Utility ProgramThe SCSI-2 controller has a built-in menu-drivenconfiguration utility program that allows you to view andchange SCSI settings.
You can use the SCSISelect Utility program to:
� Change the default values� Verify and change configuration conflicts� Format a new SCSI hard disk
Starting the SCSISelect Utility ProgramYou can access this program when you start the server.The SCSISelect prompt appears after the IBM PC Serverscreen appears briefly and then disappears. Press Ctrl +Aimmediately after the SCSISelect prompt appears.
Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to move thehighlight bar to the various menu choices. Press Esc toreturn to the previous menu. Also, you can press F5 toswitch between color and monochrome modes (if yourdisplay permits). To change the current settings of theitems displayed in the menus, follow the directions on thescreen.
SCSISelect Utility Program OptionsThe following options are displayed on the SCSISelectUtility program menu:
� Configure/View Host Adapter Settings� SCSI Disk Utilities
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings: Toview or change the SCSI-2 controller settings, selectConfigure/View Host Adapter Settings and follow thedirections on the screen. Refer to the following table forinformation on the choices on this menu.
� Host Adapter SCSI ID
Select this choice to change the SCSI ID of theSCSI-2 controller from its default value of 7.
� SCSI Parity Checking
Select this choice to enable or disable SCSI-2adapter parity checking. The default value isEnabled.
� Host Adapter SCSI Termination
Select this choice to configure SCSI-2 controllertermination. The default value is Low On / High On.
� SCSI Device Configuration
Select this choice to configure SCSI deviceparameters. Before you can make updates, you mustknow the ID of the device whose parameters youwant to configure.
� Advanced Configuration Options
Related Service Information 547
Select this choice to view or change the settings foradvanced configuration options. These optionsinclude setting the SCSI ID scanning order, andenabling support for a startable CD-ROM and forInt13Extensions.
SCSI Controller Settings/Description: Thefollowing is a list of the Configuration/View Host AdapterSettings and descriptions.
SCSI Disk Utilities: To see the IDs that areassigned to each SCSI device or format a drive, selectSCSI Disk Utilities from the SCSISelect Utility programmenu.
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list.Read the screens carefully before making a selection.
SCSI ControllerSettings
Description
Host Adapter SCSIID
Change the SCSI ID of the SCSI-2controller from its default value of 7.
SCSI ParityChecking
Enable or disable parity checking on theSCSI-2 adapter or controller. The defaultvalue is Enabled.
Host Adapter SCSITermination
Configure SCSI-2 adapter or controllertermination. The default value is Low On/ High On.
SCSI DeviceConfiguration
Configure SCSI device parameters.Before you can make updates, you mustknow the ID of the device whoseparameters you want to configure.
AdvancedConfigurationOptions
View or change the settings for advancedconfiguration options. These include:
� Startable CD-ROM drive. When setto On, the CD-ROM drive can beincluded as a startup device For thisoption to take effect, you must inserta startable CD in the CD-ROM drive.
� Init13Extensions. When set to On,these BIOS extensions are enabled.
� Reverse Scan. When Reverse Scanis set to Off and the SCSI controlleris set to the default value of 7,scanning order proceeds from 0 to 6,then 8 to 15. When this choice isset to On, the scanning orderproceeds from SCSI ID 6 to 0, then15 to 8.
548 PC Server HMM
Using the Low-Level Format Program: Onnon-disk array models, you have the option of formattingyour hard disk using the Low-Level Format feature of theSCSISelect Utility program.
Depending on the hard disk capacity, the Low-LevelFormat program could take up to two hours.
Note: For disk-array models, you must use the programsprovided on the RAID Configuration diskette toformat your hard disk drives. Refer to “Disk ArrayConfiguration” on page 461 for instructions.
When To Use the Low-Level FormatProgram: Use the Low-Level Format program:
� When you are installing software that requires alow-level format
� When you get recurring messages from the diagnostictests directing you to run the Low-Level Formatprogram on the hard disk
� As a last resort before replacing a failing hard diskdrive
Note
For information about backing up all of the files, seethe operating-system documentation for the systemyou are servicing.
Starting the Low-Level Format Program
Attention
The Low-Level Format program erases all data andprograms.
1. If the hard disk is working, make a backup copy of allthe files and programs on the hard disk.
2. Select Format disk from the SCSISelect Disk Utilitiesmenu; then follow the instructions on the screen.
3. To install an operating system, refer to theServerGuide CD documenation.
Setting the Motor-Start JumperThe jumper in position .5/ (illustrated above) is themotor-start jumper. If the jumper is installed, all hard diskdrive motors start instantly at power-on. If the jumper isremoved, POST starts the drives sequentially. Somedrives are shipped with the motor-start jumper installed (toreduce POST time). If many large-capacity drives areadded to the computer, and they are set to start atpower-on, the power supply might shut down. If thishappens, it means that the total motor-start surge currentof a multiple drive startup exceeds the reserve-current
Related Service Information 549
capacity of the power supply. You might have to removeone or more motor-start jumpers.
Note: Non-IBM drives use either a jumper or a switch toset the motor-start mode.
To set the SCSI ID on a Rewritable Optical Drive, do thefollowing:
1. Position the device so that the three position jumperis at the lower-right corner.
2. Refer to the table below to position the RewritableOptical Drive jumpers for IDs 6 through 0.
SCSI ID
Jumpers1 2 3
SCSI ID
Jumpers1 2 3
6 J J : 2 : J :
5 J : J 1 : : J
4 J : : 0 : : :
3 : J J
ServerGuideIt is important that you read and understand the followinginformation, whether you choose to install an operatingsystem that is available in the ServerGuide package or youchoose to install your own operating system.
One of the easiest and most efficient ways to install anoperating system and take advantage of a wide variety ofthe latest software for the network environment is to useServerGuide.
You can install an operating system from ServerGuide oryou can install your own operating system and still usemany of the features available on ServerGuide. (Forexample: you can install NetFinity, which is a LANsystems-management program; run demonstrationprograms; use the performance-tuning feature; and domuch more.) Refer to the ServerGuide CD documentation.
Software/Hardware Mismatch ProblemsIf a failure appears to be the result of a defective FRU, butthe diagnostic tests run error-free, there might be asoftware and hardware mismatch. These problems mightbe intermittent, and they are usually difficult to diagnose.
If you are experiencing this type of problem, and theoperating system is of the “direct driver” variety, whichbypasses the BIOS interface, such as:
� AIX � Netware � SCO XENIX� Some “windowing” interfaces
550 PC Server HMM
� Other Unix-based software
the most-likely cause of the problem is a mismatchbetween the software and the hardware.
Applications that use the Multiprotocol Adapter/A, magnetictape drives, and some SCSI devices such as CD-ROM,require direct software drivers. There is no BIOS interfacefor these devices in PS/2 products.
The following information is provided to help you resolvethese problems:
Software Can Be Sensitive to the Hardware
Direct-driver software is sensitive to variations in hardwaredesign. The resulting incompatibilities are usuallyaddressed with a revision (sometimes referred to as apatch), to the direct-driver software. Make certain thesoftware is current and that all known revisions areinstalled. The IBM on-line bulletin board (sometimesreferred to as PCPROD), and other software tools sources,such as Novell Netware, should be referenced by thesoftware support personnel for any revisions provided bythe appropriate software vendor.
The most-likely cause of these types of problems, whendirect-driver software is involved, is the failure to obtain thelatest revisions from the software vendor.
Software Installation
It is very important to follow the vendor's installationprocedures. The software should not be migrated fromanother system, unless the installation instructions indicatethat migration is supported (especially from a differentmodel in the product line).
Related Service Information 551
Important
Migrating adapters from slower systems to fastersystems might cause problems. This is due todevice-specific, system-specific, or time-dependentsoftware code, that controls these devices.
Adapter and Software Compatibility
Hardware adapters for some operating systems must beapproved by the software vendor to be compatible withthat software. The approval is specific to the system,adapter E.C. level, and the software version. Contact thesoftware vendor to confirm that system and adapterconfiguration is supported by their software level. Thecompatibility support is especially important for, (but notlimited to), all LAN adapters and RIPL applications.
Software Failures After a Hardware Change
After the initial installation, any changes in the hardwareconfiguration (addition or changes of adapters or features),might result in computer failures and require thereinstallation of the operating system or the softwarerevisions.
Specific hardware configuration changes (such as memoryaddress, interrupt level, or programmable option select),might result in a computer failure if the software hasunique operating requirements.
Undetermined ProblemsYou are here because the diagnostic tests did not identifythe failure, the Devices List is incorrect, or the system isinoperative.
Note: If you suspect a software mismatch is causingfailures (solid or intermittent), be sure to see“Software/Hardware Mismatch Problems” onpage 550.
Check the power supply voltages. If the voltages are notcorrect, replace the power supply. If the voltages arecorrect, return here and do the following:
1. Power-off the computer.2. Remove or disconnect the following (one at a time)
until you find the failure (power-on the computer andreconfigure each time).� Any external devices� Surge suppressor device (on the computer)� Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices
� Each adapter � Drives � Memory-Module Kits � Bus adapter
552 PC Server HMM
� Math coprocessor (if installed)
Note: Minimum operating requirements vary for eachcomputer. For example:� AT Bus computers require 256KB of
memory.� Micro Channel computers require 1MB of
memory.� IML drive in the drive startup sequence
(IML systems only).� If the computer is a workstation, (no
drives), a default hard disk drive is notrequired.
3. Power-on the computer. If the problem remains,suspect the system board, then the processor boardin that order.
Note: If the problem goes away when you remove anadapter from the bus adapter, and replacing thatadapter does not correct the problem, suspect thesystem board, processor board, then the busadapter in that order.
Problem Determination TipsDue to the variety of hardware and software combinationsthat can be encountered, use the following information toassist you in problem determination. If possible, have thisinformation available when requesting assistance fromService Support and Engineering functions.
� Machine type and model� Processor or hard disk upgrades
� Failure symptom– Do diagnostics fail?– What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?– Is the failure repeatable?– Has this configuration ever worked?– If it has been working, what changes were made
prior to it failing?– Is this the original reported failure?
� Reference/Diagnostics Diskette Version– Type and version level
� Hardware configuration– Print (print screen) configuration currently in use
– BIOS level� Operating system software
– Type and version level
Related Service Information 553
Important
To eliminate confusion, identical systems areconsidered identical only if they:
1. Are the exact machine type and models2. Have the same BIOS level3. Have the same adapters/attachments in the
same locations4. Have the same address
jumpers/terminators/cabling5. Have the same software versions and levels6. Have the same Reference/Diagnostics Diskette
(version)7. Have the same configuration options set in the
system8. Have the same setup for the operation system
control files
Comparing the configuration and software set-upbetween “working and non-working” systems will oftenlead to problem resolution.
554 PC Server HMM
Phone Numbers, U.S. and Canada Note
EMEA customers should contact their Dealer or IBMService organization.
Before you place a call to the Support Center, refer to“Problem Determination Tips” on page 553.
Authorized Dealers or Servicers
U.S. Customers and Helpware Subscribers
Number Information
919-517-0001 Bulletin Board Service - PC Company800-528-7705 Bulletin Board Service - TSS Only800-937-3737 IBM Business Partner Education800-426-2472 IBM Customer Engineer Technical
Support800-IBM-DEAL IBM Dealer Support Center800-342-6672 IBM Direct Desktop Software Sales303-924-4015 IBM Part Number ID and Look Up800-426-7763 IBM PC HelpCenter800-237-5511 IBM Software Defect Support (CSDs)800-327-5711 IBM Software Ordering (Publications)800-426-1484 IBM Supplies Technical Hotline800-388-7080 IBM Warranty Parts Claims Center
Number Information
919-517-0001 Bulletin Board Service - PC Company800-426-8322 Customer Education Business Unit800-999-0052 Customized Operational Services800-237-4824 EduQuest (Educational Computers)800-964-8523 End User HelpDesk Support800-742-2493 IBM Anti-Virus Services800-447-4700 IBM Authorized Dealer Referrals800-426-2468 IBM Dealer Referral800-426-3333 IBM Information Referral Service800-IBM-SERV IBM Service800-772-2227 IBM PC HelpCenter and HelpDesk800-426-7282 IBM Technical Manuals800-426-9402 (Ext. 150)
Multimedia Information Center
800-241-1620 Multimedia HelpCenter800-342-6672 OS/2 Information Line800-237-5511 OS/2 Support Services800-284-5933 Prodigy914-962-0310 Prodigy User Questions800-547-1283 Technical Coordinator Program
SystemXtra for Personal SystemsLAN Automated Distribution/2OS/2 Bulletin BoardOS/2 Application Assistance Center
800-551-2832 Technical Solutions Magazine
Related Service Information 555
IBM Canada Customer and Servicer Support
Number Information
800-661-PSMT Business Partner Marketing Support905-316-5556 Business Partner Marketing Support -
Toronto514-938-6048 Business Partner Marketing Support -
French800-465-6600 Customer Relations905-316-6666 Customer Relations - Toronto800-465-6666 Customer Service Dispatch800-263-2769 Customer Service Parts800-465-2222 Customer Support Center (ISC)416-443-5701 Customer Service Repair Centre800-465-7999 HelpClub Registration800-465-7999 IBM Direct905-513-3367 IBM Certification Administrator905-316-2683 IBM Certification Coordinator
Mail to: 50 Acadia DriveMarkham, Ontario L3R 0B3
800-465-3299 IBM HelpFax905-316-3299 IBM HelpFax - Toronto800-565-3344 IBM HelpPC800-268-3100 IBM Information Network Support800-268-3100 IBM Information Network Support -
Toronto800-387-8343 IBM PC Service Partners800-663-7662 Lexmark Product Information800-263-2769 Parts Orders, Exchange or Emergency416-443-5808 (Fax)
Parts Regular Orders, Exchange
416-443-5755 Parts Orders, Inquiries514-938-3022 PC Co Bulletin Board - Montreal905-316-4255 PC Co Bulletin Board - Toronto604-664-6464 PC Co Bulletin Board - Vancouver204-934-2735 PC Co Bulletin Board - Winnepeg800-661-7768 PS Marketing Support (PSMT)800-465-1234 Publications Ordering905-316-4148 Service Management Support905-316-4100 (Fax)
Service Management Support
905-316-4150 Service Manager905-316-4100 (Fax)
Service Manager
905-316-4872 Service Quality Programs905-316-4100 (Fax)
Service Quality Programs
800-661-2131 Skill Dynamics (Education)800-565-3344 PS/1 Warranty Customer Helpline800-387-8483 PS/1 Warranty Service (DOAs)416-443-5835 (Fax)
Warranty Claim Fulfillment
905-316-2445 Warranty Claim Reimbursement905-316-3515 (Fax)
Warranty Claim Reimbursement
416-443-5778 Warranty Claim Parts Inquiry800-505-1855 Warranty Provider Support Hotline800-267-7472 Warranty Service, ThinkPad
556 PC Server HMM
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporationin the United States or other countries:
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States andother countries licensed exclusively through X/OpenCompany Limited.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
AIX ATEnterprise Systems Architecture/390 FaxConcentratorHelpCenter IBMMicro Channel MVS/ESAMVS/DFP NetFinityOS/2 Personal System/2Portmaster Presentation ManagerPS/2 PS/ValuePointRETAIN S/370S/390 System/370System/390 ThinkPadVM/ESA VoiceTypeVSE/ESA VTAMVirtual Machine/Enterprise Systems Architecture
3Com 3Com CorporationActionMedia Intel CorporationAdaptec Adaptec, Inc.AHA Adaptec, Inc.APC American Power Conversion
CorporationBanyan Banyan Systems IncorporatedCirrus Cirrus Logic, Inc.EtherCard Elite Standard Microsystems CorporationEtherExpress Intel CorporationEtherLink 3Com CorporationGateway Gateway Systems CorporationIntel Intel CorporationMicrosoft Microsoft CorporationMS-DOS Microsoft CorporationNetWare Novell, Inc.Novell Novell, Inc.PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card
International AssociationPentium Intel CorporationQAPlus DiagSoft, Inc.QAPlus/PRO DiagSoft, Inc.Quantum Quantum Corporation)RIPL CTA IncorporatedSCSISelect Adaptec, Inc.SMC Standard Microsystems CorporationSCO The Santa Cruz Operation, Inc.TokenExpress Intel CorporationVINES Banyan Systems IncorporatedXENIX Microsoft Corporation
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 557
IBM
Part Number: 70H0751
Printed in U.S.A.
S3ðH-25ð1-ð1